otf ee 
vineyaereay 


CPP «porcine 
TTRYT Rye hws Wet 


ante te 


Pad ote hy 


ome. 


as 


: saa 
Perea 


tae! 


exes 


are | 


orgs 


os 


“eae phere 


Wat ee 
er. tae Bed 
esl wate 

wth tage 5 7 ‘ (2 

5 (hha ing Sh Wp tales: 
BMS LET Me Eee 8 fe hep 
tRirberyd HAAS TAAL FSeb 
woe 4 beat A 

hh Abate Cys ead oe vies 

bee Posen ty 
Wold es Mesa hate hud RE Ss tiated 

. Peadiba bad, elt 


eg oe 
PHS 
. 


i pete tenth Sahat 2 eS ete 
Fire sulin seeeneecie 
biog nh St Ae De 
PSD ae re tadtocs hee 
SORA wine Smee Ae Sy sete ht tl fot 
peas wth ab Bobyh yd, 


Maddvge ‘ ms 
ae tee te 
aries 
Kiaeett 
vale é naa 
Say eb rey as bs e. 


atetite 
slit. CF Boe Nethemaioaoe 4 
‘ OS Uabiien co Lied bk oat a 6 Rak IN He ASRS 
Ian re fen ts ABT Re to aoe ed HUA ort Mir eT) aR ste Nada he 
A 5 Mal vit NETL gg Ase Hit Memeebs hy catty te Curd Pan Pare ° Aedes Pe here Ay 
& ee Det a Baths hari Mettgh inal SB toe Marty Hence Pelt Pua pifar bs Nab gont Dk ed 
dtp betaine: Machen wiate Lnaeieiohens } 
Meise dey Pedeteo aN atid 
J tata 


; Ne 
Feed a NR My Ms HEIRS pind oP a Ahaha at hd alain belied oe 
Aa mee AN dR Mike Poi} 
: Wet teeta} i 
oe Anke Dot bk Neer eit a 
ai, tid ec Geet) 
ABI sac yah te eens 


ae 


we 


| 


a F 
aah 
‘ Piet 3 art | ag 


CENTRAL CIRCULATION BOOKSTACKS 


The person charging this material is re- 
sponsible for its renewal or its return to 
the library from which it was borrowed 
on or before the Latest Date stamped 
below. The Minimum Fee for each Lost 
Book is $50.00. 


Theft, mutilation, and underlining of books are reasons 
for disciplinary action and may result in dismissal from 
the University. 

TO RENEW CALL TELEPHONE CENTER, 333-8400 


UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS LIBRARY AT URBANA-CHAMPAIGN 


MAR 11 1996 


a. 


C 2 1 1996 
» ww IgvU 


AFR OU ivv¥ 


When renewing by phone, write new due date below 
previous due date. L162 


t 
as 


nv iy a OF 
(LLCs IBRARY 


AT USNR aN 


STACKS 


LABRAn 
or Te 
yk anor” 


yee 


™’ BIILNING 


Gc 


| 
i 
i 


) 

) 

4 | 
=} 
Pi] 


BRIEF HISTORY 


OF THE 


pee ver WAIN) PEOPLE 


BY 


W. D. ALEXANDER 


PUBLISHED BY ORDER OF THE BOARD OF EDUCATION OF 
THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS 


NEW YORK -:- CINCINNATI -:- CHICAGO 
AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 


—_ S 
“ / t 4 


CopyricHT, 1891 anp 1899, BY 


B. H. OF H. P- A A 


Pane VAC. bh; 


T the request of the Board of Education, I have 

endeavored to write a simple and concise history 

of the Hawaiian people, which, it is hoped, may be useful 
to the teachers and higher classes in our schools. 

As there is, however, no book in existence that covers 
_the whole ground, and as the earlier histories are entirely 
~ out of print, it has been deemed best to prepare not 
_ merely a school-book, but a history for the benefit of the 

~ general public. 

This book has been iene in the intervals of a labo- 
rious occupation, from the stand-point of a patriotic 
Hawaiian, for the young people of this country rather 
than for foreign readers. This fact will account for its 

© local coloring, and for the prominence given to certain 
ie topics of local interest. Especial pains have been taken to 
~ supply the want of a correct account of the ancient civil 
_ polity and religion of the Hawaiian race. 
< This history is not merely a compilation. It is based 
upon a careful study of the original authorities, the writer 
“having had the use of the principal existing collections 
of Hawaiian manuscripts, and having examined the early 
“archives of the government, as well as nearly all the 
- existing materials in print,; No pains have been spared to 
iii 


264658 


iv PREFACE 


arrive at the truth. The principal authorities relied on 
in the account of Hawalian antiquities have been David 
Malo, the historian, the elder Kamakau of Kaawaloa, 
S. M. Kamakau, the historian, and Haleole, the author of 
“ Daieikawal.” 

Judge Fornander’s “ Polynesian Race” has been a store- 
house of information for all subsequent writers, and the 
author can bear witness to his painstaking accuracy, his 
general fairness and excellent judgment. 

Valuable assistance has been received from Mr. J. S. 
Emerson in regard to the religious belief, as’ well as the 
arts and amusements, of the ancient Hawajlians. 

A history that aims to be both unsectarian and non- 
partisan must necessarily be incomplete. As a general 
thing, the facts have been stated with but little comment. 
The dark side of the condition of the people in ancient 
times and of their intercourse with foreigners had to be in 
great part ignored. 

The extreme brevity that was necessary has com- 
pelled the omission of much that is interesting. It is 
intended to follow this volume by a primary work for 
younger readers, composed of a series of interesting 
stories from Hawaiuan history, arranged in chronological 


order. 
W. D. ALEXANDER. 


HONOLULU. 


© ON Mee NTs 


jragelned aN 
PREHISTORIC PERIOD 


CHAPTER I 


PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY 


Name—Position—Extent—Surface—Climate—Contrast with Coral Islands— 
Soil—A nimals—Plants. ....cccsssesese Mae tice rate eee Ghee acca cawete 


CHAPTER II 
ORIGIN OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Polynesian Connections—Malaysian Affinities—Savaii the Center of Dis- 
persion—First Settlement—Hawaiiloa—Wakea and Papa—Ancient 
WW OTK — 916 | MONnOhUNG 506i. ile seaws cesses ese’ SeNRN cies ee ceneeak ea AA. 


CHAPTER III 
ANCIENT HAWAIIAN VOYAGES 


Second Period of Migration—Voyage of Paao—Voyage of Kaulu—Voyage 
of Paumakua—Voyage of Moikeha—Voyage of Laa-mai-kahiki— 
Voyage of Kahai—Cessation of Foreign Voyages—Their Effects..... 


CHAPTER IV 
ANCIENT CIVIL POLITY 


Classes of Society—Chiefs—Court of a Chief—Land Tenure—Taxes—Cus- 
tomary Law SESH SSHS SHHHT HEHE SESH SHEESH EEEHESEHSHE HSSOC ESOS ESSE SEH+SEHOHEe FEF eHee 


PAGES 


13-17 


18-20 


21-24 


v1 CONTENTS 


CHAPTER V 
CIVIL POLITY AND DOMESTIC RELATIONS 


Priesthood—Common People—Slaves—Wars— Weapons—Forts— Battles— 
Sea-Fights—Treaties—Marriages—Infanticide, etc ..........-:.seeeeeeee 


CHAPTER VI 
OBJECTS OF WORSHIP 


Deification of Powers of Nature—Local and Tutelar Deities—The Four 
Great Gods— Local and Professional Gods— Deified Animals— Pele 
and her Family — Aumakuas— Kini akua — Kupuas............sssesees 

CHAPTER VII 


IDOLS AND TEMPLES 


Idols—Temples—Sacred Houses—Sacred Rocks—Puuhonuas—Hale 0 Keawe 


CHAPTER VIII 


CEREMONIAL SYSTEM 
The Tabu System—Calendar—Ritual—Human Sacrifices—Monthly Tabus— 
Aku and Opelta -‘Tabus. ic. ceans cae Seth ec ts a tins ess ac cms 00 Selanne cen 
CHAPTER IX 
DEDICATION OF A TEMPLE AND MAKAHIKI FESTIVAL 


Dedication of a Temple—Purification—Bringing Down of the Idol—Kauila 
Ceremony—Human Sacrifice—The Great Aha—Kuili Ceremonies— 
Offering of the Ulua—The Hono Ceremony—Closing Ceremonies— 
The Makahiki Festival—Images of Lono—Purification—Tabu Days— 
Collection of Taxes—Games—Kalii Ceremony—Closing Ceremony.... 


CHAPTER X 
PRIVATE WORSHIP 


Family Worship — Fishermen — House-building — Canoe-building — Agri- 
culture — Rites at a Child’s Birth — Rites at his Promotion to be an 


CHAPTER XI 
SORCERY AND DIVINATION 


Medicine Men — Necromancers — Sorcerers — Kalaipahoa — Diviners and 
Prophets {iN ikeareeese Ge ettetoes scree ah ih TAR Rie DEE Ae PP Te Rs Biey ie 


PAGES 


30-34 


35-40 


41-47 


48-53 


54-61 


62-65 


66-73 


ee 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER XII 


FUNERAL RITES AND DOCTRINE OF A FUTURE STATE 


Burial of Chiefs—Human Sacrifices—Mourning Customs—Concealment of 
the Bones—Funerals of Priests and Common People—Purification— 
Future State—Leaping-places—Wakea—Milu—Ghosts........++0+. seneee 


CHAPTER XIII 


ARTS AND MANUFACTURES 


Tools—A griculture—Fishing—Hooks—Nets—Fish—Poison—Canoes—Houses 
—Furniture—Mats—Lights—Clothing—Dress—Ornaments—Helmets — 
Feather Cloaks—Kahilis—Tattooing......... A crt Pee rc batveteleaes ae 


CHAPTER XIV 


CUSTOMS AND AMUSEMENTS 


Cooking — Awa-drinking — Barter—Games—Boxing—Maika—Pahee—Holua 
— Surf-swimming — Konane — Puhenehene — Music — The Ukeke— 
Kiokio—Drums—Dancing—Poetry........eescceseeeees Geacbecch tsmans ae os 


Ie fatal aed ee 
TO THE DEATH OF KAMEHAMEHA L 


CHAPTER XV 
ANCIENT HISTORY 


First Period —Kalaunuiohua —Luukoa—Second Period—Story of Umi— 
Discovery of the Islands by Spaniards—Later History of Hawaii— 
Alapainui— Battle of Kawela— Battle of Keawawa— Accession of 
Kalaniopuu—Battle of the Sand-hills. .........cccccccccevcccccccccsccons 


CHAPTER XVI 


DISCOVERY OF THE ISLANDS BY CAPTAIN COOK. 1778-1779 


Captain Cook’s First Visit—His Landing at Waimea—Visit to Niihau— 
Effect on the Minds of the Natives—Second Visit of Captain Cook— 
Worship of Captain Cook— Kalaniopuu’s Visit to Captain Cook— 
Quarrels with the Natives — Departure of the Ships— Return of 
Captain Cook—Quarrel with Palea—Theft of the Boat—Affray and 
Death of Captain Cook — Hostilities — Recovery of Part of Captain 


PAGES 


74-79 


80-86 


87-94 


95-103 


Peed 00 ae ee a soli ec aca tie bees detonate deebres Vaud orssie diene ters o047LEG 


Vii CONTENTS 


CHAPTER XVII 


FROM THE DEATH OF CAPTAIN COOK TO THE ARRIVAL 


OF PORTLOCK AND DIXON. 1780-1786 
PAGES 
Dissensions on Hawaii—Death of Kalaniopuu—Battle of Mokuohai—Inva- 


sions of Hilo—Invasion of Kipahulu—Conquest of Oahu by Kahekili. 117-123 


CHAPTER XVIII 


FROM THE ARRIVAL OF PORTLOCK AND DIXON TO THB 
DEATH OF KEOUA. 1786-1791 


The Northwest Fur Trade—Arrival of Portlock and Dixon—Arrival of La 
Pérouse—Kaiana’s Voyages—The Olowalu Massacre—Capture of the 
‘“*FHair American’’—Invasion of Maui—War with Keoua—Eruption 
of Kilauea—Sea-fight off Waimanu—Assassination of Keoua.......... 124-133 


CHAPTER XIX 


VANCOUVER’S THREE VISITS AND CONQUEST OF MAUI AND 
OAHU BY KAMEHAMEHA I. 1791-1795 


Visitorg in 1791—Vancouver’s First Visit~Visit of the ** Dedalus *—Van- 
couver’s Second Visit—Troubles on Kauai—Vancouver’s Third Visit 
—War between Kaeo and Kalanikupule—Massacre of Captain Brown 
and his Men—Conquest of Oahu by Kamehameha I....... .. o.eccese 134-145 


CHAPTER XX 


FROM THE CONQUEST OF OAHU TO THE CESSION OF KAUAI. 
1795-1810 


Preparations to invade Kauai— Captain Broughton’s First Visit—At- 
tempted Invasion of Kauai—Rebellion on Hawaii—Captain Broughe 
ton’s Second Visit—Wreck of Captain Barber’s Ship—Suppression of 
Namakeha’s Revolt—Consolidation of the Government—Kamehame- 
ha’s Residence on Hawaii, 1796-1802—Eruption of Hualalai—Kame- 
hameha’s Visit to Lahaina—Landing of the First Horses—Kame- 
hameha’s Return to Oahu—The Pestilence—A Human Sacrifice in 
1807—Honolulu in, TSOS see eee eties chk ices een <uventeee vakuoee 146-154 


CHAPTER XXI 


CLOSING YEARS OF THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA I. 
1810-1819 


Cession of Kauai—Sandal-wood Trade—Distilliing—Kamehameha’s Return 
to Hawaii—Russian Aggressions—Building of the Honolulu Fort— 
Departure of the Russians—Kotzebue’s First Visit—The Spanish 
Pirates—Death of Kamehameha, I........,ccsccccccccecsscccscccccecees. 165-165 


CONTENTS 1x 


Peas a LE 
LATER HISTORY 


CHAPTER XXII 


ABOLITION OF IDOLATRY. 1819 
PAGES 
Installation of Liholiho as King—Freycinet’s Visit—Abolition of Idola- 
try—Insurrection of Kekuaokalani ..............000. wets pebiriains ePeia Kose ca's 166-172 


CHAPTER XXIII 


COMMENCEMENT OF THE AMERICAN PROTESTANT MISSION. 
1820-1823 


Obookiah-~-Arrival of Missionaries—Establishment of Mission—Character 
of Liholiho—His Visit to Kauai—First Printing—Visit of the Eng- 
lish Deputation—Other Events of the Year 1822—Arrival of the First 
Reinforcement—A Grand Pageant............. We bea icone 38 Svat hancnan -. 173-182 


CHAPTER XXIV 
LIHOLIHO’S VOYAGE TO ENGLAND, AND DEATH. 1823-1824 


Death of Keopuolani—Liholiho’s Voyage to England, and Death—Rebell- 
ion on Kauai—Progress of Education—Kapiolani’s Defiance of Pele— 
The New Kaahumanu, eeessece eereeee Cees eereeeeeerearer @rereeeseeress + e208 183-190 


CHAPTER XxXV 
VISIT OF LORD BYRON AND OUTRAGES BY FOREIGNERS. 1825-1827 


Visit of Lord Byron—Collisions with Foreigners—Outrage at Lahaina— 
Outrage by the ‘‘Dolphin’’—Second Outrage at Lahaina—Visit of 
the ‘* Peacock **—Boki’s Relapse—Death of Kalanimoku— Third Out- 
rage at Lahaina—Trial of Mr. Richards ........cecccccccecccceesceeseses L9I-199 


CHAPTER XXVI 
CLOSING YEARS OF KAAHUMANU’S REGENCY. 1828-1832 


Arrival of Catholic Missionaries—Boki’s Conspiracy—First Laws—Visit of 
the “ Vincennes” — Boki’s Sandal-wood Expedition — Kaahumanu’s 
Tour—Liliha’s Sedition—Persecution of the Catholics—Banishment 
of the Priests—Reflections—Lahainaluna Seminary—Death of Kaa- 
MAID AU acta tcnarnex sus scseccsicsevsnces scvdesshoscesesavas aoe Dir eee 200-209 


x CONTENTS 


CHAPTER XXVII 


BEGINNING OF KAMEHAMEHA III.’8 REIGN. 1832-1836 
PAGES 
Kinau as Premier—Visit of the ‘“* Potomac ”*—Arrival of a Japanese Junk— 


Accession of Kamehameha III.—‘*Wa o Kaomi’’— Visit of the 
‘* Challenger ’—Progress in Education and Religion—Trade and Agri- 
culture—Second Visit of the ‘“‘ Peacock ’*—First Government House. 210-216 


CHAPTER XXVIII 
TROUBLES WITH FOREIGN POWERS. 1836-1839 


Causes of Dispute—Arrival of the Rev. R. Walsh—Death of Nahienaena— 
Return of Bachelot and Short—Arrival of the ‘‘Sulphur” and ‘ Ve- 
nus’*’—Visit of the “Imogene ”—Arrival of Messrs. Maigret and 
Murphy—Volcanic Wave—Persecution of Catholics—Edict of Tolera- 
tion — Temperance Laws— Political Instruction—The Great Re- 
vival—Death of Kinau—Hostile Visit of the ‘* Artemise ’’—Visit of 
Commodore Read ............ viaice bawameuneeye Mes ee eves ease. ot on eeiaes 217-228 


CHAPTER XXIX 
FIRST CONSTITUTION. DISPUTES WITH CONSULS. 1839-1842 


The First Constitution—New Laws—Deaths of High-Chiefs—An Heroic 
Deed—Eruption and Volcanic Wave—United States Exploring Expedi- . 
tion—Educational Matters—Progress of Catholic Mission—Difficulties 
with France—Controversies with British Consul—Ladd & Co.’s Con- 
tract—First Embassy to Foreign Powers—Proceedings of Charlton— 
Recognition by the United States......... casenee Saeee soeneveptenestutin tee aureas 


CHAPTER XXX 


SUCCESS OF THE EMBASSY IN EUROPE. CESSION TO LORD 
PAULET. 1843. 


Success of the Embassy in Europe—Belgian Contract—Demands of Lord 
Paulet—Provisional Cession—British Commission—The Restoration.. 239-251 


CHAPTER XxxXT 


RECOGNITION OF INDEPENDENCE AND ORGANIZATION OF THE 
GOVERNMENT. 1843-1847 


Recognition of Independence—Organization of the Government—Land 
Commission — Judiciary—Material Progress—Agriculture—Discovery 
of Gold in California — Decrease of Population — Relations with 
France—New Treaties—Consular Grievances—End of Belgian Con- 
tract—Difficulties with the British Consul............ sacise veg site a etleaen oe eeOs: 


CONTENTS »-@ 


CHAPTER XXXII 


FOREIGN RELATIONS. 1848-1851 
; PAGES 
Grievances of Consul ‘Dillon—The Ten Demands—Reprisals made by Ad- 


miral Tromelin—Second Embassy to Europe—Negotiations with Mr. 
Perrin. -.ss ES ee Ter ee arin Gs'ws Gn a ths a va aha babs ons osenad de Seas 265-271 


CHAPTER XXXII 


CLOSING YEARS OF KAMEHAMEHA III.’8 REIGN. 1851-1854 


Constitution of 1852—Material Progress—Steam Navigation—Sailors’ Riot 
of 1852—Filibusters—Small-pox Epidemic—Political Agitation—Pro- 
posed Annexation—Death of Kamehameha II1.................-... 000 272-27¢ 


CHAPTER XXXIV 
REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA IV. 1855-1863 


Inauguration—Foreign Relations—Notable Deaths—The King’s Marriage— 
Birth of Prince of Hawaii—Queen’s Hospital—The Neilson Tragedy— 
Commencement of the Anglican Mission—Death of the Prince of 
Hawaii—Arrival of the English Bishop—Death of Kamehameha 
IV.— Public Improvements—Inter-island Steamers — Agriculture— 
Schools—Partial Withdrawal of the A. B. C. F. M. from the Islands— 
Eruption of Mauna Loa............ FOO SEE CCHOTEDCUTIOA DE Oe SEE: 280-287 


CHAPTER XXXV 
REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA V. 1863-1872 


Character of Kamehameha V.—Constitution of 1864— Immigration— Leper 
Establishment — Schools— Queen Emma’s Tour Abroad — Burning of 
Whalers by the ‘‘Shenandoah ”’— Eruption in Kau — Kaona Insurrec- 
tion — Visit of the Duke of Edinburgh — Australian Line of Steamers — 
Loss of Whaling Fleet— The Small-Pox— Public Improvements — 
Agriculture and Trade — Death of Kamehameha \..................... 288-297 


CHAPTER XXXVI 


LUNALILO, KALAKAUA, LILIUOKALANI. 1873-1891 


Election of Lunalilo— Mutiny at the Barracks — Death of Lunalilo — Elec- 
tion of Kalakaua—Court-House Riot— Inauguration of King Kala- 
kaua— His Visit to the United States — Reciprocity — Immigration — 
The King’s Tour around the World — Small-pox Epidemic — Volcanic 
Phenomena— Great Fire of 1886—Obituary —Death of Kalakaua — 
Accession of Liliuokalani— Progress of the Country.................. 298-313 


CHAPTER XXXVII 


REVOLUTION AND ANNEXATION. 1892-1898 
The Revolution of 1893— Establishment of the Republic— Insurrection of 
1895 — Annexation to the United States. ............... $6 pee eee 314-323 
APPENDIOES TN ye Ba Oe Fe meres Pier AEE IP ee case ha eeu s 325-349 


f 


MAPS. 


Hawaiian Islands, 
Oceania, 

Kauai, 

Hawaii, 

Oahu, 

Maui and ieee: ek 
Molokai, Lanai, &c., 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Government Building . 

Crater of Kilauea, 

The Ivory Clasp, 

Lava Flow, 

Ancient Idol, : 
Heiau (Temple) at Waimea, Kauai, 
Hale (House) of Keawe, 
Feather Helmet, , 

An Offering before Capt. ook, 
Cook’s Monument, ; : 
Queen Kaahumanu, 

Diamond Head, 

Kaiana, B i : : 
Peak in Iao Valley, : : . 
Pali of Nuuanu, : 
Kamehameha. I. : ‘ 2 
Old Fort at Honolulu, , z 
Port of Honolulu in 1816, 
Kamehameha II. 

Hilo Village, 

Kamehameha III. 


Kekuanaoa, 

Kamehameha IV. 

Queen Emma, ; 3 : . 
Kamehameha V. . : - : ; : 

A Native’s House . x . : - : 
Lunalilo, ‘ 5 3 3 3 . - 
Kalakaua, 2 : 5 ‘ ‘ 2 = 
Kapiolani, : : e ° ° ° e 
Bernice Pauahi Bishop, ions vets at Us 
Iolani Palace, . ‘ F A a . “ 
Kaiulani, . ‘: ‘ ° : e . : 


Liliuokalani, . : Ss ® 4 e ‘ = 


Sanford B. Dole, A ‘ P : ‘ Q 


after page 12 


page 15 


&* ay a. f 
ae. © — , 
yar awk 
ra 


Fd % a 
Ld 
. = 45S . 

inet, Ca 


ve reaeipiaats i Me 5 didi) drape 2 | 


e 


i : a 


T 


¢ 
¢ Ds 


SITE ee 


ee 


ee 


ee 


158°30’ Longitude 158° 


n 


Longitude 158.00 -W Greenwich 15750’ 


Ly ete iil 
ee alge hes 
EE 


I a 
“sy 


“7, 


= 5 
Honolulu 
Harbor 


' Kaunaka®ey sla Channel 


from 157° Greenwich 156° 30’ 


156° 


HAWAITAN ISLANDS 


SCALE 
43 Miles=One Inch, or 1:2,724,000 


MOLOKAL 


alawa 


Pukoo 


10 


20 


30 


40 50 


Saal 


155°30° 


° 
21 


30° 


J 


tj 


b 

i 

5 

: 
ak 
ky 
Ay 

f3 
<4, 


ae 


PART I 
PRiHislLORIC PERIOD 


CHAPTER I 


PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY 


LTHOUGH it is true that History has more to 

do with men and nations than with the countries 

in which they act their parts, still it is within her provy- 

ince to show how the position, climate, and physical fea- 

tures of a country have influenced the character and 
fortunes of the people who inhabit it. 

"Name.—The name Sandwich Islands was given to this 
country by Captain Cook, at the time of its discovery by 
him, in honor of his patron, the Earl of Sandwich, who 
was then First. Lord of the British Admiralty; but the 
name Hawatian Islands, derived from that of the largest 
island in the group, is the official name, used by the 
people of the islands, and is generally taking the place of 
the former. 

Position.—The Hawaiian Islands lie just within the 
northern tropic, between 18° 54’ and 22° 15’ north lati- 
tude, and between 154° 50’ and 160° 80’ of longitude 
west of Greenwich. | 


They occupy a central position in the North Pacific, 
13 


14 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


about two thousand miles west of North America. This has 
been in the past one of the most isolated positions in the 
world, and the one farthest removed from the ancient 
centers of civilization. Now, however, these islands are 
directly in the track of commerce between the United 
States and the Commonwealth of Australia on the one 
hand, and between the Isthmus of Panama and China on 
the other. They will necessarily become an important 
commercial center and resort of shipping in this great 
ocean. 

Extent.—The eight inhabited islands, viz., Hawaii, 
Maui, Kahoolawe, Lanai, Molokai, Oahu, Kauai, and Niihau, 
comprise an area of about six thousand seven hundred 
Square miles, of which the largest island, Hawaii, in- 
cludes nearly two thirds. This island is nearly equal in © 
area to the state of Connecticut, while the whole group 
is about equal to the principality of Wales or the king- 
dom of Saxony. 

The eight inhabited islands extend from northwest to 
southeast over a distance of about three hundred and 
eighty miles. The extent of the group is thus sufficient 
to develop a spirit of enterprise and skill in navigation 
among its inhabitants. | 

Surface.—Few countries comprise a greater variety of 
surface and of climate. Hawaii contains the highest 
mountains of any island in the world. In Europe only 
a few peaks of the Alps are as high as Mauna Loa and 
Mauna Kea, while Haleakala is about equal to Mt. Etna 
in extent and elevation. The two largest active volcanoes 
on the globe (Kilauea and Mauna Loa) are found in 
Hawaii, while Hast Maui contains the vast extinct crater 
of Haleakala, and the other islands abound in sublime 
and beautiful scenery. 


PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY 15 


Climate.—The climate of the islands is much cooler 
than that of other countries in the same latitude. This 
is due not only to the trade-winds, which blow,over a 
wide extent of ocean, but also to the fact that the ocean 
itself is cooled by the return current from the region of 


ORATER OF KILAUEA 
(From a photograph in 1885) 


Bering Straits. It is said that the seas surrounding these 
islands are cooler by ten degrees than those of any other 
region in the same latitude. The islands are exempt 
from the destructive cyclones which often prevail in the 
central part of the Pacific Ocean. 

The contrast in climate between the windward and the 
leeward sides of each island is very striking, the eastern 


16 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


slopes being windy and rainy, and heavily wooded, while 
the western coast enjoys a warm, dry climate, with a 
more scanty vegetation; hence the windward side of each 
island has been cut by the streams into numerous deep 
and precipitous ravines. 

Again, by ascending the mountains, any desirable de- 
gree of temperature can be attained, while on the highest 
summits snow remains during most of the year. 

Contrast with Coral Islands.— How favorable the con- 
ditions of life are here compared with those of other 
islands in this ocean, is well shown by the following 
passage by Professor Dana, referring to the Gilbert 
Islands: 

“How many of the various arts of civilized life 
could exist in a land where shells are the only cutting 
instruments; the plants in all but twenty-nine in number ; 
but a single mineral; quadrupeds none, with the excep- 
tion of foreign mice; fresh water barely enough for 
household purposes; no streams, or mountains, or hills? 
How much of the poetry or literature of Europe would 
be intelligible to persons whose ideas had expanded only 
to the limits of a coral island; who had never conceived 
of a surface of land above half a mile in breadth, of a 
slope higher than a beach, of a change of seasons beyond 
a@ variation in the prevalence of the rains?” 

Soil.— The soil of these islands, in general, is poor, with 
the exception perhaps of Kauai, and nature yields but 
little spontaneously. The valleys, indeed, are fertile and 
productive, but they are of limited extent. Some of the 
dry plains, however, can be made fertile by.irrigation. In 
Hawaii and Maui extensive tracts are covered with 
rugged lava. 

Much labor and skill are necessary in order to produce 


PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY Ee 


good crops. This fact tends to render the inhabitants 
more industrious and hardy than those of some other 
tropical groups. As there were no metals, the inhab- 
itants were obliged to use the best substitutes they 
could find. | 

Animals.—The only quadrupeds existing upon the 
islands before their discovery by Captain Cook were dogs, 
Swine, and mice, which were probably introduced by the 
first settlers. These, as well as the domestic fowls, were 
of the same breeds as are found throughout Polynesia. 
The sea abounds in fish, for which extensive artificial 
ponds along the coast have been constructed, which 
must have cost immense labor. 

Plants.— The principal food plants were the taro (colo- 
casita antiquorum), which was the Hawaiian “staff of life,” 
the sweet-potato, and the yam. The only fruit-trees in 
ancient times were the bread-fruit, cocoanut, banana, and 
ohia (the Malay jambo), together with the ohelo, wild 
strawberry, poha or Cape gooseberry, and akala or rasp- 
berry. Many other kinds of fruit have since been intro- 
duced. Sugar-cane was indigenous, and grew luxuriantly. 
The koa, kou, lehua, kawwila, and other forest trees sup- 
plied abundance of timber for useful and ornamental 
purposes. 

Unfortunately, together with useful animals and plants, 
many kinds of weeds and noxious vermin, such as mos- 
quitoes, wasps, scorpions, centipedes, and white ants, have 
been introduced from foreign countries in recent times. 


CHAPTER II 


ORIGIN OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Origin. — The question of the origin of the Hawaiian 
race is one which can not yet be said to have been fully 
solved. 

As we have seen, the Hawaiian Islands are more than 

two thousand miles distant from the nearest inhabited 
land, and the prevailing winds and currents are from the 
east and northeast to the south and southwest. 

Polynesian Affin'ties.— The affinities, not only of the 
people, but also of the plants and animals, are with the 
islands to the south and southwest. The inhabitants 
of all the groups of islands in the Hastern Pacific, from 
New Zealand to Hawaii and also to Easter Jsland, scat- 
tered over a distance of four thousand miles, may be con- 
sidered as one race, which is commonly called the Poly- 
nesian race; for they all speak dialects of the same lan- 
guage, have the same physical features, the sarne manners 
and customs, the same general system of tabus, and similar 
traditions and religious rites.* 

Again, it has been proved that the Polynesian language 
is but one member of a widespread family ol languages, 
including those spoken in Micronesia, the Philipoine Islands, 
the Malay Archipelago, and Madagascar. 


* For example, the names of the principal gods, the stories told of the demigod 
Maui, of the origin of fire, about the deluge, and many others, aie common to all 
these islands. , 

18 


= 


eaten Oa, 


—_ 


wT 


2ere 


Rit 4 A 
ise 
ty 


“Eshanghai ; 
—_ 
S 


oo 
e'Liu KIU IS. 


os 
“| MARIANNE 
OR 


_| LADRONE ISLES 
e 


Pee 


CAROLINE ISLANDS“ 


4 Sedavane:s 
j AVA Se 
ion a 
ee" 'SLaNDS 


Australia 


Au strait a 
es 


Perth — 
J Z Great 
CS Australian 


Bight 


DB 


- | 
East 180 West Longitude 163 : Washington 123 


West from Greenwich 


hea) 
vs) 


San Francisco ® 


GILBERT ISLES 


. 
ee ee eee rr rrr 


& PHOENIX ISLES 


MARQUESAS 


_ 
i 


O U ; ISLES 


SAMOA 
€e | NAVIGATOR 


Latitude 


ISLES SOCIETY is. 
° 
. . 


oe eS 
Fiul is. e COOK ISLES Tahiti 
ee, 
ay 1S..2 72 


—----TROPIC OF CAPRICORN 


8027, 4. LO 
oes 


® 2 ARCHIPELAGO 


AUSTRAL IS. 


I 
ij oe ieee & O 


* KERMADEC IS. 


.7 


SY |. ConatHami. 
© 
J 


aa OCEANICA 


SCALE OF STATUTE MILES 


? ANTIPODES I, 
Lae 1000 1500 


ORIGIN OF THE HAWAIIANS 19 


Malaysian Affinities ——In particular, the brown race in 
the Moluccas or Spice Islands and Celebes seems to have 
a close resemblance to the Polynesians, both in language 
and in physical appearance. Beyond this nothing is cer- 
tain, although men who have made a special study of the 
subject have endeavored to prove from their language, 
traditions, religious rites, customs, etc., that the Polynesians 
originally came from southwestern Asia. 

Savaii, the Center of Dispersion.— As regards the Pa- 
cific Ocean, it is pretty well settled tha’, the island of Savaii, 
in the Samoan group, was the chief center of dispersion 
for the Polynesian race, to which all their traditions point.* 

The tcaditions of the Marquesans relate that their an- 
cestors came from a Hawaii in the west, ‘stopping on the 
way at Fiji, Vavau, and Tonga. The dialect of the southern 
group of the Marquesas is, on the whole, the one most like 
the Hawaiian, except that it drops the letter J. 

First Settlement.—It is nearly certain that there were 
two distinct periods of emigration to these islands. The 
first settlers must have arrived in very ancient times, as 
is proved by the discovery of human bones under ancient 
coral beds and lava flows. Judge Fornander estimates 
that. these islands were inhabited as early as 500 A.D. 

Thes2 pioneer settlers may have been either expelled 
from other islands in war, or driven out of their course 
by storins.t 

*The lew Zealand natives, or Maoris, who. have a very close resemblance to 
the Hawa‘ians, have a tradition that their ancestors migrated from Hawaiki, 
which is t1e same word with Savaii and Hawaii. 

+ We kaow that southerly winds or konas sometimes blow here for months at 
atime. A Japanese fishing-junk, which had been blown out of its course by a 
typhoon, arrived at Waialua, Oahu, in December, 1832, with four men on board. 

Kadu, a native of one of the Caroline Islands, was found by Kotzebue, in 
1817, on one of the Marshall Islands, to which he had drifted in a canoe with 


three companions, a distance of fifteen hundred miles due east. These and other 
like instaiices show how migrations have taken place from west to east. 


2.0 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Legend of Hawaii-loa.—There is an ancient tradition 
about the discovery of these islands by a chief called 
Hawaii-loa. He is said to have been a famous fisherman 
and navigator in Kahiki-ku, and by sailing toward the 
east to have discovered and named Hawaii and Maui. 
After this he made several trips back and forth, and finally 
settled in the islands with a large company of retainers. 
But the truth of this story is very doubtful. 

Wakea and Papa.—According to the Hawaiian genealo- 
gies, Wakea and Papa, his wife, were the progenitors of the 
race, or at least founders of the line of chiefs. 

It is generally admitted that they did not live in these 
islands, but in Kahiki, which simply means some foreign 
country. Wakea is also said to have introduced the tabus.* 

Later on we find four consecutive generations of Ha- 
wailan chiefs, which are the same as four in the Maori 
genealogy, who are said to have lived in their Hawaiki 
(probably Savaii) before their emigration from thence to 
New Zealand. 

First Period.—Of that first period scarcely any tradi- 
tions have come down to us. There are no traditions of 
any voyages to and from other countries for at least thirty 
generations after Wakea. 

Many great works, however, are ascribed to that period, 
such as the building of certain heiaus, and of the great 
fish-ponds along the coast of Molokai and in many other 
places. 

Ancient Works.—These are said to have been made by 
the menehune people, a word which in Tahiti is applied 
to the lowest class of people, sometimes represented in 
Hawaiian legends as a race of industrious elves or dwarfs. 


* Wakea, Atea, or Vatea, is the god of light in the Marquesas and Hervey 
Islands, while Papa is the earth personified, the Great Mother, which idea is also 
expressed in the Hawaiian mele, Papa-hanau-moku, i.e., mother of islands. 


CHAPTER III 


ANCIENT HAWAIIAN VOYAGES 


Second Period of Migration.—After the Hawaiian peo- 
ple had lived secluded from the rest of the world for many 
generations, intercourse between them and the islands in 
the South Pacific seems to have been renewed, and many 
voyages to have been made, which have been celebrated 
in song and story. 

There seems to have been a general movement through- 
out Polynesia during the eleventh and twelfth centuries 
of the Christian era. It was about this time that the Her- 
vey Islands and New Zealand were colonized, according to 
the traditions of the inhabitants. It is not known what 
started these migrations, but it may have been the expul- 
sion of Polynesian settlers from the Fiji Islands, and the 
invasion of Samoa and the Tonga Islands by the refugees. 

Voyage of Paao.—The most important emigration was 
that of Paao (a priest from Upolu in the Samoan Islands) 
and his followers.* 

* He is said to have left Upolu in consequence of a quarrel with his brother, 
Lonopele, and to have sailed to Hawaii, where he became the high-priest, and 
built the great heiau of Mookini in Kohala. The office remained in his family 
down to the time of Hewahewa, who was the last high-priest, in the reign of Kame- 
hameha I. It is said that as he found the island without a king, ‘‘on account of 
the crimes of Kapawa, the chief of Hawaii,” he returned to Kahiki, and brought 
back with him a chief named Pili, whom he established as king, and from whom 
the Kamehameha dynasty was descended. 


Paao is said to have introduced the use of the puloulow as the insignia of 
tabu and to have changed the shape and arrangements of the heiaus. 


21 


2? HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Voyage of Kaulu.—One of the most famous navigators 
of this period was Kaulu-a Kalana of Oahu, who visited 
many foreign islands in company with Luhau-Kapawa, a 
famous navigator and astronomer of southern birth. In 
the song of Kaulu it is claimed that he visited Vavau, 
Upolu, and Kahiki, and many other foreign lands. 

Voyage of Paumakua.—Another Oahu chief, called 
Paumakua, was a famous navigator. He visited the 
southern islands, and brought back with him several 
priests, who are described in the traditions as foreigners 
or haoles of large stature, light complexion, and bright, 
saucy eyes, from whom several priestly families on 
Oahu claimed descent. 

Voyage of Moikeha.—In the next generation a famous 
chief named Moikeha, with his brother Olopana, his wife 
Luukia, and their attendants, left Waipio and sailed to 
Kahiki, where they became chiefs of a district supposed 
to have been situated in Raiatea, one of the Society 
Islands. In this voyage Moikeha took with him as an 
adopted son a young chief named Laa. 

After a long residence in their new domain a family 
quarrel arose, in consequence of which Moikeha resolved 
to return to his native land. Under the guidance of his 
astronomer and navigator, Kamahualele, he set sail in a 
fleet of canoes, with a goodly company of chiefs and re- 
tainers. 

When the mountains of Hawaii rose in sight, the 
prophet chanted a song in which Nuuhiva, Bolabola, and 
other southern islands are mentioned. After coasting 
along the shores of the principal islands, they landed at 
Wailua, Kauai, where the high-chief, Puna, held his court. 
Here Moikeha married Puna’s daughter, and on his death 
became king of Kauai, where he spent the rest of his life. 


ANCIENT HAWAITAN VOYAGES 23 


In his old age he sent his youngest son, Kila, with a 
fleet of double canoes, under the guidance of the old as- 
tronomer, to bring back his foster-son Laa to Kauai. 

Return of Laa-mai-Kahiki.—They took their departure 
from the southern point of Hawaii, steering by the stars, 
and arrived safely at Kahiki.* 

The young chief, generally known as TennenaeK atin 
immediately returned to these islands, accompanied by a 
famous sorcerer and prophet, Naula-a-Maihea, and a large 
train of attendants. On his arrival he introduced the use of 
the large drum, kaekeeke, covered with a shark’s skin, with 
which he astonished the natives. He resided a long time 
at Kualoa, where he had three sons, from whom the high- 
chiefs of Oahu and Kauai were descended. After the 
death of his foster-father he returned to Kahiki, taking 
his departure from the west end of Kahoolawe (which is 
still named Ke-ala-i-Kahiki, the way to Tahiti), and never 
returned. 

Voyage of Kahai—A grandson of Moikeha, named 
Kahai, is said to have made a voyage to Kahiki, and to 
have brought bread-fruit trees from Upolu in the Sa- 
moan group, which he planted at Kualoa, Oahu. 


*TIt is probable that those ancient navigators had large canoes, built up of 
planks sewed together, and decked over, in part at least, with capacity to hold 
live-stock and stores for a long voyage, like those of the Paumotu Islands, for 
example. They were bold and expert seamen, inured to hardship, and had a re- 
spectable knowledge of the positions of the principal stars, and of their rising and 
setting at different times of the year. Even in recent times, instances were not 
uncommon of persons who had sailed from Hawaii to Kauai out of sight of land, 
taking their direction from the stars. The fact that they successfully made those 
voyages is indisputable. 

The effect on the ancient Hawaiians of this intercourse with other countries 
must have been to enlarge their conceptions of the world, to awaken their 
minds, and to stimulate activity and enterprise. Many priests and sorcerers came 
from the south at this time, as well as chiefs of high rank, who intermarried 
with the reigning families here. There seems to have been during this period a 
great increase of the power of both priests and chiefs, of the severity of the 
tabus, and of the frequency of human sacrifices. 


24 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Cessation of Intercourse.—In the following generation 
all intercourse with the southern groups seems to have 
ceased, for there is no further evidence of it in any of the 
ancient legends, songs, or genealogies for five hundred 
years. AS communication ceased, the ideas of ancient 
Hawaiians became vague and indistinct, so that Kahiki 
came to mean any foreign country. It was in their minds 
a land of mystery and magic, full of marvels, and in- 
habited by supernatural beings. 


| 


: 


CHAPTER IV 


CIVIL POLITY 


Classes.—The Hawaiian people were divided in ancient 
times into three classes, viz.: 

1. The nobility, alzz, comprising the kings and chiefs 
of various grades of rank. 

2. The priests, kahuna, including priests, sorcerers, and 
doctors. 

38. The common people, makaainana, or laboring class. 

There was a wide and permanent distinction between 
the class of chiefs and that of the common people. A 
common man could never rise to the rank of chief. 
Nobody conceived of such a thing as possible; nor could 
a chief be degraded to the rank of a common man or to 
that of a slave. If conquered in war, he might be slain 
and offered in sacrifice to the gods, but if his life was 
spared he was still a chief. 

Chiefs.—The reason was that the position of a chief 
was not merely a political office, but was primarily of a 
sacred and religious character. The chief was believed 
to be descended from the gods, and to be in close alli- 
ance with the invisible powers, so that he was looked up 
to with superstitious awe. His birth was announced by 
thunder and lightning, his coming heralded by rainbows 
and other signs, and after death he was worshiped as a 


god. The contrast in stature and appearance as well as 
26 


26 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


in bearing between the chiefs and common people was 
very striking.* 

There were, however, many gradations of rank among 
the chiefs. The head chief of an island was styled Jfoz, 
and his position was generally hereditary. Yet, as in Ta- 
hiti, “his power over the turbulent district chiefs was 
neither strong nor permanent, and he could not count on 
their fidelity.” + 

Until the reign of Kamehameha I. there were generally 
at least four separate 
kingdoms in the group, 
and sometimes the sin- 
gle island of Hawaii was 
divided between several 
independent chiefs. 

Sacred Chiefs.—The 
highest chiefs were 
styled alit kapu, or sa- 
cred chiefs, and almost 
divine honors were paid 
to them. When they 
appeared abroad all the 
common people _ pros- 
trated themselves with their faces upon the ground at 
the warning cry H moe o! It is said that certain chiefs 
were so tabu that they did not show themselves abroad 
by day. 


Death was the penalty for the slightest breach of eti- 
quette. For example, it was death for acommon man to 


*‘*No aristocracy,” says Jarves, ‘‘ was ever more distinctly marked by na- 
ture.” Only a chief had the right to wear the red feather cloak and helmet, or 
the ivory clasp, niho palaoa; his canoe and its sails were painted red, and on 
state occasions he was attended by men bearing kahilis of various colors. 

¢ Ellis. 


CIVIL POLITY 27 


remain standing at the mention of the king’s name in 
song, or when the king’s food, drinking-water, or cloth- 
ing was carried past; to put on any article of dress be- 
longing to him; to enter his inclosure without permission ; 
or even to cross his shadow or that of his house. If he 
entered the dread presence of the sovereign, he must 
crawl, prone on the ground, Xolokolo, and leave it in the 
same manner. The chief’s head was especially sacred, and 
for any one to touch it or occupy a position above it would 
ve treasonable. No subject dared to appear on the deck of 
a vessel when the king was in the cabin. 

Court of a Chief.—The chiefs were surrounded by a 
throng of attendants, who were generally kaukaualv, ie., 
noble only on the father’s side. One of these had to remain 
constantly near his master, holding a kafzlz, or fly-brush, 
another had charge of his spittoon, while another sat 
ready to lomdlom, i.e., to knead and shampoo the royal 
person whenever desired. There were also in attendance 
the aipuupuu, or chief steward, the puwku, or treasurer, 
the elele, or heralds, the kukinz, or runners, and many 
others. 

Besides these, the court of a great chief comprised 
priests, diviners, bards, and _ story-tellers, with dancers, 
drummers, and buffoons. This crowd of attendants around 
the chief, supported by him in idleness, were called the 
aialo, i.e., those who eat in his presence. 

Land pence —As a general rule the chiefs were ane 
only proprietors. They were supposed to own not only 
the soil and all that grew upon it, not only the fish of 
the sea, but also the time and labor of the people. The 
common people had nothing which they could call abso- 
lutely their own.* 


* The system of land tenure bore a striking resemblance to that Which pre- 


28 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Taxes.— There was first the royal tax, which extended 
over the whole kingdom, each grade of inferiors paying to 
its superiors, until the whole pile was laid before the 
king. This tax consisted chiefly of articles of food, such 
as vegetables, fruit, hogs, dogs, fowls, and fish; kukui-nuts 
for light; kapas, nets, calabashes, and the red and yellow 
feathers of certain birds. 

Besides this there was a labor-tax, which recurred at 
certain days in every moon, and which chiefly consisted in 
cultivating the taro-patches of the chief. 

The common people were also liable to be called out 
for publict work, such as building or repairing temples 
(heiaus), or fish-ponds, or houses for the chiefs. There 
were various irregular demands made on the people by 
the chiefs, especially when traveling. For example, the 
horde of retainers which accompanied Kamehameha I. in 
his tours, and which usually amounted to a thousand 
persons, was supported entirely by the contributions of 
the people. If a sufficient quantity of provisions was not 
forthcoming, the king’s servants would plunder the people 
of pigs, provisions, etc., often leaving them entirely des- 
titute; and in lke manner each petty chief taxed his 
dependents according to his power or inclination.* 


vailed in Europe in former times, and which is called the feudal system. All the 
lands were considered to be the property of the king, and were held of him by 
the high-chiefs in fief, i.e., on condition of tribute and military service. On these 
great landlords he relied to carry out his plans, promote his interests, and fight 
kis battles. 

Each of the district chiefs divided up his territory among an inferior order of 
petty chiefs, who owed to him the same service and obedience that he owed to the 
king. In this way the land was subdivided again and again, down to the miser- 
able serfs who tilled the soil. It is estimated that the common laborers did not 
receive on an average more than one third of the avails of their industry, while 
the other two thirds were divided between the chiefs of different grades and the 
king. 

* There were, however, some restraints on the arbitrary power of the chief. 
His tenants could leave him and enter the service of a more popular chief, and 


PME PS Ee 


CIVIL POLITY 29 


The common people were not fixed to the soil, as in 
some countries, but could and often did remove from one 
land to another. They were merely tenants at will, liable 
to be dispossessed at any time. At the death of any chief 
all his estates reverted to the king, by whom they were 
again assigned to new landlords. 

Again, at the accession of a new king it was an ancient 
custom to redivide and distribute all the lands of an island 
among the adherents of the new sovereign, which often 
caused a civil war. 

Besides, there were ancient customs which had come 
to have the force of unwritten law, and ancient proverbs 
handed down from the wise men of old. This kind of 
customary law, for instance, regulated the irrigation of 
lands, fixing the proportion of water to which each land 
was entitled. 

Crimes such as theft were punished by private revenge, 
unless the injured party was too weak, when he either 
had recourse to sorcery or appealed to the chief, who dis- 
pensed a rude kind of justice. Executions were generally 
secret. The chief's zlamukwu or executioner often did his 
work at the dead of night, when his victim was asleep. 


the frequent wars obliged him to pay some regard to those upon whom he would 
have to depend in the day of battle. 


CHAPTER V 


CIVIL POLITY AND DOMESTIC RELATIONS 


Priests.— The priests or kahunas proper were divided ~ 
into several orders, which were hereditary. As before 
stated, the highest of these was founded by the foreigner 
Paao. 

The regular priests had lands set apart for their sup- 
port, and had great influence, due to their being the 
medium of communication with the gods, and having the 
power of selecting victims for the human sacrifices. 

It was their special duty to commit to memory and 
teach to their children the long prayers used in the temple ~ 
service. In general, they were the learned class, and kept . 
alive whatever knowledge of astronomy, history, medicine, ~ 
etc., had been handed down. 

A much lower class of kahunas were the diviners, k2lo- ~ 
kilo, the sorcerers, kahuna anaana, who prayed people to : 
death, and the doctors, kahuna lapaau, who depended — 
more on charms and incantations than upon medicines. — 

Common People.—Even among the common people, ; 
makaainana, there were different grades. Those who 
were skilled in some art, aS canoe-building, etc., and fa- t 
mous fishermen, enjoyed more consideration than other ¢ 
members of their class. . 

Slaves.—There were also bond-slaves, kawwa, lower t | 
even than the common people, who were probably made 
so in war. The copes Sp Hnte laepunt and mala 


CIVIL POLITY AND DOMESTIC RELATIONS Bie 


wela applied to them imply that they were marked in 
the forehead. 

Wars.— There was no separate military caste or stand- 
ing army, but most of the people, especially those employed 
around the chiefs, were trained in the use of weapons, 
and occasionally drilled in large bodies in sham fights. 

Weapons.— Their weapons were simple, and consisted 
of long spears, pololu ; javelins or short spears, the ; daggers, 
pahoa; and clubs made of hard wood, newa, and laau 
palau. ‘They never used the bow in war, but only in 
sport for shooting rats. Slings, however, made of cocoa- 
nut fiber or human hair, were extensively employed. 
The sling-stones were smooth round pebbles, and by long 
practice they learned to throw them with great force and 
precision. They used no shields, but became wonder- 
fully expert in catching or warding off spears thrown at 
them.* The elegant feather helmets and cloaks of the 
chiefs were worn for ornament and not for defense. 

Forts.—They often had fortresses, pakaua, either nat- 
ural or artificial, to which they could retreat if defeated, 
such as the hill of Kauwiki at Hana. 

Battles.—Their battles, however, were generally fought 
in the open field without much strategy, and they seldom 
practiced lying in ambush as most savages do. Idols were 
carried in the ranks, and the priests used to rush forward, 
making hideous faces and uttering diabolical yells, to 
strike terror into the enemy. 

The first man killed on either side was called a lehua, 
and his body was immediately dragged to the priest, who 
offered it to his god. The wives of the warriors often 

* Vancouver relates that in a sham fight he saw six spears cast at once at 


_ Kamehameha I., of which he caught three, parried two, and avoided the sixth by 
a quick movement of his body. 


32 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


followed in the rear, carrying water and food. They were 
frequently killed. 

Sea Fights.—Sometimes they engaged in sea fights in 
fleets numbering upwards of a hundred canoes on each 
side, but this rarely happened. 

Generally no quarter was given, and no mercy was 
shown to the vanquished. They were hunted out of their 
hiding-places and beaten to death, and their bodies were 
often mutilated and left unburied. Cannibalism, however, 
was regarded with horror and detestation. 

The bones and teeth of slain enemies were sometimes 
preserved as trophies of victory. 

Treaties.—Branches of the #@ plant and of young ba- 
nana-trees were used as flags of truce. Treaties of peace 
were ratified in the temples by sacrificing swine and de- 
positing wreaths of mazle woven jointly by the leaders 
on both sides, after which heralds were sent to proclaim 
the news far and wide.* 

Marriage as Affecting Rank.—Marriages were con- 
tracted with very little ceremony except among chiefs. It is 
said that in rare cases children were betrothed, hoopalau, 
when quite young, and then strictly watched over till 
marriage. Among the chiefs it was an important matter of 
state policy to marry the women of the highest rank, be- 
cause rank descended chiefly from the mother. 


Thus the son of a queen would be considered a noble, — 
even though his father should be of low origin; but ifa — 


chief should marry a common woman, her children would 


hold an inferior position, and could not succeed to his © 


rank. | 
In the reigning families, brothers and sisters some- 
times married each other from state policy, in order to 
* Ellis. 


ee A ee a a 


CIVIL POLITY AND DOMESTIC RELATIONS 33 


have children of the highest possible rank, ala niawpio, 
as they were called. é 

Among the better class of people the consent of the 
relatives, particularly of the brothers of the bride, was ob- 
tained, and presents were exchanged. But offers of mar- 
riage were made as frequently by the women as by the 
men. 

Wedding Ceremonies.—As in most countries, they often 
made-a feast to celebrate the event. Sometimes when 
chiefs of high rank were married they came in state with 
their attendants and joined noses, honz, before the as- 
sembly, amid loud shouts of hoao na’lii e/ “the chiefs are 
married!” But the principal ceremony more often consisted 
in the bridegroom’s casting a piece of tapa over the bride 
in the presence of her relatives, or their friends throwing 
it over both. Several instances of this are mentioned in 
Hawaiian chronicles. 

The marriage tie was loose, and the husband could dis- 
miss his wife without any ceremony. Polygamy was al- 
lowed in all ranks, but practiced mostly by the chiefs, who 
could best afford it.* 

Infanticide.—Infanticide was fearfully prevalent, and 
there were few of the older women at the date of the 
abolition of idolatry who had not been guilty of it. It 
was the opinion of those best informed that two thirds of 
all the children born were destroyed in infancy by their 
parents. They were generally buried alive, in many cases 
in the very houses occupied by their unnatural parents. 
On all the islands the number of males was much 
greater than that of females, in consequence of the 

* The state of society will not bear description in this work. The ideas and 


sentiments connected with the home and family in Christian countries could not 
be said to exist. 


84 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


girls being more frequently destroyed than the boys. 
The principal reason given for it was laziness,—unwilling- 
ness to take the trouble of rearing children. 

It was a very common practice for parents to give 
away their children to any friends who were willing to 
adopt them. 

No regular parental discipline was maintained, and 
the children were too often left to follow their own in- 
clinations, and to become familiar with the lowest vices. 

Neglect of the Helpless—Among the common people 
old age was despised. The sick and those who had be- 
come helpless from age were sometimes abandoned to 
die or put to death. Insane people were also sometimes 
stoned to death. 


CHAPTER VI 


OBJECTS OF WORSHIP 


Deification of the Powers of Nature.—The ancient 
Hawaiians had innumerable objects of worship. 

To them the earth, the air, and the sea were filled with 
invisible beings or akuas. In the mind of the savage all 
the powers of nature, especially those that are mysterious 
and terrible, are living and spiritual beings like man him- 
self. To the ancient Hawaiian the volcano, the thunder, 
the whirlwind, the meteor, the shark, above all, the mys- 
terious and dreaded disease, were each either the work or 
the actual embodiment of a malicious spirit. It is re- 
markable, however, that no worship was paid to the sun, 
moon, or stars. 

Local and Tutelar Deities —There were some deities 
that haunted particular localities, especially lonely or 
dangerous places; others that presided over different trades 
or professions; and others that watched over particular 
families, etc. One large class of divinities were the dei- 
fied spirits of the dead. 

The Four Great Gods.—The four great gods that were 
worshiped throughout all Polynesia were Kane, Kanaloa, 
Ku, and Lono.* These four deities were believed to have 
existed maz ka po mat, i.e., since the period of prime- 
val chaos or night. They were conceived of as power- 


*It may be remarlred that the Hawaiians were accustomed to count by fours. 
356 


36 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


ful, invisible beings, dwelling in or above the clouds, but 
also appearing on earth in human form. 

Kane.—The most ancient and powerful of these was 
Kane. Tane was also the chief god of Raiatea in the 
Society Islands. Some of the prayers in his honor seem 
to be fragments of a simpler and grander creed, and speak 
of him as father of men and founder of the world, Kane- 
makua and Kane-kumu-honua. He was imagined to be 
less malicious and cruel than the other deities. 

Kanaloa and Kaneapua.—Kanaloa is always ‘oes 
with him as his younger brother. They were said to have 
once resided at Waipio, Hawaii, and to have created springs 
of water in many places during their tours around the 
islands. Other legends give them the credit of having in- 
troduced banana-trees and other useful plants from Ka- 
hiki. Another younger brother, Kaneapua, was an inferior 
deity, worshiped by fishermen. 

Ku.—Ku appears to have been feared as a dark and 
malevolent being, delighting in the sufferings and immo- 
lation of human victims. 

Lono.—Lono had a separate order of priests, and tem- 
ples of a lower grade, in which human sacrifices were 
never offered. The New-Year games were held in his 
honor, and he was specially invoked for rain and on certain 
family occasions.* 

Multiplication of Deities —As time went on there was — 
a strong tendency to multiply divinities, and each of these 
four gods was worshiped under various special attributes 
‘or functions, which afterwards came to be regarded as — 
different persons. 


* Traditions connected with the ancient kings Lonokawai and Lono-i-ka- — 
makahiki seem to have been mixed up with those belonging to the primeval god 
Lono. 


OBJECTS OF WORSHIP 37 


Thus we have Kane-makua, the special god of certain 
fishermen; Kane-puaa, the god of agriculture; Kane-nui- 
akea, who inspired prophets; etc., etc. 

In the same way there were many varieties of Ku, and 
several of Lono. 

Local Gods.—There were a great many gods of differ- 
ent localities, such as Kane-hoa-lani, god of the sky; Kane- 
huli-koa, god of the sea; gods of the cardinal points; Poli- 
ahu, goddess of Mauna Kea; Lilinoe, goddess of Haleakala ; 
and many others. There were many places where travel- 
ers always made offerings of tapa or leaves or flowers, 
generally befure a sacred stone, as at Nuuanu Pah, Ka- 
huwaa Valley, etc. 

Laamaomao, an ancient deified chief, was the god of 


the winds, and Kane-wahi-lani was the god of the light- 


ning, attended by a troup of hunch-backed akuas. 

Gods of Professions.—Of the professional gods some 
have already been mentioned. 

Fishermen adored Ku-ula and his wife, Hina-hele, Moku- 
hali, a shark god, and many others. Ku-kaili-moku, also 
called Kaili, was the god of war. 

Kapa beaters venerated Lauhuki, a deified chiefess, 
who was changed into the wauke or paper-mulberry tree. 
Sorcerers worshiped Uli, as well as other lesser deities. 
Necromancers employed a number of petty demons on 
errands of mischief, such as Kuamu, Pua, Kapo, etc., akua 
noho. Hula dancers worshiped Laka, robbers and mur- 
derers Kuialua, and poisoners Kalaipahoa, while thieves 
and gamblers also had their patron gods. 

Deified Animals.—A large class of akuwas were incar- 
nated in certain animals, which were feared or believed 
to have an uncanny or supernatural character. For ex- 
ample, there were several shark gods, which were wor- 


38 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


shiped by fishermen, and sometimes possessed or inspired 
their devotee or kahu. 

There was a class of moo, or lizard gods, such as Kiha- 
wahine, a deified chiefess much employed by necroman- 
cers. Lizards were regarded with superstitious awe, as in 
New Zealand, and there were many traditions about 
gigantic reptiles, which were probably reminiscences of 
the crocodiles of the East Indian Archipelago. 

The owl had a sacred character, and its appearance in 
time of danger was a good omen. The god of owls was 
Kukauahi. The alae bird was also worshiped by some. 
Its cry was an omen of death. 

Pele and Her Family.—Pele, the goddess of volcanoes, 
and her numerous family formed a class of deities by 
themselves. She with her six sisters, Hiiaka, her brother, 
Kamohoalii, and others, was said to have emigrated from 
Kahiki (Samoa) in ancient times. They were said to have 
first lived at Moanalua in Oahu, then to have moved 
their residence to Kalaupapa, Molokai, then to Haleakala, 
and finally to have settled on Hawaii. 

Their headquarters were in the Hale mau-mau, in the 
crater of Kilauea, but they also caused the eruptions of 
Mauna Loa and Hualalai. In southern Hawaii Pele was 
feared more than any other deity, and no one dared to 
approach her abode without making her an offering of 
the ohelo-berries that grow in the neighborhood. When- 
ever an eruption took place great quantities of hogs and 


other articles of property were thrown into the lava 


stream in order to appease her anger.* 


* Mr. Ellis says: *‘ The conical craters were said to be their houses, where they — : 


frequently amused themselves by playing draughts, Xonane; the roaring of the 
furnaces and the crackling of the flames were the music of their dance, and the 
red fiery surge was the surf in which they played.” 


q 
| 
: 


OBJECTS OF WORSHIP 89 


Pele was identical with the Samoan fire goddess Fee. 
Her sister, Hiiaka-i-ka-poli-o-Pele, was much employed 
by sorcerers. 

Aumakuas.—The awmakuas were tutelar deities, at- 
tached to particular families, and were generally, but not 
always, deified ancestors. They were identical with the 
Tahitian oromatuas, but were not so malignant.* 

Sickness and misfortune were generally caused by the 
displeasure of these deities, who had to be propitiated by 
prayers and offerings, which were different with different 
aumakuas. The most unpardonable sin in their eyes was 
the neglect to perform a vow, hoohikz.+ 

Kini akua.—The kint akua were multitudinous little 
elves inhabiting the woods, whose favor it was best to 
gain. 

Kupuas.—The kwpuwas, or demi-gods, were men pos’ 
sessed of preternatural powers, or mighty magicians like 
Maui, Kana, or Kamapuaa. 

Maui.—Maui was celebrated in all the islands of Poly- 
nesia for his exploits of obtaining fire for men, of draw- 
ing up islands from the bottom of the sea with his magic 
hook, manaiakalana, and of lassoing the sun, and com- 
pelling him to move more slowly. His hook was preserved 
at Tonga in the eighteenth century. 


*If, as was often the case, they resided in particular species of animals, as the 
shark, owl, eel, etc., then that animal was tabu to the family, and could not’ be 
injured without fatal consequences. If the family aumakua resided in certain 
stones, then it would be tabu for members of the family to sit on those stones. 

t+tFabulous stories were told of deliverances wrought by aumakuas. For in- 
stance, one man was rescued from drowning by his shark-god, and another, taken 
captive in war, and tied up to be roasted in an oven, was set free by his guardian 
owl-god. 

People sometimes gave the bodies of their relatives to sharks in order that 
their spirits might enter into the sharks, or threw them into the crater ©. 
Kilauea, that they might join the company of the volcanic deities, and after 
ward befriend the family. 


40 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Kamapuaa.—Kamapuaa was a kupua or demi-god, who 
had the power of assuming the form of a man or that of 
a gigantic hog, as suited his caprice. There are many 
legends about his war with his uncle Olopana, the chief 
of Koolau, Oahu. He was the local deity of the Kaliuwaa 
valley in Koolau. 


LAVA FLOW 


Other legends relate his contest with the goddess Pele, 
whose fires he nearly extinguished by pouring sea-water 
into her crater.* 


* According to one version of the story, the volcanic deities succeeded in 
drying up the water, and in driving the monster to the sea, amidst a shower 
of red-hot stones. Another account, however, states that he gained the day, 
and that he finally married Pele; in consequence of which no more extensive 
volcanic eruptions took place, and no new islands were formed 


aR eli Selehaiancrsa 


aes 


a ee 


i 
; 


CHAPTER VII 


IDOLS AND TEMPLES 


Idols.—The Hawaiians usually worshiped their gods 


by means of idols, believing that by 
the performance of certain ceremonies 
power, mana, was imparted to the 
idols so that they became a means of 
communication with the unseen divini- 
ties. They imagined that a spirit re- 
sided in or conveyed influence through 
the image representing it. 

The principal gods which stood in 
the great heiaus were of ohta wood, 
and were purposely made hideous in 
order to inspire fear. Another class 
of gods, such as Kukaili-moku, Ko- 
loewa, etc., was represented by images 
of wicker-work, covered with red feath- 
ers, with eyes made of mother-of-pearl, 
and wide gaping mouths armed with 
sharks’ teeth. 

The common people also had small 
idols for private worship, which they 
carried to the heiaus on great occa- 


ANCIENT IDOL 


sions. The pebbles from the beach of Ninole, Kau, were 
sought after as idols, and were supposed to have the power 


41 


42, HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


of self-propagation. Sometimes worship was paid to shape- 
less stones, which were supposed to be the shrine or resi- 
dence of a deity. 

Temples.—There were two principal orders of temples 
and also of the priests who officiated in them, viz., those 
of Ku and those of Lono. 

The former were of higher rank, and far more se- 
vere and exclusive in their tabus and ritual than the 
latter. 

The name lwakini was applied to the chief heiaus or 
temples of the former class, which belonged to the doz 
or highest chief of the island. It was only at these heiaus 
that human sacrifices could be offered, and hence they 
were called hetaw pookanaka. 

The luakinis were commonly erected upon hills near 
the sea, and formed conspicuous objects in the land- 
scape. 

A few of the most famous ones were those of Mookini 
in Kohala, of Puukohola at Kawaihae, of Pakaalana in 
Waipio, Hawaii, and of Kawaluna in Waolani, Nuuanu. 
They were, in general, extensive stone platforms or ter- 
races, Surrounded by stone walls. All the houses built 
within the inclosure had to be of ohta wood, and thatched 
with the wkz or Dianella. On the other hand, in the smaller 
temples dedicated to Lono (mapele) the lama was the only 
kind of wood allowed, and the houses had to be thatched 
with the ¢# leaf. These last could be built by chiefs of 
inferior rank, and their consecration required only three 
days, if no delay occurred, while the dedication of a lwakint 


occupied from ten to fourteen days of protracted rites of — 


the severest kind. 
Temple of Puukohola.—There was a good deal of 
variety in the plan of these structures, but the great 


ees ie 


IDOLS AND TEMPLES 43 


heiau. of Puukohold, built by Kamehameha I. in 1791, 
is a good example of them. 

According to Ellis, it is an irregular parallelogram 
two hundred and twenty-four feet long and one hun- 
dred feet wide, with walls twelve feet thick at the base, 
and varying in height from eight feet on the upper side 
to twenty feet on the lower side. The entrance was a 
narrow passage between two high walls, and the in- 
terior was divided into terraces paved with smooth, flat 
stones. At the south end was an inner court where the 
principal idol used to stand, surrounded’ by a number of 
images of inferior deities. 

Oracle-—In the center of the court stood the lananuu, 
a lofty frame of wicker-work, in shape something like 
an obelisk, hollow, and four or five feet square at the 
base. This was the oracle, in which the priest stood as 
a medium of communication with his god, when the 
king came to inquire of him. | 

Altar—Near the entrance to the inner court was the 
lele or altar, a sort of scaffolding supported by posts, on 
which offerings were laid and left to moulder away. 

Sacred Houses.—About the center of the terrace was 
a sacred house, in which the king resided during the pe- 
riods of tabu, and at the northern end stood the houses 
of the priests. 

The outer walls were crowned with hideous -wooden 
idols of all shapes and sizes. From native writers we 
learn that in front of the lele was the hale pahwu or drum- 
house, with the door facing the lele. Beyond this was 
the principal house, called mana, with the door toward 
the Jele. At the end of the mana, stood a small house 
called Wazea, in which certain prayers called the aha 
were recited. 


44 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


At the other end of the mana was a long house called 
hale wmu, in which the fire of the heiau was lighted and 
certain offerings cooked. Somewhere in the heiau was a 
pit called lwapau, which was probably a receptacle for the 
bones of the victims. 

In the outer court stood a house called the Hale o Papa, 
set apart for female deities, under a priest of its own, to 
which the female chiefs came on certain occasions. 
Women in general were excluded from the interior of 
the heiaus.* , 

Almost every headland had its altar or wnu, dedicated 
to Ku-ula or Kinilau, or to the shark-god Mooalii, the 
patron of fishermen. 

Sacred Rocks.— There were numerous sacred rocks, 
from one to six feet high, called the pohaku o Kane, which 
the common people used as family shrines, before which 
they made offerings and prayers. 

Ipu o Lono.—In time of drought small heiaus called 
wpu o Lono were built for rain. But the term was gen- 
erally applied to a sacred calabash, kept in private houses, 
in which offerings were made to the tutelar gods of the 
family. 

Puuhonuas.— The puuhonua was a place of refuge, an 
inviolable sanctuary in time of war. “ Hither,” says Hllis, 
“the man-slayer, the man who had broken a tabu, the 
thief, and even the murderer, fled from his pursuers, and — 
was safe.” The gates were always open, and as soon as 
he had entered he repaired to the presence of the idol — 
and made a short address of thanksgiving. In war time 
a white flag was unfurled from the top of a tall spear at — 
each end of the inclosure, a short distance outside of the 
walls. 


* Inferior chiefs had smaller chapels, according to their rank and wealth. 


IDOLS AND TEMPLES 45 


The priests and their attendants would immediately 
put to death any one who should follow or molest those 
who were within the pale of the pahu tabu. After remain- 
ing several days in the pwuhonua they could return home 
under the protection of the gods. In the island of Hawaii 
were three famous puuhonuas, one at Honaunau, ad- 


—_ 


—— ZZ Ppa Fe oe 
= (JOP MAD? 
FA ty me 


HEIAU (TEMPLE) AT WAIMEA, KAUAI 


joining the Hale o Keawe, one at Waipio, the heiau of 
Pakaalana, containing the Hale o Lloa, and one in the 
little islet of Mokuola in Hilo Bay. 

In the island of Lanai the land of Kealia Kapu was a 
famous asylum; and in Oahu the land of Kualoa was 
sacred. All canoes had to lower their masts on passing 
it from Makawai to Kaaawa. The heiau at Waolani in 
Nuuanu was sacred to fugitives and the sick. 

On Kauai there was a puuhonua at Wailua, and 
another at Waimea. 


46 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


The most celebrated puuhonua was the one at Honau- 
nau, which measures seven hundred and fifteen feet by 
four hundred and four, containing about seven acres, and 
is surrounded by a massive wall, twelve feet high and 
fifteen feet thick. Formerly large wooden images stood 


CEE 


AN . 


HALE (HOUSE) 0 KEAWE 


on the walls, about four feet apart. Within this inclosure 
were three heiaus, built of very large stones. 

Hale o Keawe.—The Hale 0 Keawe was in fact a tomb 
or sacred depository of the bones of the chiefs, erected by 
Kanuha, a son of Keawe II., about the year 1690 a.p. 
It was built of kautla timber, thatched with tz leaves, 
and surrounded by a strong paling, with a paved court 
at each end. Numerous idols stood on the fence at in- — 


IDOLS AND TEMPLES 47 


tervals all around, and twelve were set on pillars arranged 
in a semicircle at the southeast end of the inclosure, 
before which offerings were formerly placed.* 


* Many other images were kept in the house, some of wood and some of wicker- 
work, covered with red feathers. Under their powerful protection were kept the 
bones of Keawe and other ancient chiefs, wrapped up in bundles, and carefully 
bound with cinet made of cocoanut fibers, together with red feathers and other 
valuable articles. They are now deposited in the Royal mausoleum in Honolulu. 


CHAPTER VIiIl 


CEREMONIAL SYSTEM 


The Tabu.—The tabu system, which is characteristic 
of the Polynesian race, was perhaps most fully de- © 
veloped in the Hawaiian Islands. It was a compli- 
cated system, which covered the entire daily life of the 
people with a vast net-work of regulations and penalties. 
These were not merely laws but religious ordinances, 
and the violation of them was not merely a crime, ~ 
but a sin, which would bring down the NESSES of @ 
the gods. 

Some tabus were permanent, and others special and — 
temporary. Of the former kind were those relating to the 
chiefs or to the idols or temples, while others belonged to — 
particular times or were imposed by the king. 

Special Tabus Relating to Women.—The most op- — 
pressive of these regulations were those relating to the © 
sexes. It was tabu for men and women to eat together — 
or even to have their food cooked in the same oven. A — 
complete domestic establishment comprised at least six j 
houses: i1st,a chapel for the family idols; 2d, the mua, — 1 
or men’s eating-house, which was tabu to females; 3d, — 
the hale noa, or common sleeping-house; 4th, the hale — 
aia, or women’s eating-house; 5th, the hale kua, or ; 


house for beating tapa; and 6th, the hale pea for thes | 
48 q 


CEREMONIAL SYSTEM 49 


women during certain tabu periods. The first two houses 
were tabu to the women on pain of death. 

Several kinds of food were forbidden to the women on 
pain of death, viz., pork, bananas, cocoanuts, turtles, and 
certain kinds of fish, as the wlua, the hwmu, the shark, 
the hihimanu or sting-ray, etc. The men of the poorer 
class often formed a sort of eating-club apart from their 
wives. These laws were rigorously enforced. 

For example, at Honaunau, Hawaii, two young girls of 
the highest rank, Kapiolani and Keoua, having been de- 
tected in the act of eating a banana, their kahu, or tutor, 
was held responsible, and put to death by drowning. 
Shortly before the abolition of the tabus, a little child had 
one of her eyes scooped out for the same offense. About 
the same time a woman was put to death for entering the 
eating-house of her husband, although she was tipsy at 
the time. There were many tabus that related to cere- 
monial purity, especially in connection with their funeral 
rites, of which more hereafter. There were many occa 
sions when no canoe could be launched, no fire lighted 
no tapa beaten or poi pounded, and no sound could be 
uttered on pain of death; when even the dogs had to be 
muzzled, and the fowls were shut up in calabashes for 
twenty-four hours at a time. 

Calendar.—Their ritual was so closely connected with 
their division of time that it seems necessary to con- 
sider the latter in this place. The Hawaiians, like all 
other Polynesians, reckoned time by lunar months con- 
taining either twenty-nine or thirty days alternately. As 
twelve of these months fell eleven days short of the true 
year, they had discovered the deficiency, and occasion- 
ally inserted an intercalary month. ~The Polynesian year 
began with the month Makali about November 20th, 


50 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


when the Pleiades rise at sunset. The reckoning on 
Kauai and Oahu, however, is said to have differed two 
months from that of Maui and Hawaii. 


During four months, beginning with Ikuwa, which cor- 


responds to our October, the regular religious services 
were suspended, and special services and games held in 
honor of Lono. 

New Year’s.—The great makahiki or New Year’s fes- 
tival was held about the end of Welehu, which nearly 
corresponded to November. The five months beginning 
with Kaelo, our January, were war-months, but during 
the remaining seven months there could be no war. 

Lunar Month.—Hach night of the lunar month had its 
appropriate name. During each month there were four 
tabu periods of two nights and one day each, dedicated 
severally to each of the four great gods. All their re- 
ligious rites, as well as their fishing, planting, etc., were 
regulated by the moon. 


Prayers.—Their temple service was most elaborate and — 


complicated. The numerous prayers were known -by 
special names, and had been handed down by word of 


mouth for many generations. They were in a very an- — 


cient style, and understood only by a few, and often oc- 


cupied several hours in their recital. They were not ~ 
merely prayers in the proper sense of the word, but — 


magical incantations, and in order tefsecure the desired 


effect it was necessary to repeat them without the slight- — 


est mistake. 


During the most important class of prayers, called — 


ahas, it was necessary that absolute silence should be 


observed, as the least noise would break the -— and — 


destroy the whole effect of the charm. 
In some services there were responses made by the 


CEREMONIAL SYSTEM 51 


people or by a company of priests, the assembly rising and 
sitting at given signals, or holding their hands toward 
heaven for half an hour at a time. The service always 
closed with the words “ Amama! ua noa. Lele aku la.” 
Ata great heiau there were numerous priests, who divided 
the different parts of the service between them, and each 
had his specialty. It should be observed, however, that 
the king was the head of the church, that he presented 
the human sacrifices on great occasions, and pronounced 
the concluding amama. 

Human Sacrifice.—The human sacrifice was the crown- 
ing act of the ancient worship, only offered on the most 
important occasions, and at the heiaus of the highest 
class. The victims were either prisoners taken in war or 
persons accused of a violation of some of the numberless 
regulations of the tabu, poe lawehala. The female sex 
seems to have been exempt from sacrifice. 

The mode of execution was generally that of secret 
assassination, the victim being stunned by a blow with a 
club from behind. Whenever a temple was to be dedi- 
cated, a new house built for the chief, or a new war-canoe 
launched, many people fled to the mountains and lay hid 
till the danger had passed. 

The Mu.—The person employed to procure victims 
was known as the Mu; this word inspired peculiar terror, 
even long after the abolition of idolatry. The corpses 
were dragged to the heiau, presented to the idol, and laid 
face down upon the lele, together with hogs, etc., where 
the mass was left to putrefy in the sun.* 

Monthly Tabus.—As was stated above, there were tour 


*Thus in 1807 three men were sacrificed in the heiau at the foot of Dia 
mond Head, because the queen, Keopuolani, was dangerously ill. 


52 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


tabu periods during each moon, viz.: 1st, that of Ku, 
from the third to the sixth night; 2d, that of Hua, at full 
moon, including the fourteenth and fifteenth nights; 3d, 
that of Kaloa or Kanaloa, the twenty-fourth and twenty- 
fifth nights ; and 4th, that of Kane, the twenty-seventh 
and twenty-eighth nights. 

During these tabu periods a devout king Poneraily 
spent the time in the heiau, and no person could pass its 
limits on pain of death.* 

Women were forbidden to enter canoes, or to have 
any intercourse with the other sex as long as the tabu 
lasted. 

The Aku and Opelu Tabu.—Two kinds of fish, the 
aku or bonito and the opelu, had a sacred character, and 
were tabu by turns, for six months at a time. At the 
kapu hua, i.e. the 13th day of Kaelo, in January, a hu- 
man sacrifice was offered, together with the fish aku, at 
which it is said that the Kahoalw, a man personifying 
the god, plucked out and ate an eye of each. By this 
ceremony the tabu was taken off from the aku, and the 
opelu became tabu for the next six months, not to be 
eaten on pain of death. 

In the month of Hinaiaeleele, or July, the tabu was 
taken off the opelw and reimposed on the aku. The first 
night, Hilo, of this month was kapu loa. No fire could 
be kindled, and no sound of man or beast or fowl must 
be heard. 

Toward morning the high-priest, accompanied by an- 
other priest, went to the opelu house of Ku-ula, the god 

** This time,” says an eye-witness, Archibald Campbell, ‘“ was spent in 
prayer, in sacrificing pigs, in eating the sacrifices, and in conversation. The 
priest continued praying for three hours at a time, during which the most 


profound silence was observed. The congregation stood with arms uplifted for 
about three quarters of an hour at the beginning and end of the prayer.” 


CHnaMOUNIAL SYSTEM 58 


of fishermen, where he sacrificed a pig, and recited the 
great aha as during a dedication. Afterward the con- 
gregation was arranged in four rows, and long prayers 
recited, the people rising up and sitting down at the 
recurrence of certain words in the service, while a man 
was sent to the woods for pala fern. 

Next morning the head fisherman, wearing a white 
malo, took the pala and a new net in his canoe, and put 
to sea. 

Meanwhile a strict tabu was observed on shore; no 
fire could be lighted, and no canoe launched, on pain of 
death, nor could any canoe from abroad land on that day. 

The fisherman, after praying to his awmakuas and to 
Ku, proceeded to cast his net. If he and his crew made 
a haul of opelu, they paddled at once for the shore with 
loud shouts of joy. The head fisherman then took seven 
of the fish to the priest, who sent some of them to the 
king, and placed the rest on the /ele in the temple. 

The chief also proceeded to the heiau, where he offered 
his opelu to the gods, plucking out and eating the right 
eye of the fish. Next day the sea was free, and the opelu 
was noa, or free to all, but the akw in its turn was tabu 
for the next six months. 


CHAPTER IX 


CEREMONIAL DEDICATION OF A TEMPLE 


Dedication.—The consecration of a temple, or luakini, 
which was often performed just before a war in order to 
insure victory, was the most important as well as the 
most laborious of their religious services. Nine priests 
conducted different parts of the ceremonies, which occu- 
pied ten or more days. The proper time for the dedica- 
tion was in the spring (in the months of Nana, Welo, or 
Tkiiki). : 

Purification.— About twelve days were occupied by 
preliminary rites of purification. A religious procession 
made the circuit of the island or district, consisting of 
the akua alaea, i.e., a man personating the god, with a 
peculiar head-dress of human hair, girt with white kaya, 
and carrying spears, accompanied by a priest bearing a 
calabash of red ocher, alaea, and other attendants, pre- 
ceded and followed by men bearing white flags. When 
they arrived at the ahu, or pile of stones which marked 
the boundary of a land, on which an image of a hog 
made of kukui wood had been placed, the priest smeared | 
the image with the red ocher, and offered a prayer. At 
the same time, the tenants of the land brought contribu- 
tions of pigs, kapas, feathers, etc., after which the pro- 
cession moved to the next land. 

54 


CEREMONIAL DEDICATION OF A TEMPLE 55 


After this tour had been completed, on the evening 
before the new moon a responsive service was held at 
the heiau, to which the whole population was summoned, 
during which the priest sprinkled the people with holy 
water, i.e, salt water mixed with a little turmeric and 
limu kala moss, with a bunch of pala, a sacred fern. 

Bringing Down of the Idol.— The next thing in order 
was to bring down the principal idol, called the hakuohza, 
from the forest. A great procession was formed, consist- 
ing of the king, the hakuohia priest, and a crowd of 
attendants carrying idols and various offerings, and lead- 
ing a human victim. The tree had been selected and the 
ax consecrated the day before. On arriving at the tree 
the priest recited the appropriate aha amid dead silence, 
after which the king pronounced the amama, and killed 
the hog with a single blow. 

The priest inquired whether any sound of man or beast 
or bird or cricket had been heard during the aha, and if 
not it was a good omen. The doomed man was then 
brought forward, and offered to the god by the king, after 
which his body was buried at the foot of the tree. The 
consecrated hog was baked in an oven on the spot, while 
the tree was cut down, trimmed, and covered with zee 
vines. 

After the company had feasted, a procession was formed 
with the feather-gods in front, followed by the chiefs and 
people with pala fern, ohia-branches, etc., and others car- 
rying the new idol, uttering fearful yells. The inhabitants 
of the village remained indoors, for it was death to meet 
the procession, and all fires were strictly forbidden. The 
images were finally carried to the heiau, where they were 
deposited with shoutings and beating of drums. 

Kauila Ceremony.—The remaining services at the heiau 


56 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


occupied seven or eight days. Before the houses could be 
thatched, the kauzla ceremony was performed, at which 
the whole population had to assist. The multitude was 
seated in eight rows in the outer court. The keepers of the 
portable sacred images brought them forth, and formed 
in line together with Kahoalw, a naked man personating 
a god or deified chief. The high-priest came forward with 
a bunch of pala or teze in his hand, girded with white 
kapa, and attended by a man bearing a skull filled with 
holy water. He then intoned a long prayer, at certain 
passages of which the image-bearers rose and went through 
various evolutions, marching and counter-marching in per- 
fect time, with Kahoalz at their head. At other passages, 
the congregation rose and sat down eight times, and joined 
in the closing responses, “ Ola, olao Ku!” Toward even- 
ing the hakuohia idol was brought to its place in front 
of the lananwu, near the altar, where a hole had been 
dug for its pedestal. Then another human victim was — 
sacrificed and buried in the hole, after which the image 
was planted over the dead body, while the aha popouana 
was recited. . 
The Great Aha.— That night was the most solemn 
and critical of all. The omens were carefully observed, 
and prayers were offered in every house for the success — 
of the coming aha, and for auspicious weather, that there | 
might be no wind or rain, no thunder or lightning, no | 
high surf, and no sound of man or beast to mar the cer- 
emonies. If the sky was clear and every thing favorable, — 
between midnight and morning the king and high-priest — 
entered into the small house called Wazea to perform the 
great aha (hulahula), while the congregation sat in front 
of the mana house, listening and watching in profound 
silence. The king stood listening intently and holding a 


CEREMONIAL DEDICATION OF A TEMPLE 57 


pig, while the high-priest, clad in white kapa, and hold- 
ing a Jama rod wound with oloa (white kapa), recited the 
long prayer. At its close the king killed the pig with a 
single blow, and offered it up with a short prayer to the 
four great gods. The priests then asked the king whether 
the aha was perfect, and whether he had heard the voice 
of man or dog or mouse or fowl, or any thing else during 
the prayer. If not, he tapped the large drum as a signal 
that it was over, and they both went out to question the 
assembly outside. If no one had heard a sound during 
the ceremony, the high-priest congratulated the king, and 
predicted for him victory and long life. The people then 
raised loud shouts of “ Lele wale ka aha e!” which were 
repeated by all who heard them, and so the news traveled 
far and wide. 

Kuili Ceremonies.—During the next three nights the 
Kwilt ceremonies were performed.* 

During each day great numbers of hogs were cooked 
and feasted on by priests and people. 

On the fourth night another great aha (hoowilimoo) 
was performed by the king and the priest of Lono, while 
another priest, with a large company of fishermen, put 
to sea to fish for wlua. 

Offering of the Ulua.—The idols were now invested 
with white kapa and received their several names; the 
principal one being called Moz; and a great sacrifice was 
made of hogs, bananas, cocoanuts, red fish and white kapa, 
besides several more human victims, which were placed 
on the lele. If the fishermen failed to catch any wlua 
that night they killed a man in the village, and dragged 


* The houses in the heiau were lighted up with torches all night, and there 
were noisy prayers and chantings by the priests divided into sections, with 
much gesticulation and clapping of hands, 


58 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


his body to the heiau with a hook in his mouth, as a 
substitute for the fish. . 7 

As the wulua priest approached, chanting an incanta- 
tion and carrying his hook and line, everybody fled, and 
even the priests retired within the drum-house. When 
he had finished chanting his aha behind the lananuwu, he 
reported to the king the omens which he had observed, 
and the fish was offered up to the god. If he had broken 
his rod or line, or if the bait had all been eaten, it was 
a bad omen. 

The Hono Ceremony.—On the next day more sacri- 
fices were offered, and all the people, priests, and chiefs 
repaired to the sea to bathe, after which the hono cere- 
mony took place. The congregation was all seated in 
rows in front of the drum-house, and the hono priest took 
his place with a sacred /wna wand in his hand, and re- 
cited his prayer, at one passage of which all had to hold up 
their hands toward heaven, and remain in that position 
for a long time, motionless, on pain of death. 

Closing Ceremonies.—On the last day, the priest of 
Papa presided. The wives of the king, clad in white wrap- 
pers, brought a long white girdle as an offering to the Hale 
o Papa. Many dogs and fowls were also offered, as be- 
ing lawful for women to eat. The priest of Papa recited 
the prescribed prayer, and the queen prayed for children. 
The devotees of various female deities also presented 
themselves at the same place with offerings. Then the © 
congregation was ranged in rows, and the priests of Papa 
made the concluding prayer, the laity joining in the — 
closing responses, and ending the whole ceremony with 
loud shouts of “noa honua!” | 

Such were some of the principal ceremonies held at 
the dedication of a luakéné or temple. 


CEREMONIAL DEDICATION OF A TEMPLE 59 


Makahiki Months.—As has been stated above, the 
religious services were suspended during the four maka- 
hikt months, commencing near the beginning of October. 
During this period pork could not be eaten by the chiefs, 
not having been consecrated by sacrifice to the gods. 
The great festival took place in the latter part of No- 
vember. 

On the 23d day of the moon of Welehu, the image of 
Lono makua, the Makahiki god, was decorated.* 

Purification.—The next night fires were lighted on the 
shore all around the island, and the people all went to 
bathe in the sea, warming themselves at the fires. This 
was a rite of purification, after which they all put on 
new mdlos and paus. 

Tabu Days.—The next morning the festival began, 
and for four days no work, no fishing, no bathing, no 
pounding of kapa, no beating of drums or blowing of 
conchs was permitted. Land and sky and sea were 
tabu to Lono, and only feasting and games were allowed. 
The high-priest was blindfolded, and remained in se- 
clusion for five days. 

Collection of Taxes.—Meanwhile all the konohikis on 
the island had been getting ready the taxes of their re- 
spective lands, in anticipation of a visit from the long 
god, who now made a tour of the island. The long god 
was preceded by a man carrying two long rods, which he 
set up in the ground on arriving at the boundary of a 

*This idol was like a round pole, twelve feet long and three or four inches in 
diameter, with a head carved at one end. A cross-stick was fastened to its neck, 
at right angles to the pole, and about six feet long, to which were attached 
feather wreaths, and an imitation of a sea-bird, the kaupu, was perched upon it. 
A long white kapa like a sail was fastened at the top to the cross-piece, and left 


loose at the bottom. A short idol was also made, called the akua paani (god 


of sport), and makawahine, because it was set up at the boxing-matches and 
other games. 


60 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


land. The land was then under a tabu or interdict, and no 
one could leave it until the tax was fully paid. The taxes 
were brought to the ahu, and when the tax-collector was 
satisfied, the priest chanted a prayer to Lono, the crowd 
joining in the responses, closing with the shout, “ Aulwe 
Lono!” when the land became noa or free, and the long 
idol moved on to the next land. When the procession 
arrived at the chief’s house, the inmates called out, “ZH 
welt ta oe, Lono, ea!” “Welcome to thee, Lono!” to 
which the bearers of the idol responded, “ Nauwane.” 

This was twice repeated before they entered the house, 
where they were feasted on the choicest dishes the coun- 
try could produce. The food had to be put into their — 
mouths, because their hands were tabued by contact with 
the idol. Then the wife of the chief bound a fine white 
kapa girdle on the idol, while her husband fastened an 
ivory clasp, ntho palaoa, around his neck. : 

Games.— As evening came on, the people assembled 
from the surrounding country to see the boxing-matches, 
etc., under the immediate patronage of the short god. 
For the next two days, all kinds of games were carried 
on, such as boxing, wrestling, sliding down hill, throwing 
the mazka, foot-races, etc., attended with general gambling 
and revelry. On the fifth day, called Lono, the bandage 
was taken off the high-priest’s eyes, and canoes were | 
allowed to go a-fishing for that day. The tabu was then | 
put on again until the long idol returned, 1e., for about 
twenty days. 

Kalii Ceremony.—On that evening the Kalw ceremony 
was performed as follows: The king went a-fishing with 
a numerous company, taking the long idol with him. On 
his return he was accompanied by a warrior, expert in the — 
spear exercise. As the king leaped on shore a man rushed — 


“an 
a || 


=. 
; IE 


CEREMONIAL DEDICATION OF A TEMPLE 61 


forward with two spears bound with white kapa, and 
hurled one at him, which was parried, after which he 
simply touched the king with the other spear, and the 
ceremony was over.* This was followed by sham fights, 
until the king put a stop to them, and repaired to the 
heiau to pay his devotions to Lono. 

The next day the long idol was stripped of its orna- 
ments, which were packed up and deposited in the temple 
for use another year, and a white canoe, called “Lono’s 
canoe to return to Kahiki in,” was sent out to sea, after 
which all restrictions on fishing and farming were taken 
off, noa ka makahtkz, 


* Kamehameha, however, always caught the spear himself. 


CHAPTER X 


PRIVATE WORSHIP 


Family Worship.— Besides the public worship in the 
heiaus, almost every act of the ancient Hawaiian was 
attended with prayers and offerings to the tutelar deities. — 
This private and family worship of the common people 
was in great part addressed to an inferior class of divin- 
ities. Every avocation had its patron gods, who had to be 
propitiated, besides the ancestral awmakuas, and there 
were also innumerable omens to be observed.* 

Fishermen.— Fishermen had many tabus peculiar to 
themselves, and formed almost a distinct community. © 
Their small heiaus, often called ku-ulas, stood on every _ 
promontory. A fisherman could not use a new net or | 
fishing-rod without prayer and sacrifice to his patron god. 
Especially had the shark-god to be propitiated. Besides, 
there were countless minute regulations, which varied in 
different islands and districts. a 

House-building.—In building a house, the professional 
advice of a kélokilo or diviner had to be taken as to the — 
position and direction of the house, and even the arrange- 
ment of the sticks composing the framework, or sickness _ 
and death would ensue. If it were a chief’s house, human 


* Mr. Dibble states that ‘‘the people were in the habit of praying every morn- i 
ing to the gods, clapping their hands as they muttered a set form of words in a 
sing-song tone. This was practiced by the chiefs and many of the people,”’ 

62 


PRIVATE WORSHIP 63 


sacrifices would be required, so that many people filed to 
the mountains at such times from fear of the mysterious 
Mu. When the door was to be finished, a priest was sent 
for to offer the kwwa prayer, and to cut the thatch over 
the door. 

Again, before the house was occupied, offerings and 
prayers had to be made both to the great gods and to the 
aumakuas, and it was usual to employ a priest to sleep 
alone in the house one or two nights before the owner 
moved into it. 

Canoe-building.— The building of a canoe was a very 
serious. business, almost equal to bringing down an idol 
for the heiau. The whole operation had to be superin- 
tended by a kahuna kalaiwaa. The choice of the tree 
was of the utmost importance. The kahuna paid great 
attention to the actions of birds, particularly of the little 
elepaio, and used to pass a night in the heiau, in order 
to receive directions from his awmakuas through dreams. 
Before the tree was cut down, offerings were made of a 
hog, red fish, cocoanuts, and awa, and prayers were ad- 
dressed to Ku-pulupulu and other gods. The gods were 
again invoked before the canoe was dragged down to the 
shore. After it was finished and ready for launching, a 
final sacrifice was offered, called the Jolo, and an aha 
was recited by the priest, standing with the owner at the 
bow of the canoe. In this prayer the names of Tahiti, 
Vavau, Upolu, and other islands of the South Pacific are 
mentioned. If the silence was broken by any noise or by 
any one’s coming, it was a fatal omen, foreboding death 
and disaster, but if not, the canoe was safe. 

Agriculture.— Those engaged in agriculture were very 
careful to plant on certain days of the moon. The oo or 
digger had to be fashioned with prayers addressed to 


64 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Ku-pulupulu or Ku-moku-halii, to insure good luck. Then 
there were prayers to be repeated when planting, and at — 
different stages of the growth of the crop, addressed to 
Kane-puaa, and prayers for rain addressed to Lono or Ku. 
When the crop was ripe, the first fruits were offered to 
the family gods on the proper day of the moon. 

Some of the food was cooked together with red fish. 
The family idol was brought, together with the tw o 
Lono or sacred calabash, part of the food was offered to 
the god, and the rest was consumed by the company. 
After this, the field or taro-patch was noa or free. 

The hale kua, where the women beat kapa, was tabu, 
and the whole manufacture was under the patronage of 
the goddess Lauhuki. The hula dance was regarded as an — 
act of service to the obscene deity, Laka. 

Again, there were appropriate ceremonies for several 
different periods of a child’s life. 

Rites at a Child’s Birth. When a male child was born, 
he was taken to the heiau, where offerings were made to 
the idols, and prayers offered by the priest, after which | 
the father prayed to the four great gods to grant his son 
long life and prosperity. | 

Rites at a Boy’s Promotion.—When a boy was four | 
or five years old he was removed from the hale noa to the | 
hale mua, where he could partake of tabu food, such as | 
pork, and was henceforth forbidden to eat with women. | 
On this important occasion a hog was baked for the gods, 
its head cut off and laid upon the kuahw or altar before the | 
idol, and one ear placed in the tpuo Lono, which was at-_ 
tached to the idol’s neck. Then bananas, cocoanuts, and 
awa were offered, and the boy’s father, holding the awa, 
recited a long prayer, chiefly addressed to Lono. Hee | 
then chewed a little of the awa and of the fish, and PTO 


PRIVATE WORSHIP 65 


nounced the concluding amama, after which the as- 
sembled worshipers feasted on the consecrated pork, and 
the boy was promoted to be an az kapu.* ae 

It is a significant fact that while every other act in life 
was accompanied with prayers and sacrifices to the gods, 
there were no religious ceremonies connected with mar- 
riage. Not even the favor of the awmakuas was invoked. 
It was entered upon with less ceremony than fishing or 
planting. 


* Circumcision was attended with similar rites. 


CHAPTER XI 


SORCERY AND DIVINATION 


THERE was another and darker part of the ancient re- 
ligion which filled a larger place in the minds of the com- 
mon people than the regular services in the heiaus, and had 
a more debasing influence upon them. This class of super- 
stitions was common to all the Polynesian tribes. The basis 
of it was their belief that nearly all forms of sickness and 
disease were caused by evil spirits, with whom communi- 
cation could be held through kahwnas or sorcerers, of 
whom there were many different schools. 

1. Kahuna Lapaau or Medicine Men.—Ordinary cases 
of illness were believed to be caused by the displeasure 
of the awmakuas, who were supposed to be jealously 
watching for any infringement of the tabus, and especially 
any neglect to fulfilla vow. Ifa chief was ill, offerings and 
prayers were made in the heiau, and chapels were built 
for the gods Lonopuha and Koleamoku. If his illness 
was severe, human sacrifices were offered to the tutelar 
god of the family. In ordinary cases a kahuna lapaau was 
called in, whose chief function was to propitiate the invisi- 
ble powers who caused the malady. It is true that certain — 
vegetable remedies were used, but their efficacy depended 
entirely on the good-will of the awmakuas. The medicine 
seems to have been considered more as the vehicle or 
medium through which the spirit would act, than as hav- — | 


ing any power in itself to cure the disease. 
66 


SORCERY AND DIVINATION 67 


The tutelar gods of this class of practitioners were 
Maiola and Koleamoku. There were many omens, too 
numerous to mention, by which the kahuna judged 
whether the patient would recover or not. After prayer and 
sacrifices he would go to sleep, in order to receive intima- 
tions from his akua by dreams or visions as to the cause 
and remedy of the disease. If it did not rain during the 
night, on the following morning a fire was kindled and a 
fowl was baked for the awmakuas, a dog for the men’s eat- 
ing-house, and another for the women, five kapas being 
used to cover each oven. ‘These offerings were afterward 
eaten by the relatives of the patient, and prayers offered to 
the aumakuas and the gods of medicine. Sometimes the 
patient was treated to a steam bath by being seated upon a 
pile of heated stones strewed over with wet leaves, while 
enveloped in kapas, after which he was dipped in the sea. 
If he did not improve, some squid, hee, was spread out all 
night and baked in the morning. The kahuna then re- 
peated the pule hee prayer, while some of the squid was fed 
to the sick man. If this did not relieve him it was evident 
that something uncommon was at work, some malevolent 
akua sent by a sorcerer to destroy him. The next thing to 
be done was either to propitiate the demon, and send him 
back to hisemployer, or to employ a more powerful spirit 
to expel him. In such a case it was usual to employ sorcer- 
ers who had “familiar spirits” in their service. Of these 
there were many different schools, which had different 
patron deities, and used different kinds of incantations. 
They may, however, be reduced to two classes, of which 
the first may be called: 

2. Necromancers or Mediums. tie were several 
varieties of these, which were styled kahuna hoonohonoho, 
hoounauna, hookomokomo, and hooleiled, but in the main 


— 


68 - HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


their methods were the same. As has been already stated, 
the chief god of sorcery was Uli, but there was an infe- 
rior order of demons, mostly females, who were sent on 
errands of mischief, akua noho, viz., Pua, Kapo, Kuamu, 
Kiha-wahine, a reptile goddess, etc. The goddess Hiiaka- 
i-ka-poli-o-Pele was also much employed by this class of 
cahunas. Certain shark-gods may be added to the list. 

Unihipili— Sometimes a necromancer employed as his 
agent for evil the departed spirit of some relative, which 
he had retained in his service as an unthipils by pre- 
serving his bones, and by the unremitting use of incan- 
tations and offerings at every meal. If, however, he or his 
heir and successor should neglect these rites for a single 
day, this evil power would be turned against him to his 
own destruction. 

Kahuna hoonoho.—The practices of the kahuna hoo- 
noho strongly resembled those of modern spiritism. The 
medium was called the kahw or tpu of the spirit, which 
was often called a makant or wind. Sometimes the spirit 
descended upon the kahu, and sometimes it spoke from 
the roof of the hut.* The necromancer always demanded 
awa before commencing operations. “H wu2tka awa tv 
ikatka ka makant.” After drinking the awa the wind 
descended upon the kahuna, and showed him the cause 
of the sickness, whether the patient had been bewitched 
by a sorcerer, and by whom. The same practitioners were 
employed in cases of theft to recover stolen goods, and 
to detect the thief. 

Kahuna hoounauna.—The kahuna hoounauna, etc., had 
the power of sending familiar spirits on errands. In cases 
where a patient had been bewitched, if the kahuna called 


* Probably some of these kahunas were ventriloquists. 


SORCERY AND DIVINATION 69 


in by his friends possessed more powerful incantations 
or had a more powerful demon in his service than the 
hostile sorcerer, he could compel the evil spirit not only 
to confess by whom he was sent, but even to return and 
destroy his own kahu. 

3. Sorcerers.—There was another class of sorcerers, 
still more feared and hated than the former, who were 
regarded, as Dibble says, “more like evil spirits than hu- 
man beings,” and were sometimes stoned to death or be- 
headed by the order of a chief. 

Of this class the principal divisions were the anaana, 
the kunt, the hoopiopio, and pahiuhiu, and the apo leo. 
Uli was the chief deity invoked by them all. 

Anaana.—The ceremonies of the anaana and the kunt 
were very similar. The anaana sorcerer always performed 
his incantations in secret, and generally at night. In order 
to effect his purpose it was absolutely necessary for him 
to secure something connected with the person of the 
intended victim, as the parings of the nails,.a lock of the 
hair, the saliva from the mouth, etc., which was termed 
the maunu or bait. For this reason the chiefs always 
kept their most faithful servants around them, who care- 
fully buried or burned every thing of the kind or sunk 
it out at sea. 

After the requisite imprecations and offerings had been 
made, the maunw was either buried or burned. It is 
probable that the sorcerer sometimes used poison to ac- 
-complish his ends, but the power of imagination and of 
superstitious fear was often sufficient to make the victim 
give up all hope and pine away till he died. The kahuna 
was sometimes moved by revenge, but he more often exer- 
cised his black art for hire. The greater the number of his 
_ victims, the higher his reputation and the larger his fees, 


70 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Kuni.—The kunt ceremonies were always performed in 
public and in the daytime. They were employed at the 
death of a person to discover and destroy the sorcerer 
who was supposed to have caused his death, or to detect 
and kill a thief. The name kwni (ie., to burn) refers to 
the fireplace, which was always connected with the cere- 
mony. <A preliminary offering of a pig was given to the 
kahuna as a retainer, alana, and a prayer was made to 
Uli.* After this, the speedy death of the thief was cer- 
tain. No power could save him. 

If the object was to avenge the death of a person who 
had been anaana’d, some of the hair of the deceased was 
burned, or pieces of the liver were fed to dogs and fowls, 
which were immediately burned to ashes, while the fire- 
prayer was chanted.t 

Next morning the kahuna asserted that he had seen 
the hoaka or wraith of the guilty wizard, with his eyes 
shut and head down, which was a sign that he would 
surely die. 

Hoopiopio and Pahiuhiu.—The hoopiopio and pahiuhiu 
forms of sorcery were substantially the same. In the 
former method the kahuna took his place in the road 
over which his intended victim was sure to pass, and 
made a magic mark across the road, at the same time 
muttering an imprecation or prayer to Ul. In the latter, 
he drew a square with his finger, dividing it into four 


* A fireplace was then made, and four sticks with flags of white kapa set up at 
the corners, surrounded by the plant called auhuhu, fish-poison, and green gourds. — 


A fire was kindled by rubbing the fire-stick aulima on a stick of akia, a poisonous 
shrub, and a large quantity of wood was burned. If his object was to punish a 


thief, the kahuna took several kukui-nuts and threw the oily kernels one after 
another into the fire, chanting the ‘'fire-prayer” or imprecation in the name of — 


Ui. 


collected and thrown into the sea. - 


tIn either case the ashes, kukui-nuts, etc., at the fireplace. were afterwards | 


S 
i 
I 
: 
; 
f 


SORCERY AND DIVINATION 71 


equal squares, and placed a small stone on the center of 
the figure. He then addressed a prayer to Kane Po- 
hakaa, the awmakua in the stone, for the death of his 
victim. When the unsuspecting victim came along and 
stepped on the fatal spot, a spell would come upon 
him from which he was sure to die, generally in a few 
days. 

Apo Leo.— Apo leo was the art of depriving a person 
of the power of articulate speech. In order to do this, 
the kahuna prayed at night to Uli and Hiiaka, present- 
ing them with the usual offerings of awa, etc. The next 
day he sought out his intended victim and entered into 
conversation with him, during which (as was believed) 
he caught and took away his voice, or paralyzed his vocal 
organs, so that he could never speak again. He might 
linger a long time in this wretched condition, or die in a 
few days if the sorcerer so willed. 

4. Kalaipahoa was the name of a famous poison-god, 
whose worship was of comparatively recent origin. Ac- 
cording to the legend, one Kaneakama, living on West 
Molokai, had a dream in which his tutelar deity showed 
him a poison-tree on Mauna Loa, and directed him to cut 
it down and make an idol of it, by means of which he 
could cause any one’s death. It was believed to be the 
only existing tree of its kind, and to be so poisonous that 
the least particle of it mixed with any one’s food and 
drink, and accompanied with the proper incantations, was 
sure to cause his death. It was eagerly sought after, and 
several pieces of it were in the possession of different 
chiefs, who used it to get rid of persons who were obnox- 
ious to them, both high and low. Kamehameha I. is said 
to have kept the principal image always near his person. 
Kaahumanu collected and burned all the fragments of 


- os 


72 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN. PEOPLE 


it that could be found. It is still a disputed question 
whether it was really poisonous or not. 

5. Kilokilo or Diviners.— There was a numerous class 
of diviners or fortune-tellers called k2lokilo, who lived on 
the credulity of the people, and were divided into several 
distinct branches. 

The worst of these were the kilokilo uhane, who 


reported on the condition of the soul, whane, and inter- 


preted dreams. 

The ancient Hawaiians believed that each individual 
had two souls, one of which occasionally left the body, as 
in trances, dreams, etc., and returned to it again. The 
diviners took advantage of this belief to extort from the 
people whatever they coveted. For instance, a Kilokilo 
would gravely inform his neighbor that he had seen his 
double or wraith in a dream or vision, wandering naked, 
with his eyes shut, tongue hanging out, etc. (which was a 
sign that his awmakuas were offended with him), and that 


he was in danger of losing his double entirely. The owner | 


of this wandering soul would be terrified, and willing to 


do any thing that the soothsayer required. The latter 


generally ordered certain kinds of fish, white dogs, white — 


chickens, awa, and ten kapas to cover: the oven with. 
The kelokilo then recited prayers while kindling the fire 
by friction. 
‘When the offerings were cooked, he offered the nie 
kala or prayer for pardon, after which they were eaten 
by the assembled company, and he pronounced absolution. 
For this service he received a liberal fee. 

Po’i-uhane.—The po’-whane, who worshiped Hiiaka, had 


the faculty of not only seeing the souls of living per-— 


sons, kakaola, but of catching them with the hand, po’, 


and of either squeezing them to death or imprisoning them _ 


SORCERY AND DIVINATION 738 


in a water-calabash. The sorcerer then had the owner of 
the soul in his power, and could levy blackmail on him 
as he pleased, for if he killed his kakaola he would go into 
a decline and soon die. 

Astrologers.—The kilokilo hoku or astrologers were a 
more respectable class, and helped to keep alive the 
knowledge of astronomy possessed by the ancient navi- 
gators. They were continually studying the heavens, and 
based their predictions on the positions of the moon and 
planets in relation to certain fixed stars and constellations, 
which were associated with the fortunes of particular fami- 
hes of chiefs. 

Nana-Uli.—The nana-uli or soothsayers predicted not 
only changes in the weather, but also future events, such 
as the death of chiefs, wars, etc., from appearances in the 
sky, tidal waves, the arrival of shoals of certain kinds of 
fish, etc. 

Prophets.—The kauia and makaula (prophets) were 
comparatively harmless persons, who lived solitary lives, 
and believed themselves to be at times inspired by Kane- 
nui-akea. They were often attached to the high-chiefs 
as counselors, 


CHAPTER XII 


FUNERAL RITES; DOCTRINES OF A FUTURE STATE 


Burial of Chiefs——Several different modes of burial 
were practiced, and the funeral rites of a high-chief differed 
widely from those of the common people. At the death of 
the king, the whole district was considered polluted for ten 
days, so that the heir to the throne was obliged to remove 
to another district and remain there during this tabu 
period. 

The kwnz sorcerers were first set to work to avenge the 
chief’s death, if there was any suspicion that it had been 
caused by sorcery. 

Human Sacrifice—A human sacrifice, called the mv- 
epuu, was then offered, in order that the king might enter 
the other world with attendance suitable to his rank. 
Many people fled to the mountains from fear of the mu 
at kanaka (the man-eating mw), and remained there in 
hiding-places till the tabu period was past. The corpse was 


enveloped in banana and taro leaves, and buried in a shal- © 


low grave about a foot deep. A fire was kept burning over 
it to hasten decomposition, while certain prayers were con- 
tinually repeated (the pule huz). This was kept up for 
ten days. The corpse was then disinterred, and the flesh 
stripped from the bones, which were collected in a bundle, 
tied up with cinet, and covered with kapa and red feathers. 


This was called an wnehipile. 
a4 


FUNERAL RITES; DOCTRINES OF A FUTURE STATE 75 


The wko (hog), which had been already baked, was now 
offered, and worship was paid to'the bones of the deceased, 
who was thus deified. This ceremony removed the pollution 
of the district, and the heir fo the throne could now return. 

Mourning Customs.—Meanwhile the most extraordi- 
nary mourning ceremonies, kumakena, took place. Be- 
sides the universal and long-continued wailing, the peo- 
ple generally knocked out one or more of their front 
teeth, and cut their hair in the most grotesque shapes, 
sometimes bald on both sides, while leaving it long on the 
top of the head, etc. Some tattooed their tongues, and 
others burned semicircles on their bodies in different 
places with blazing bark.* 

Concealment of Bones.—The deified bones of the chiefs 
“were generally carefully concealed in the most secret and 
inaccessible caves. Before death they made their most - 
trusty attendants swear to conceal their bones so that no 
one could ever find them. “Ido not wish,” said a dying 
chief, “that my bones should be made into arrows to shoot 
mice with, or into fish-hooks.” This practice was called 
hunakele. In some cases, however, the bones were deposited 
in a temple as objects of worship. Thus the bones of many 
-ancient chiefs of Hawaii were deposited in the Hale o 
Keawe at Honaunau, and thoseof Liloa at the heiau in 
Waipio Valley. Those of many ancient kings were de- 
posited in a cave at the head of the Iao Valley, Wailuku, 


* At the same time, the people generally threw off for the time all clothing 
and all restraints of decency, and appeared ‘‘more like demons than human be- 
ings.”” Houses were often burned, property was plundered, revenge taken for old 
forgotten injuries, and a state of anarchy prevailed, according to the testimony of 
eye-witnesses. Even as late as 1823, at Keopuolani’s death, many natives fled to 
the mountains, while others ‘“‘ carried their effects into the missionaries’ inclosure 
and begged permission to remain there, hoping to find a sanctuary within their 
premises amidst the general devastation which they expected would follow her 
decease.” 


76 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


and some were thrown into the crater of Kilauea, “ under 
the impression that the spirits of the deceased would be © 
admitted into the society of the volcanic deities.” 

Burial of Priests, Etc.—The bodies of priests and chiefs ~ i 
of inferior rank were laid out straight, wrapped in many ~ 
folds of kapa, and buried in that posture, the priests some- — 
times within the precincts of the temple in which they had 
officiated. A pile of stones, and frequently a circle of high 
poles around the grave, marked the place of their inter- 
ment. As soon as death had taken place, all except the 
immediate relatives had to leave the house, which became 
ceremonially polluted. Other friends might wail outside, 
but it was tabu for them to enter, or touch, or eat with 
those within. 

Burial of Common People.—Sometimes the body was 
partially embalmed by being salted and dried (zaloa). The 
lower class of people generally raised the upper part of 
the body immediately after death, and bent the face for- 
ward to the knees, after which the head, hands, and knees — 
were bound together with cinet or cord. The body was” 
afterward wrapped in a coarse mat, and buried the first 
or second day after death, with great secrecy by night. 

They preferred to deposit their dead in caves or sub- 
terranean caverns, with calabashes of water and pol, sugar- 
cane, etc., by their sides; but they also often buried them | 
in a sitting posture in small pits near their houses or in 
the sand. No prayer was offered at the grave except 
occasionally by the people of Oahu. 

Purification.—The morning after the burial the rite of 
purification was performed as follows: The persons de-. 
filed by the dead went and bathed in fresh water, and 
on their return seated themselves in a row at the door 
of the house. Then the priest came with a calabash- 


| 
| 

f 
alt 
i 


z 


isis 654: 3 


| 


| 
| 


| 


| 
: 


| 
| 
| 
| 
| 


FUNERAL RITES; DOCTRINES OF A FUTURE STATE (eye 


_ lid containing holy water, and pronounced the form pre- 
scribed for purification, (beginning Lelewli, etc.), the 
_ audience uttering the regular responses, and closing with 
the shout “Noa honua!” after which he sprinkled them 
with the holy water, and they were clean. 


Doctrine of a Future State-——The conceptions which 


the ancient Hawaiians had of the future state were vague 
and inconsistent. 


Lolupe was the name of a deity invoked in funeral 


: ceremonies, who conducted the spirits of the chiefs to their 


final abode after death, and assisted them in the journey. 
According to some traditions and dirges, Ka-onohi-o-ka-la 
(the eye-ball of the sun) conducted the souls of heroes 
to a heaven in or beyond the clouds. According to others, 
they went to Kane, to the aina huna o Kane or hidden 
land of Kane, which seems to have been a sort of Tata 
Morgana or fairy island in the West. It was said that 


mariners sometimes saw in the distance a_ beautiful 


island abounding in cocoanut trees, but it was all unsub- 


‘stantial and ghostly, and receded before them like the 
“Mirage of the desert; but the great majority of the 
dead, after a delay of a few days, went to a subterranean 
| Hades.* 


Leaping-places.—There were several precipices from 
the verge of which the unhappy ghosts were supposed to 
leap into the lower world.t 


* During the first few days after death ghosts generally haunted the place 
| of sepulture, and endeavored to strangle their enemies, but kept growing weaker 
and weaker day by day. 

They were distinguished by the peculiar squeaking or whistling sound, muki, 
which they produced, like the ghosts which did ‘““squeak and gibber in the Roman 


| streets.” In rare cases a departing soul would be met by a friendly awmakua or 
_unihipili, who compelled it to go home and re-enter the body. This was their 


way of accounting for cases of catalepsy or trance. 


t+ According to Mr. Dibble, one of these was at the northern point of Hawaii, 


78 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Wakea.—The lower world was divided into two dis- 
tinct kingdoms, the upper one ruled by Wakea, and the 
lower by Milu. The region of Wakea, the ancestor of 
the race, was a quiet and peaceful realm of comparative 
comfort, reserved for the select few. Wakea was pos- 
sessed of higher tabus and greater power than Milu, and 
only admitted those who had been scrupulous in ob- 
serving the religious rites and tabus during life. 

Milu.—Milu was said to have been an ancient chief of 
Hamakua, Hawaii, notorious for his wickedness during 
life, who afterwards became king of a realm of darkness 
and misery below that of Wakea, to which the great 
majority of the dead were destined. Their food consisted 
of lizards and butterflies, but there were streams of water 
of which they could drink, and spreading kou trees be- 
neath which they reclined. 

Milu’s province was also said to be a noisy and dis- 
orderly place, where lawless akuas kept up wild games 
all night.* In both New Zealand and Mangaia, Miru 
was the goddess of hell, who devoured the souls of 
cowards. : 

Ghosts._The Hawaiians were exceedingly supersti- 
tious about ghosts and haunted places. There were cer-_ 
tain places, especially old battle-fields, which it was un- 


one at the west end of Maui, and the third at the southern point of Oahu. Near 
the northwest point of Oahu is a rock called the Leina ka-uhane, where the — 
souls of the dead descended to Sheol. The same term, reinga or leaping-place, is¥ 
applied in New Zealand to their place of descent to the poor Inferno, at the North © 
Cape. According to another account the entrance to the dua or pit of Milu was 
situated at the mouth of the great valley of Waipio. Hawaii, at a place called 
ke one (the sand), where the sands have long since covered it up and concealed it 
from mortal sight. 

*The hero Hiku was fabled to have descended by means of an immensely 
long rope of koali vines (Convolvulus, or rather Tpomea) into the abyss of Milu, — 
and to have brought back his bride Kawelu. Almost the same legend was told 
in New Zealand of the lovers Hutu and Pare. 


FUNERAL RITES ; DOCTRINES OF A FUTURE STATE 79 


safe to pass at night. The feeling of incubus or night- 
_ mare was ascribed to a ghost sitting upon the sufferer. 
_A lapuw was a malicious and dangerous specter. The 
term oto was apphed to a procession of ghosts, which it 
was death to meet. There were persons in Waipio who af- 
firmed that they had seen Kamehameha L, the conqueror, 
with his chiefs, warriors, and attendants, marching past in 
ghostly procession. In Honokahau Valley in Maui an o%o 
was said to have been seen led by the headless specter 
of Kanihonui, a chief beheaded by Kamehameha for 
adultery. 

Such an o7o in that valley was said to have left sev- 
eral men dead in its track. 


CHAPTER XIII 


ARTS AND MANUFACTURES 


Tur arts and manufactures of the ancient Hawaiians 
were similar to those of the other Polynesian tribes, and 
particularly to those of the Society Islands. 

Tools.—When we consider that they were destitute 
of metals and of the cereal grains, as well as of cotton, 
flax, and wool, we must admit that the Hawaiians made 
as much progress as could well have been expected of 
them. Their cutting tools were made of stone, or sharks’ 
teeth, or bamboo. Their axes were chiefly made of a 
hard, compact kind of lava, found on the summits of | 
Mauna Kea and Haleakala. The art of making them 
was handed down from father to son. 

The principal tool used in cultivating the soil was the 
o-o, which was then simply a stick of hard wood, either 
pointed or shaped into-a flat blade at the end. 

With these rude tools extensive works were carried 
out, such as building terraces, leveling and embanking 
their taro-patches, and constructing irrigation-ditches, 
often miles in length. 

Agriculture.— The principal crop was the taro or kalo, 
but sweet potatoes were chiefly raised in the dry and 
stony districts, and yams in Kauai and Niihau. They 
also cultivated the sugar-cane, bananas, calabash-gourds, 
the wauke or paper-mulberry for its bark, and the awa 


(Piper methysticum) for its narcotic roots. 
80 


ARTS AND MANUFACTURES 81 


The subsistence of the common people was, on the 
whole, poor and scanty. 

7 Fishing.— Fishing was next to agriculture in impor- 
tance, and was carried on with great ingenuity and skill. 
The ancient fishermen had a most intimate knowledge of 
all the different kinds of fish frequenting the seas, and 
of their habits and feeding-grounds. All the shoals and 
hidden rocks for several miles out to sea were well known 
to them, as well as the different kinds of fish frequenting 
each. There were many modes of fishing—by spearing, 
by baskets, by hook and line, and with nets. The 
spearing was chiefly practiced by divers under water, or 
at night by torchliight in shallow water. 

Hooks.—Their hooks were made of bone, of mother-of- 
pearl, of whales’ teeth, and of tortoise-shell, and were of 
many styles, adapted to different kinds of fish. A showy 
variety of cowry was used to attract the hee or squid. 

Nets.— Their nets were made of twine spun from the 
_ strong and durable fiber of the olona (Touchardia latifolia), 
and were of many different patterns and sizes, which may 
be divided into two classes—long nets, sometimes over 
one hundred fathoms in length, and bag-nets. The long 
nets were often drawn into large circles, so as to inclose 
shoals of fish, and sometimes ropes hundreds of fathoms 
in length, having dry kz leaves braided to them by the 
stems and hanging down in the water, were used to 
Sweep around and drive the fish into the net, thus in- 
‘closing thousands at one haul. The numerous artificial 
fish-ponds, already referred to, are not found in southern 
Polynesia. 

Fish-poison.— Another method of catching fish was by 
the use of a poisonous plant, the auhuhw or hola (Tephro- 
sia piscatoria), which was bruised and placed by divers 


§2 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


beneath the stones in places frequented by the fish. The 
poison was so powerful that the fish were soon overcome 
by it and floated to the surface, where they were col- 
lected. 

Canoes.—In the mechanical arts the Hawaiians accom- 
plished some creditable work, considering the tools at 
their command. | 

Their canoes were not built up of planks, as in Fiji, 
but each one was hollowed out of a single tree. Strips 
of hard wood, however, were sewed on the upper edge of 
the canoe on each side, closing over the top at both stem 
and stern. Their model was finer than that of the Ta- 
hitian canoes, and they were faster sailers. As in other 
Polynesian groups, the canoes were steadied by an out- 
rigger, ama, a slender log of light wood parallel to the 
canoe and fastened to it by curved cross-pieces, zako. 
They also had large double canoes, sometimes from fifty 
to a hundred feet. long, with a raised platform or pola in 
the middle, for passengers of rank. The ancient sails 
were made of mats, triangular in shape, and broad at the 


top. Their skill in navigation has been referred to in. 


Chapter III. In the management of canoes in the surf 
they were unsurpassed. 

Houses.— House-building was a laborious undertaking 
in the olden time. After cutting down the trees in the 


Sen hitonietr eal 


mountains they had to drag or carry them several miles — 


to the shore, braid the cord, and collect the pile grass, 
hala leaves, or ferns for thatching, etc. 

The houses were oblong, with low sides and steep 
roofs to shed the rain. There were professional builders, 
who were expert in framing the timbers and 1n thatching 


the corners and ridge-pole of the house. There were many | 
technical names for different sticks of the frame, and 


ARTS AND MANUFACTURES 83 


many minute rules to be followed in the work. Very few 
houses had any windows, and the doors were low and 
narrow. Some of the chiefs’ houses were from forty to 
seventy feet long and twenty feet wide. They were not 
as elaborately ornamented as in some other groups. Those 
of the lower class were mere hovels, ten feet long by six 
feet wide, and four feet high, and were entered by a small 
hole in the side. 

Furniture.— Their furniture consisted chiefly of cal- 
abashes for water, poi, and valuables, wooden dishes, and 
stone utensils of various kinds, fish-baskets, and mats. 
The large gourd (Cucurbita maxima) was not known in 
any other group in the Pacific. The bottle-gourd (Lage- 
naria vulgaris) was used for water-containers and for hula 
drums. With their stone adzes they made circular dishes 
of kea and kow wood, holding from a pint to five gallons, 
as neatly as if they had been turned in a lathe.* 

Mats.—The common floor-mats, made by the women, 
were formed of the leaves of the pandanus or hala tree. 
Generally a platform or htkiee, raised two or three feet 
above the floor, extended across one end of the house. 
This was spread with a layer of rushes, and covered with 
sleeping-mats. A superior quality of mats was made on 
Kauai and Niihau of a fine rush called makaloa. These 
mats were of great size and dyed in various patterns. 

Lights.— For lights at night they used the nuts of the 
kukwi tree (Aleurites moluccana). These were baked in 
an oven and shelled, after which the kernels were strung 
on a split of bamboo or the thin stock of a cocoanut-leaf, 
and used as candles, beginning at the top. Each nut 
would burn about four minutes, when the one below it 


* The art of pottery was unknown in Polynesia. 


84 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN -PEOPLE 


took light and the burned-out nut was broken off. They 
also used stone lamps with kapa wicks, and. kukuzi or 
fish-oil. 

Clothing.— Their cloth or kapa was made of the bark 
_ of the paper-mulberry or wauke (Broussonetia papyrifera) 
and of the mamake (Pipturus albidus), which were culti- 
vated with much care. Its manufacture was left entirely 
to the women, who peeled off strips of the bark and 
scraped off the outer coat with shells. After being soaked 
a while in water each strip was laid upon a smooth log 
and beaten with a square grooved mallet of hard wood 
until it resembled thick flexible paper. The strips were 
united by overlaying the edges and beating them to- 
gether. There were. several qualities of kapa, some so 
fine as to resemble muslin, and other kinds very thick 
and tough, which appeared like wash-leather. It was 
‘bleached white or stained with vegetable or mineral dyes, 
impressed with bamboo stamps in a great variety of pat- 
terns and colors, and glazed with a kind of gum or resin. 
Nothing like a loom was known in Polynesia. 

Dress.— The dress of the women consisted of the pa-v, 
@ wrapper composed of five thicknesses of kapa, about 
four yards long and three or four feet wide, passed several 
times around the waist and extending below the knee, 
while that of the men was the malo or girdle, which was 
about a foot wide and three or four yards long. 

The kthez or mantle, about six feet square, was occa- 
sionally worn by both sexes. It was worn by the men 
by tying two corners of the same side together, so that 


the knot rested on one shoulder, and by the women aS a 


long shawl. In general, this paper cloth would not bear 
washing, and lasted only a few weeks. 
The kapa moe or sleeping kapa was made of five layers 


ARTS AND MANUFACTURES 85 


of common kapa, three or four yards square. The out- 
side piece (kilohana) was stained or painted with vege- 
table dyes. 

Ornaments.— The Hawaiians have always been noted 
for their fondness for flowers and other ornaments. The 
ilima (Sida fallax) was formerly much cultivated on 
account of its yellow flowers, of which wreaths or leis 
were made for the head 
and neck. Then, as now, 
the fragrant orange- £4 
colored fruit of the % 
pandanus was often 
made into necklaces. 
Feather leis were worn 
both as coronets and 
necklaces.* Their 
bracelets, kuwpee, con- 
sisted of shell or ivory 
ornaments fastened on 
the back of the wrist 
by a small cord. 

Helmets.— The ele- 
gant feather helmets 
worn by the chiefs on state occasions were made of 
wicker-work, covered with the golden-yellow or the scarlet 
feathers of certain birds—the o-o, the mamo, and the ww. 

Feather Cloaks.— The feather cloaks or robes of state, 
called mamo, were magnificent and costly insignia of rank. 
Their ground-work was a fine netting of olona or native 


FEATHER HELMET 


* An ornament for the neck formerly much worn by the chiefs was the niho 
palaoa, which consisted of a hooked ornament made from the tooth of a sperm 
whale or walrus, suspended in front by a large number of braids of human hair, 
Necklaces were also made of ivory beads (lei poo). 


86 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


hemp, to which small delicate feathers of a bright yellow 
color were attached so as to overlap each other, forming 
a perfectly smooth surface. The birds which produced 
these feathers were caught by means of branches smeared 
with sticky papala gum, and well baited with their favorite 
flowers.* These choice yellow feathers were reserved for 
royalty alone. Inferior chiefs had smaller capes and cloaks 
of various colors and more common feathers. The feather 
cloak of Kamehameha I. is said to have occupied nine 
generations of kings in its construction. 

The kahilis or feathered staffs carried on state oc- 
casions were from ten to thirty feet in height, and were 
composed of feathers arranged on branches attached to 
the staff, so as to form colored cylinders fifteen or eight- 
een inches in diameter, the handles being covered with 
rings of tortoise-shell or ivory. 

Tattooing.—The ancient Hawaiian tattooed but little, 
and in a perfectly arbitrary style. Tattooing was not 
used here as elsewhere to serve the purpose of costume, 
or to indicate rank or lineage. It was sometimes done 
as a token of mourning at the death of a friend or chief. 
The women sometimes had the back of the hand marked 
so as to resemble an open-worked glove. 

It was the fashion among the women to wear the 
hair short in front and on the sides of the head, and to 
turn up the edges on the forehead and temples with a 
wash made of lime or white clay. 


* These birds were honey-suckers, living on the nectar of the flowers of the 
ohia, the banana, and the large lobelias. The yellow feathers were taken from 
two species of birds, viz.: the o-o (Acrulocercus nobilis), which has one little tuft 
of yellow feathers under each wing, and the still rarer mamo (Drepanis pacifica), 
which has also larger golden-yellow feathers on its back. The latter species is 
nearly extinct. The scarlet feathers were obtained from the tiwi (Vestiaria coc- 
cinea), a song-bird with gorgeous scarlet coat and black wings; and from the 
akakane (Fringilla coccinea). 


CHAPTER XIV 


CUSTOMS AND AMUSEMENTS 


Cooking.—In ancient times, as now, the Hawaiians 
practiced the well-known Polynesian method of steaming 
their food in the wmw or under-ground oven with heated 
stones. The labor of cooking and of pounding the poi on 
a large wooden tray with a stone pestle was performed 
entirely by the men. Fire was produced by friction, by 
rapidly rubbing a pointed stick (the awltma) in a groove 
made in another stick (the awnakz) until the heap of 
fine powder collected at the end of the groove took fire. 
The wood of the olomea or hau tree was generally pre- 
ferred for this purpose. 

Salt was manufactured from sea-water, and also col- 
lected from the salt lake of Aliapaakai and elsewhere. 
It was much used in salting fish and pork, and season- 
ing their food, which does not seem to have ‘been prac- 
ticed by other Polynesians. 

Awa Drinking.—Neither fermented nor distilled liquors 
were used by the Hawaiians, but in common with all 
the Pacific islanders they drank an infusion of the 
roots of the awa plant, elsewhere called kava. It was 
first chewed, after which the masticated morsels were 
placed in a wooden bowl, and water poured upon them. 
The infusion was strained through a mesh of ehuawa 


(cyperus) fibers, and was then ready for drinking. Its 
| 87 


88 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


effects were narcotic and stupefying. Although awa 
drinking was not attended here with as much ceremony 
as in Tonga and Fiji, still it was mainly restricted to 
the chiefs and priests. 

Barter.—There was no circulating medium which 
served the purpose of money, and all trade was con- 
ducted by barter. Certain districts were noted for the 
superiority of certain products, such as stone axes, kapas, 
mats, canoes, etc., which they exchanged with other dis- 
tricts, and thus a small commerce was carried on.* 

Games.—The ancient Hawaiians had a great variety 
of games, both for children and adults. The makahiki~ 
festival in the latter part of the month of Welehu was 
devoted to sports and general gambling. In fact, most of 
these games were resorted to chiefly for the purpose of 
betting, to which they were excessively addicted. Both 
men and women of all ranks were eager to stake every 
article they possessed on the success of their favorite 
players, and the games seldom ended without fierce brawls 
between the different parties. 

Boxing.—Among their athletic sports that of moko- 
moko or boxing was the favorite national game. It was 
regulated by fixed rules, and presided over by umpires. 
The champions generally belonged to different chiefs or dis- 
tricts, and were attended by crowds of partisans. As many 
as ten thousand spectators were present on these occa- 
sions. A knock-down or blood-starting blow was followed 
by deafening yells, dancing, and beating of drums by the 
surrounding multitude. The elated victor strutted around ~ 
the ring, challenging others to the contest, until he met 
his match. It was not uncommon for several to be left 


*TItis said that there were periodical fairs held at various places, of which the 
banks of the Wailuku River at Hilo were the most famous, according to Ellis. 


CUSTOMS AND AMUSEMENTS 89 


dead in the arena during one of these games. Less fatal 
in their results were the games of hakoko, wrestling, 
and kukint, foot races, which were very popular. 

Maika.—A favorite amusement, the mazka, consisted 
in bowling a circular, highly-polished stone disk called 
an wulu, three or four inches in diameter and an inch or 
more thick, swelling with a slight convexity from the 
edges to the center. A kahua or level track about three 
feet wide and half a mile in length was made smooth 
and hard. In this track two short sticks were fixed 
in the ground only a few inches apart, at a distance of 
thirty or forty yards. The game consisted in either 
sending the stone between these sticks, or in seeing which 
party could bowl it farthest. It is said that one of 
their best players would bowl the stone upwards of a 
hundred rods. 

Pahee.—The pahee was a similar game, in which short 
blunted darts of highly polished hard wood from two to 
four feet in length were thrown or rather glanced along 
the level track between two darts laid down at a certain 
distance. | 

The game called kea pua, which was played chiefly 
by children, was similar to the pahee, but the darts used 
were the dried flower-stalks of the sugar-cane. 

Holua.—Another popular sport was the holua, which 
consisted in sliding down hill on a long narrow sledge 
called a papa holua. The runners were from twelve to 
fourteen feet long and three inches deep, made of hard 
red wood, highly polished, and curving upward at the 
forward end. They were set about four inches apart, and 
fastened together by ten or more cross-pieces, on which 
two long, tough sticks were fastened and connected by 
wicker-work. 


90 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


A smooth track was made down the side of a steep 


hill, extending to a great distance over the adjoining © 


plain, and covered with dry pzlz grass. The player, grasp- 
ing the sledge about the middle with his right hand, 
ran a few yards to the starting-place, and then threw 
himself with all his strength upon it, and shot head-fore- 
‘most down the hill. Sometimes they were carried half a 
mile before stopping. 

Surf-Swimming.—The most popular of all their pas- 
times with all ranks and ages was surf-swimming or hee 
nalu, still practiced. In this sport the players use a 
hght board made of the wood of the koa tree or some- 
times of the welewile (Erythrina), about eight feet long and 
eighteen inches broad, stained black and highly polished. 
With this they swim out to sea, diving under the rollers 
which they meet, until they reach the outer line of break- 
ers; then, lying flat on their boards, they balance them- 
selves upon the forward slope of the highest breaker, and 
ride them with the speed of a race-horse toward the 
shore. , 
Other ancient sports were the lele kawa, or leaping 
from a precipice into the deep water below; dele kowalz, 
or swinging on a long rope suspended from a lofty cocoa- 
nut tree ; koheoheo, or the children’s game of jumping the 
rope; and flying kites, lupe. 

Konane.—The konane was a complicated game of 
checkers, played with black and white pebbles upon a 
board divided into numerous squares. 

Puhenehene.—In the favorite game of puhenehene, five 
bundles of kapa, puu, were placed between the two 
parties. Under one of these a player was to hide a stone 
called the no’a, after which the other side were to 
point out the pwu under which they guessed it to be 


CUSTOMS AND AMUSEMENTS 91 


concealed, striking it with a rod tipped with feathers. 
The side that guessed right the greater number of times 
won the game. The games called kilu and wme 
were always played at night, in an inclosure made for 
the purpose, and were connected with many vile asso- 
clations.* 

Shooting mice with bow and arrows, pana tole, was a 
game played only by chiefs, and connected with religious 
ceremonies. Cock-fighting, too, was much practiced in 
ancient times. Few of the games mentioned above were 
ever played without a wager. 

The children had many games with strings, called 
hei, similar to the English cat’s-cradle. They also 
played at walking on stilts, and at tossing and catching 
pebbles, k¢mo, and at spinning tops made out of little 
gourds, hu. 

Music—the Ukeke.—The ancient Hawaiian instru- 
ments of music were very few and simple. The wkeke was 
a strip of flexible wood or bamboo, mounted with two 
or three strings of olona or of cocoanut fiber, which are 
said to have been tuned to the intervals of a second or 
fourth, and may be regarded as a primitive guitar. 

Kiokio.—The tokio was a small gourd pierced with 
three holes: one to put against the nose to blow through, 
the other two for the fingers. The nose-flute, another form 
of it, was made of a joint of bamboo, with the nose-hole 
on one side, and two finger-holes near the other end. 

Drums.—There were also several kinds of drums, as 
the kaekeeke, made of a section of the hollowed trunk 
of a cocoanut tree, with one end covered with shark-skin ; 
smaller drums made of cocoanut-shells, pwniu, covered 


*The kilu itself was a small gourd of a peculiar shape, which was thrown at a 
stick set up at a distance. 


92 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


in the same manner; and hokeo made of two gourds, placed 
one upon the other, which were used with the hula. The 
drums were chiefly used to mark time as an accompani- 
ment to dancing or chanting. The other instruments had 
a range of only one or two hotes, and their singing was 
a monotonous chanting on one, two, or three notes, but in 
very accurate time. 

Dancing.— The hulahula was not so much anoste in 
the usual sense of the term as acting out by gestures and 
movements the ideas expressed by the songs which they 
accompanied. 

Different kinds of dances were sometimes named from 
the nature of the accompaniment, as the pat wmauma, in 
which they struck their breasts in time, the pacpu, in 
which the accompaniment was the calabash or hokeo, 
the ka-laau, in which the tune was marked by striking 
on sticks, the hula pahu, accompanied by drums, etc. 
Some dances were in honor of the gods, or in praise of 
the chiefs, as the alaapa-apa. But the greater part were 
intended for the gratification of the baser instincts, and 
were accompanied by songs unfit to be mentioned. 

The dancers were generally women, and wore a dec- 
orated pa-w with wreaths on the head, dogs’-teeth bus- 
kins on the ankles, hogs’-teeth bracelets, hulilz, on the 
wrists, and the whale’s-tooth ornament, cho palaoa, or 
let palaoa, on the neck. Children sometimes engaged in 
the less objectionable dances, and men sometimes per- 
formed as buffoons between the acts. Certain dances 
were performed by large companies of women drawn up 
in solid squares and moving in perfect time. The dancers 
generally remained stationary in one place, and moved 
the arms and body in keeping with the sentiment of the 
accompanying chant. | | 


> eee 
he — 


CUSTOMS AND AMUSEMENTS 93 


As has been stated, the professional hula dancers were 
devotees of the foul goddess Laka. 

A shrine was fitted up for her worship, consisting of a 
kuahu or wooden shelf, on which was a stick of halapepe 
or Dracaena aurea, wrapped in kapa, and surrounded with 
green wreaths of mazle, zeve, ferns, and other foliage. 
Prayers and offerings were frequently made before the 
shrine, and certain tabus strictly observed during the 
whole period of the training, at the close of which the 
final sacrifice or ailolo hog was offered. . 

Poetry.— The Hawalians were always passionately fond 
of poetry. Their poems (mele) had no rhyme or meter 
in the European sense. They consisted of short musical 
sentences or lines, divided into bars or measures, with great 
attention to the accent and cadence of the concluding 
word. Sometimes they were divided into stanzas, each 
stanza ending in a refrain or chorus. The sound of the 
letter ¢ was “universally and invariably used” in poetry 
instead of k. The style and diction of poetry was quite 
different from that of prose. It was highly figurative, 
abounding in lists of names, and in allusions to their 
mythology, to places, to local winds and rains, and favorite 
flowers, as the lehua. 

Some of the principal classes of meles* were the fol- 
lowing: 

1. Religious chants, prayers, and prophecies. 

2. Inoas or name-songs, composed at the birth of a 
chief in his honor, recounting the exploits of his ancestors, 
etc. 


* Many meles, some of which were several hundred lines in length, were handed 
down for centuries, by oral tradition. In the same way the genealogies of the 
chiefs and historical traditions, as well as numerous legends and romances, kaao, 
were preserved by professional bards and story-tellers, who were attached to the 
retinues of the high-chiefs, 


94 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


8. Kanikaus, dirges or lamentations for the dead. 


4, Ipos, or love-songs. 


The following is a passage in a dirge, preserved by 
Mr. Ellis, which was in memory of Keeaumoku: 


Auwwe, auwe, ua mate tuu Alii, 
Ua mate tuu hatu, tuu hoa, 
Tuu hoa i ta wa o ta wi, 

Tuu hoa i paa ta aina, 

Tuu hoa t tuu ilhune, 

Tuu hoa i ta ua me ta matan, 


Tuu hoa i ta wela o ta la, 
Tuu hoa i ta anu o ta mauna, 


Tuu hoa t ta ino, 

Tuu hoa 4 ta male, 

Tuu hoa i na tai ewalu, 
Auwe, auwe, ua hala tuu hoa, 
Aohe e hoi ma! 


Alas, alas, dead is my chief, 

Dead is my lord and my friend; 

My friend in the season of famine, 

My friend in the time of drought, 

My friend in my poverty, 

My friend in the rain and the 
wind, 

My friend in the heat and the sun, 

My friend in the cold from the 
mountain, 

My friend in the storm, 

My friend in the calm, 

My friend in the eight seas. 

Alas, alas, gone is my friend, 

And no more will return. 


PART II 
TO THE DEATH OF KAMEHAMEHA I. 


CHAPTER XV 
ANCIENT HISTORY 


First Period.—The first two hundred and fifty years 
‘after the departure of Laa-mai-kahiki, mentioned in 
Chapter III, appears to have been a period of compara- 
tive peace and prosperity, during which few inter-island 
wars took place, and each island kingdom seems gen- 
erally to have attended to its own affairs. It was during 
this period that extensive works of irrigation, etc., were 
executed, and the population multiplied under such wise 
chiefs as Manokalanipo of Kauai, Mailekukahi of Oahu, 
and Liloa of Hawaii. 

Kalaunuiohua.— About the end of the thirteenth cen- 
tury, however, it is said that Kalaunuiohua, a warlike and 
ambitious Mot of Hawaii, undertook to subdue the whole 
group. He collected a fleet and an army and invaded 
Maui, where he defeated and captured the leading chief 
of that island. Elated by this success, he proceeded first 
to Molokai, where he was again victorious, and then to 
Oahu, where he defeated and captured the chief of Ewa 


and Waianae. With the three captive chiefs in his train 
95 


— 


96 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


he set sail for Kauai, and landed near Koloa, where he 
was met by Kukona at the head of the warriors of Kauai, 
and totally defeated, his fleet being taken and his army 
destroyed. In fact, the island of Kauai appears to have 
ever afterward maintained its independence until the 
nineteenth century.* 

Luukoa.— About a century later three high-chiefs of 
Hawaii, together with Luukoa, a Maui chief, invaded Oahu, 
landing at the Ewa lagoon. Marching inland, they were 
defeated by Mailekukahi at the Kipapa ravine, which is 
said to have received that name from its having been 
paved, k¢papa, with the corpses of the slain. 

Second Period.—Of this last period, extending from 
about 1450 a.p. to the conquest of the group by Kame- 
hameha I., Judge Fornander has justly said: 


“Tt was an era of strife, dynastic ambitions, internal 


and external wars on each island, with all their deterio- 
rating consequences of anarchy, depopulation, social and 
intellectual degradation, loss of liberty, loss of knowledge, 
loss of arts.” 

Wars became more frequent and more cruel, while the 
common people became more and more degraded and 
oppressed, and were probably decreasing in numbers here 
as well as in Tahiti before the end of the eighteenth 
century. 

Story of Umi—The most famous chief during this 
period was Umi, who reigned over the island of Hawaii 


* Tt was about this time that a vessel called ‘‘ Mamala” in the tradition arrived 
at Kahului, Maui. The captain and crew are said to have been foreigners of light 
complexion, with bright eyes, who intermarried with the natives and became 
progenitors of a light-colored stock. As there were no Europeans in the Pacific 
Ocean in the thirteenth century, it is most probable, as Judge Fornander has 
suggested, that these foreigners were the crew of some Japanese junk, driven out 
of its course by a typhoon, and drifted to these shores, as has twice happened in 
recent times. 


ANCIENT HISTORY 97 


about 1500 a.p. He was the son of Liloa, a celebrated 
king of Hawaii, and Akahiakuleana, a woman of low 
rank, who lived in East Hamakua. Umi was brought up 
in ignorance of his rank until he was about sixteen years 
old. His mother then revealed to him the secret, and 
invested him with the red malo, the yellow-feather 
wreath, and the whale’s-tooth ornament, which Liloa had 
left with her as pledges and tokens of her son’s royal 
birth. 

With these credentials he went to Waipio, boldly en- 
tered the tabu inclosure, and in spite of warning shouts 
and cries of death forced his way into the presence of 
the aged king. “Who art thou?” said Liloa. “Iam Umi, 
thy son,’ replied the young man, displaying the tokens 
which his mother had given him. Liloa recognized them 
at once, and publicly acknowledged him as his son, second 
only to Hakau, his heir. 

Umi excelled in all manly exercises, and soon became 
popular with all classes. Hakau, on his accession to the 
throne, proved to be a cruel, rapacious, and treacherous | 
tyrant. He deposed and outraged the old counselors of 
his father, two of whom took refuge with Umi, who had 
retired to Laupahoehoe. By their advice Umi suddenly 
marched to Waipio at the head of a large force, slew the 
tyrant, and was proclaimed Moi of Hawaii amid general 
rejoicing. His reign was a long and prosperous one. He 
removed his court from Waipio to the Kona district, 
which has ever since been the favorite residence of Ha- 
walian kings. He built a remarkable temple on the table- 
land between Mauna Loa and Hualalai, now known as 
Ahua-a-Umi, which he is said to have occupied as his 
head-quarters. Around this heiau he caused six pyramids 
of stone fifteen or twenty feet high to be erected— 


98 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


one by each district of the island, besides one for him- 
self. 

To strengthen his position he married Piikea, the 
daughter of Piilani, king of Maui, who sent a large fleet 
of double canoes to escort her to Hawaii, as became her 
rank. Soon afterward Piilani died, and was succeeded 
by his eldest son Lono-a-pii, a surly and avaricious chief, 
who soon drove his younger brother to seek refuge with 
Umi at Waipio. 

Their sister Piikea persuaded Umi to espouse the cause 
of the exiled chief Kiha-a-Piilani. Accordingly he collected 
the best warriors from every district of Hawaii, and an 
immense fleet of war-canoes, with which he crossed the 
channel to Hana, Maui. 

He first besieged and took a fort on the top of the hill 
called Kauwiki, which was considered almost impregnable 
in those days, and then proceeded to Waihee, where he 
defeated and killed Lono-a-pii. Kiha-a-Piilani, who thus 
succeeded his brother in the government of Maui, was an 
able and prosperous chief, and deserves to be remembered 
for the paved road which he caused to be made around 
Hast Maui, the remains of which are still to be seen. 

Discovery of the Islands by the Spaniards.— Umi was 
succeeded by his eldest son Kealiiokaloa, who was suc- 
ceeded in turn by his youngest brother Keawe-nui-a-Umi. 
During the reign of the former, a foreign vessel was 
wrecked at Keei, in South Kona, Hawaii. The tradition 
relates that only the captain and his sister reached the 
shore in safety, and that they knelt down on the beach, 
remaining a long time in that posture, whence the place 
was called Kulou, as it is at this day. 

Unlike the Fijians, the people received them kindly 
and set food before them. The strangers intermarried 


ANCIENT HISTORY 99 


with the natives, and became the progenitors of certain 
well-known families of chiefs, such as that of Kaikioewa, 
former governor of Kauai. 

In reckoning by generations, and allowing thirty years 
on an average to a generation, we find that Kealiokaloa 
was born about 4.p. 1500, and probably came to the 
throne about A.p. 1525-30. 

Now we learn from Spanish historians that Cortez, the 
conqueror of Mexico, fitted out several exploring expe- 
ditions on the western coast about this time. The first 
squadron, consisting of three vessels, commanded by Alva- 
rado de Saavedra, sailed from Zacatula for the Moluccas 
or Spice Islands, October 31,1527. These ships sailed in 
company, but when they were a thousand leagues from 
port they were scattered by a severe storm. The two 
smaller vessels were never heard from, but Saavedra pur- 
sued the voyage alone in the “ Florida” to the Moluccas, 
touching at the Ladrone Islands on the way.” 

No white people except the Spaniards were navigating 
the Pacific Ocean at that early period, and it seems to be 
certain that the foreign vessel which was wrecked about 
this time on the Kona coast must have been one of Saa- 
vedra’s missing ships. 

There is also little doubt that these islands were dis- 
covered by the Spanish navigator Juan Gaetano, in the 
year 1555.+ : 


* As has been shown by Judge Fornander, this storm was probably a Kona gale 
from the southwest, which would have driven the vessel directly toward Hawaii. 

+ He had previously crossed the Pacific Ocean as pilot for Ruy Lopez de Vil- 
lalobo in 1542, on which voyage they discovered the Caroline Islands (Islas del 
Rey). The account of his second voyage has never been published, but there is 
an ancient manuscript chart in the Spanish archives on which a group of islands 
is laid down in the same latitude as the Hawaiian Islands, but over ten degrees 
of longitude too far east, with a note stating the name of the discoverer and the 
date of the discovery. 


> 


100 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


The southernmost and largest island was named La 
Mesa, “the table,’ which points to Hawau, with its high 
table-land. North of it was La Desgraciada, “the unfort- 
unate,” or Maui, and three small islands called Los Mon- 
jes, “the monks,” which were probably Kahoolawe, Lanai, 
and Molokai. 

In June, 1748, the British ship of war “Centurion,” 
under Lord Anson, after a bloody engagement captured 
the Spanish galleon from Acapulco near the Philippine 
Islands, on her way to Manila. A manuscript chart was 
found on board, containing all the discoveries which had 
been made in the navigation between Mexico and the 
Philippine Islands. In this chart the above-mentioned 
group of islands is laid down in the same position as in 
the old chart in the Spanish archives. <A copy of it is to 
be seen in the account of Lord Anson’s voyage which 
was published in London in 1748. These islands did not 

lie in the track of the Spanish galleons, for on leaving 
: Acapulco they steered southwesterly so as to pass far to 
the south of them, and on their return voyage they sailed 
northward till they reached thirty degrees of latitude, 
and then ran before the westerly winds till they approached 
the coast of North America. This was fortunate for the 
Hawaiians, who thus escaped the sad fate of the natives 
of the Ladrone or Marianne Islands. | 

The error in longitude need not surprise us when we 
consider that chronometers were not yet invented, and 
that Spanish-navigators depended entirely on “dead reck- 
oning” for their longitude. 

Later History of Hawaii Keawe-nui-a-Umi was suc- 


ceeded by his son Lono-i-ka-Makahiki, who instituted the — 


games which were celebrated during the makahiki fes- 


tival. The rest of the history of this period is taken up — 


. | 


ANCIENT HISTORY 101 


with traditions of frequent and bloody wars, especially 
between the kings of Hawaii and Maui for the possession 
of the district of Hana. The warlike kings of Oahu also 
repeatedly invaded Molokai, for which they contended 
with the chiefs of the Windward Islands. It was during 
one of these inter-island wars that Kamehameha I. was 
born, on a stormy November night in the year 1736, at 
Halawa, in Kohala, Hawaii. 

Alapainui— At that time Alapainui, who had made 
himself Moz of Hawaii by force of arms, was collecting a 
fleet and army from all the districts of the island for the 
invasion of Maui. 

He took with him two young princes, viz., Keoua, the 
father of Kamehameha L., and his half-brother Kalaniopuu, 
who afterward became king. On hig arrival in Kaupo, 
Maui, he learned that his adversary Kekaulike, king of 
Maui, had just died; that his bones had been deposited 
in the cave at the head of the Iao Valley; and that his 
own nephew, Kamehamehanui, had succeeded him as king 
of Maui. Accordingly he made peace with the young 
king, and joined his forces with those of Maui for the 
relief of Molokai. 

Battle of Kawela.—The king of Oahu had invaded that 
island, and was ravaging it without mercy, having driven 
its chiefs to take refuge in their mountain: fastnesses. 
Obstinate and bloody battles, which lasted several days, 
were fought in the vicinity of Kawela. At last the Oahu 
army was completely routed, and their king, Kapiio- 
hokalani, slain on the field.* 

Alapai then invaded Oahu, but without success, and 
returned to Hawaii. 


» 
* To this day the sands of Kawela are full of half-buried human bones and 
skulls, which bear witness to the ferocity of the struggle. 


102 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Battle of Keawawa.—In the following year (about 
1788) he again landed on Maui with a large army, for 
those days, to support the cause of his young nephew 
against his half-brother Kauhi, who had usurped the sov- 
ereignty. On the other side, Kauhi was aided by Peleio- 
holani, king of Oahu. There was desperate fighting for 
two days, north of Lahaina, during which the pretender 
Kauhi was taken prisoner and put to death. 

The kings of Hawaii and Oahu then met and made 
a treaty of peace, by which Kamehamehanui was recog- 
nized as Mot of Maui, after which they returned to 
their respective islands, Molokai being left to the king 
of Oahu. 

Accession of Kalaniopuu.— At the death of Alapainui, 
about 1754, a bloody civil war followed, as usual, the re- 
sult of which was that Alapai’s son Keaweopala was killed, 
and Kalaniopuu, descended from the old dynasty, became 
king of Hawaii. He was a restless and warlike chief, and 
signalized his reign by bloody wars with the kings of 
Maui for the possession of the eastern districts of that 
island. Although often defeated, he managed to hold the 
famous fort of Kauiki in Hana for more than twenty 
years. It was retaken at last by Kahekili, brother of 
Kamehamehanui, by cutting off the water-supply of the 
garrison, who were forced to surrender at discretion. 
They were put to death without mercy, and their bodies 
baked in ovens by way of insult. 

A few years before this, in 1775, Kalaniopuu on in- 
vading the district of Kaupo had been routed and driven 
back to his canoes. 

He returned to Hawaii and spent a whole year in col- 
lecting and organizing an army, which was divided into 


| 
| 


nine brigades, each known by an individual name. But ~ 


_ ANCIENT HISTORY 103 


Kahekili had not been idle, and had received reinforce- 
ments from Oahu. 

Battle of the Sand-hills— Landing at Maalaea Bay, 
Kalaniopuu sent his favorite regiment, called the Alapa, 
comprising the flower of his army, in advance. It was 
attacked in flank among the sand-hills near Wailuku, 
and hardly a man escaped to tell the tale. 

The next day he advanced again with his whole force, 
but was completely defeated and driven back to Maalaea. 
He then sent his son Kiwalao to humbly sue for peace, 
which was granted, but did not last very long, as he soon 
renewed his cruel raids on the people of Maui and 
Lanai. 

The young prince Kamehameha I. distinguished him- 
self in these campaigns as a brave and skillful warrior. 

The war was still going on in the district of Koolau, 
Maui, when Captain Cook discovered these islands. 


5 ae 


CHAPTER XVI 


1778-1779 


THE DISCOVERY OF THE ISLANDS BY CAPTAIN COOK 


THE discovery of these islands by Captain James Cook — 
was the turning-point in their history. It brought them — 
into connection with the rest of the world, and ushered 
in a new era of unexampled progress. 

The great navigator had already made two voyages of 
discovery around the globe, and was then making a third 
voyage to find, if possible, a northern passage from the 
Pacific to the Atlantic Ocean. 

On the 8th of December, 1777, with his two armed 
ships, the “ Resolution” and the “Discovery,” he sailed 
from Bolabola, one of the Society Islands, for the north- | 
west coast of America. : 

Sailing nearly due north, on Sunday morning, the 
18th of January, 1778, he discovered the island of Oahu, 
bearing northeast by east, and soon after saw the island 
of Kauai directly ahead. | 

The next morning, the 19th, he stood for Kauai, 
and soon made out a third island, Niihau, bearing north- 
west. 

As he approached the southeastern sidé of Kauai a 
party of native fishermen came alongside, and bartered | 
fish and vegetables for nails and bits of iron, but they 
were afraid to venture on board. He was agreeably sur- — 


104 


= 


DISCOVERY OF THE ISLANDS BY CAPTAIN COOK 105 


prised to find that they spoke a language differing but 
little from that of the Society Islands. 

As the ships proceeded slowly along the leeward side 
of the island there was great excitement on land, the 
people crowding to the shore, and collecting on the 
heights to view the novel sight. 

After standing off and on during the night, Captain 
Cook again approached the land on the morning of the 
20th, and met several canoes filled with people, some of 
whom took courage and came on board. 

Three armed boats were then sent under command of 
Lieutenant Williamson to look for a watering-place. 
About noon he returned and reported that he had found 
a good watering-place, but that on attempting to land in 
another place, “the natives had pressed so thick upon 
him, trying to take away the oars, muskets, and every 
thing else they could lay hold of, that he was obliged 
to fire, by which one man was killed.” 

Landing at Waimea.—The ships soon afterward an- 
chored in Waimea Bay, and between three and four 
o'clock p.m. Captain Cook went ashore with three armed 
boats and twelve marines. The moment he leaped ashore, 
the natives all fell flat upon their faces, and remained so 
until he had made signs to them to rise. They then 
brought a great many pigs, which they offered to him 
with plantain trees, while a long prayer was recited by a 
priest. Captain Cook gave them presents in return for 
theirs. The next morning trading was commenced for 
hogs, fowls, and vegetables in exchange for nails and 
pieces of iron,* and the natives willingly assisted in filling 
and rolling the water-casks. 


*They were amazed and delighted to see so much iron, which was to them a 
precious metal. 


106 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Several feather cloaks and helmets were offered for — 


sale, besides great numbers of skins of red birds, the 
ewtpolend. | 

Meanwhile Captain Cook, accompanied by the surgeon 
and the artist of the expedition, and a numerous train 
of natives, took a walk up the valley, and visited a 
heiau, of which he gives a description and a drawing.: 

On the 22d a southerly storm with rain set in; and 
the next day, as Captain Cook endeavored to change his 
anchorage, his ship was driven out to sea. Being unable 
to regain the Waimea roadstead, he ran down to Niihau, 
and after cruising around for several days anchored off 
the west coast of that island on the 29th. After he had 
left Kauai, a young chief of high rank, together with his 


wife, came off in a double canoe to visit Captain Clerke 


of the “ Discovery,” and exchanged presents with him. 
Visit to Niihau.—The two ships remained off Niihau, 
collecting water and provisions till February Ist, 1778, 
when they landed three goats, a boar, and a sow pig of 
English breed. They also brought on shore seeds of 
melons, pumpkins, and onions. On account of the stormy 


weather and high surf, Lieutenant Gore and twenty men — 


had been detained on shore for two nights, where they 
were hospitably treated by the natives. The next day, 
February 2d, both the ships sailed to the northward in 
prosecution of their voyage. They left behind them dis- 
eases, unknown before, which spread through the group, 
causing misery and death to the people. 


Effect on the Minds of the Natives.—The Hawaiians — 


were left in a state of the utmost wonder and perplexity 
in regard to the character of their strange visitors.* 


*The majority of them looked upon Captain Cook as an incarnation of their 


god Lono, who, as they supposed, had now returned in fulfillment of anancient — 


| 


: 


WHEN NOON 
AT LONDON 


159° 20° 
aULU 


hiANAMA\ 


159° 25° ° 


a 
3} 
o-t 
z 
A 
2 
fe 
o 
S 
on 
1 
So | 
9 
q 
el 


159 35’ “West 


ATTN 


ALAIN 


Longitude 


U 


159° 40 


NA 


- 


iy 
iy a 

Dir 

r 


Bist o & ; WN) 
Aa, SG Re eS MURINE ope AUBIN) 
“iN ‘ Z yy 5 \ » N \ saath wy ny, 
x a As Sor yy gh as LDS 

i ie 


woneee= 
- 


ir: 


a ABN 


ta 


W 
SCALE OF MILES 


FROM GOVERNMENT SURVEYS 
. Wall, 
Scale, 32,500 ft.=One Inch 


1.21 AsMe 
WHEN NOON 
AT LONDON 


oF t 
. 
’ 
. 
‘ 
4 
ia 
, ‘ 
i 
i 
iy 
2 


DISCOVERY OF THE ISLANDS BY CAPTAIN COOK 107 


Messengers were sent to Oahu and Maui to inform 
the chiefs there of the arrival of these wonderful beings. 
The messengers said: ‘‘The men are white; their skin is 
loose and folding; their heads are angular; fire and 
smoke issue from their mouths; they have openings 
in the sides of their bodies into which they thrust their 
hands, and draw out iron, beads, nails, and other treas- 
ures; and their speech is unintelligible. This is the way 
they speak: ‘a hikapalale, hikapalale, hioluai, oalaki, 
walawalaki, poha,’ etc.” 

_Second Visit of Captain Cook\—Having explored the 
coast-of Alaska, Bering’s Straits, and the Arctic Ocean 
until he was stopped by the ice-fields, Captain Cook re- 
turned to spend the winter in the sunny isles which he 
-had discovered at the beginning of the year. He ar- 
rived off the northeast coast of Maui on the 26th of 
November, and beat to windward around the east end of 
the island. 

Kalaniopuu, the aged king of Hawaii, was then at 
Wailua in Koolau, engaged in war with Kahekili. At- 
tended by several of his chiefs, he visited the ships, and 
his nephew, Kamehameha, spent the night on board of 
the “ Resolution,’ returning in his double canoe in the 
morning. 

Captain Cook then approached Kukuipahu in Kohala, 
where he lay off and on for a time, trading for provisions. 
When the natives saw the sailors smoking and eating 
_ watermelons, they exclaimed: “Gods indeed! They eat 
the flesh of men, and the fire burns in their mouths!’ 

Captain Cook spent the month of December beating 
around the eastern and southern sides of Hawaii, and 


prophecy, and upon his crew as supernatural beings. Others pronounced them to’ a 


be foreigners, Aaoles, from Kahiki or other mysterious lands to the south. 


Pf 


vr ae 


108 HISTORY OF THE HAWAHAN PEOPLE 


finally anchored in Kealakekua Bay January 17th, 1779. 
Immense crowds of people collected there from the rest 
of the island, and the bay presented an extraordinary sight. 
During .the king’s absence the chiefs Palea and Kanaina 
kept oder among the people. 


YU; 
fi 


4, 


\ 
) “\ 
" 
} \ 


== 
ae 
Ae BSS 


=——- — 


ty, 


ff 


} 


= SS 
a 

== SS 

~— 


——— oe 


—S 
———— 


= 


SS 


i} 
D 


AN OFFERING BEFORE OAPTAIN COOK 


Worship of Captain Cook.— An aged priest named Koa 


came on board with them, and saluted Captain Cook with 


the utmost veneration. He then threw a piece of red 
kapa over his shoulders, and stepping back made an 


offering of a pig, while he recited a long prayer. The 


same afternoon Captain Cook, with two of his officers, 


accompanied the priest on shore, where the people re- 


tired or prostrated themselves at his approach. On landing _ 


DISCOVERY OF THE ISLANDS BY CAPTAIN COOK 109 


he was conducted to the heiau of Lono, near a pond north 
of the village of Napoopoo, where various ceremonies 
took place, the object of which was to solemnly acknowl- 
edge and install Captain Cook as an incarnation of the 
god Lono. He was first stationed in front of the sacred 
images, where he was robed with red kapa, and long 
prayers were addressed to him by two priests, while a 
dead hog was offered to him. Similar ceremonies were 
repeated on other parts of the heiau, after which he was 
anointed with the chewed kernel of a cocoanut wrapped 
in a cloth, and regaled with awa, baked pork, ete. 

A few days later, when he visited the priests’ residence 
at Napoopoo, they conducted him to the Hale o Lono, or 
house of Lono, where he was worshiped with nearly the 
same ceremonies as before. Whenever he went on shore 
one of the priests accompanied him with a wand in his 
hand, ordering all people to prostrate themselves, and sac- 
rifices were offered to him.* | 

A site for an observatory was selected near the heiau, 
where tents were set up and instruments erected, and the 
priests effectually tabued the place by setting up white 
rods around it. The party on shore received from the 
priests every day a liberal supply of hogs and vegetables, 
while several canoe-loads of provisions were daily sent to 
the ships, for which no return was ever made or asked. 

On the 24th Kalaniopuu arrived from Maui, and a strict 
tabu was immediately put upon the bay, no canoes being 
allowed to leave the shore. 

Kalaniopuu’s Visit to Captain Cook.—On the 26th the 
king made a grand ceremonial visit to the ships, with three 
large canoes, attended by chiefs wearing their feather cloaks 


_ *AsJarves says, “‘He moved among them an earthly deity, observed, feared, 


_and worshiped.” 


110 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


and helmets, and armed with spears and daggers, and by — 
priests bearing gigantic idols. of wicker-work, covered with 
red feathers, with eyes made of mother-of-pearl and mouths 
set with double rows of sharks’ teeth. 

After paddling around the ships, chanting prayers or 
hymns, they went toward the observatory, where Cap- 
tain Cook landed to receive them. On entering the tent — 
the king placed his own magnificent feather cloak upon — 
Captain Cook’s shoulders, and a feather helmet on 
his head, and laid five or six other beautiful cloaks at — 
his feet. He also presented him with a number of large 
hogs and a large quantity of cocoanuts and bread-fruit, — 
after which the priests made offerings and prayers to their 
supposed patron divinity. 

In return Captain Cook took the royal party on board 
of the “ Resolution,’ and presented the king with a linen 
shirt and a cutlass. The English officers were afterward 
feasted on shore, and entertained with boxing and wrest- 
ling matches. On his part, Captain Cook gave an exhi- 
bition of fire-works, which the natives took for flying 
spirits. : 
Quarrels with the Natives.—After the first ten days, 
the natives began to tire of their guests, and to show them 
less respect. Their violations of tabu and their abandoned 
conduct were such as to disgust even heathens, while _ 
the lavish contributions levied upon the people for their — 
support began to be felt as a heavy burden.* 

On the 2d of February Captain Cook, being in want 
of fuel, concluded to take the fence around his heiau, and 
offered the priests first two and then three hatchets for 


* On the 28th one of the seamen died and was buried in the heiau with both | 
Christian and pagan funeral rites. This was enough to show the natives that 
the strangers were mortal like themselves, 


ie 


DISCOVERY OF THE ISLANDS BY CAPTAIN COOK 111 


it, which they declined to accept. His men, however, 
carried off not only the railing of the temple but even 
the twelve idols within it, upon which the chief priest 
meekly requested that at least the central image should 
be restored. About this time an affray took place be- 
tween the natives and a party from the ‘“ Resolution,” 
who had been sent to bring off the rudder. Quarrels Im, 
trade and thefts became more and more common. “{*<“ 

On the 8d of February, the day previous to the de- 
parture of the ships, Kalaniopuu presented Captain Cook 
with an immense quantity of vegetables, a large herd of 
swine, and an extensive collection of kapas and red and 
yellow feathers. Captain King says: “ We were astonished 
at the value and magnitude of this present, which far 
surpassed any thing of the kind we had seen at either 
the Friendly or Society Islands.” 

They finally sailed February 4th, but the joy of the 
people over their departure was unfortunately to be of 
short duration. 

Return of Captain Cook.—Captain Cook’s intention 
was to survey the Leeward Islands, and to lay in a supply 
of water before sailing for the Arctic. But off Kawaihae 
the ships encountered a violent gale, in which the ‘“ Rego- 
lution” sprang her foremast. It was therefore decided to 
put back to Kealakekua Bay, in order to repair it on 
shore. They arrived at their old anchorage on the morn- 
ing of Thursday, February 11th. 

‘“An ominous silence everywhere prevailed, and not a 
canoe was to be seen.” A boat which had been sent 
ashore brought back word that Kalaniopuu was absent, 
and had left the bay under tabu. Toward night a few 
canoes came off with provisions, but the behavior of the 
natives plainly showed that their former friendship was 


i123 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


at an end. Almost the only articles in demand were iron 
daggers, which Captain Cook had ordered to be made for 
barter. | 

The next day (Friday) the damaged masts and sails 
and the astronomical instruments were landed at the 
former camp, and the friendly priests tabued the place 
as before. On Saturday afternoon, matters rapidly went 
from bad to worse. At length some of Palea’s retainers 
stole a pair of tongs and a chisel from the armorer of 
the “Discovery,” leaped into their canoe, and paddled with 
all haste to the shore. Several muskets were fired after 
them in vain, and a boat was sent in chase. 

Palea, who was on board, offered to recover the stolen 


articles, and followed in another canoe..\/The thieves ; 


reached the shore first, beached their canoe, and fled 


inland. Mr. Edgar, the officer of the boat, undertook to — 


seize this canoe, which belonged to Palea, who refused to 
give it up, protesting his innocence of the theft. A scuffle 


ensued between them, in which Hdgar was worsted, when 


a sailor knocked Palea down by a heavy blow on the 
head with an oar. Upon this the whole crowd of natives 
looking on immediately attacked the unarmed seamen 
with stones, and forced them to swim off to a rock at 


some distance. Palea, however, soon recovered from the — 
blow, dispersed the mob, called back the sailors, and re- 


stored the missing articles as far as he could. 


The following night the large cutter of the “Discov-— 
ery” was stolen by Palea’s people, taken two miles north, — 


and broken up for the sake of the iron in it. 


Landing of Captain Cook.— Captain Cook then deter- 


mined to bring the king on board of the “Resolution,” 


and to keep him a prisoner until the stolen boat should 


be returned,—a plan which he had tried more than once — 


DISCOVERY OF THE ISLANDS BY CAPTAIN COOK 118 


with success in the South Seas. Accordingly, on Sunday 
morning, the 14th, he landed with a lieutenant and nine 
marines, proceeded to Kalaniopuu’s house, and invited 
him to come on board and spend the day with him. 

Blockade of the Bay.—At the same time a blockade © 
was placed upon the bay, three boats, well armed and 
manned, being stationed at equal distances across the 
entrance to cut off any communication by water. 

While Captain Cook was trying to decoy the aged king 
on board, a canoe came from Keel with two high-chiefs, 
viz., Kekuhaupio, a famous warrior, and :Kalimu, Palea’s 
brother, who knew nothing of the blockade. . They were 
fired upon from the boats, and Kalimu was killed, upon 
which Kekuhaupio made all haste with the sad news to 
the king, who was on his way to the shore. An immense 
crowd had collected, many of whom now armed them- 
selves with spears and daggers. The leading chiefs held 
the old man back, and refused to let him go any farther. 

Affray and Death of Cook.—One warrior approached 
Captain Cook with a dagger, saying that the foreigners 
had killed his brother, and he would be revenged. Cap- 
tain Cook fired at him, but without effect, and ordered 
Lieutenant Phillips to withdraw the marines to the 
shore. The instant they began to retreat he was hit by 
a stone, and perceiving the man who had thrown it, 
shot him dead. The marines and the people in the 
boats then opened fire, upon which the chiefs rushed 
in before they had time to reload, and killed four of 
the marines. The rest escaped by swimming to the 
boats. Meanwhile Captain Cook turned for a moment, 
and waved his hat to the men in the boats to cease 
firing and pull in, when a.chief from behind stabbed him 


in the back with an iron dagger, which passed quite, _ 


114 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


through his body. The captain fell forward with his 
face into the water and expired. Lieutenant Phillips then 
drew his sword, and engaging the chief whom he saw kill 


Captain Cook, soon dispatched him, after which he swam — 


off to the boats. Lieutenant Gore, of the “ Resolution,” 
perceiving with his glass what was going on, fired several 
round shot into the middle of the crowd, and both the 
thunder of the cannon and the effect of the shot caused 
a sudden retreat from the shore to the hills. Seventeen 
natives, five of whom were chiefs, including Kanaina, 
were killed in this affray. There is reason to believe that 
Kamehameha took an active part in it. The camp on 
the other side of the bay was also attacked, but the 
guards took their station on the heiau, and kept the na- 
tives at bay until they were reinforced from the ships. 
About noon the “Resolution’s” foremast, with the 
tents, sails, and astronomical instruments, was safely 
brought on board. Afterwards, Lieutenant King was sent 
to demand the bodies of Captain Cook and the marines. 
The body of Captain Cook, however, was carried to a 


small heiau above the pal¢ or precipice,- where the regu- 


lar funeral rites were performed that night; the flesh was 
removed from the bones and burned, and the bones were 
tied up with red feathers and deified.* 

Recovery of Part of Captain Cook’s Remains.—On 
Monday night two friendly priests secretly brought off 


part of Captain Cook’s body, which had been allotted to 


Kau, the head-priest of Lono. On Wednesday a watering 
party from the ships was attacked by the natives and 
another fight took place, in which six natives were killed, 


* Part of the bones were kept in the temple of Lono, on the east side of Hawaii, 
and worshiped by the people until 1819, when they were concealed in some 


secret place. 


DISCOVERY OF THE ISLANDS BY CAPTAIN COOK 115 


and deplorable acts of cruelty were perpetrated by 
the sailors. The “Discovery” fired round and grape 
shot into the village of Napoopoo, and a cocoanut-tree 
was lately standing near the landing-place, with a hole 
through it made by one of 
the cannon-balls fired on 
this occasion. The sailors 
set fire to the village, and 
the houses of the friendly 
‘ priests, with all their effects, 
were consumed. On Thurs- 


COOK’S MONUMENT 


day a high-chief, “Eappo,” was sent by Kalaniopuu to sue 
for peace, and on Saturday he delivered up part of the 
bones of Captain Cook. A tabu was laid upon the bay, 
and on Sunday, the 22d, the remains of the late com- 
mander were committed to the deep with military honors. 

The ships finally sailed on the 28d, passing to the 


116 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


leeward of Lanai and along the windward side of Oahu. 
They anchored one day off Waialua, and then proceeded 
to their former station at Waimea, Kauai. Here they 
procured a supply of water, not without annoyance from 
the natives, and called at Niihau for yams, finally leaving 
the group for Kamchatka and the Arctic Ocean on the 
25th of February, 1779. 


‘CHAPTER XVII 
1780-1786 


FROM THE DEATH OF CAPTAIN COOK TO THE ARRIVAL 
OF PORTLOCK AND DIXON 


SucH was the impression made on the civilized world 
by the tragical death of Captain Cook, that no foreign 
vessel touched at the islands for over seven years. Dur- 
ing this period Hawaii was rent into three independent 
petty kingdoms, while all the other islands were brought 
under the sway of Kahekili and his brother Kaeo. 

Dissensions on Hawaii.—The dissensions which led to 
the breaking up of the kingdom of Kalaniopuu seem to 
have begun before the close of his reign. About the 
year 1780 he held a great council of the highest chiefs 
of Hawaii in the valley of Waipio to settle the succession, 
at which Kauikeaouli Kiwalao, his son by the tabu Maui 
princess Kalola, sister of Kahekili, was proclaimed heir 
to the throne, or to the title of “Moi.” The second place 
in the kingdom was awarded to his nephew Kamehameha, 
together with the charge of the ancestral war-god Kukaili- 
moku, and of his heiaus.* 


*Some months later, as Kiwalao was about to offer up the corpse of Tma- 
kakoloa, a rebel chief, to this war-god, Kamehameha interfered and performed 
the ceremony himself. This bold assertion of his prerogative excited such hostile 
feeling that the old king advised him to leave the court in Kau, and retire to 
his hereditary estates. Accordingly he returned to Kohala, where he spent more 

111 


118 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Death of Kalaniopuu.—Kalaniopuu died at Wat-o- 
Ahukini, near the south point of Kau, in the spring of 
1782. After the period of mourning had expired, about 


the month of July, Kiwalao, with his half-brother, Keoua 


Kuahuula, his uncle, Keawe-mauhili, and other chiefs, pre- 
pared to bring the bones of his father to be deposited in 
the famous Hale o Keawe in Honaunau, South Kona. 

It had long been the custom after the death of a Moz 


to redistribute the lands of the island in a grand council — 


of chiefs, a custom which had often led to civil war. 
Kalaniopuu and Alapai had each gained the throne by 
successful rebellion. 

At this time the western side of Hawaii (Kona) was 
held by four powerful chieftains, who were closely allied. 
These were the twin brothers Kameeiamoku and Kama- 


nawa, their half-brother Keeaumoku, and Keawe-a-Heulu. — 


In view of the weak and irresolute character of the young 
king, the grasping and overbearing disposition of his 
uncle, and the fiery ambition of his brother Keoua, they 
had good reason to be alarmed for the security of their 
possessions. Accordingly they sent Kekuhaupio of Keel, 


the greatest warrior of his time, to persuade Kamehameha ~ 


to leave his retirement and put himself at their head. — 


Convinced by his arguments, Kamehameha quickly as- 


sembled his retainers, and accompanied him back to — 


Kaawaloa. | . 
Meanwhile Kiwalao had sailed for Honaunau in his 

double canoe, with the remains of the late king lying in 

state on another double canoe, attended by a large num- 


than two years in quietly cultivating and improving his lands, building canoes, 


and fishing. Several of his public works are still to be seen, such as a tunnel by ~ 


which a water-course is carried through a ridge in Niulii, besides a canoe-land- 
ing in Halauia, a fish-pond, etc. He was at this time forty-five years of age. 


1780-1786 119 


ber of chiefs and armed warriors. Each party distrusted 
the other, but neither wished to go to war. The conflict 
was brought on at length by the mad rashness of Keoua. 

On arriving at Honaunau, the young king crossed the 
bay and called on Kamehameha, who received him with 
all due respect and courtesy. After the usual wailing 
was over, Kiwalao frankly said, ‘‘Where are you? It is 
possible that we two may die. Here is our aged uncle 
pushing us on to war. Perhaps you and I only may be 
slain. Alas for us two!” 

On the next day, after the funeral ceremonies were 
over, Kiwalao came out on a platform adjoining the Hale 
o Keawe, and declared the last will and testament of his 
father, which simply confirmed the decision of the council 
held at Waipio, but did not suit the Kona chiefs. During 
the next few days the important business of dividing the 
lands of the kingdom was taken in hand, in which Keawe- 
mauhili of Hilo and his favorites received the lon’s 
share. 

Battle of Mokuohai.—Keoua was entirely neglected, _ 
and was told that he must be contented with the lands 
he already possessed. 

Upon this he went off in a rage, armed his retainers, 
and proceeded to “run amuck,” as it were. They first 
went to Keomo and cut down cocoanut-trees (which was 
a challenge to war), and then to Keel, where they picked 
a quarrel and killed some of Kamehameha’s people. Their 
bodies were taken to Honaunau and offered in sacrifice 
by Kiwalao, who thus assumed the responsibility of the 
war and put himself in the wrong. 

For several days there was desultory skirmishing, while 
the two parties were mustering their forces, and finally a 
pitched battle was fought, called the battle of Mokuohai. 


120 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE — 


The “City of Refuge” at Honaunau was crowded with 
the women and children of both parties. During the hot- 
test of the fight Keeaumoku was tripped up by a long 
spear, and severely stabbed by his enemies. Kiwalao, see- 
ing it, called out to them to save his ivory neck-orna- 
ment, 22ho palaoa, from being smeared with blood. At 
this critical moment Kamanawa came to his rescue, and 
Kiwalao himself was struck down by a sling-stone. When 
Keeaumoku saw him fall he crawled up to him and cut 
his throat with a dag- 
ger armed with sharks’ 
teeth. The king’s party 
was completely routed. 
Keoua fled to his ca- 
noes and embarked for 
Kau, where the people 
acknowledged him as 
successor to his brother. 
Keawe-mauhili was tak- 
en prisoner, but escaped 
during the night and 
crossed the mountains 
to his own district of 
| Hilo. 

QUEEN KAAHUMANU IN 1816 Invasions of Hilo.— 


a 


Been sr es fo 


FR Beat oe eat top Steat (AEs 


After making extensive ~ 
preparations by sea and land, Kamehameha renewed the ~ 


war against the two allied chiefs, who held the windward 
side of the island. Landing in Puna, he marched first to 
the crater of Kilauea (in order to prevent a junction of 
his enemies), and thence to Waiakea, where he encoun- 


tered Keawe-mauhili’s force, aided by a body of warriors — 


from Maui. Kamehameha’s forces were totally routed and 


coins ah 


1780-1786 121 


forced to flee to their canoes, after which he retired to 
Laupahoehoe. This is known as the kawa awa, the bitter 
war. He next made a raid along the coast of Puna, where - 
he had a skirmish with a party of fishermen, in which he 
was beaten over the head with a paddle, and narrowly 
escaped with his life. After this he returned to Kohala, 
and devoted himself for a considerable time to peaceful 
pursuits. 

In 1785 he again invaded Hilo, but without success 
(the war of Hapuu). It was about this time that he mar- 
ried Kaahumanu, the daughter of Keeaumoku. 

Invasion of Kipahulu.—In 1786, taking advantage of 
Kahekili’s absence on Oahu, he sent an expedition under 
the command of his younger brother, Kalani-malokuloku, 
to retake the districts of Hana and Kipahulu, Maui, which 
had been conquered by Kahekili four or five years before. 
He met with little resistance at first, and by his kind 
treatment of the people gained the surname of “Kelii 
maikai,” the good chief, by which he was ever after known. 
Kamohomoho, a younger brother of Kahekili, was speedily 
sent with a force to drive out the invaders. He found 
them in Kipahulu, and after much hard fighting utterly 
defeated them, and forced the remnant that escaped to 
flee back to Kohala. Keliimaikai himself was obliged to 
lie hidden until nightfall, when he obtained a passage 
over to Hawaii.* 

Conquest of Oahu by Kahekili.imKahekili, who had 
ruled over Maui and Lanai since the death of his brother 


_ Kamehamehanui in 1765, was a master of intrigue, stern 


* Thus far Kamehameha had fought his battles with only the rude weapons 


of ancient times, and had met with no great success since the battle of Mokuohai. 


At a later period he was enabled to enter upon a new career of conquest by the 
assistance of foreigners and by the possession of fire-arms. 


L22 - HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


and taciturn in manner, and crafty and cruel in disposition. 
He made himself peculiar by having one side of his body 
tattooed so as to appear almost black, while the other side 
was left its natural color. He had thus far successfully 
resisted the attacks of both Kalaniopuu and Kame- 
hameha. 

Peleioholani, the great king of Oahu who subdued 
Molokai, was succeeded by an incompetent son, Kumu- 
hana, who was deposed by his chiefs, and returned to 
Kauai about 17738. They then elected Kahahana, a young 
chief who had been brought up at the court of Kahekili, 
and had married his half-sister. Kahekili consented to 
their going to Oahu on condition that the sacred land of 
Kualoa in Koolau and the palaoa pae (the whalebone and 
ivory drifted ashore) should be ceded to him. 

After Kahahana’s installation the council of Oahu 
chiefs refused to ratify this cession of the national em- 
blems of sovereignty to Kahekili. This latter, however, 
dissembled his resentment, for he was only too glad to 
receive their help in his sanguinary wars with Kalanio- 
puu. Meanwhile he labored to poison the mind of Ka- 
hahana against his wisest counselor, the priest Kaopulu- 
pulu, whom he secretly accused of having offered the 
throne of Oahu to himself (Kahekili). The weak and 
credulous prince believed the slander, and caused Kao- © 
pulupulu to be treacherously assassinated at Puuloa. He — 
was already unpopular, and this murder still further 
alienated the minds of both chiefs and people from him. 

Kahekili then considered that his time had come, and 


recalled the auxiliary troops he had sent to Hilo. In the | 


year 1783 he mustered all his forces at Lahaina, and 
without warning sailed for Oahu, landing at Waikiki. A . 
decisive battle was fought in Nuuanu Valley, in which 


1.36 A.M. 


WHEN NOON 
AT LONDON 


Longitude 155°40’ West 


1.42 A.M. 


oor SER Ons WHEN NOON 
from 15520’ Greenwich 155 0 AT LONDON 


Sg, 
Mg 


Ea 
SY, 
Fail 


MAP OF HAWAII 


COMPILED By W. A. WALL 


FROM GOVT. SURVEY MAPS. 
1887. 


SCALE OF MILES 
5 


CHAPTER XVIII 
1786-1791 


FROM THE ARRIVAL OF PORTLOCK AND DIXON TO THE 
DEATH OF KEOUA 


The Fur Trade of the Northwest Coast.—The narra- 
tive of Captain Cook’s last voyage showed what profits 
might be made by purchasing furs from the Indians of 
the northwest coast of America with pieces of iron, beads, 
blankets, etc., and selling them for cash in the Canton 
market. 

Accordingly several expeditions were fitted out in 
England, America, India, and China to engage in this 


profitable trade. Nootka Sound in Vancouver Island be-— 


came the general rendezvous of the fur-traders on the 
coast. After disposing of their furs in China, they often 
took cargoes of tea for England or for the United States. 

Arrival of Portlock and Dixon.—The first ships 
that visited the islands after the death of Captain Cook 
were the “King George,’ commanded by Captain Port- 
lock, and the “Queen Charlotte,’ under Captain Dixon, 
which sailed together from London, and arrived off the 


coast of Hawaii May 24th, 1786. Both of these com- 


manders had served under Captain Cook in his last voy- 
age. They touched at Kealakekua Bay on the 26th 
day of May, but as the natives became insolent and 
troublesome, they left for Oahu and anchored in Waialae 
Bay June 3d.* 


*Here they remained four days, buying fresh water, at the rate of a six- 


penny nail for a two-gallon calabash full. Captain Portlock noticed that nearly — 


124 : 


; 
@ 
: 


; 


1786-1791 125 


About the same time, May 28th, 1786, La Pérouse, 
the famous French explorer, with his two frigates, an- 
chored off Honuaula, East Maui, where he spent one day 


in friendly intercourse with the people, and sailed for 
Alaska. 


DIAMOND HEAD 


Portlock and Dixon again visited the islands in Novem- 
ber, 1786, and spent the winter, mostly at Waialae, Oahu, 
and at Waimea, Kauai, where they laid in ample sup- 
plies of provisions, wood, and water, in exchange for 
nails, beads, and pieces of iron hoop. They touched at 


these places again the following year on their way to 
China. 


all of the iron daggers sold by Captain Cook at Hawaii were now in the hands 
of Kahekili’s warriors, having probably been captured in war. They next touched 
at Niihau for yams, and proceeded thence on their way to the Northwest Coast, 


126 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Many other vessels engaged in. the fur trade followed 
their example and visited the islands, generally in the 
winter season, or on their way to China. 

Kaiana’s Visit to China and his Return.— Among the 
first of these was Captain Meares, who arrived at Waimea, 
Kauai, in August, 1787, in the snow “Nootka,” and spent 
about a month there. He took the famous chief Kaiana 
as a passenger to 
Canton, where he re- 
mained three months, 
and received the 
greatest kindness 
from the English resi- 
dents. 

Captain Meares 
then fitted out two 
vessels, the “Felice” 
and the “Iphigenia,” 
for the. fur trade. 
taking Kaiana and 
three other natives 
as passengers on the 
latter vessel. Kaia-— 
na’s friends at Can- 
ton put on board of 
each vessel several 
cattle, goats, and turkeys, besides lime and orange trees, 
and a large assortment of presents for him. Unfort- 
unately the ships made a long trading voyage along the 
American coast, during which all of the live-stock perished 
before visiting the islands. : 

The “ Iphigenia,” Captain Douglass, arrived off the coast _ 
of Hana December 6th, 1788, and proceeded to Kealake-— 


1786-1791 Ae 


kua Bay, where Kamehameha came off in state, with 
twelve large double canoes, beautifully adorned with 
feathers, and was honored with a salute of seven guns. 

As Kaiana learned that Kaeo, king of Kauai, was very 
hostile to him, he decided to accept Kamehameha’s offers 
and to enter his service. Accordingly he was landed 
December 29th, 1788, with his extensive collection of 
foreign goods, tools, and fire-arms, which made him im- 
mensely rich, in the estimation of the natives. 

Captain Douglass afterward brought Kaiana’s wife and 
child and his brother Namakeha from Kauai, and was 
persuaded to present Kamehameha with a swivel cannon, 
which was mounted upon a large double canoe, besides 
some muskets and ammunition. He touched again at 
Kealakekua in July, 1789, on his way to China, when he 
narrowly escaped a plot of the principal chiefs to massacre 
him and his crew. For about four years the islands re- 
mained at peace, the chiefs and people being all eagerly 
engaged in trade with their foreign visitors. The two har- 
bors most frequented were those of Waimea, Kauai, and 
Kealakekua Bay, and it is probable that Kamehameha 
and his chiefs received the lion’s share of this traffic. 

The Olowalu Massacre.— About the end of the year 
1789 Captain Metcalf, an American fur-trader, in com- 
mand of the snow “Eleanor,” visited the islands on his 
way to China. His son, only eighteen years of age, com- 
manded a little schooner called the “Fair American,” 
which had been detained by the Spaniards at Nootka 
Sound.* 


* A plot was formed by Kaiana and other chiefs to capture the ‘‘ Eleanor,” but 
wus prevented by Kamehameha, who went on board and ordered the treacherous 
chiefs ashore. After this Kameeiamoku, a high-chief of Kona, was insulted and 
beaten with a rope’s-end by Metcalf for some trifling offense, on which he vowed 
to revenge himself on the next vessel that should come into his power. 


128 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PROPLE 


Near the end of February, 1790, the “ Eleanor” crossed 
the Hawaii Channel and anchored off Honuaula, Maui. 
There Kaopuiki, the chief of Olowalu, with his men, stole 
a boat one night from its moorings at the stern, and mur- 
dered the sailor who was sleeping in it. It was then 
broken up for the sake of the nails in it, after which the 
thieves returned to Olowalu. When Captain Metcalf found 
that the guilty persons had come from Olowalu, he pro- 
ceeded thither in the “Eleanor,” and after a certain tabu 
was over, resumed trade with the natives. A great num- 
ber of canoes from far and near had crowded around his 
ship, when suddenly a broadside of cannon and musketry 
was fired upon them, and the waves were covered with 
the dead and dying. Over a hundred were killed and 
many more were wounded. 

After this cruel and wanton massacre of innocent 
people Captain Metcalf returned to Hawaii, and lay off 
and on near Kealakekua Bay waiting for the tender, 
which arrived about this time off Kawaihae. 

Capture of the ‘Fair American.”— Kameeiamoku went 
off with a fleet of canoes as if to trade, and while the 
young captain was off his guard threw him overboard 
and killed all the crew except the mate, Isaac Davis. The 
vessel was hauled up on shore and stripped of its guns 
and ammunition. On the same or the next day (March 
17th) John Young, the boatswain of the “Hleanor,” who 
was on shore, found himself detained, and all canoes 
tabued by Kamehameha’s orders lest Metcalf should hear 
of the loss of the schooner and the death of his son. The 
“Eleanor” lay off and on for two days longer, firing signal 
guns for Young’s return in vain, and finally sailed for 
China. Young and Davis were treated with great kind- 
ness, presented with valuable lands, and raised to the 


1786-1791 129 


_ rank of chiefs by the king; and in return they fully repaid 
_ him by their services both in war and in council. They 
were, however, for a long time closely watched whenever 
a foreign vessel was in sight. They mounted the small 
cannon obtained from the “Iphigenia” and the “Fair 
American” on carriages for land service, and trained a 
small body of troops in the use of muskets. 

Invasion of Maui. Kamehameha considering himself 
now strong enough to renew the invasion of Maui, sent 
a Summons to Keoua of Kau and to Keawemauhili of 
Hilo to furnish him men and canoes for the war. Keoua 
flatly refused, but his uncle sent a ees force commanded 
by his own sons. 

In the summer of 1790 Kamehameha crossed the 
channel with his fleet, landing first in Hana and then in 
Hamakualoa, where he defeated the advance-guard of the 
Maui forces in a hard-fought battle. He then moved his 
fleet to Kahului, and marched to the Wailuku Valley, 
where he met the Maui army under Kahekili’s sons, and 
drove them up the valley. The two field-pieces managed 
by Young and Davis, and the musketry, struck terror 
into the hearts of the Maui warriors, and decided the vic- 
tory in his favor. No mercy was shown to the vanquished. 
They were driven over precipices and chased to the high 
peaks and crags of the mountains, where they were starved 
into surrender.* 

Kalanikupule, with his brothers and the other chiefs, 
escaped through the Olowalu Pass, and sailed to Oahu. 

War with Keoua.—Kamehameha did not, however, 
make any permanent conquest of Maui at this time; for 
in his absence Keoua had invaded Hilo, slain Roaoane 

* It is said that the prook Iao was choked with the corpses of the slain, whenee 
_ the battle was called “ Kapaniwai” (the damming of the waters). 


a 


PSO HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


hili in battle, overrun Hamakua, and cruelly ravaged 


S= 


“pe, WR, ua 


4 
re a, PEAK IN IAO VALLEY 
 RayrAt 


Waipio and Wai- 
mea. On hearing 
this news, Kame-_ 
hameha ’ immedi- 
ately sailed with | 


, all his forces from 
Molokai for Hawaii and landed at Kawaihae. Keoua re-- 


1786-1791 131 


treated to Hamakua, where he awaited the attack, and 
fought two bloody but indecisive battles near Paauhau, 
in which Kamehameha’s fire-arms gave him the ad- 
vantage. Keoua fell back to Hilo, while Kamehameha 
returned to Waipio to. recruit his losses. 

The Eruption of Kilauea.—In November, 1790, Keoua, 
having divided the lands of Hilo between his chiefs, set 
out for Kau by the overland route that leads past the 
voleano of Kilauea. His followers encamped there two 
days, during which the crater was very active. .On the 
third day, as they were on their way to Kau in three di- 
visions, a terrific earthquake took place, after which an 
immense black cloud rose out of the crater and shut out 
the light of day. An enormous quantity of black sand 
and cinders was thrown to a great height, and came 
down in a destructive shower for many miles around. 
The rear body, which suffered the least, after the shower 
had passed over hastened forward, rejoicing at their es- 
cape, but they found the middle party all dead, some 
lying down, and others sitting up and clasping their 
wives and children in a farewell embrace. They did not 
dare to linger, but hurried on to overtake the advance 
company at their place of encampment. This disaster 
convinced Kamehameha that the goddess Pele was on 
his side, and must have discouraged Keoua. 

During the following year (1791) the great heiau of 
Puukohola at Kawaihae was built in honor of the war- 
god Kukailimoku, by the advice of the priests, to secure 
to Kamehameha the kingdom of Hawaii. Kaiana was 
sent to Kau, where he carried on the war against Keoua 
without success. 

The Sea-fight off Waimanu.—Meanwhile Kahekili and 
his brother Kaeo, king of Kauai, combined their forces for 


132 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 
an attack on Hawaii. Kaeo took with him his nephew 
Peapea, his favorite gunner, Murray, and several large, 
fierce dogs. Stopping awhile at Maui on their way, the 
two fleets proceeded to Waipio, where they landed and 
committed many wanton outrages on the people. 

Kamehameha sailed from Kona to meet them with his — 
fleet of double canoes and the schooner “ Fair American,” 
carrying several small cannon, which were under the 
charge of Young and Dayis. The two hostile fleets met 
off Waimanu, where a bloody battle was fought, in which ~ 
Kamehameha’s superiority in fire-arms gave him the 
victory. Kahekili and Kaeo returned crest-fallen to Maui 
with their shattered fleet.* 

The Assassination of Keoua.—Toward the end of the 
year 1791 two of Kamehameha’s chief counselors, Kama- 
nawa and Keaweaheulu, were sent on an embassy to 
Keoua at Kahuku in Kau. Keoua’s chief warrior urged 
him to put them to death, which he indignantly refused — 
to do. 

By smooth speeches and fair promises they persuaded 
him to go to Kawaihae, and have an interview with 
Kamehameha, in order to put an end to the war, which 
had lasted nine years. Accordingly he set out with his 
most intimate friends and twenty-four rowers in his own 
double canoe, accompanied by Keaweaheulu in another 
canoe, and followed by friends and retainers in other 
canoes. 

As they approached the landing at Kawaihae, Keeau- 
moku surrounded Keoua’s canoe with a number of armed 
men.- As Kamakau relates: “Seeing Kamehameha on 
the beach, Keoua called out to him. ‘Here Iam,’ to which 


* This sea-fight was called ka pu-waha-ula (the red-mouthed gun). 


1786-1791 183 


he replied, ‘Rise up and come here, that we may know 
each other.’ ” , 

As Keoua was in the act of leaping ashore, Keeaumoku 
killed him with a spear. All the men in Keoua’s canoe 
and in the canoes of his immediate company were slaugh- 
tered but one. But when the second division approached, 
Kamehameha gave orders to stop the massacre. The bodies 
of the slain were then laid upon the altar of Puukohola as 
an offering to the blood-thirsty divinity Kukailimoku. 
That of Keoua had been previously baked in an oven at the 
foot of the hill as a last indignity. This treacherous mur- 
der made Kamehameha master of the whole island of 
Hawaii, and was the first step toward the consolidation of 
the group under one government. But, as Fornander says, 
“We may admire the edifice whose foundation he (Kame- 
hameha) laid, but we must note that one of its corner- 
stones is laid in blood.’ 


CHAPTER XIX 
1791-1795 
VISITS OF VANCOUVER AND CONQUEST OF OAHU 


Visitors in 1791.—Among others, a sloop called the | 
“Princess Royal,” which had been seized by the Span- 
iards at Nootka Sound, visited the islands in March, 1791, 
under Spanish colors. Kaiana, whose mind seems to have 


been constantly directed to the seizing of every small | 
vessel that arrived, formed a plot for the capture of this _ 
sloop, but was again prevented by Kamehameha. In 


October of the same year, Captain Kendrick of Boston, — 
in the sloop “Lady Washington,” left three sailors at 
Kauai to collect sandal-wood and pearls against his re- — 


turn from New England. This was the beginning of the 


sandal-wood trade with China. 

Vancouver’s First Visit—The three visits of Vancou- 
ver form an era in the history of these islands, and his 
name is justly cherished as that of a wise and generous 
benefactor to the Hawaiian people. | 

Captain George Vancouver was sent by the British | 
Government to receive the cession of Nootka Sound and 


the adjoining country from a commissioner of Spain; and | 


to make a complete survey of the northwest coast. He 
had under his orders the ship “Discovery” and the 
armed tender “Chatham,” of one hundred and thirty-five © 
tons, under Lieutenant Broughton. They first reached 
Hawaii March 2d, 1792, and sailed slowly along the 


134 


1791-1795 1355 


Kona coast. Kamehameha was on the other side of the 
island, probably engaged in dividing up Keoua’s late do- 
minions among his followers. Kaiana visited the ships, 
and was well received, but, strange to say, could not 
speak a word of English. Vancouver uniformly refused 
to sell any fire-arms or ammunition, but he gave Kaiana 
and Keeaumoku orange-trees, grape-vines, and other useful 
plants and seeds. He told the chiefs that the ship and all 
it contained belonged to King George, who had tabued all 


_fire-arms and ammunition. 


Kaiana falsely represented himself as the equal of 
Kamehameha, and as sovereign of the three southern 
districts of Hawaii. Captain Vancouver then touched at 
Waikiki, Oahu, where he learned that Kahekili and Kaeo, 
with most of their chiefs and warriors, were at Hana, Maui, 


_to repel an expected invasion by Kamehameha. He next 


proceeded to Waimea, Kauai, where he remained a week. 
The ships were visited by Inamoo, the regent, and Kau- 
mualii, son of Kaeo, a lad of twelve years of age, who 


_ greatly pleased Vancouver by his superior intelligence and 
-amiability. The young prince was always accompanied 


by a guard of thirty men, armed with iron daggers, and 


carrying thirteen muskets made up into three bundles, 
_with calabashes containing ammunition.* 


Visit of the ‘Dzdalus.”—The store-ship “ Deedalus,” 
under Lieutenant Hergest, arrived off Waimea, Oahu, May 


| 7th, 1792, and sent a small party ashore to procure fresh 
_water. This party was attacked by a lawless band under 
one Koi, who killed Lieutenant Hergest and Mr. Gooch, 


the astronomer, who had gone farther inland than the rest. 


* Vancouver was everywhere struck with the evidence of the decrease in 
population since Captain Cook’s visit in 1778 and with the insatiable desire of 


i the natives to obtain fire-arms, 


130 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


The others escaped to their boat and fired on the na- ‘ 
tives, but did not succeed in recovering the bodies of the — 
unfortunate officers. The “ Deedalus” then sailed for 
Nootka Sound to jom Vancouver. ; 

Vancouver’s Second Visit.—Vancouver returned from ‘ 
Monterey, California, and anchored off Kawaihae February — 
14th, 1798, where he landed a bull and a cow (the first of 
their kind on these islands), as a present to Kamehameha. 
On the 21st Kamehameha visited the ships, accompanied 
by John Young and by his favorite wife, Kaahumanu.* 

The next day the ships anchored in Kealakekua Bay, 
where Kamehameha made them a grand state visit, wear- 
ing his feather cloak and helmet, with a fleet of eleven 
double canoes, and presented Vancouver with four feather 
helmets, ninety of the largest swine, and an immense quan- 
tity of fruit and vegetables. In return Vancouver landed 
his remaining live-stock, consisting of five cows and three : 
sheep, which he gave to the king. The rival chieftains, 
Kaiana and Keeaumoku, could not repress their jealousy 
and avarice. Onthe 4th of March Kamehameha enter- 
tained his visitors with a sham battle between one hun- 
dred and fifty of his best warriors, in which he took an 
active part himself, and showed wonderful dexterity in 
the spear exercise. Vancouver, in his turn, gave a grand 
display of fire-works in the evening. 

The object which he had most at heart was to bring 
about a lasting peace between Hawaii and the leeward 
islands. Having thoroughly discussed, and, as he thought, 
settled the conditions of peace, he sailed for Maui March 
7th. The ships anchored off Lahaina on the evening — 


* Presents were liberally distributed among the party, and the king received 
a showy scarlet cloak, in which he displayed himself on deck to his admiring 
subjects. | 


1791-1795 oT 


of the 12th, and were visited first by Kamohomoho 
and then by Kahekili himself. Captain Vancouver dis- 
cussed with him and the other principal chiefs the two 
objects for which he had made this visit. 

The first was that of bringing to justice the persons 
guilty of the murder of Messrs. Hergest and Gooch, of the 
store-ship “Deedalus,” committed at Waimea, Oahu. To 
this Kahekili replied that three of the murderers had 
already been executed by his orders, and that his brother 
Kamohomoho would accompany Captain Vancouver to 
Oahu and see that the rest of them should be duly 
punished. 

The second object was to put a stop to the war which 
had so long continued between Kahekili and Kameha- 
meha. The island of Maui had not yet recovered from the 
effects of the cruel ravages committed by Kamehameha’s 
men during the last invasion. Besides, a large army had 
to be kept up in Hana, which was a heavy drain on the 
resources of both Maui and Oahu. This the chief admitted, 
and proposed to send Kaeo as ambassador to Hawaii on 
Vancouver's ship to negotiate a treaty in his presence. 

As Vancouver could not spare the time for this, he 
proposed to write a letter to John Young, to inform 
Kamehameha that the Maui chiefs had consented to the 
terms of peace. This was done, but the chief bearing the 
letter was attacked and obliged to flee for his life without 
delivering it. Having presented Kahekili with some goats 
and a large assortment of useful articles, and given a dis- 
_ play of fire-works, Vancouver sailed for Oahu with Kamo- 

homoho on board, and anchored at Waikiki on the 20th. 
| Three men were then brought on board who were 
charged with the murder of Lieutenant Hergest, and 
Several witnesses testified to their guilt. On the 22d 


“a 
1388 HISTORY OF THE HAWAILAN PEOPLE 


they were placed in a double canoe alongside of the 
“Discovery,” and shot by a chief, who is called “Tennavee ” 
by Vancouver. This man afterwards confessed that they 
were innocent of the murder, although guilty of certain 
offenses against the tabu. 

About this time a revolt had broken out in Kauai 
against the tyranny of Inamoo, which had been put 
down. with the aid of the foreigners on the island. On 
his way thither in mid-channel Vancouver met a fleet of 
canoes carrying the news and prisoners to Kaeo, one of g 
the canoes being sixty-one and a half feet long, made of 
a single pine log, and beautifully finished. is 

On the 28th of March he anchored off Waimea, aioe 
he landed two young women who had been carried off by 
Captain Baker in the “Jenny” the year before.* 

Troubles on Kauai.—The “renegade white men,” as 
Vancouver calls them, on Kauai were charged with in-— 
citing the natives to acts of piracy. They well-nigh suc- 
ceeded in cutting off the brig “Hancock,” of Boston, by 
scuttling her under water. They also urged Inamoo, the 
governor, to assert his independence, and fired on the 
messengers sent by Kahekili to investigate these matters. 

Accordingly, in October, 1798, Kahekili, notwithstand- 
ing his advanced age, took passage for Kauai with Captain 
Brown on the ship “Butterworth,” and summoned Inamoo 
to give an account of his conduct. Inamoo, however, 
seems to have convinced Kahekili of his loyalty, for he 
was allowed to retain his offices as governor and as guard- 
ian of the young prince. 

Vancouver’s Third Visit—On the 9th of January, 
1794, Vancouver, returning from the American coast, 


* After taking great pains to secure land for them and to provide for their — 
future protection, he sailed again for the Northwest Coast. | 


1791-1795 139 


arrived off Hilo, Hawaii, where Kamehameha was residing. 
Although the makahiki or New Year’s festival was in 
progress, he was persuaded to take passage with Vancou- 
ver to Kealakekua, where the ships remained six weeks. 

Vancouver and his men were regarded as the guests 
of the nation, and treated with unbounded hospitality. 
He landed several more cattle as well as sheep for Ka- 
mehameha, and had a tabu laid upon them for ten years. 
On the first of February his carpenters laid the keel of 
the “Britannia,” the first vessel ever built at the islands. 
Although only thirty-six feet in length, she formed an 


important addition to Kamehameha’s navy. \V:ncouver 
gave the king much valuable advice in revravl » | is in- 
tercourse with foreigners, the manageimic:! of - , ng- 
dom, the discipline of his troops, etc. jie alco id him 
of the one true God, Creator and Governo: of al! man- 


kind, that their tabu system was wrong, ei that he 
would ask the king of England to send him a teacher of 
the true religion. He also effected a reconciliation be- 
tween Kamehameha and his favorite queen, Kaahumanu. 
He strongly recommended Young and Davis to his con- 
fidence, and would have removed seven runaway seamen 
of bad character, leaving only four white men on the 
islands, if the chiefs had consented to it. 

On the 21st of February, 1794, a grand council of the 
chiefs was held on board of ‘the “ Discovery” for the pur- 
pose of placing Hawaii under the protection of Great 
Britain. They reserved, however, the right to regulate all 
their own internal affairs. On the 25th Lieutenant Puget 
hoisted the British flag on shore, and took possession of 
Hawaii in the name of his Britannic Majesty. <A salute 
was then fired, and the natives shouted, “Kanaka no 
Beritane” (“We are men of Britain”). 


140 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


The next day Captain Vancouver sailed for Kauai, : 
having promised the chiefs that he would return, accom-_ 


panied by missionaries and artisans, to civilize and Chris- 


tianize them, under the protection and support of the 


British Government.* 


He anchored off Waimea, Kaui, March 9th, 17 94, where 


he was visited by Inamoo and Kaumualii, with whom he 
left some sheep for breeding. He was entertained on 
shore by a dance performed by six hundred women, 
dressed in figured kapas, and finally sailed for England 
on the 13th. | 

War between Kaeo and Kalanikupule.— Kahekili died 
in July, 1794, at Waikiki, over eighty years of age. It 1s 
said that his bones were taken to Hawaii, and concealed 
in a cave at Kaloko, North Kona. After his death his 
kingdom speedily fell to pieces from the folly and treach- 
ery of his heirs, and became an easy prey to Kameha- 
meha. 

While his son remained the sovereign of Oahu, his 
brother Kaeo continued to rule over Maui and the adja- 
cent islands. In November, 1794, Kaeo decided to visit 
Kauai and settle the affairs of that island, which were in 
great disorder. 


Accordingly he embarked with a large force of chiefs. 


and warriors, leaving Maui nearly defenseless. When he 


arrived at Waimanalo, Oahu, he found Kalanikupule’s 


warriors drawn up to oppose his landing. A skirmishing 
fight was kept up until Kalanikupule arrived from Waikiki, 
and held a conference with his uncle, at which they came 
to a friendly understanding. 

After a short stay in Koolau, Kaeo and his men em- 


*The cession, however, was never ratified by the Home Government, and no 
steps were ever taken to carry out Vancouver’s benevolent designs. 


~~ 


1791-1795 141 


barked again in their canoes, landing first at Waialua, 
and then at Waianae, on their way to Kauai. But while 
resting at Waianae he was informed that a formidable 
conspiracy had sprung up among his troops, and that 
there was a plot to throw him overboard during the voy- 
age to Kauai. “Better to die in battle,” said he; “many 
will be the companions in death.” He immediately 
ordered his men to haul up the canoes on shore and pre- 
| pare to march overland against Kalanikupule. Upon this, 
the disaffection among his troops disappeared, and the 
people of Waianae and Waialua flocked to his banner. 
He would no doubt have carried all before him if his 
nephew had not been aided by foreigners. 

Captain Brown in the schooner “J ackal,” accompanied 
by Captain Gordon in the sloop “Prince Lee Boo,” entered 
the harbor of Honolulu, (which he had discovered and 
named “ Fair Haven”), November 21st, 1794. There Cap- 
tain Kendrick joined him in the sloop “Lady Wash- 
ington.” Captain Brown sold Kalanikupule arms and 
ammunition for the war. As Kaeo was victorious in the 
first encounters, and was rapidly approaching, Mr. George 
Lamport, the mate of the “Jackal,” with eight others, 
agreed to assist Kalanikupule to repulse the enemy. In the 
first battle at Punahawele, their native allies were routed, 
and one of the seamen was killed, the rest escaping to 
the canoes. After several skirmishes, during which Kaeo 
kept slowly advancing, a bloody battle was fought De- 
cember 12th, in Kalauao, east of Pearl Lochs, in which 
Kalanikupule gained a complete victory. Kaeo himself 
was surrounded and slain, fighting desperately to the last. 

Massacre of Captain Brown and his Men.—On the 
return of his men the next day, Captain Brown fired a 
salute in honor of their victory. A wad, as is supposed, 


: 


from one of the guns entered the cabin of the “Lady © 
Washington,” and killed Captain Kendrick, who was at 
dinner at the time. } 

His funeral service was the first ceremony of the kind — 
ever witnessed on Oahu, and the natives supposed it 
to be an act of sorcery to cause the death of Captain ™ 
Brown. The “Lady Washington” then sailed for China, 
but Captain Brown remained in port, on the most inti- 
mate terms with the chiefs.. 

Kalanikupule kept his promise to pay him four hun-_ 
dred hogs for his services in the war, and most of the 
sailors were employed in butchering and salting them on — 
shore. On the 1st of January, 1795, Captain Brown had 
sent Mr. Lamport with a boat and four men to procure 
more salt at the Kaihikapu pond in Moanalua, when 
Kamohomoho suddenly boarded the vessels with an 
armed force, killed the two captains and made the rest. 
prisoners. At the same time, the unarmed seamen on > 
shore were surrounded and overpowered by a multitude 
of natives. Mr. Lamport’s party were also attacked and | 
cruelly beaten, but their lives were spared, and they | 
were brought to Honolulu. ; 

Elated by the capture of these two vessels with all 
their guns and ammunition, Kalanikupule and his chiefs 
resolved to sail at once to Hawaii and attack Kame- 
hameha. Mr. Lamport and several of the seamen were 
set to work under a guard to fit the vessels for sea. On 
the 11th the king had all his guns and ammunition put 
on board, and embarking with some of his chiefs, had | 
the vessels warped out of the harbor, and anchored off 
Waikiki. Against Kamohomoho’s advice he had ordered | 
that the soldiers should accompany him in a fleet of 
canoes, reserving the vessels for himself and his train. | 


142 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


1791-1795 143 


About midnight, at a preconcerted signal, the seamen 
in both vessels suddenly rose up and made a desperate 
attack on the natives. They soon cleared the decks of 
them, and confined the king, queen, and a few attendants 
in the cabin. They then set sail, and stood to the south- 
ward till day-break, when they put the king, queen, and a 
servant into a canoe which had been towing astern, and 
sent them ashore. They touched at Hawaii for pro- 
visions, where they landed the three remaining women, 
and informed Kamehameha of all that had occurred, 
after which they proceeded on their voyage to China, 
touching at Kauai for yams. 

Conquest of Oahu by Kamehameha, 1795.—Kame- 
hameha and his counselors saw that the time had now 
come to conquer the leeward islands. Without any de- 
lay, he ordered a levy of all the fighting men and war- 
canoes of Hawaii, and mustered the largest and_ best 
equipped army ever seen in the islands. He had sixteen 
foreigners in his service, of whom Young, Davis, and one 
Peter Anderson had charge of his cannons.* 

In the month of February, 1795, he sailed to Lahaina, 
which he completely destroyed, and West Maui was laid 

waste. Koalaukane, who was in command, fled to Oahu 
without a battle. The great Armada next proceeded to 
- Kaunakakai, Molokai, where the canoes are said to have 
lined the beach for four miles. : 

Of late years there had been a growing jealousy and 
suspicion between the old Kona chiefs and the turbulent 
_Kaiana. As he was not invited to a council of war held 
at Kaunakakai, be concluded that his ruin or death had 
been determined upon. Accordingly, during the voyage to 
| Oahv he and bis brother, Nahiolea, separated from the 


* A tradition verurts the strength of his army at 16,000 men.—Broveuron. 


144 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


main fieet with their followers, and landed at Koolau, — 
whence they crossed over to Nuuanu and joined Kalani- 


PALI OF NUUANU 


kupule. In the mean time, Kamehameha landed his army 
in Waialae Bay, and after a few days spent in arranging 
and preparing his men, he marched up Nuuanu Valley, 
where Kalanikupule had posted his forces. 


SS at eae ee a TT chee oe 


— 


1791-1795 145 


He encountered the enemy at Laimi and Puiwa, where 
the Oahu troops made a brave resistance until Kaiana, 
their leader, was killed by a cannon-ball, when they gave 
way. ‘They were closely pursued up the valley, some escap- 
ing up the ridges on either side, while others were hemmed 
in and driven over the Nuuanu “Pali,” or precipice, north 
of the road. Kalanikupule for several months wandered in 
the Koolau Mountains, until he was captured in a cave 
above Waipio, brought down and offered in sacrifice to the 
conqueror’s war-god at Moanalua. His brother, Koalau- 
kane, escaped to Kauai. 

This battle, which was fought about the end of April, 
1795, made Kamehameha master of all the islands except 
Kauai and Niihau, and was the beginning of a new era 
for the Hawaiian Islands. 

Although no wholesale massacres were committed 
after the battle was over, the conquered people suffered 
the miseries of savage warfare. All the lands were con- 
 fiscated and divided among Kamehameha’s friends, while 
the immense horde that followed his banner plundered the 
people without mercy or restraint. 


CHAPTER XxX 
1795—1810 


FROM THE CONQUEST OF OAHU TO THE CESSION OF 
KAUAI 


AFTER dividing the lands of Oahu among his followers, 
Kamehameha resolved to embark in an expedition against 
the two remaining islands of Kauai and Niihau, in order 
to complete the conquest of the entire group. Accord- 
ingly he set the foreign mechanics in his service to work 
in building a vessel of about forty tons, which he pro- 
posed to arm with his four-pound cannons. 

Captain Broughton’s First Visit.— About this time, in 
February, 1796, Captain Broughton, commanding the 
British discovery-ship “Providence,” of sixteen guns, ar- 
rived at Waikiki, Oahu, on his way to Nootka Sound. 
Kamehameha visited the ship, clad in a European suit, 
over which he wore a splendid feather cloak. He made 


handsome presents to Captain Broughton, and begged for 
fire-arms and ammunition, but met with a firm refusal. — 


Captain Broughton employed his men three days in mak- 
ing the first survey of the harbor of Honolulu. He was 
much impressed by the misery and destitution of the 
common people, and with the rapid depopulation that 
had been going on since his former visit with Vancouver. 
He labored in vain to dissuade Kamehameha from his 


proposed invasion of Kauai, and says that the conquerors _ 


146 


| 


1.27 AsMe 


WHEN NOON 158°15" 158 10° 15805" 


# AT LONDON 


Longitude 


Me Nig 
EN | 
Wee 


Za y 


He 
Y, 


SUAS, 


Ki xe 


Barber’s Pt. 


21 
15 


158°20° 


— 


[22> ASS 


1.30 AsMe 


oo z at Yen! Oy Te, WHEN NOON 
m 15755 Greenwich 15750 187 45 157 40 AT LONDON 


MAP OF 


OAHU io 


FROM GOVERNMENT SURVEY MAP 
BY 
W. A, Wail. 
(Be) ASS = SS St ee ee ee 


MILES 
1887. 


ral 


> Mokapu Pt. 


7Makapuu Pt, 


157°35' 


148 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


that the cattle left by Vancouver had rapidly increased. — 
On his arrival at Oahu, July 25th, Kamehameha boarded 
the ship and entreated Captain Broughton to take him 
and his principal chiefs to Hawaii, a request which he ~ 
was obliged to refuse.* 

At Kauai, Keawe, who seemed to be in power, had 
tabued the sale of supplies, except for arms and ammu- — 
nition. He was afterward slain, leaving the sovereignty 
of the island to Kaumualii. Captain Broughton then 
crossed over to Niihau to buy yams, and at first all ap- 
peared friendly. On the 30th he sent the cutter ashore 
with two armed marines to bring off the remainder of 
the yams. While off their guard they were suddenly at- 
tacked, and the two marines were killed, the rest nar- 
rowly escaping to the boat. A strong armed party was 
sent to their assistance, which burned the village and — 
destroyed sixteen canoes. Four natives were killed in | 
this sad affair, the last of the kind that stains Hawaiian 
annals. 

Wreck of Captain Barber’s Ship.— The snow “Arthur,” _ 
commanded by Captain Henry Barber, on his second voy- 
age from Bengal to the Northwest Coast, visited the islands 
in October, 1796. After taking in supplies at Waikiki he 
sailed for Kauai in the evening of the 81st, and was 
wrecked off the point that bears his name. One of the | 
boats was lost and six men were drowned, the rest escap- _ 
ing to the shore. 

Fortunately Mr. John Young was on Oahu at the time, 
and by his orders the natives saved a large part of the | 
ship’s stores and of the cargo of furs, which were taken | 


* Queen Kaahumanu presented Captain Broughton with a canoe in which she 
had lately eloped, and had nearly reached Se before she was overtaken and | 
brought back.— BINGHAM. 


1795-1810 149 


to Hawaii in the king’s schooner. The king afterward 
succeeded in recovering the ship’s cannon, which he kept 
for himself. 

The Suppression of Namakeha’s Revolt.—In August, 
1796, Kamehameha embarked for Hawaii with the bulk 
of his army, to suppress the rebellion. He met the insur- 
gents at Kaipalaoa, in the district of Hilo, and gained a 
complete victory over them. Namakeha was hunted 
down, and offered in sacri- 
fice in the heiau at Pii- Ai 
honua, Hilo. This was mein. 
the last of Kamehameha’s 
wars. All opposition to his 
authority was now at an 
end. 

Consolidation of the 
Government.—The ancient 
system of government was 
radically changed by the 
conquest. Kamehameha’s 
great object was to cen- ke Sy, 
tralize all power in his re 2 
own hands. All the lands giant R 
in the kingdom he claimed 
as his by right of conquest, and apportioned them 
among his followers according to their rank and services, 
on condition of their rendering him military service and 
a part of the revenues of their lands. He broke up the 
old system of district chieftains by giving land in de- 
tached pieces, scattered through the group, and by keep- 
_ing the more restless and ambitious chiefs about his per- 
| son, obliging them to follow his court wherever he resided. 
Tle employed numerous informers and female spies, who 


eS . 


SAN Ha, 
=N \ 
2 SN \ 


150 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


were always on the watch for disaffection, and he ap- 
pointed men whom he could trust as governors, kiaaina, 
over the principal islands. Thus John Young was gov- 
ernor of Hawaii, and Keeaumoku governor of Maui. In 
making appointments, he regarded ability and fidelity 
much more than rank. The governors, by his approval, 
appointed tax-collectors, heads of districts, and other petty 
officers. The four great Kona chiefs (see page 118) who 
had raised him to the throne and aided him in all his 
wars were his chief counselors, together with Kalanimoku, 
alias William Pitt; who acted as prime-minister and 
treasurer. 

He now exerted himself to promote agriculture, to 
encourage industry, and thus to repair the ravages of his 
wars. He took energetic measures for suppressing 
brigandage, murder, and theft throughout his kingdom, 
until, as the old saying goes, “the old men and the chil- 
dren could sleep in the highways” unmolested. 
> As long as he lived he was a firm supporter of the 

J) ancient tabu system in all its rigor, and used it as a 
powerful engine of state. The tabus relating to the per- 
‘son of the king were strictly enforced, and the ceremonial 

etiquette of the court was increased in severity. 

His policy toward foreigners showed his superiority 
in wisdom to other chiefs. He always protected them, 
and secured their trade and assistance by hospitality and 
fair dealing. He also showed his superior sagacity and 
insight into character by his selection of foreign advisers, 
and was never imposed upon by worthless adventurers. 

His head queen was Keopuolani, who was admitted 
by all to be the highest chief living, uniting in herself 
the blood of the highest chiefs of Maui and Hawaii. Her 
children were heirs to the throne. But his favorite queen — 


\ E iq : 


be 


1795-1810 151 


was Kaahumanu, though she, like the rest, had to suffer 
from occasional outbreaks of his ungovernable temper. 

| Kamehameha’s Residence on Hawaii, 1796-1802.— 
_ Kamehameha remained six years on Hawaii, during which 
time the famous fleet of war-canoes called pelelew was 
built in the forests back of Hilo for the invasion of 
Kauai. These were wide and deep canoes, with a capacity 
for carrying men and stores on long voyages. Several small 
_ decked vessels were also built by native carpenters under 
the direction of Mr. James Boyd.* About this time two 
foreigners residing in Lahaina built for the king a two- 
story brick house, which stood for over seventy years, 
near the landing, on the site of the present market. 

His heir, Liholiho, was born in 1797 at Hilo, Hawaii. 
When five years old he was proclaimed as heir-apparent, 
and was carried to the temples to take part in the sacred 
rites. 

Eruption of Hualalai, 1801.—A great eruption of lava 
took place in 1801 from a crater in Kaupulehu on the 
western slope of Hualalai, which filled up the fish-pond 
of Paiea, and destroyed several villages and cocoanut 
groves. Many sacrifices were made to the goddess Pele, 
and hundreds of hogs were thrown into the fiery stream, 
but in vain. 

At last Kamehameha cut off part of his own hair 
(which was considered sacred), and cast it into the flow- 
ing lava, which is said to have ceased to flow in a day or 
_ two after. 

Kamehameha’s Visit to Lahaina, 1802-3.—In 186% 


* At this time certain fishermen of Puna, who had beaten Kamehameha's 
forehead with a paddle in a skirmish in the year 1783, were arrested and 
brought before him, together with their wives and children. The king’s courtiers 
all advised that they should be stoned to death, but he forbade it, and protected 
| them by a decree called Mamalahoa. 


152 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Kamehameha sailed to Lahaina with his fleet of pelelew 
canoes, touching at Kipahulu and Kaupo, where he con- 
secrated several heiaus. He remained more than a year 
in Lahaina, making the “brick palace” his head-quarters, 
while he collected the taxes due from Maui and the three 
adjacent islands. He also consecrated numerous heiaus 
at Lahaina and other places with the usual cruel rites, in 
which the little heir to the throne officiated. At this time 
his old comrade, Kameeiamoku, died at Puuki in Lahaina, 
and was succeeded by his son Hoapili. 

In May, 1808, Captain Cleveland touched at.the islands 
on his way from California to China, bringing with him 
the first horses ever seen here. He landed a mare and 
foal at Kawaihae for John Young on the 24th, and two 
days later landed a horse and mare at Lahaina as a 
present to the king. Their beauty and mettle excited 
the wonder and admiration of the natives. In spite of 
his advanced age, Kamehameha afterwards became a good 
horseman. 

Kamehameha’s Return to Oahu, 1803.—Soon after 


this Kamehameha proceeded on his way to Oahu with his 
fleet and army. According to Cleveland’s account, he | 


possessed at that time twenty small vessels of from 
twenty to forty tons burden, some even copper-bottomed. 


In 1804 Mr. Shaler exchanged his brig, the ‘‘ Lelia Byrd,” . 
of one hundred and seventy-five tons, which had been 


aground on the California coast and was leaking badly, 


with Kamehameha for his schooner and a sum of money 
to boot. Mr. George McClay, the king’s carpenter, put in a 
new keel, and nearly replanked her in Honolulu Harbor. — 


She afterwards made two or three voyages to China with 
sandal-wood, and finally sank near Canton. 


The Pestilence, 1804.—After Kamehameha had made | 


il 


1795-1810 | 153 


vast preparations for the invasion of Kauai, and had col- 
lected an overwhelming force, a pestilence broke out 
among his troops, which spread through the island and 
carried off half the population. It was known among the 
natives by the name of “mad okwu,” and is believed by 
many to have been the cholera. Kamehameha himself 
was attacked, but he recovered. All his chief counselors 
perished except Kalanimoku. Thus Kauai again escaped 
invasion. 

A Human Sacrifice, 1807.—In 1807 Queen Keopuolani 
was dangerously ill at Waikiki. <A priest declared that 
her illness was caused by the gods, who, he said, were 
angry because certain men had eaten tabu cocoanuts. 

Upon this ten men were seized as victims by the king’s 
orders, but as her alarming symptoms abated, only three 
of them were slain and offered up in the heiau at the 
foot of Diamond Head. 

Honolulu in 1809.—Archibald een a Scotch sailor 
who arrived in Honolulu in 1809, and spent a year in 
Oahu, afterwards published an interesting account of his 
experience.* 

During this year Kamehameha’s younger brother, 
Keliimaikai, died, and Mr. Campbell was an eye-witness 
‘of the frightful scenes that took place, the knocking out 
of teeth, the deafening wailing, etc., and the general cast- 
ing off of clothing and of all restraints of decency. When 


*The village of Honolulu, which consisted of several hundred huts, was then 
well shaded with cocoanut-trees. The king’s house, built close to the shoré and 
surrounded by a palisade, was distinguished by the British colors and a battery 
of sixteen carriage guns belonging to his ship, the ‘Lily Bird” (Lelia Byrd), 
which lay unrigged in the harbor. “At a short distance were two large store- 
houses built of stone, which contained the European articles belonging to the 
king.” The king’s fleet of small vessels was hauled up on shore around Waikiki 
Bay, with sheds built over them. One small sloop was employed as a packet 


between Oahu and Hawaii. Captain Harbottle, an old resident, generally acted as 
, pilot. 


154 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIJAN PEOPLE 


remonstrated with by the captain of a ship that lay in 
the harbor, Kamehameha replied that such was their law, 
and that he could not: prevent it. Mr. Campbell also wit- 
nessed the makahtki, or New Year’s ceremonies. Kame- 
hameha sent a handsome feather cloak to England by 


Captain Spence of the “Duke of Portland,” as a present | 


to King George III., and dictated a letter to the captain, 
dated March 3d, 1810, reminding King George of Van- 
couver’s promise that a vessel armed with brass guns © 
should be sent to him. 

Don Francisco de Paula Marin, from Jerez, Andalusia, 
Spain, who came to the islands in 1791, and died in 18387, 
deserves to be remembered for his services in introducing 
useful plants and setting an example of industry.* 

* As early as 1809 he was raising oranges, figs, grapes, roses, pine-apples, and 
vegetables, making butter, salting beef for ships, and making wine. He acted as 


interpreter for Kamehameha I. until his death, and became wealthy by honest 
industry 


CHAPTER XxXI 
1810—1819 


CLOSING YEARS OF THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA I. 


Cession of Kauai, 1810.— Kaumualii, the king of Kauai 
and Niihau, had justified the high expectations formed of 
him by Vancouver and others who saw him in his youth. 
From his personal qualities, both of mind and body, he 
was the beaw zdeal of a Hawaiian chief, and was univer- 
sally beloved by his subjects and by foreigners. He was 
the only Hawaiian who had learned to read and write 
the English language to any extent. 

Although his warriors were well armed, he knew how 
inferior his forces were to those of Kamehameha, and 
therefore caused a schooner to be built by the white me- 
chanics in his service, in which, as a last resort, he might 
escape from the island and seek refuge in some land to 
the west. | 

Several messages and presents had been interchanged 
between the two kings. At length Kaumualii sent his 
cousin Kamahalolani to Oahu with presents, offering to 
acknowledge Kamehameha as his feudal superior. In 
reply Kamehameha insisted on Kaumualii’s making the 
cession in person, and pledged his honor for his safety. 
Remembering the fate of Keoua, Kaumualii hesitated, 


until Captain Jonathan Windship, a well-known sandal- 
165 


156 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


wood trader, by leaving his mate as a hostage, persuaded 
him to visit Honolulu in his ship. ; 

As soon as he arrived, Kamehameha went on board in 
state, and held a friendly interview with him. Kaumualii 
offered him his islands, upon which Kamehameha told 
him to continue to hold them in fief during his lifetime, 
on condition that Liholiho should be his heir. 

Kaumualhi then landed, and was hospitably entertained, 


although some of the chiefs urged Kamehameha to have — 


him assassinated, to which he would not consent. A plot 
was then laid to poison him at a feast to be held at 
Waikahalulu, near the shore. Isaac Davis, however, warned 
him of it, so that instead of attending the feast he went 
on board of the ship and sailed for Kauai. For this good 
act Mr. Davis was soon afterward poisoned by the pen 
fidious chiefs, and died in April, 1810. 

' The Sandal-wood Trade.—It was during the period 
from 1810 to 1825 that the sandal-wood trade was at 


its height. This wood was in great demand for the Canton 


market, where it was sold for incense and for the manu- 


facture of fancy articles. It was purchased by the picul ~ 


of 13834 pounds, the price varying from eight to ten dol- 
lars for the picul. 
While it lasted, this wood was a mine of wealth to the 


_ king and chiefs, by means of which they were enabled to- 


buy guns and ammunition, liquors, boats, and schooners, 
as well as silks and other Chinese goods, for which they 
paid exorbitant prices.* Great quantities of these costly 
goods, however, were never used, but being stored away 
in unsuitable storehouses were allowed to decay. 


* This trade greatly increased the oppression of the common people multitudes 
of whom were obliged to remain for months at atime in the mountains searching 
for the trees, felling them, and bringing them down on their backs to the royal 
storehouses, 


OO EE 


CLOSING YEARS OF KAMEHAMEHA’S REIGN 157 


Distilling.—The art of distilling was introduced by some 
Botany Bay convicts before the year 1800. It is said to 
have been first practiced here by a William Stevenson, 
from New South Wales. 

The root of the kz plant (Cordyline terminalis) was 
first baked for days in the ground, after which it be- 
came very sweet. It was then macerated in a canoe with 
water to ferment, and in five or six days was ready for 
distillation. The rude still was made of iron pots, procured 
from ships, with a gun-barrel used as a tube to conduct 
the vapor. The liquor obtained in this way, okolehao, 
was nearly pure alcohol. At one time almost every chief 
had his still. Large quantities of rum were also im- 
ported, and caused incalculable injury to the people. 
Kamehameha, although at first he indulged in it to ex- 
cess, was soon convinced of the evil effects of the prac- 
tice by John Young, and had the strength of mind to 
restrict himself to a very small fixed quantity, and finally 
to abstain entirely.* 

On the 21st of February, 1811, John Jacob Astors 
ship, the ill-fated “Tonquin,” 
chored off Waikiki, and remained a week, buying sup- 
ples from Kamehameha. Twenty-four natives entered 
the service of Astor’s company. 

Kamehameha’s Return to Hawaii, 1811—In 1811 
Kamehameha returned to Hawaii for the purpose of re- 
ceiving and disposing of the sandal-wood that had been 
collected for him on the Windward Islands. He first em- 
barked in his own schooner, the “Keoua,” accompanied 
by many canoes and other small vessels. The “Keoua” 


on its way to Astoria an- 


* Near the end of his life he summoned all the leading men of Hawaii to a 
great assembly at Kailua, at which he ordered all the stills to be destroyed, and 
forbade the manufacture of any kind of liquor. His oldest son, Liholiho, how- 
aver, and many of the other chiefs were in the habit of drinking to excess. 


158 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


sprang a leak off Lanai, on which Waipa, a native ship- 
carpenter, leaped into the sea and nailed canvas over the 
leak, so that the vessel could be safely brought back to 
Honolulu. Kamehameha afterward sailed in Captain 
Windship’s ship for Kealakekua, accompanied by some of 


his chiefs on board of another ship (commanded by Cap- — 


tain William Davis), Kalanimoku following on _ the 
“Keoua.” From Kealakekua the king sailed to Lahaina 
and to Molokai to dispose of the taxes collected there. 
In December, 1811, he sent a cargo of sandal-wood to 
China by Captain Windship, who brought him back a 
cargo of China goods in return the next year. 
Soon after this there was a famine in Hawaii, caused 


by the neglect of agriculture while the people had been — 


forced to spend their time in cutting sandal-wood. Kame- 


hameha set his retinue to work in planting the ground, | 


and also set an example of industry himself. The piece of 


ground which he tilled is still pointed out. As an illus- _ 
tration of his foresight, it is said that he forbade the 


cutting of young sandal-wood, and instructed his bird- 


catchers not to strangle the birds from which they | 


plucked the choice yellow feathers for royal cloaks, but 


to set them free, that other feathers might grow in their | 


place. 


His second son by Keopuolani, Kauikeaouli, was born | 


August 11th, 1818, at Keauhou. 

About this ae Astor’s ship, the “Lark,” ” was cast 
away on the island of Kahoolawe. Kamehameha re 
lieved the wants of the crew, but claimed the wreck for 
himself. 


Russian Aggressions.—Mr. Baranoff, the Russian gov- | 
ernor of Alaska, seems to have had some idea of forming — 


a colony on the islands as early as 1809, when Archi | 


aa 


CLOSING YEARS OF KAMEHAMEHA’S REIGN 159 


bald Campbell visited them in his ship “Neva.” In 1812 
he established a fortified trading-post on Bodega Bay, 
California, in defiance of the Spanish governor. 

In the year 1814 Governor Baranoff sent the ship 
“Attawelpa” on a sealing voyage to the islands, in 
which she was wrecked at Waimea, Kauai. The ship’s 
stores and cargo were left in the care of Kaumualii for 
the owners. 

In 1815 Bardnoff sent Dr. Scheffer to the islands on 
the American ship “ Isabella,” to look after the property.* 

Shortly after, the “ Discovery,” a Russian ship in search 
of seals, arrived with thirty Kodiak Indians .on board, 
who were left at Waimea with Dr. Scheffer. Next, a 
Russian brig, the “ Elemenia,” or “Ilmen,”’ which had been 
trading on the coast of Mexico, ran down to the islands 
for repairs, and a Russian ship, the “Myrtle,” sent by 


Governor Bardnoff, arrived about the same time. The 
| “Myrtle” anchored at Honolulu, where the Russians 
' landed and built a block-house, mounting a few guns and 
' hoisting the Russian flag. As soon as he was informed 


of it, Kamehameha sent Kalanimoku with a large force 


of chiefs and warriors, with orders to watch the Rus- 


' sians, and, if necessary, to resist them with arms. 


On the night after their arrival at Honolulu, the 


' “Myrtle” and the brig both sailed for Kauai, and remained 


some time at Hanalei, where a breast-work was thrown 


up and a few cannon mounted. 


It is said that Kaumualii had been persuaded to give 
Dr. Scheffer the valley of Hanalei. Dr. Scheffer superin- 


tended the building of a fort at Waimea for Kaumualii, 


* He landed with his goods at Kailua, Hawaii, where he was kindly treated 


_ by Kamehameha, until he obtained a passage to Kauai on the ship “ Millwood.’ 
_ After landing his merchandise at Waimea, he built a storehouse there, and en 
' gaged in trade. 


Has aes 


160 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


over which the Russian colors were displayed, and even 
proposed to Kaumualii to lease the whole island of him 
for a term of years. 

Building of the Honolulu Fort.—Meanwhile, by the 


advice and under the direction of John Young, Kalani- 


moku proceeded to erect a fort at Honolulu to command 
the harbor, which was commenced in January, 1816, and 


OLD FORT AT HONOLULU 


completed in a year. It was nearly square, measuring 


three hundred to four hundred feet on a side, with walls 
about twelve feet high and twenty feet thick, built of 
coral rock, with embrasures for cannons. It stood on the 


seaward side of Queen Street, and across the lower part 


of Fort Street. About forty guns, six, eight, and twelve- 
pounders, were afterward mounted, and it was placed 
under the command of Captain Beckley. Eight thirty- 
two-pounders were afterward placed on Punchbowl Hill. 

Departure of the Russians.— By Kamehameha’s orders, 
a@ messenger was sent to Kaumualii with orders to expel 


dn) 


> Seca 


: 


CLOSING YEARS OF KAMEHAMEHA’S REIGN 161 


Dr. Scheffer. The latter, on being informed of the order, 
sent his property on board of the brig, and sailed for 
Hanalei and thence to Honolulu. Here again they were 
soon requested to depart, which they did without resist- 
ance. The ship “Myrtle,” however, being old and unsea- 
worthy, was obliged to return, and sank in the harbor. 
Her crew were kindly treated on shore until they had an 
opportunity to leave. Soon after the Russian sloop of war 
“Diana” touched at Waimea for supplies. The captain 
made some inquiries about Dr. Scheffer’s conduct and his 
treatment, and appeared to be satisfied. 

In October, 1816, John Ebbets sold the ship “ Alba- 
tross,” of one hundred and sixty-five tons burden, to 
Kamehameha Jl. for four hundred piculs of sandal- 
wood. 

Kotzebue’s First Visit, 1816.—Captain Kotzebue, in the 
Russian discovery-ship “ Rurick,” visited the islands near 
the close of the year 1816. | 

On his arrival at Kailua, November 24th, there was 
great excitement on shore, until he assured the king that 
Dr. Scheffer’s proceedings were not authorized by the 
Russian Government. 

After this he was treated with the utmost hospitality, 
in return for which he gave Kamehameha two eight- 
pounder mortars, together with a supply of shells, pow- 
_ der, etc. M. Choris, the artist of the expedition, painted 
the only authentic portrait of Kamehameha in existence. 
The king sent Manuia with Captain Kotzebue to carry 
messages to Kalanimoku and John Young. 

On arriving at Honolulu the “Rurick” was towed into 
_the harbor by eight double canoes, each manned by from 
sixteen to twenty rowers. The port charges were remitted, 
_and she was supplied with provisions gratis. The next 


162 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


day a misunderstanding arose because the Russians in 
surveying the harbor had set up flags on shore. The 
people resented this and were taking up arms, when 
John Young explained matters, substituting brooms for 
flags, and tranquillity was restored. | 
Captain Kotzebue made an interesting trip to Pearl © 
River, and a mock fight with spears was exhibited in his 


<— 
nf 


Het SS S —= 
NO eS = S = 

eats HS AG CUE EGO) M4) phe Ay 2 : " = 
= wD 8) Bi 7 BD WN) ae) 


PORT OF HONOLULU IN 1816 


honor, in which over sixty chiefs took part. He sailed © 
December 14th, 1816, exchanging salutes with the fort, | 
the first time that this had ever been done. ‘ 

Kotzebue had found in the harbor, besides the ship © 
“ Albatross” and other vessels, the brig “Forester,” which 
had been purchased by the king from Captain Piggott in 
exchange for sandal-wood, and her name changed to | 
“Kaahumanu.” In March, 1817, Kamehameha sent her, 
under Captain Alexander Adams, with a cargo of sandal- | 
wood to Canton, touching at Kauai to haul down the — 


CLOSING YEARS OF KAMEHAMEHA’S REIGN 168 


Russian colors and hoist his own, and returning October 
17th, 1817. The result was that the king lost about 
three thousand dollars by the speculation, partly because 
the Chinese authorities would not recognize the Hawauan 
flag. The “Keoua” had previously been taken to Macao 
by Captain Davis, and never returned. The ‘“ Bordeaux 
Packet,” a brig of one hundred and sixty tons, was pur- 
chased in 1817 with sandal-wood. 

The Spanish Pirates.—In the early part of the year 
1818 a suspicious-looking craft named the “ Victory,” alzas 
“Santa Rosa,” arrived at Kealakekua Bay under the com- 
mand of an Englishman named Turner. The crew, who 
spoke Spanish, were a lawless set, and spent most of their 
time in carousing on shore. They had abundance of gold 
and silver, crucifixes, candelabras, cups, and other sacred 
vessels, taken from Roman Catholic churches. Kameha- 
meha purchased the ship of her officers and crew, and 
renamed her the “Liholiho,” intending to send her to 
Canton with a cargo of sandal-wood. 

At last, in September, 1818, a Spanish man-of-war from 
Buenos Ayres, the “ Argentina,’ commanded by Captain 
Bouchard, arrived, and seized the “ Victory.” The captain 
informed Kamehameha that its crew were pirates, who 
during the war of independence had run away with the 
“Santa Rosa,” a sloop of war belonging to the province of 
La Plata, had pillaged a town on the Chilian coast, and 
stripped the churches of their sacred ornaments and fur- 
niture. Accordingly, the king immediately sent out his 
messengers, who captured most of the buccaneers and deliv- 
ered them up to justice. The greater part of the church 
_ ornaments were also recovered by his orders and restored 
to Captain Bouchard, who appointed Don Marin consul of 
' La Plata. Hearing that the first officer of the “ Victory” 


164 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


had gone to Waimea, Kauai, Captain Bouchard sailed 
thither with an order from Kamehameha to the chiefs 
of Kauai. The pirate was given up, and summarily tried 


and executed on the beach at Waimea, after which both — 


vessels laid in supplies at Honolulu, and finally sailed for 
California. 


In 1817 the “Argentina” had cruised against the | 


Spaniards, and captured a brigantine belonging to the 
governor of Guam. In November, 1818, Captain Bouchard 
made a descent on the California coast, and sacked the 
town of Monterey. 


During this year three men were sacrificed at Keala- 


kekua for petty violations of the tabu. 

Death of Kamehameha I.—Kamehameha resided at 
Kailua seven years.* He died May 8th, 1819, at the age 
of eighty-two years, and in the faith of his ancestors. His 


work was done. He had consolidated the group under 


one government, put an end to feudal anarchy and petty 
wars, and prepared the way for civilization and Chris- 
tianity. His faults were those of the age and society in 
which he lived, and both morally and mentally he stood 
far above the other chiefs of his time. 

It is said that during his last illness, when the priests 
proposed that a number of human victims should be sac- 


rificed to his patron deity in order to prolong his life, he 
replied, ‘The men are sacred to the king,” meaning his 


son, Liholiho. 
The funeral rites observed at that time have been 
described in Chapter XII. As the district of Kona was 


*Tt is said that near the end of his life he heard of the changes that were 
taking place at the Society Islands, and asked some questions in regard to the 


CEE RL TE eS 


nature of the Christian religion, but found no one who could answer his ins | 


quiries. 


CLOSING YEARS OF KAMEHAMEHA’S REIGN 165 


polluted for the time being, the heir to the throne had 
to leave at once for Kohala. The usual human sacrifice, 
moepuu, seems not to have been offered, but the kunz 
sorcerers performed their incantations to discover who 
had prayed the king to death. The conduct of the people 
in general was such as forbids description. “According 
to custom, all law was suspended and all restraints taken 
away.’ After the bones of the late king had been deified 
Hoapili took charge of them and had them concealed in 
some cave in North Kona. The place of their conceal- 
ment has never been revealed. 


PART IIl 
LATER. l= Oka 


CHAPTER XXII 


1819 


ABOLITION OF IDOLATRY 


NSTALLATION of Liholiho, or Kamehameha II.— 
By his will Kamehameha had left to his son, Li- 
holiho, the sovereignty over all the islands, and the title 
of Moi, while the war-god Ku-kaili-moku was intrusted 
to the care of Kekuaokalani, the son of his late brother 
Kelimaikai. 

From all accounts Liholiho appears to have been a 
heedless and dissolute young prince, entirely wanting in 
the great qualities of his father. Knowing his unfitness | 
to govern, Kamehameha had appointed Kaahumanu, who 
was already the guardian, kahu, of the young princes, as 
premier or kuhina nui, to exercise equal authority with 
the king. 

Undoubtedly the leading chiefs, as well as Hewahewa, 
the high-priest, had long since ceased to believe in the — 
power of their ancient deities; and the highest female — 
chiefs, especially the two queens, Keopuolani and Kaahu- — 
manu, had secretly resolved upon the abolition of the | 
oppressive tabu system. Hence as soon as the iron hand 
of Kamehameha was withdrawn, the whole structure was | 


166 


1819 167 


ready to crumble into ruins. In fact,on the very morn- 
ing of Kamehameha’s death the .six chiefs present pro- 
posed to Kaahumanu to renounce the tabu; but she 
thought the time for this step had not come. 

About ten days after Kamehameha’s death, Liholiho 
returned to Kailua, and on the second day after his ar- 
rival he was formally vested with the sovereign power. 
The ceremony took place at Kamakahonu, adjoining the 
old heiau, before a vast concourse of chiefs, soldiers, and 
common people. 

Liholiho came forth from the heiau, arrayed in a 
feather cloak and a cocked hat, and attended by chiefs 
wearing feather helmets and mantles, and bearing mag- 
nificent kahilis or plumed staffs of state. 

Kaahumanu, in similar costume, advanced to meet 
him, and publicly declared the will of his father, which 
constituted him king and herself premier with equal 
authority. She concluded by proposing that they should 
henceforth disregard the tabus. The king, however, re- 
mained silent, and withheld his consent. 

Carefully trained as he had been in idolatry, and 
remembering the last injunctions of his father, on no 
account to forsake it, he was very slow to yield to the 
general sentiment of the chiefs. The same evening 
Keopuolani, the queen-mother, sent to the king for his 
younger brother, Kauikeaouli, a mere child, to come and 
eat with her in defiance of tabu. Liholiho permitted it, but 
was careful himself to refrain from any violation of tabu. 

Soon after this he returned to Kawaihae, where he 
attempted to consecrate a heiau, and did the same at. 


. Honokohau in North Kona.* 


*He failed in both cases to obtain a perfect aha or faultless ceremony, on 


, account of the drunkenness and disorder that prevailed. 


168 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Freycinet’s Visit. While the king was still at 
Kawaihae, the French discovery-ship “ Uranie,” Captain 
Freycinet, arrived at Kailua August 8th, 1819. He was 
hospitably received by Kuakini, a/zas Governor Adams, 
and made a series of scientific observations on shore. On — 
the 12th he proceeded to Kawaihae, where the king and 
most of the chiefs were assembled in council, and spent 
several days in friendly intercourse with them. A French- 
man from Bordeaux, named Jean Rives, who had been 
twelve years in the islands, acted as interpreter for the 
king. | 

In view of the disaffection of Kekuaokalani, and 
the impending danger of civil war, a grand council was 
convened on the 14th, at which Captain Freycinet, after 
referring to the cession to Vancouver, declared that 
France and England were allies, and were both ready to 
assist Liholiho in maintaining peace and order in his 
kingdom. Immediately after this council, Kalanimoku, 
at his own request, was baptized on board of the 
“Uranie” by the chaplain, the Abbé De Quelen. 

The next day Captain Freycinet sailed for Lahaina, 
where he set up an observatory on shore, adjoining the 
“brick palace,’ and made a series of pendulum observa- 
tions. Having laid in supplies of fresh provisions and 
water, he proceeded to Honolulu on the 26th, and ex- 
changed salutes with the fort. Boki, a younger brother 
of Kalanimoku, was acting governor at Oahu. 

Captain W. H. Davis, who was extensively engaged in 
the sandal-wood and fur trade, entertained Captain Frey- 
cinet at his residence on shore. The latter justly praises 
Don Marin for his industry and enterprise. Governor 
Boki, on learning from Captain Davis that Kalanimoku 
had been baptized, requested the same privilege for him- 


1819 169 


self. He was accordingly baptized on board of the 
“Uranie” on the 27th. 

There were then lying in the harbor the ship “ Para- 
gon,” Captain Wildes, and the “ Enterprise,” both engaged 
in the sandal-wood trade, besides the new brig “ Niu,” 
which had been ordered by Kamehameha, and was sold 
to Liholiho for $51,750, paid for in sandal-wood at $10 
per picul. 

Captain Freycinet, after laying in supplies of fire-wood, 
etc., sailed for Port Jackson August 380th, 1819. 

Abolition of Idolatry.— Meanwhile Kaahumanu sent 
for Liholiho again, requesting him to renounce idolatry 
on his return to Kailua. Accordingly, Liholiho with his 
retinue embarked in several canoes, and spent two days 
in a drunken debauch at sea, during which he committed 
several violations of tabu. 

On his arrival at Kailua he found that a great feast 
had been prepared, at which he sat down with a large 
company of chiefs of both sexes, and openly feasted with 
them, while a multitude of common people looked on with 
mingled fear and curiosity to see what judgments would 
follow so impious an act. As they saw no harm ensue 
they raised a joyful shout, ‘The tabus are at an end, and 
the gods are a lie!” 

The effect of it was like that of displacing the key-stone 
of an arch. The whole structure both of idol-worship 
and of the tabus fell at once into ruins. The high-priest 
himself set the example of setting fire to the idols and 
their sanctuaries, and messengers were: sent even as far 
aS Kauai to proclaim the abolition of the tabus, which 
was termed the az noa or free eating, in opposition to 
the at kapu. Kaumualii gladly consented, and a general 
_ jubilee pervaded the islands, attended with revelry and 


= . 


170 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


license; but the tabu system was too ancient and deeply : 
rooted to be given up without a struggle. | 

Insurrection of Kekuaokalani.—Kekuaokalani, who was 
a brave and popular young chief, was highly indignant 
at the conduct of Liholiho, and retired to Kaawaloa. — 
There the priests flocked around him and offered him the | 
crown, repeating an ancient Hawaiian proverb: “A re- 
ligious chief shall possess a kingdom, but irreligious chiefs _ 
shall always be poor.” <A large body of chiefs and com- — 
mon people rallied around the standard of this “ defender 
of the faith,” while his adherents took up arms in the 
district of Hamakua and killed a chief named Kainapau. — 

Kaahumanu and her friends, who had been reveling | 
deeply at Kailua, suddenly awoke to a sense of their | 
danger. 

A few months before, the king had purchased over 
eleven thousand dollars’ worth of muskets and ammu- 
nition from an American trader, which now stood them 
in good stead. 

They decided, however, to try conciliatory measures 
first, and sent Naihe, the orator, and Hoapili, together 
with Keopuolani, to negotiate with Kekuaokalani; but all 
their entreaties were in vain, and they were glad to es- 
cape with their lives. 

Battle of Kuamoo.— Kekuaokalani resolved to march 
immediately on Kailua, hoping to take the royal party 
by surprise. But Kaahumanu and her general, Kalani- 
moku, were equal to the crisis. That night the arms 
were given out, and in the morning the army advanced 
to meet the rebels. The two armies met near Kuamoo, 
about four miles north of Kaawaloa. As the royalist 
troops approached, they received a volley from a scouting 
party of rebels and several men fell, on which they fell 


y 


1819 171 


back to the cover of a stone wall, but finding the party 
opposed to them to be small, they advanced again and 
pursued the rebels till they came up to the main body, 
and the battle became general. Kekuaokalani had fewer 
men and fewer muskets than Kalanimoku, and but little 
ammunition. His men were outflanked and driven down 
toward the sea-shore, where they were exposed to a flank- 
ing fire from a squadron of double canoes, one of which 
carried a mounted gun under the charge of a foreign 
gunner. , 

Kekuaokalani, although wounded early in the action, 
fought bravely, and repeatedly rallied his men, until, as 
Ellis relates, ‘“‘unable to stand from loss of blood, he sat 
on a fragment of lava and twice loaded and fired his 
musket at the advancing foe. He now received a ball in 
the left breast, and covering his face with his feather 
cloak, expired in the midst of his men. 

“His wife, Manono, during the whole of the battle had 
fought by his side with steady and dauntless courage. A 
few moments after her husband’s death she called out 
for quarter, but the words had hardly left her lips before 
she received a bullet in her left temple, fell upon the 
lifeless body of her husband, and expired.” 

The rebels having lost their leader were soon scattered 
or taken prisoners.* | 

This battle was fought about December 20th, 1819. 

Hoapili was then sent with a force to Hamakua, and 
made short work with the insurrection in Waipio. The 
people now turned with rage and contempt against their 
idols. They slew Kuawa, the priest who had been Keku- 
aokalani’s chief adviser. 


* An oblong pile of stones near the sea, covered with vines, long marked the 
resting-place of the brave but misguided Kekuaokalani and his heroic wife. 


172 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


They now made more thorough work of destroying 
their images and sacred inclosures, with a few exceptions, 
such as the Hale o Keawe at Honaunau. All public wor- 
ship and sacrifices ceased, and, in the words of Mr. J arves, 


“Hawaii presented to the world the strange spectacle of _ 


a nation without a religion.” 

Still the ancient idolatry was cherished by many in 
secret; and many of their superstitions, especially those 
relating to sorcery and the cause of disease, were destined 
to survive for generations to come, and to blend with and 
color their conceptions of Christianity. 3 


CHAPTER XXIII 
1820-1823 


COMMENCEMENT OF THE AMERICAN PROTESTANT 
MISSION 


Obookiah.— - strong interest in the Hawaiian people 
was awakened in New England by several Hawaiian 
youths who had been taken to the United States as sea- 
men, and especially by Opukahaia, commonly known as 
Obookiah. He was brought to New Haven by a Captain 
Brintnall in 1809, where he attracted the attention of 
Mr. E. W. Dwight and other kind friends, who gave him 
an education.* 

Arrival of the Pioneer Missionaries.—The first com- 
pany of American missionaries to these islands embarked 
at Boston, October 23d, 1819, in the brig “Thaddeus,” 
Captain Blanchard. It consisted of two clergymen and 
five laymen, with their wives, besides three Hawaiian 
youths from the Cornwall school, who were to act as 
assistants, viz., Kanui, Hopu, and Honolii. 

Humehume or George Tamoree, a son of King Kau- 
mualii by a common woman, was also a passenger. He 
had been sent to America for an education in childhood, 


*In 1817 the ‘‘ Foreign Mission School” was instituted at Cornwall, Conn., for 
the instruction of young men from heathen lands, and five young Hawaiians 
were among its earliest pupils. Obookiah died while a member of the school in 
1818. 

1348 


174 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


and in later years had enlisted in the American navy, in 
which he served during the War of 1812 with Great 
Britain, and: the war with Algiers. On his return to 
Boston he was sent to the Cornwall school for a time. 
The “Thaddeus” approached the coast of Kohala 
March 81st, 1820, and a boat was sent ashore under Mr. 
J. Hunnewell, the first officer, to learn the state of the 


country. On his return he said: “Liholiho is king; the- 


tabus are abolished; the idols are burned; the temples 
are destroyed. There has been war, but now there is 
peace.” | 
The wonder and gratitude of the missionaries can not 
be described. Off Kawaihae they were boarded by Kala- 
nimoku and two female chiefs, Kalakua and Namahana, 
who took passage with them to Kailua, where the king 
resided. They arrived at Kailua April 4th, where the 
captain, with Messrs. Bingham and Thurston, attended 
by Hopu as interpreter, called on the king to explain the 
objects for which they had come, and to ask permission 
to reside in the country. On the 6th the king and his 
family dined with them on board by invitation. Kalani- 
moku appeared quite civilized in his dress and manners, 
but Liholiho’s royal costume consisted of a malo, a green 
silk mantle fastened over the right shoulder, a string of 


beads around his neck, and a wreath of yellow feathers 


on his head. 
After a week’s delay, permission was granted them on 
the 12th to reside in the islands one year, two of them 
at Kailua and the rest at Honolulu. John Young had 
used ‘his influence in their favor, assuring the chiefs that 
they taught the same religion as the English mission- 
aries whom Vancouver had proposed to send to them. 
Establishment of the American Mission.—Mr. and Mrs, 


THE AMERICAN PROTESTANT MISSION 175 


Thurston and Dr. and Mrs. Holman were assigned a small 
thatched hut to occupy in common at Kailua, while the 
rest of the party proceeded in the brig to Honolulu. 
There Boki, who had been appointed governor of Oahu, 
gave Mr. Bingham and his associates a building-site on 
the arid, treeless plain half a mile east of the landing, 
and then some distance from the village. 

Their firewood and water were brought a distance of 
several miles. 

At Kaumualii’s urgent request Messrs. Whitney and 
Ruggles went to reside at Waimea, Kauai. No chief gave 
Christianity so cordial a reception, or made such rapid 
improvement as Kaumualii. In August, 1820, one Jean 
Rives, a Frenchman in Liholiho’s service, came from 
Kailua to Honolulu to expel all foreigners “who did not 
belong to the king or Kalanimoku.” In consequence of 
this, several Americans removed to Fanning’s Island. 

The first whale-ship, the “ Mary,” Captain Joseph Allen, 
arrived at Honolulu in 1820, and was soon followed by 
many others. 

In November, as the king and court removed to Hon- 
olulu, Mr. and Mrs. Thurston were obliged to accompany 
them, and sailed as far as Lahaina in a small brig with 
four hundred and seventy-five passengers besides a 
numerous live-stock. This crowding was not an unusual 
occurrence. 

The first pupils of the missionaries were the chiefs 
and their favorite attendants, and the wives and children 
of foreigners. At first their teaching was entirely in 
English, but by degrees they devoted their time and 
energies more and more to the task of mastering the 
Hawaiian language, and of reducing it ta writing, until 
_ they made it their chief medium of instruction. 


176 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


The foreigners in Honolulu at this time subscribed 
upwards of six hundred dollars for the education of orphan 
children. 

Commander Vassilieff, of the Russian Exploring Expe- 
dition, who visited the islands in April and again in 
December, 1821, strongly recommended the mission to 
the favor of the chiefs, and treated both parties with 
the utmost kindness and courtesy. 

In 1821 the frame of a dwelling-house was sent out 
from Boston for the mission, and with much difficulty 
permission was obtained from the king to build it. At 
first he said, “My father never allowed a foreigner to 
build a house in this country except for the king.” When 
the cellar was dug, a report was spread that it was 
intended to be a magazine for arms and ammunition to 
be used against the king. The first church, a thatched 
building, was built in August, 1821. 

During the summer of 1821, Kaumualii proposed to 
send his brig, the “ Becket,” to open intercourse with the 
Society Islands, and offered two of the American mission- 


_— 


aries a free passage thither to confer with the English 


missionaries and to obtain copies of their publications. 
In consequence, however, of the opposition of Mr. Jones, 


the American consul, and of the traders, this expedition 


was given up. 


Character of Liholiho, Kamehameha II.—The conduct 
of Liholiho* formed a striking contrast to that of his 
father. Discarding the old counselors of his father, he 


chose his favorites out of the lowest class of whites, and 
spent most of his time in revelry and debauchery. He 


spent much time in roving from place to place with a 


numerous train of worthless retainers, who ravaged the 


land like a swarm of locusts. The treasures accumulated 


THE AMERICAN PROTESTANT MISSION iT 


by his father were squandered, and he was soon involved 
in ruinous debts.* 

Many other chiefs followed his example of extrava- 
gance and dissipation, to support which the common 
people were taxed and plundered, until, as they expressed 
it, “debt was more oppressive than war.” Vast quanti- 
ties of sandal-wood were collected and sold, but the debts 
increased still more rapidly, and new methods of extor- 
tion were devised. All trade with foreigners was subject 
to the monopoly of the chiefs, and the common people 
had nothing that they could call their own. 

Liholiho’s Visit to Kauai.—On the 21st of July, 1821, 
without disclosing his intention, Liholiho left Honolulu 
for Ewa in an open sail-boat with Boki, Naihe, and about 
thirty attendants, including two women. 

But on arriving at Puuloa he refused to enter the 
lagoon and passed around Barber’s Point. Then, to their 
surprise and consternation, he ordered the helmsman to 
steer for Kauai, nearly one hundred miles distant. ‘They 
were without water, provisions, chart, or compass, the 
channel was rough and the wind strong; but the king, 
half intoxicated, would not listen to advice, and spread- 
ing out the fingers of one hand, said, “Here is your 
compass; steer by this.” Twice the boat was nearly ~ 
capsized, the seas broke over them, and his companions 
begged him to put back. “No,” said the king, “bail out 
the water, and goon. If you return with the boat, I will 
swim to Kauai.” 

After a night of peril and fatigue they arrived off 


* For example, in 1820 he purchased from Captain Suter a beautiful yacht 
called ‘‘ Cleopatra’s Barge,” built in Salem, Mass., for $90,000, to be paid in 
sandal-wood. Her name was then changed to ‘“*Haaheo o Hawaii,” ‘Pride of 
Hawaii” The brig “ Thaddeus ” was also bought for $40,000. 


178 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Waimea at the dawn of day, where they threw them- 
selves entirely into the power of Kaumualii. 

That noble chieftain, as soon as he heard of their 
arrival, instead of taking advantage of their helpless con- 
dition, went off in a canoe to meet Liholiho, gave him a 
hospitable reception, and took every pains to entertain 
him with honor. He then sent his brig to Oahu to 
inform Liholiho’s people of his safety, and to bring his 
wives to Kauai. The following day, in an assembly of 
chiefs, Kaumualii addressed his guest, Liholiho, offering 
to surrender to him his kingdom, his fort, guns, and ves- | 
sels. After this a deep silence prevailed for a short time, 
all awaiting with anxiety the reply of Liholiho. At length 
he answered: ‘I did not come here to take away your 
island.. Keep your country and take care of it as before, 
and do what you please with your vessels.” 

The two kings then spent several weeks in a tour 
around the island of Kauai. 

On their return, September 16th, Kaumualii was 
invited on board of the “Cleopatra’s Barge” in the evening. 
While the unsuspicious prince was seated in the cabin, 
orders were secretly given to make sail, and he was torn 
from his kingdom, to remain henceforth a virtual prisoner | 
of state. Soon after his arrival at Honolulu, October 9th, 
he was induced to marry the haughty Kaahumanu, who | 
also took to husband hig son, Kealiiahonui. 

The First Printing.—The first printing in Hawaii 
was done January 7th, 1822. Keeaumoku II. (also called 
Governor Cox) was present and assisted in taking a few 
impressions of eight pages of a Hawaiian spelling-book 
The king and other chiefs came in to see the wonderful 
machine, and a new impulse was given to the desire for 
knowledge among them. Much ‘pains had been taken in 


| 


THE AMERICAN PROTESTANT MISSION 179 


settling upon the best method of expressing the sounds 
of the language. An alphabet of twelve letters was finally 
decided upon, the vowels having the same powers as in 
the Italian language. All the leading chiefs, including 
the king, now eagerly applied themselves to learn the 
arts of reading and writing, and soon began to use them 
in business and correspondence. 

Visit of the English Deputation.—The arrival of Mr. 
Ellis and his associates at Honolulu, April 16th, 1822, 
was of great service to the cause of Christianity. 

To fulfill a promise made by Vancouver to Kame- 
hameha I., a schooner of seventy tons, called the “ Prince 
Regent,” with an armament of six guns, had been built 
and fitted out at Port Jackson, New South Wales. Cap- 
tain Kent, of the brig ‘“ Mermaid,’ was commissioned to 
present this vessel to Liholiho in the name of the British 
Government. Having touched at the Society Islands on 
his way, and finding that Messrs. Tyerman and Bennett, 
who were there as a deputation from the London Mis- 
sionary. Society, and the Rev. W. Ellis, with two converted 
chiefs of Huahine, were desirous of proceeding to the 
Marquesas Islands, he offered them a free passage thither 
by way of the Hawaiian Islands, which they accepted. 

They were most cordially received both by the native 
chiefs and by the American Mission, and were detained 
at Honolulu four months, while Captain Kent made a 
trip to Fanning’s Island for béche de mer. Their original 
plan of a mission to the Marquesas Islands was finally 
given up. The Tahitian teachers, Auna and Matatore, 
were immediately taken into the confidence of the chiefs, 
to whom they described the character and influence of 
the English missionaries among their own people. The 
English members of the party were able to refute many 


180 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


false reports that had been circulated, and to dissipate 
any lingering jealousies by joining harmoniously In the 
work of the American missionaries. Such is the similar- 
ity between the Tahitian and Hawaiian dialects, that in 
two months Mr. Ellis was able to preach fluently to the 
natives, and composed several hymns in their language. 

The “Prince Regent” was formally presented to the 
king May Ist, but a few months after was wrecked on 
the east side of Oahu. 


Other Events in the Year 1822—Kaahumanu and 


Kaumualii, with a large retinue, including Auna, made a 
tour through the windward islands in May and June, 
1822. Immense quantities of provisions, kapas, etc., were 
laid at their feet in different places (hookupu). Feasting, 
dancing, and revelry went on together with the burning 
of idols) Kamehameha’s poison-god, Kalaipahoa, was 


burned at Hilo June 4th, and at Kailua on the 26th © 


one hundred and two idols collected from various hiding 
places were consumed in one bonfire. 


The first Christian marriage in the islands was solem- — 


nized August 11th, 1822, between Thomas Hopu and 
Delia, before a large assembly. On the 138th of August, 
Kaahumanu and the nominal king of Kauai, with their 
immense retinue of chiefs and servants, numbering nearly 


twelve hundred persons, sailed for Kauai on board of two — 


brigs and two schooners, the decks of which were so 
crowded that the people could scarcely find room to sit 
or stand. They took Auna and others with them as 


teachers. The object of this expedition was to receive’ 


homage and presents from their subjects and to collect 
sandal-wood. 


As the king and chiefs and American missionaries | 
united in inviting Mr. Ellis to take up his residence at 


THE AMERICAN PROTESTANT MISSION 181 


the islands with his family as well as Auna, the deputa- 
tion gave its consent. The whole party sailed for the 
Society Islands in August by the brig “Mermaid.” Mr. 
and Mrs. Ellis, with Taua and Tute, Tahitian teachers, 
returned from Tahiti in the “ Active,’ Captain Richard 
Charlton, arriving in Honolulu February 4th, 1823. 

Arrival of the First “ Reinforcement.’—The first rein- 
forcement to the mission, consisting of six missionaries 
and their wives, arrived at Honolulu April 27th, 18238, on 
the “Thames,” Captain Clasby, and were well received 
by the chiefs. During the last three years much progress 
had been made in civilization. The English deputation 
had found twenty-four vessels at anchor at Honolulu, 
mostly whalers from the United States. The village con- 
tained from two thousand to three thousand inhabitants, 
and boasted four mercantile establishments, well supplied 
with goods, which carried on trade with the northwest 
coast of America, the Spanish Main, and China. The 
chiefs appeared on state occasions dressed in civilized 
style, and their houses began to be supplied with costly 
furniture. Many of them had learned how to read and 
write, and several had embraced Christianity. The poy- 
erty and misery of the common people, however, had 
increased. 

A Grand Pageant.—The annual feast in commemora- 
tion of Liholiho’s accession to the throne was celebrated 
this year (1828) with barbaric magnificence. In the grand 
procession of the last day (May 8th), each of Liholiho’s 
wives and his younger brother and sister were borne in 
state with all the pomp and splendor that the country 
could furnish. — 

The head queen, Kamamalu, was seated in a whale- 
boat, fastened to a platform of spars, and borne on the 


182 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


shoulders of seventy men. The boat and platform were 
covered with fine broadcloth, relieved by richly colored 
native cloth. The bearers marched in a solid phalanx, 
the outer ranks of which wore scarlet and yellow feather 
cloaks and helmets. The queen wore a scarlet silk paw 
and a coronet of feathers, and was screened from the sun 
by a huge umbrella of scarlet damask, supported by a 
chief wearing a scarlet malo and a feather helmet. On 
one quarter of the boat stood Naihe, and on the other 
Kalanimoku, similarly clad, and each holding a scarlet 
kahilt or plumed staff of state, thirty feet in height.* 

Meanwhile the king and his suite, nearly naked, and 
intoxicated, rode from place to place on horses without 
saddles, folowed on the run by a shabby escort of fifty 
or sixty men.ft 

* One of the queen-dowagers wore seventy-two yards of orange and scarlet — 
kerseymere, which was wrapped around her waist until her arms were sustained 
by it in a horizontal position, and the remainder was formed into a train sup- 
ported by her attendants. 

+t Companies of dancing and singing girls, to the number of several hundreds, 


met the procession in different places, encircling the highest chiefs, and chanting 
their praises. 


CHAPTER XXIV 
1823-1824 


LIHOLIHO’S VOYAGE TO ENGLAND AND DEATH 


Death of Keopuolani, 1823.—About the end of May, 
1823, Keopuolani, the queen-mother, who was the highest 
chief in the nation by blood, moved her residence to 
Lahaina, Maui. At her request, Messrs. Stewart and 
Richards, with Taua, her Tahitian chaplain, accompanied 
her, and founded a mission-station there under her 
patronage.* 

On the 21st of August, Kaahumanu, Kaumualii, Kala- 
nimoku, and other chiefs arrived at Lahaina in a fleet of 
three brigs and two schooners, of which not only the decks, 
but also the chains, bowsprits, and tops, were crowded with 
people. Soon after, Keopuolani was taken with her last ill- 
ness, and expired September 16th, after receiving baptism 
from Mr. Ellis. She had previously given strict orders for- 
bidding all heathen practices at her death. Many of the 
natives, however, fled to the mountains from fear that 
anarchy would be let loose, as in former times, but their 
fears were groundless. Her funeral was conducted in a 
quiet and orderly manner, with solemn religious rites, 
which was considered a signal triumph of Christianity 
over pagan superstition. 

*Of a remarkably interesting and amiable character, she had already em- 
braced Christianity in spite of bitter opposition, and had set her face against the 


debauchery and revelry of the court. 
183 


184 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Mr. Wm. Ellis, accompanied by Messrs. Thurston, 


Bishop, and Goodrich, was engaged from the beginning 
of July to the end of September in making a thorough | 
exploration of the island of Hawaii, of which he pubusied 
a very interesting and valuable report. 

Liholiho’s Voyage to England and His Death. = Abou 


this time Liholiho decided to visit England and the 


| 


United States. In this he wag ; 


by. a desire to secure protec- 


against Russia. A council of 
the high-chiefs was held at Lae 
haina to consider the subject, 
at which Kaahumanu was ac 
knowledged as regent with Ka- 
lanimoku as her prime-minis- 
ter, and Kauikeaouli confirmed 
as heir-apparent. 

The king embarked in an 
English whale-ship, “L’Aigle,” 
commanded by Captain Star- 
buck, an American. He was accompanied by Kamamalu, 
the queen, by Boki and his wife, Liliha, by Kekuanaoa, 
Kapihe, Manuia, and James Young. | 

The king and chiefs were very anxious that Mr. Ellis 


KAMEHAMEAA Il. 


should accompany the party, and offered a large sum for | 


his passage, but Captain Starbuck positively refused to 


actuated partly by curiosity to. 
see foreign lands, and partly 


tion for his country, especially 


receive him. Jean B. Rives, the Frenchman, secretly | 


took passage with them, and was employed as interpreter. 
They sailed from Honolulu November 27th, 1828, amid 
the sad forebodings of the people. 


1828-1824 185 


The king had placed on board twenty-five thousand 
dollars in coin, which Captain Starbuck took charge of. 
The “L’Aigle” touched at Rio Janeiro, where they received 
distinguished attentions from the British consul-general 
and the emperor, Dom Pedro. During the voyage, “ 
pains were spared to induce the chiefs to drink and 
gamble.” 

On arriving at Portsmouth, May 22d, 1824, Captain 
Starbuck landed them without providing for their com- 
fort or -giving notice to the government. On being 
informed of their arrival by the owners, the government 
appointed the Hon. F. Byng as their guardian, and paid 
all their expenses while in England. 

When their cash-chests were opened at the Bank of 
England, only ten thousand dollars were found, and no 
account was ever rendered of the balance by Captain 
Starbuck, who alleged that three thousand dollars had 
been spent at Rio Janeiro, and some more on the way 
from Portsmouth to London. Rives was dismissed from 
his office as interpreter on account of gross misconduct, 
and James Young was appointed in his place. 

The royal company received great attention from the 
‘English nobility, were feasted and flattered, and taken to 
‘see all the sights and shows of London. 

About the 10th of June, Manuia, the steward, was 
attacked by the measles, and soon the whole party were 
taken ill, The inferior chiefs soon recovered, but the 
queen grew rapidly worse, her lungs were affected, and 
in spite of the best medical attendance she died on the 
8th of July. | 
_ This sad event so affected the spirits of the king that 
‘he sank rapidly and expired on the morning of the 14th. 
The survivors were treated with great kindness, and were 


ho 


186 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


received by the king, George IV., at Windsor Castle, Sep- . 
tember 11th, where he advised them to attend to the 
instructions of the missionaries, and promised to protect 
them from foreign aggression. 

The Rebellion on Kauai, 1824.—Meanwhile the nation 
had suffered a great loss in the death of Kaumualii, king | 
of Kauai, May 26th, 1824. His remains were deposited — 
in Lahaina by the side of Keopuolani.* ; 

By his will he bequeathed his dominion to Kaahumanu ~ 
and Kalanimoku in trust for Liholiho. 

When the news of his death reached Kauai, there was 
an outbreak of the heathen party, and many outrages | 
were committed in different parts of the island. Kaha- 
laia, anephew of Kalanimoku, a young man unfit for the — 
place, was appointed governor, upon which a conspiracy | 
was formed to throw off the yoke. But Kapule, the widow 
of Kaumualii, remained loyal. 

Soon after this Kalanimoku went to Kauai to settle — 
the affairs of the island, and to look after the wreck of 
the “ Cleopatra’s Barge” at Hanalei. In a council which 
he called at Waimea, he declared the will of Kaumualii, | 
and refused to make the new division of lands demanded | 
by the disaffected chiefs. 

On this Kiaimakani and other heathen chiefs invited 
George Humehume, who was living at Wahiawa, to put — 
himself at their head, and offered to make him king of — 
Kauai and Niihau. He accepted the offer, and before — 
light on the morning of the 8th of August they made a 
desperate attack on the fort at Waimea. After half an 
hour’s hard fighting the rebels were repulsed with a loss 


* Of him Mr. Stewart testifies that “*he never knew of a word or action of 
his that was unbecoming a prince or even inconsistent with the character of @ — 
pious man.” 


= ——~ 


1823-1824 187 


of ten men, while six of the garrison were killed, includ- 
ing two young Englishmen. 

The next day Kalanimoku sent a schooner to Oahu 
and Maui with the news of the rebellion, and by his 
advice Messrs. Bingham and Whitney took passage in it 
for Honolulu.* 

The news of the war caused great excitement both at 
Honolulu and Lahaina. A thousand warriors from Oahu 
and two companies from Maui soon sailed for Kauai 
under the command of Hoapili, and landed at Waimea. 
After organizing and arranging his forces, Hoapili marched 
to meet the rebels August 18th. 

As he was versed in ancient astrology, he spent night 
after night in studying the positions of the planets and 
principal stars in order to learn the result of the impend- 
ing conflict. He gave orders to spare the vanquished, 
and to abstain from cruelty to prisoners and non-com- 
batants. | 

The two armies met east of Hanapepe, two miles inland, 
where the insurgents were posted, with two field-pieces. 
These, however, in the hands of ignorant gunners, did 
little or no execution, and Hoapili’s men, steadily advanc- 
ing, captured them with the loss of only one man. Dis- 
heartened at this, the rebels gave way, and were pursued 
without mercy. In the action and pursuit forty or fifty 
of them were killed. Kiaimoku was shot, but George 
Humehume escaped to the mountains, where he was con- 


_cealed for several weeks. At length he was captured and 

' brought before Kalanimoku, who treated him kindly, and 

_ soon after sent him to Oahu, where he remained until his 
death in 1826. 


* During the voyage Kamakakini, a young chief who had been taken prisoner, 


_ was stabbed in the night and thrown overboard. 


188 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Kaahumanu and the other high-chiefs held a grand 
council at Waimea, for the final settlement of the island 
of Kauai, which was now treated as a conquered province. 
The disaffected chiefs were distributed on the other 


islands, and their lands were divided among the loyal | 


chiefs and their favorites. Kaikioewa, a famous warrior 
chief, was appointed governor. 

At this time Mr. Ellis was obliged by the ill-health of 
his wife to return to England. 

Progress of Education.—After the war was over, the 
leading chiefs exerted themselves more than ever to 


suppress drunkenness and vice, and to promote educa- — 


tion. 


Before the end of 1824, two thousand people had — 


learned to read, and a peculiar system of schools was 


spreading rapidly over the islands. Hach chief sent the © 


most proficient scholars in his retinue to his different — 


lands to act as teachers, with orders to his tenants to 


attend school. The eagerness of the people to acquire | 


the new and wonderful arts of reading and writing was 


intense, and at length almost the whole population went © 
to school. The time of school was from one to two hours — 


in the afternoon, and the pupils were called together by 
the blowing of a conch-shell. 


Kapiolani’s Defiance of Pele.—Kapiolani, daughter of | 
the great chief, Keawe-mauhili, of Hilo, was one of the — 


noblest characters of her time. Her husband, Naihe, 
called the national orator, was the son of Keawe-a-heulu 
of Kaawaloa, where they generally resided. 

Though at one time intemperate and dissolute, Kapio- 


lani became an example to her countrywomen of virtue | 
and refinement, and excelled them all in the readiness ~ 


with which she adopted civilized habits and sentiments. — 


1823-1824 189 


In December, 1824, she determined to break the spell 
of the belief in Pele, the dread goddess of the volcano. In 
spite of the strenuous opposition of her friends, and even 
of her husband, she made a journey of about one hun- 
dred and fifty miles, mostly on foot, from Kealakekua to 
Hilo, visiting the great crater of Kilauea on her way, in 
order to defy the wrath of Pele, and to ‘prove that no 
such being existed. | 

On approaching the volcano, she met the priestess of 
Pele, who warned her not to go near the crater, and 
predicted her death if she violated the tabus of the god- 
dess. “Who are you?” demanded Kapiolani. “One in 
whom the goddess dwells,’ she replied. In answer to a 
pretended letter of Pele, Kapiolani quoted passages from 
the Scriptures, setting forth the character and power of 
the true God, until the. priestess was silenced, and con- 
fessed that ke akua, the deity, had left her. Kapiolani 
then went forward to the crater, where she was much 
surprised to find Mr. Goodrich, who had come from Hilo 
to meet her. “Mr. Ruggles, having been for six months 
without shoes, was unable to come.” On the eastern 
brink of the crater a hut was built for her, in which she 
spent the night. 

The next morning she and her company of about 
eighty persons descended over five. hundred feet to the 
“Black Ledge.” There, in full view of the grand and terrific 
action of the inner crater, she ate the berries consecrated 
to Pele, and threw stones into the burning lake, saying: 
‘Jehovah is my God. He kindled these fires. I fear not 
Pele. If I perish by her anger, then you may fear Pele; 
but if I trust in Jehovah, and he preserve me when break- 
‘ing her tabus, then you must fear and serve him 
alone... .”. They then united in singing a hymn of 


190 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


praise to the true God, and knelt in adoration to the 
Creator and Governor of the universe.* : 

The “New Kaahumanu.”’—Scarcely less remarkable 
was the change in the character of Kaahumanu, the 
regent. Superior in intellect and in decision of character 
to most of the chiefs, she was haughty, overbearing, and 
cruel before her conversion. At first she treated the mis- 
Sionaries with disdain, but her mind became interested, 
first in the novel arts of reading and writing, and then 
in the new doctrines which they taught, and finally her 
heart and conscience were completely won over. | 

As she did nothing by halves, the change in her con- 
duct and in her treatment of her people was so striking 
that they called her “the new Kaahumanu.” From the 
beginning of the year 1825 she devoted herself with her 
wonted energy to the improvement of her countrymen, 
and made frequent tours among the islands, to promote 
education, and to urge the people to the practice of 
industry and virtue. | 


* This has justly been called “one of the greatest acts of moral courage ever | 
performed.” 


CHAPTER XXV 


1825-1827 


VISIT OF LORD BYRON AND OUTRAGES BY FOREIGNERS 


HILO VILLAGE 


Visit of Lord Byron in the 
“ Blonde.”—In January, 1825, Cap- 
tain Kotzebue made a second visit 
to the islands in the Russian sloop- 
of-war ‘“ Pretpriatie,” in the course 
of his voyage around the world. 

Captain Richard Charlton, who had been appointed by 


the British Government consul-general for the Society 
191 


192 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


and Hawaiian Islands, arrived at Honolulu in the 
“ Active” April 16th, 1825. 

The 46-gun frigate “Blonde,” commanded by Lord 
Byron, a cousin of the poet, was commissioned to convey 
the remains of. the late king and queen and their at- 
tendants back to their native land. The “ Blonde” arrived 
off Lahaina May 4th, 1825, and sent a boat ashore with 
Boki, Liliha, and their suite, who were received by 
Hoapili and a multitude of people with old-fashioned 
wailings, a few old veterans burying their faces in the 
sand. The little princess, Nahienaena, and other chiefs 
took passage in her to Honolulu, where the whole party 
landed on the 6th, and were received by the queen 
regent and other chiefs on the beach. The meeting be- 
tween the survivors of the royal party and their old 
friends was an affecting scene. The next day a formal 
state reception of Lord Byron and his officers took place 
at the house of Kalanimoku. After the ceremonies of 
introduction Lord Byron made a courteous speech, and 
distributed the presents from the British Government, a 
gold watch to Kalanimoku, a silver teapot for Kaahumanu, 
and a rich suit of Windsor uniform, with hat and sword, 
for the little prince Kauikeaouli. “He instantly put it 
on, and strutted about the whole morning in an ecstasy.” 

On the 21st of May the remains of Kamehameha IL. 
and his queen, Kamamalu, enclosed in triple coffins 
covered with crimson velvet, were landed and conveyed 


to a temporary mausoleum, with impressive funeral cere- — 


monies, in which Huropean and Hawaiian customs were 
combined. | 


On the 6th of June a national council of chiefs was — 
held at Honolulu, for the purpose of settling the succes; — 
sion to the throne and other important affairs of govern- | 


1825-1827 193 


ment, at which Lord Byron was present. The young 
prince Kauikeaouli was proclaimed king with the title 
of Kamehameha IIL, and Kaahumanu was continued in 
the regency during the minority of the king, with 
Kalanimoku as her minister. Lord Byron expressed his 
approval of the objects and labors of the American mis- 
sion, and gave the chiefs some useful suggestions. In 
particular, a set of port regulations were drawn up by 
his advice and published. 

The next day the “Blonde” sailed for Hilo, taking 
Kaahumanu and her suite as passengers. Lord Byron, 
with his corps of scientific men, visited the volcano of 
Kilauea, where they occupied Kapiolani’s hut, and sur- 
veyed the crater. He also caused an accurate survey to 
be made of the bay, which has since been called “ Byron’s 
Bay.” He returned to Honolulu, where he remained 
four days, when he sailed for England, touching at 
Kealakekua Bay, where he erected a monument to the 
memory of Captain Cook. 

Lord Byron was a worthy successor of Vancouver, and 
won the gratitude and respect of both the natives and 


_the better class of foreigners. If he had left here a 
suitable representative of his government, imbued with 
his own humane and enlightened views, the subsequent 
_ history of the islands would have been very different. 


Collisions with Foreigners.— Encouraged by Lord 


| Byron’s advice, the chiefs now proceeded to take more 
active measures for suppressing the vices which were 
destroying their race, and for promoting education. In 
the seaports of Honolulu and Lahaina this policy im- 
-mediately brought them into collision with a lawless and 
depraved class of foreigners. It is said to have been the 


motto of the buccaneers that “there was no God this 


194 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


side of Cape Horn.” Here, where there were no laws, no 4 
press, and no public opinion to restrain men, the vices : 
of civilized lands were added to those of the heathen, — 
and crime was open and shameless. 

Accordingly, in no part of the world has there been a — 
more bitter hostility to reform. As soon as laws began 
to be enacted to restrict drunkenness and prostitution, a 4 
series of disgraceful outrages were perpetrated to compel 
their repeal. Mr. Charlton, the British consul, put him- 
self at the head of this faction, and from that time on | 
persistently labored to embarrass the native government, 
and finally to overthrow its independence. He even 
denied the right of the native chiefs to make laws or 
treaties without the approval of the British Government. 

Outrage at Lahaina, 1825.—The ship “Daniel,” of Lon-— 
don, commanded by Captain Buckle, arrived at Lahaina — 
October 8d, 1825, and the crew soon found that a change 
had taken place on shore since their last visit. Two 
days later several of them entered Mr. Richards’s house _ 
and threatened him and his wife with death if he did 
not procure the repeal of the obnoxious law. 

Their calm and heroic demeanor seems to have saved | 


their lives for a time. On the 7th a larger company,) 
armed with knives and pistols, landed under a black flag” 
and forced an entrance into the yard, when the natives 
interfered, barely in time to rescue the lives of their 
teachers. A strong armed guard was then kept on the 
place by Hoapili’s order until the departure of the “ Daniel.” 

A shower of meteoric stones fell at Honolulu Septem- 
ber 27th, 1825. 

Outrage of the “ Dolphin,” Lieutenant Percival.—On | 
‘the 23d of January, 1826, the United States armed | 
schooner “ Dolphin,” Lieutenant John Percival, arrived. 


Pater a ae eee ee eee 
—, ~ : J A - - eo ’ 


> 


eer a ee 


WHEN NOON 
AT LONDON 


156°50 


ALTO SSANI 
\\ Sot 
{ WSS 


V Kamaike Pt. 


KH AL AJ KAA ET 


Kealaikahiki Pt\Z 


1.37 A.M. 
m 156 20° Greenwich 156°10° WHEN NOON 


MAUL, 
: KAHOOLAWE. 


AND PART OF s 


MOLOKAI AND LANAI |” 


SCALE’ OF MILES 
0 2 4 6 8 10 


TAMAS 


> 
the Ha NYS 


20° 
50°F 


ta 


Pueokahi 
Harbor 


DS 
If 
ih 
t 


\\/y 
l 

cal 

Va 


MT) 


* eA Hi 

W\\h} \ 
NY [A\\ 
RUA 
AN \ 
oNN 


ys 


- 
| 


Su - —- le 
SS Haleakala. ‘ = 
diese te 
1G ort reerh 
ZL Ly WWW LW 


7 LL 
‘ V7, 4} of AW NON 
ETL FR CRO GTN 


\ 


Jy] 
WA 
ge pa 


20° 
30 | 


ga Oy x ° , 
156 20 156 10 156 00 


or A 


e 
a 


Tok 
Ie 


oe 


: 


1825-1827 195 


at Honolulu from the Marshall Islands, where he had 
taken off the surviving mutineers of the whale-ship 
“Globe.” About this time the American ship “London ” 


was wrecked at Lanai, and the “Dolphin” went there 


to save the cargo. On his return, February 22d, Lieu- 


_ tenant Percival called on the queen regent, and demanded 


the repeal of the law against vice, threatening violence 
if it were not done. 

“My vessel is small,” said he, “but she is just like 
fire.” 

On the 26th his men attacked the houses of Kalani- 


_moku, who was ill, and the mission premises, and did 


considerable damage before they were driven off. Mr. 
| Bingham was rescued from their hands by the natives, 


| lMarrowly escaping with his life. 


In the evening Lieutenant Percival waited on the 


: chiefs, and again insisted on the repeal of the law. At 


length Governor Boki and Manuia, the captain of the 
fort, intimidated by his threats, permitted its violation, 
at which it is said that “a shout of triumph rang through 
the shipping.” The “Dolphin” remained in port two 
‘months longer, and the pernicious influence exerted by 
‘its crew during that time cannot be described.* 

Captain Beechey, in command of the British exploring 


ship “Blossom,” visited the islands in May, 1826. 


During this year mosquitoes, hitherto unknown in the 


islands, were introduced at Lahaina by the ship ‘“ Well- 
ington,” from San Blas, Mexico. 


Second Outrage at Lahaina.—In October, 1826, the 


* After Lieutenant Percival’s return to the United States, a court of inquiry 
| Was convened at Charlestown, Mass., in May, 1828, to inquire into his conduct at 
ffonolulu. The session lasted thirty-six days, and brought out a mass of evidence 
sustaining most of the charges against him. 


196 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


crews of several whale-ships landed at Lahaina, threaten- 
ing to massacre Mr. Richards and his family, who hap- 
pened to be absent at Kailua, Hawan. They went in a 
body to demolish his house, but found it strongly guarded. 
They continued rioting several days, breaking open and 
plundering the houses of the natives. The native women 
had all fled to the mountains with Kekauonohi, who was 
acting as governess in Hoapili’s absence, and remained 
there until the ships sailed for Oahu. 

Visit of the ‘‘ Peacock,” Captain Jones.—Several me- 
morials had been presented to the President of the United 
States by the ship-owners of Nantucket, complaining of 
the frequent mutinies and desertions of their crews, and 
representing that there was Ganger that the “Sandwich 
Islands would become a nest of pirates and murderers.” 
They stated that nearly one hundred whale-ships visited 
the islands every year, and sometimes thirty were lying 
at the port of Honolulu at once. 

Accordingly, Captain Thomas Ap Catesby Jones, com- 
manding the United States sloop-of-war “ Peacock,” was 
sent to the islands to attend to these complaints, and “to 


secure certain debts due to American citizens by the — 
native government.” He arrived at Honolulu in October, 


1826, and remained at the islands nearly three months. 


He first turned his attention to the American runaway 


sailors, and rid the islands of thirty or more of them, 
He then took up the claims of American traders against 
the king and chiefs. Unfortunately, no list or schedule 
of these claims has ever been published. Captain Jones 
is said to have reduced them considerably, and yet he 
estimated them at the enormous sum of five hundred 
thousand dollars. There is reason to believe that many 
of them were exorbitant and unjust. 


1825-1827 197 


To provide for the payment of these claims an edict 
was issued, December 27th, that every able-bodied male 
subject should deliver half a picul of sandal-wood or pay 
four Spanish dollars before the lst of September, 1827, 
and that every woman of age should deliver a mat twelve 
feet by six, or pay one dollar; the whole to be applied 
exclusively to the payment of these claims. The popula- 
tion of the islands at that time was estimated at one 
hundred and forty thousand. 

On the 22d of December, 1826, a great council of 
chiefs was convoked by the queen regent, at which Cap- 
tain Jones and the British consul were present. At this 
council Mr. Charlton declared that the islanders were 
subjects of Great Britain, and denied their right to make 
treaties, to which Captain Jones replied that Charlton’s 
own commission as consul recognized the independence 
of the islands. The council then proceeded to business, 
and soon agreed to the terms of a commercial treaty 
with the United States, the first between the Hawaiian 
Government and any foreign power. 

At a general meeting of the missionaries held at 
Kailua in October, a circular letter was drawn up and 
published, stating briefly the course which they had pur- 
sued, and challenging investigation. The challenge was 
accepted by their opponents, and they assembled in Hono- 
lulu early in December. A public meeting was held on 
the 8th at Governor Boki’s house, which was presided 
over by Captain Jones, the opposition being headed, as 
usual, by Mr. Charlton.* 


* Of this famous trial Commander Jones afterward wrote that “not one jot o7 
tittle, not one iota, derogatory to their characters as men, or as ministers of the 
Gospel of the strictest order, could be made to appear against the missionaries 
by the united efforts of all who conspired against them.” 


198 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


After some desultory talk, the circular was read, and 
the opposition was invited to present charges in writing, 
and to support them by credible evidence. This they 
refused to do, and the meeting broke up seine die. 

Boki’s Relapse.—Boki, younger brother of Kalanimoku, 
on his return from England, had been reappointed govy- 
ernor of Oahu, and given the personal charge of the 
young king by Kaahumanu, an appointment which she 
soon had reason to regret. After a year or two, he and 
his wife, Liliha, relapsed into intemperance, ran into debt, 
and squandered much of the sandal-wood which had 
been collected for extinguishing the debts of the late 
king. He was led by désigning foreigners to intrigue 
against the queen regent, and to lead the young king 
into habits of dissipation. 

Death of Kalanimoku.—Kalanimoku, the prime minis- — 
ter, who was called by his countrymen “the iron cable of 
Hawaii,” died at Kailua on February 8th, 1827, of the 
dropsy, from which he had suffered for several years. 
Originally of low rank, he had gained this high position 
by his ability and integrity. His death was a great loss 
to the cause of reform. 

Third Outrage at Lahaina.—In October, 1827, another 
assault was made at Lahaina by the crew of the “John — 
Palmer,” an English whaler, commanded by Captain © 
Clarke, an American. Governor Hoapili, having learned — 
that several native women were on board, contrary to 
law, demanded that they should be landed. The Cap- | 
tain evaded and ridiculed the demand from day to day. — | 
At last one evening the governor detained him on shore, | 
and seized his boat to enforce his demand. Upon Captain — 
Clarke’s promise to return the women in the morning, 
he was released. Meanwhile the crew had opened fire on — 


1825-1827 199 


the village with a nine-pound gun, aiming five shots at 
Mr. Richards’s house, which, however, did little damage. 
The next morning Captain Clarke sailed for Honolulu, 
without keeping his promise. 

Trial of Mr. Richards.—About the same time Captain 
Buckle arrived at Honolulu, and learned that a full report 
of his conduct in Lahaina in 1825 had been published 
in the United States. It was now seen that crimes com- 
mitted at the islands were liable to be published on the 
other side of the globe, and the rage of Captain Buckle 
and his party knew no bounds. Even some of the chiefs, 
as Boki and Manuia, joined in condemning Mr. Richards. 

Such threats were made against his life that the 
regent sent to Lahaina for him and the chiefs to attend 
a council in Honolulu. On their arrival two meetings 
were held, at which the chiefs decided that, as there was 
no question about the truth of Mr. Richards’s statements, 
they would protect him at all hazards. 

This ended the matter. Heavy guns were mounted 
on the fort at Lahaina, and the guard strengthened. 

A few days after this affair, December 8th, 1827, the 
first written laws were published against murder, theft, 
adultery, rum-selling, and gambling. We read of no more 
outrages at Lahaina. 


CHAPTER XXVI 
1828-1832 


CLOSING YEARS OF KAAHUMANU’S REGENCY 


Arrival of Roman Catholic Missionaries.—Jean Rives, 
after being dismissed from the suite of Liholiho in England, 
went to France, where he represented himself as having 
great wealth and influence at the Hawaiian Islands. He 
purchased a cargo of goods on credit, chartered a ship to 
carry them to the islands, and advertised for laborers to 
cultivate his estates, and for priests and artisans to 
instruct his people. 

A religious order had recently been founded by the 
Abbé Coudrin, which is often called the “ Picpusian order,” 
from the name of the street, Picpus, in Paris on which its 
headquarters were situated. It is more properly named the 
“Congregation of the Sacred Hearts of Jesus and Mary.” 
In September, 1825, Pope Leo XII. gave to this Society 
the task of introducing the Catholic faith into the 
Hawaiian Islands. Accordingly, three priests of this order, 
Alexis Bachelot, prefect apostolic, Patrick Short, and M. 
Armand, were set apart for this mission. | 

They embarked at Bordeaux in the ship “Comet,” 
Captain Plassard, in November, 1826, together with three 
lay brothers, who were mechanics. Church ornaments 
were shipped to the amount of several thousand dollars, 
which, together with the cargo, were to be paid for by 


Jean Rives at Honolulu. He himself took passage on 
200 


1828-1832 201 


the ship “Le Heros,” Captain Duhaut-Cilly, to the west- 
ern coast of America, and never appeared at the islands. 
He died in Mexico August 18th, 183838. Mr. Armand 
died during the voyage. After touching at Valparaiso, 
Callao, and Mazatlan, the “Comet” arrived at Honolulu 
July 7th, 1827, and anchored outside. 

Captain Plassard, unable to sell his cargo, landed his 
passengers without a permit. Being ordered to take them 
away, he refused to do so, and sailed without them. The 
priests celebrated their first mass July 14th, and opened 
a small chapel about January 1, 1828, in which a small 
congregation was soon gathered. Boki and Mr. Charlton 
favored them, in the hope of enlisting them in their polit- 
ical party. 

Boki’s Conspiracy.—Meanwhile Governor Boki contin- 
ued his course of extravagance, intemperance, and disloy- 
alty. He set up a tavern on the harbor front, the “ Blonde 
Hotel,” and leased for a distillery a building which Kala- 
nimoku had built for a sugar-house. To supply sugar-cane 
for this distillery he leased land in Manoa Valley, but 
Kaahumanu cancelled the lease, and had potatoes planted 
instead of cane. 

Instigated by the two foreign consuls, he plotted to 
destroy Kaahumanu and supplant her as regent. In 
pursuance of this design, he sounded nearly every high- 
chief in the country without success, and labored in vain 
to shake the young king’s attachment to the queen regent. 
_ About the beginning of 1829, he collected armed men at 
) Waikiki, and civil war seemed imminent, when Kekua- 
_naoa, his fellow-voyager to England, boldly went alone to 
_ his camp, and dissuaded him from his mad designs. 

The First Laws, etc.—Soon after this an immense 
_ thatched house of worship was erected at Honolulu, which 


202 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


measured one hundred and ninety-six feet by sixty-three, 
and could seat four thousand people. It was opened for 
divine worship July 8d, 1829, the king taking a sa 
nent part in the ceremonies of dedication. 

In September, 1829, laws were published against mur- 
der, theft, gambling, and drunkenness, and also on the 
subject of marriage and the observance of Sunday. These 
laws were violently opposed by many of the foreign resi- 
dents, who denied that they were amenable to the laws 
or courts of the kingdom. In reply to a memorial by 
Charlton and others, a proclamation was issued October 
7th, addressed to the foreign residents, in which they 
were notified that these laws would be equally enforced 
on natives and foreigners. 

The Visit of the ‘“ Vincennes.”—At this Juncture the 
United States sloop-of-war ‘ Vincennes,”: Captain Finch, 
arrived at Honolulu, October 14th, bringing presents to 
the king and the principal chiefs, and a letter from the 
Secretary of the Navy, in which he congratulated them 
on their “rapid progress in acquiring a knowledge of 
letters and of the true religion.” * 

In a conference held to consider the claims of Amer- 
ican merchants, the chiefs acknowledged about $50,000 
as due to different merchants and ship-masters, and 
promised to pay the whole in nine months in sandal-wood, 
giving their note for four thousand seven hundred piculs. 
These claims, however, were not fully settled until 1843. 


* The letter also contained the following important passage: 

“Our citizens who violate your laws or interfere with your regulations violate 
at the same time their duty to their own government and country, and merit 
censure and punishment. We have heard with pain that this has sometimes been 
the case,.and we have sought to know and to punish those who are guilty.” In 
addition to this well-timed assurance from the American Government, Captain 
Finch gave the chiefs much valuable advice in regard to their rights and duties 
as an independent nation. 


1828-1832 2038 


Mr. Stewart, chaplain of the “ Vincennes,” was greatly 
surprised at the progress made by the chiefs since 1824, 
not only in education, but also in luxury and refine- 
ment. 

A new thatched palace had been built south of the 
fort, and elegantly furnished, and several two-story houses 
had been erected in the town. The ship-yard and wharf 
of Robinson & Co. had been established in 1827. The 
“Vincennes” sailed November 238d, having done much to 
repair the injury done by the visit of the “ Dolphin.” 

Boki’s Fatal Expedition.—Boki had been lavish in his 
presents to his partisans; his debts began to press hard 
upon him, and sandal-wood had become scarce. In No- 
vember, 1829, an adventurer from Port Jackson reported 
that an island had been discovered in the South Pacific, 
which abounded in sandal-wood, and offered to guide an 
expedition to it. Boki immediately took the bait, and, 
against the advice of his best friends, hastily fitted out 
the king’s brig “ Kamehameha” and the “ Becket.” 
Kaahumanu was absent at the time on Kauai. Boki took 
command of the “Kamehameha,” with about three hun- 
dred men, while Manuia, his confidential agent, had 
charge of the “ Becket,” with one hundred and seventy- 
nine men. Almost the whole company of opposers that 
he had collected went on this wild expedition. They 
sailed December 2d, 1829, touching at the island of 
Rotuma, where Boki remained four days, and took on 
board a large number of natives to assist in cutting 
_ sandal-wood. The “Becket” lay there ten days longer, 
and then followed on her way to their destination, which 
_ was the island of Eromango, in the New Hebrides. 
Nothing more was ever seen or heard of Boki’s vessel, 
_ the “Kamehameha,” and her fate is still a mystery. 


204 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


The “Becket” remained at Eromango five weeks, but 
the hostility of the inhabitants, and sickness among the 
people on board, defeated the object of the expedition. 
Many of them fell victims to the deadly climate, among 
whom was Manuia. 

The survivors set sail for home, touching again at 
Rotuma, where they left twenty of their sick. They suf- 
fered dreadfully during the voyage from disease and pri- 
vation, and when they arrived at Honolulu on the 8d of 
August, 1830, out of the whole company only twenty 
remained, eight of whom were foreigners. 

The mournful sound of wailing was heard for weeks 
by night and by day throughout the district. 

Kaahumanu’s Tour of Hawaii and Maui.—In May, 
1830, Kaahumanu, accompanied by the young king and 
Hoapili, made the circuit of the windward islands, leaving 
Liliha and Kinau in joint charge of affairs on Oahu for 
nine months. Their object was not to plunder the people, 
but to lighten their burdens, and to promote education 
and good morals. 

It seems to have been on a previous trip in 1829 that 
she visited the Hale o Keawe, or mausoleum at Honau- 
nau, Kona. On account of the heathen superstitions 
attached to the place, she caused the bones of twenty- 
four chiefs to be placed in coffins and entombed in a 
secret cave at Kaawaloa, and the house to be demolished. 

The sacred kawwila rafters in it were used in building 
a government house in Honolulu, south of the fort, which 
was called the Hale Kawwila. 

Liliha’s Sedition.—During the absence of all the lead 
ing chiefs, and after the return of the “ Becket,” Liliha, 
fearing that she would lose her position as governess of 
Oahu, made warlike preparations. Encouraged by foreign 


1828-1832 205 


sympathizers, she purchased arms and ammunition, and 
filled the fort with armed men from Waianae. 

While the leading chiefs were assembled at Lahaina, 
Kinau managed to send them information of Lilha’s 
plot to detach the king from the regent and to overthrow 
the government. 

As it was thought best to try peaceable measures first, 
Hoapili was sent to use his influence with his daughter, 
Liliha. The old warrior landed without troops or arms, 
called on Liliha, and required her to give up the fort to 
him, and to repair to Lahaina with her captain, Paki. 
She obeyed, on which Hoapili took command of the fort, 
established a new garrison, and calmly awaited the arrival 
of the regent and the other chiefs, who arrived at Hono- 
lulu about the end of March, 1881. 

At a national council held April 1st, 1881, Kuakini 
(Governor Adams), brother of Kaahumanu, was appointed 
governor of Oahu, and Naihe governor of Hawaii. Kua- 
kini proceeded to vigorously enforce the laws of 1829, 
which had been allowed to become a dead letter under 
Boki and Liliha.* 

Persecution of Catholics.—Governor Boki, by Kaahu- 
manu’s order, on the 8th of August, 1829, had published 
an order forbidding the natives to attend Catholic wor- 
ship. 

On Kaahumanu’s return from Kauai, about the begin- 
ning of 18380, she undertook to reform some evils that 
had grown up under Boki’s protection. At this time her 
attention was called to the progress of the Catholic faith, 
and she ordered the priests to desist from propagating it 


: *“ Armed bands,” says Jarves, “paraded the streets; grog-shops, gaming- 
houses, and other haunts of dissipation were suppressed; even riding was forbid- 
den on Sunday ” 


906 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


among the natives. She commanded certain natives to 
give up their crucifixes, and threatened them with pun- 
ishment if they continued to use them in their devo- 
tions. 

Louisa, a native woman who had been baptized in 
California, was taken into her train, and, remaining firm 
in her belief, was treated with severity. Kaahumanu 
even intended to send her to Kahoolawe (which was then > 
used as a place of banishment), but was dissuaded from 
doing so by Mr. Richards, and sent her back to Honolulu. 
During her absence at the windward, Kinau caused 
several persons to be punished for the same offense by 
hard labor in building stone walls or in braiding mats. 

On her return from the windward, Kaahumanu con- 
tinued the same policy, and in some cases had the. 
offenders put in irons for what she considered insolent 
language. 

Banishment of the Priests.—At the council of the 
high-chiefs, April 2d, 1881, a formal order was passed — 
for the departure of the priests within three months, | 
which was twice repeated afterwards. Meanwhile they 
continued their labors, chiefly among the adherents of : 
Liliha. | 
In July, 1831, a Prussian ship, the “ Princess Louisa,” 
Captain Wendt, touched at the islands, bringing presents 
from the king of Prussia to Kamehameha III, among 
which were portraits of the king and of Marshal Blicher. 
Captain Wendt, being requested to take the priests away, 
refused to receive them on board unless he was paid five 
thousand dollars. 

Letters had been received from the prefect of the 
Franciscan Missions in California inviting the prea to_ 
come to their assistance. 


1828-1832 ; 207 


At length the chiefs fitted out a vessel of their own, 
the brig ‘ Waverly,” Captain Sumner, at an expense of 
about $4,000, and issued a proclamation December 7th, 
1831, stating their reasons for taking this course. Ac- 
cordingly, Messrs. Bachelot and Short sailed December 
24th, and landed at San Pedro, California, on the 28th 
of January, 1832, where they were cordiaily received by 
the Franciscan fathers. The lay brothers remained be- 
hind to keep alive the embers of the faith. 

With the lapse of two generations, the bitter animos- 
ities of those days have nearly died out, and all parties 
now regret that any religious persecution should ever 
have taken place in this kingdom. 

Justice to the native government, however, requires 
some further explanation. It would have been strange, 
indeed, if the chiefs of that generation, brought up under 
the old régime, had been able to understand the princi- 
ple of religious toleration or the distinction between 


church and state. 


In ancient times each reigning family had its own 


tutelar deities, and the worship of those of a rival chief 


_ by. a subject would have been considered an act of sedi- 


tion. The civil war of 1819 was purely a religious war, 


' and so was that of 1824 in a great measure. From that 
, time any act that to their minds suggested image wor- 
_ ship was regarded as a grave political offense. 


This was the ground taken by Kaahumanu when Mr. 
Bingham remonstrated with her for compelling certain 
Catholic converts to work on the stone wall at Kulaoka- 


hua. In the minds of the chiefs they were also identified 


with the faction of Boki and Liliha, who were plotting 


the overthrow of the government. It was therefore not 
strange that the older chiefs regarded them not merely 


208 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


as an element of discord, but as a political party, danger- 


ous to the state. 
This persecution being confined to Honolulu, few of 
the American missionaries knew of it at the time.* 


While many believed that the Hawaiian Government — 


had a legal right under the law of nations to exclude 
foreigners whom it considered dangerous to the state, 


there is no evidence that as a body or as individuals _ 


they advised the exercise of that right. 

From this time on the native government greatly 
needed a wise and able civilian in its service as a political 
adviser. 

Lahainaluna Seminary.—In September, 1831, the La- 
hainaluna Seminary was founded, under the care of Rev. 
Lorrin Andrews. The scholars supported themselves in 
part by cultivating a tract of land granted by the chiefs 
to the school, and had to erect their own school-house 
and lodgings under the greatest disadvantages. A print- 


ing-press and book-bindery were afterwards attached to : 


the school, at which many text-books were printed. 


Death of Kaahumanu.—On the 29th of December, — 


1831, Governor Naihe died at Kaawaloa, and Kuakini 


(Governor Adams) returned to Hawaii to resume his | 


former place as governor of that island. Kaahumanu 


paid a last visit to Kapiolani, and returned to Honolulu 
in very feeble health. She lived to receive the fourth 


reinforcement of American missionaries, which arrived 


in the “Averick,” May 19th, 1832. She then retired to | 
a cottage in Manoa Valley, where she had the pleasure — 


of receiving the first complete copy of the New Testa- 


* There is abundant evidence, however, that several of them remonstrated with 
the chiefs against persecution for religious opinions. A published letter, addressed 
by Kamehameha III. to the American consul, relates several instances of this. ~ 


1828-1832 209 


ment in Hawaiian, and where, on’ the 5th of June, 1832, 
she passed away. Her place could not be filled, and the 
events of the next few years showed the greatness of the 
loss which the nation had sustained. The “ days of 
Kaahumanu” were long remembered as days of progress 
and prosperity. 


CHAPTER XXVII 
1832-1836 


THE BEGINNING OF KAMEHAMEHA III’S REIGN 


Kinau Premier.—The death of Kaahumanu marks an > 
era in the history of the nation. Although the four suc- 
ceeding years were years of peace and quiet as far as the 
foreign relations of the country were concerned, they 
were years of reaction, uncertainty, and disorder in its 
internal affairs. 

Kinau had been appointed by Kaahumanu, by and 
with the advice of the council of chiefs, as her successor, 
with the title of Kaahumanu II. A joint declaration by 
her and the king was published July 5th, 1882. She was | 
the daughter of Kamehameha I. and Kalakua, and a half- 
sister of the king. She had married Kekuanaoa, a chief 
of secondary rank, but of commanding ability, in October, 
1827, and two of her sons afterwards succeeded to the — 
throne. In a public address she declared her intention to 
carry out the policy of Kaahumanu. She was a princess 
of more than ordinary discretion and firmness, but could 
not fill the pre-eminent position of Kaahumanu. 

Visit of the ‘‘Potomac.”—The United States frigate 
“Potomac,” Commodore Downes, from the East Indies, 
arrived July 28d, 1832, and anchored outside of the har-_ 


bor. Commodore Downes and his officers had much — 
210 * 


THE BEGINNING OF KAMEHAMEHA III.’S REIGN 41 


friendly intercourse with all parties on shore. Having 
been informed that a company of Roman Catholics were 
forced to labor on the stone wall of Kulaokahua, he 
strongly represented to the chiefs the injustice and folly 
of punishing men for their religious opinions. They were 
liberated, and the persecution seems to have been discon- 
tinued for several years. 

The claims of the traders were also discussed before 
the Commodore. 

Arrival of a Japanese Junk.—A Japanese fishing-junk 
with four men on board, after 
drifting many months, arrived 
at Waialua, Oahu, December 
238d,1882. In an attempt to 
take the junk around to Hon- 
olulu it was wrecked on Bar- 
ber’s Point, January 1st, 1838, 
but no lives were lost. 

Accession of Kamehameha 
III.—After the death of Kaa- 
humanu, the king came more 
under the influence of Liliha 
and Charlton, who did their 
best to lead him into dissipa- 
tion, and to prejudice him against his old friends.* 

He had surrounded himself with a company of dis- 
sipated young men of Liliha’s faction, called “Hulumanu” 
(bird feathers), among whom one Kaomi, a renegade 
teacher of Tahitian descent, for a time had unbounded 


KAMEHAMEHA III. 


* He had set his heart on buying a brig, which was offered to him for $12,000, 
but Kinau and the council refused to sanction the purchase, thinking it unwise 
to increase the public debt, which already pressed hard upon the poor people. The 
king yielded the point, but felt deeply the disappointment. 


DAD HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


influence over him. This Kaomi was nicknamed “ke 
lii kui” (the engrafted king). Kinau was treated with 
insult, and forbidden to enter the king’s presence, while 
Kaomi usurped her authority. 

It was given out that all laws were abrogated except 
those against murder, theft, and rioting. Distilleries were 
set up in many places, grog-shops were multiplied, and 
heathen dances and drunken revels were encouraged as 
in Liholiho’s time. MHoapili, the king’s foster-father, has- 
tened to Honolulu, to reclaim him if possible, but in vain. 

About the middle of March, 18388, the king announced 
to his chiefs his intention “to take into his possession the 
lands for which his father had toiled, the power of life 
and death, and the undivided sovereignty.” He summoned 
a public meeting, at which it was expected that he would 
set aside Kinau, and appoint either Liliha or the low-born 


Kaomi in her place. A great assembly was convened in 


the open air. Kinau came in, and saluting her brother, 


said: “We cannot war with the word of God between 
us.” Civil war had indeed been apprehended by some. 
The king made a speech, declaring his minority to be 
at an end, and asserting his claim to the sovereignty. 
Then, lifting his hand to appoint the second person in the 
kingdom, to the disappointment of Liliha’s partisans, he 
solemnly confirmed Kinau as premier. When afterwards 


asked why he had done so, he replied, ‘ Very strong is” 


the Kingdom of God.” “The effect was electrical. All 
felt that the days of misrule were numbered.” (Jarves.) 
For a time, however, there was a great reaction, as it 
was generally understood that the king was no longer 
on the side of morality. On Oahu, especially, the effect 
was disastrous. Schools were deserted, congregations 
thinned, and in a few places there was a partial revival of 


-- 


. 


THE BEGINNING OF KAMEHAMEHA III.’S REIGN 213 


heathen practices. This year of disorder is known as “ka 
wa o Kaomi” (the time of Kaomi). But on the whole, 
the effect of the king’s course was to sever whatever 
connection may have existed between church and state, 
and to settle Christianity on a more solid basis. 

Most of the high-chiefs, including the governors of 
the other islands, stood firm, and used their authority to 
repress crime and disorder. After the shock of 1833 had 
passed over, a change for the better took place. The 
king’s adoption of Kinau’s third son, Alexander Liholiho, 
born February 9th, 18384, as his heir, helped to complete 
the reconciliation of the families. 

In March, 1884, Hoapili and the other chiefs made 
the circuit of Oahu, and destroyed every distillery. 
Kaomi soon afterwards fell into neglect and _ ill-health. 
He lingered awhile in a hovel at Lahaina, and died on 
board of a schooner on his way to Honolulu. 

Visit of the “Challenger.”—The British ship-of-war 
“Challenger,” Captain Seymour, arrived in 1834, to de- 
mand the execution of two Hawaiian sailors, who had 
murdered their commander, Captain Carter, an English- 
man, on the voyage from California, on the “William Lit- 
tle,” after which they had run the little vessel to Fanning’s 
Island, and scuttled her there. Accordingly, they were 
arrested and hanged at the yard-arm of the king’s brig, 
the “Niu.” Captain Seymour thanked Kinau for her 
assistance in bringing them to justice. 

Progress in Education and Religion.—The Rey. John 
Diell, seaman’s chaplain, arrived in Honolulu May 1st, 
1833, bringing with him from New London the frame 
of a chapel. This was erected on a lot given by the 
king and Kinau in the heart of the town, “in the very 
midst of grog-shops.” It was opened for worship Novem- 


214 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


ber 28th, 1838, under the name of the “ Bethel Church,” 
and henceforth formed a central rallying point for the 
better elements among the foreign residents and seamen. 
Its flag was “a welcome signal of peace and hope to 
many a mariner.” | 

It was in 18382 that schools began to be opened for 
native children, which gradually took the place of those 
for adults.* 

At the same time a subscription was opened among 
the foreign residents of Honolulu for the erection of a 
school-house for the instruction of English-speaking chil- 
dren, which was liberally aided by the ship-masters in ~ 
port, and by the officers and men of the frigate “ Poto- 
mac.” A neat building of brick was erected, and opened 
on the 10th of January, 18838, under the name of the 
“Oahu Charity School,” near the site of the present gov- 
ernment building. 

The first girls’ boarding-school was opened in Wailuku 
in 1837, and a manual-labor school for boys was estab- 
lished the same year in Hilo, which still exists. 

The first census of the kingdom was taken in 1882, 
and gave 130,313 as the total population of the islands 
at that time. 

Another census was taken in 1836, which gave only 
108,579 as the total. By all accounts the decrease of 
the native population at that period was alarming. 

The first newspapers published in the Pacific Ocean 


were the Lama Hawan, issued at Lahainaluna in Feb- | 


ruary, 1834, and the Kumu Hawaii, printed at Honolulu 
in October of the same year. | ; 
The first English newspaper in Honolulu was published 


* The number of readers that year amounted to 23,127, 


THE BEGINNING OF KAMEHAMEHA III.’S REIGN 215 


during the year beginning July 30th, 1886, under the 
name of The Sandwich.Island Gazette. 

Trade and Agriculture.—The export of sandal-wood 
had fallen off from $400,000 worth in a year to only 
$30,000 worth in 1885, and the chiefs were burdened 
with debts in consequence of their former extravagance. 
Their principal resources were the sale of fire-wood and 
hides, and of supplies to the whale-ships, of which from 
fifty to one hundred a year called at Honolulu. 

A tract of land at Koloa, Kauai, was leased to Ladd 
& Co. for a sugar plantation July 26th, 1835, and at the 
same time a silk plantation was started by Peck & Tit- 
comb. Cotton now began to be raised and manufactured, 
and in 1837 Governor Kuakini built a stone cotton fac- 
tory at Kailua, Hawaii.* 

Second Visit of the “Peacock.’—The United States 
frigate ‘“ Peacock,” Commodore Kennedy, and the United 
States brig “ Enterprise,” Captain Hollins, arrived at Hon- 
olulu September 7th, 1886, and remained a month. 
During this time the commodore held conferences with 
the chiefs, at which the subjects of land titles and of the 
claims of traders were discussed without any decided 
result. . 

An old claim for $60,000 was some cleed, besides 
another much smaller one. 

The First Government House.—Until the death of 
Kinau nearly all of the actual administration of the 
government was left to her, as premier, and to her hus- 


* The old system of land tenure was a great hindrance to progress. The idea 
of absolute ownership in land was unknown to the Hawaiians. No one could 
possess more than a life interest in it. It could not be bought and sold like 
movable property. Foreigners could not obtain more than a permission to occupy 
land at the pleasure of the chiefs, and it reverted to the king at their departure 

| or death. 


216 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


band, Kekuanaoa, the governor of Oahu, who also acted 
as judge. The “Hale Kauila,” already mentioned, was 
the Government House, where the court records, the ac- 
counts of taxes, leases, etc.; and the correspondence with 


KEKUANAOA 


foreign consuls were kept by 
a Staff of native clerks, under 
the superintendence of Keku-_ 
anaoa. It was there that the 
consuls came to enter their 
complaints, and the com- 
manders of ships of war to 
make their demands, and 
many scenes of thrilling in- 
terest took place within those 
walls. 
The idea, however, of a 
government as distinct from 
the person of the king, and 


of a treasury apart from his private income, had not yet 
taken shape in the native mind. 


CHAPTER XXVIII 
1836-1839 


TROUBLES WITH FOREIGN POWERS 


Causes of Dispute.—The chiefs were particularly 
tenacious of their rights on two points, which involved 
them in many disputes with foreigners. 

The first was the ownership of land, which, according 
to their theory, belonged to the king as head of the 
nation, and could not be transferred without his consent, 
so that all foreign residents were but tenants at will. 
The second point was the right of the king to refuse 
permission to enter the kingdom to any foreigner who 
might be obnoxious to him. 

While they denied that they had any intention to 
hinder foreigners from worshiping God in their own 
way, they forbade them to propagate the Roman Catholic 
religion among the natives, fearing that it would foment 
discord and sedition; and under this apprehension they 
persisted in harsh and impolitic measures, which im- 
periled the independence of the kingdom. 

Arrival of the Rev. R. Walsh.—In 1835 the two exiled 
priests in California received a brief from the Pope ex- 
horting them to persevere in their attempt to establish a 
mission in the Hawaiian Islands. On the 30th of Sep- 
tember, 1886, the Rev. Robert Walsh, an Irish priest 


educated in Paris, arrived in Honolulu by the brig “ Gara- 
| 212 


218 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


filia,’ from Valparaiso. He was ordered to leave the 
country, but by the intervention of the British consul 
obtained permission to remain until the arrival of the 


British sloop-of-war “ Acteon,” Lord Edward Russell. 


Meanwhile, on the 8th of October the French corvette — 


“Bonite,’ Captain Le Vaillant, arrived from Guayaquil. 


Having been appealed to by Mr. Walsh, Captain Le 
Vaillant obtained permission for him to reside in the 
islands on condition that he should make no attempt to 
propagate his religion among the natives. Lord Russell 


arrived on the 28d, and after long and warm discussions, 
and not without threats, negotiated a convention, which 
was signed November 16th, defining the right of British 


subjects to land, reside, and build houses on the islands — 


“with the king’s consent.” Damages were paid to a Mr. 


Geo. Chapman, whose house had been pulled down by 


Paki, the owner of the land. Lord Russell then sailed 
for Tahiti. 

Death of Nahienaena.—The princess Harieta Nahie- 
naena, once the pride of the nation, at last gave way to 


the temptations surrounding her, and after a brief career 


of dissipation died at Honolulu December 80th, 1836. She 
was born in 1815, and was married. to Leleiohoku, son — 
of Kalanimoku, in 1835. Her funeral took place with — 


more than usual pomp February 4th, 1837. 


The king was married February 2d to his favorite | 


Kalama, the daughter of Kapihe (alas Naihekukui), a 
chief of low rank. 


At this time the bark “Don Quixote” was purchased | 


for the Hawaiian navy, and armed with fourteen guns, 


her name being changed to “Kai.” On the 12th of | 
April, 1837, the king took the remains of his sister to — 
Lahaina in the “Kai,” accompanied by a fleet of sight | : 


i. 


| 


TROUBLES WITH FOREIGN POWERS 219 


schooners. Her body was interred by the side of her 
mother, Keopuolani. 

On the 9th of the same month the bark “Mary 
Frazier” arrived from Boston with the largest company 
of missionaries ever sent to the islands. 

Return of Messrs. Bachelot and Short. — We now 
come to the second stage of this unhappy contest. The 
Rey. Fathers Bachelot and Short embarked from Santa 
Barbara in the “Clementine,” a brigantine under English 
colors, the property of Mr. Jules Dudoit of Honolulu, and 
arrived at Honolulu April 17th, 1887. In the absence of 
the king and Kinau, Governor Kekuanaoa ordered the 
captain and the owner of the “Clementine” to receive the 
priests on board again, which they both refused to do. 
On the 19th he delivered an order to the priests to return 
to California in the vessel in which they had come, and 
his course was approved by the king and Kinau. 

After many long and fruitless discussions, when the 
vessel was ready to sail, the order was reluctantly car- 
ried into effect on the 20th of May. After some remon- 
strance on the part of the mate, the priests were put on 
board of the “Clementine” without violence, on which 
Mr. Dudoit ordered the crew ashore, hauled down the 
flag, and carried it to Mr. Charlton, who burnt it in the 
street. Mr. Dudoit then made his protest before the 
British consul, affirming that the “Clementine” had 
been seized by the Hawaiian Government, and claiming 
$50,000 damages. The American consul also claimed 
heavy damages for Mr. W. French, who had chartered 
her on the 10th of May for another voyage.* 

Arrival of the “Sulphur” and ‘‘Venus.”—On the 7th 


* Meanwhile Kinau kept the priests supplied with provisions. 


220 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


of July, 18387, the British sloop-of-war “Sulphur,” Cap- 
tain Edward Belcher, arrived at Honolulu from San Blas, 
and on the 10th the French frigate “ Venus,” Captain 
Du Petit Thouars, from Callao. They were immediately 
applied to for the liberation of the priests imprisoned on 


board of the “Clementine.” The two commanders, with 


the two consuls and other gentlemen, called upon Kinau 


at the Kauila House the same afternoon, and had a | 
stormy interview. Captain Belcher so far forgot himself — 


as to shake his fists in her face. 

After he had left, Mr. Charlton returned and informed 
Kinau that the harbor was under blockade, and that all 
vessels except the “Clementine” were forbidden to leave. 
After inquiring about the meaning of this proceeding, 
she said: “My vessel shall sail.” He replied: “No; she 
will be fired upon. If you wish to write to the king, 
your messenger can go upon our vessel with the letter.” 
This Kinau refused. ‘“ No,” she said, “ my vessel shall sail.” 

In fact, it did sail without molestation. A body of 
marines from the “Sulphur” was sent to the “Clemen- 
tine,” and landed the priests, after which both command- 
ers escorted them to their former residence. The British 
flag was now hoisted on the “Clementine,” and she was 
sent to Lahaina for the king, who arrived on the 20th 
on his own man-of-war bark, the “Kai,” accompanied by 


several schooners. The next day he gave audience tothe | 


two commanders, and had a long discussion with them, 
of which there is a full report. 

Both commanders, while condemning the king’s course, 
admitted his rights under the law of nations. During 
this conference Rev. H. Bingham was insulted and threat- 
ened by a foreign officer, so that the chiefs were obliged 
to interpose for his protection. 


; 


- 


TROUBLES WITH FOREIGN POWERS yall 


As a compromise, Captain Du Petit Thouars signed a 
pledge that M. Bachelot “would seize the first favorable 
opportunity to go to Lima, Valparaiso, or some other part 
of the civilized world,” and that “in the mean time he 
should not preach.” Captain Belcher signed a similar 
obligation for Mr. Short, and the king signed an agree- 
ment that the two priests might reside unmolested at 
Honolulu until such opportunity should occur. At an- 
other conference, he signed a brief convention with 
Captain Du Petit Thouars, guaranteeing to the French 
“equal advantages with the subjects of the most favored 
nation.” 

Both men-of-war sailed on the 24th, without exchang- 
ing salutes with the fort. 

Visit of the “ Imogene.”—On the 24th of September, 
1837, the British frigate “Imogene,” Captain Bruce, 
arrived from Valparaiso, and remained until October 
12th. Captain Bruce held four friendly conferences with 
the chiefs, in which he recommended a liberal system 
of toleration, but fully recognized the king’s rights as 
an independent sovereign. He received a letter from 
the chiefs thanking him for his courtesy and valuable 
advice, and took charge of a petition to the British 
Government for the removal of Mr. Charlton. 

He also offered Messrs. Bachelot and Short a free 
passage. Mr. Short sailed for Valparaiso October 30th, 
1887, in the ship “ Peru.” 

Arrival of Messrs. Maigret and Murphy.—The contest 
now entered on its third stage. 

On the 2d of November, 1837, the ship “ Europa,” 
Captain Shaw, arrived from Valparaiso, bringing as pas- 
' sengers the Rev. L. D. Maigret, pro-vicar, and Mr. J. CO. 
Murphy, or Brother Colomban, a catechist. Mr. H. Skin- 


299 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


ner, the owner of the vessel, had required his passengers, 
when in Valparaiso, to give bonds that they would not 
land in the islands without permission. 

On their arrival, Kinau had the captain bound in the 
sum of ten thousand dollars not to allow the landing of 
the priests without a permit. Three Chilean political 
refugees who were on board were allowed to land. A 
long correspondence followed, in which Mr. Maigret stated 
that his object was to ‘ 


‘remain here until he could get a_ 


passage to the Marquesas, or Dangerous Archipelago.” | 


The government, however, refused to permit him to land 


unless Mr. Dudoit would give pecuniary security for his — 


departure within some definite time. Mr. Murphy was 
allowed to land on the certificate of the British consul 
that he was not a priest. He afterward returned to 
Tahiti, where he took an important part in affairs. 

At length Mr. Maigret purchased a schooner, the 
.“Missionary Packet,” or “Honolulu,” for $8,000, and 
sailed for Micronesia on the 23d. Mr. Bachelot, who was 
in feeble health, embarked with him; but unfortunately, 


instead of improving in health, he grew worse, and died 


at sea on the 4th of December. He was buried on the 
Island of Bonabe, where Mr. Maigret remained a short 
time, and then proceeded to the Gambier Islands, or 
Mangareva. 

Volcanic Wave.—On the 7th of November, 18387, an 
extraordinary commotion of the sea was observed at all 
the islands. At Hilo the sea first receded, and then sud- 
denly rose twelve feet above high-water mark, carrying 
away houses and doing great damage. ‘Twelve lives were 


lost at Hilo, where many were saved by the boats of the 


“General Cockburn,” an English whaler. A great earth- 
quake took place in Chile on the same day. At Kahului, 


TROUBLES WITH FOREIGN POWERS DAD AS} 


Maui, two persons lost their lives. A similar phenom- 
enon took place in May, 1819. 

Persecution of Catholics.—On the 18th of December, 
18387, the king and chiefs issued a severe “ordinance 
rejecting the Catholic religion,’ which forbade the teach- 
ing of that religion, or the landing of any teacher of it 
except in cases of necessity. During these years of angry 
controversy, it is to be deplored that the persecution of 
native Catholics was renewed. Toward the end of 1835, 
and at different times during the next three years, nearly 
thirty persons were set at forced labor, and a few were 
even required to work as scavengers in the fort, which 
then served as a prison.* 

Edict of Toleration.—At last better counsels prevailed, 
and mainly through the influence of Mr. Richards, the 
king was induced to issue an edict of toleration, June 
17th, 1889, which ordered that all who were then in con- 
finement should be released, and that no more punish- 
ment should be inflicted on account of religion. The fol- 
lowing week two women were found to be confined in 
the fort in irons, but were promptly released by order of 
_Kekuanaoa, as soon as he was informed of it. This 
seems to have been the last case of religious persecution 
in the islands, 

Temperance Legislation.—After being petitioned by 
many shipmasters, and by their own people, to restrict 
the sale of ardent spirits at Honolulu, the king and his 
council enacted the first license law, March 20th, 1838, 
-under which the number of licenses was reduced from 


* Foreign visitors remonstrated with as little effect as the missionaries. As 
late as September, 1838, Kinau, in reply to a letter from Captain Eliot of the 
British sloop-of-war ‘ Fly,” asked him: ‘‘ What shall we do? Shall we return to 
idolatry and the shedding of blood?” 


994 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


twelve to two. In August of the same year a law was 
passed prohibiting the importation of ardent spirits after 
January 1st, 1839, and imposing a duty on wines of fifty 
cents per gallon. 

At the request of the Hawaiian Government, the Pres- 
ident of the United States removed Mr. Jones in 1838, 
and appointed Mr. P. A. Brinsmade as American consul 
in his place. 

Political Instruction.—The king and chiefs were well 
aware that their whole system of government needed to 
be remodeled, and had written to the United States in 
1886 for a legal adviser and instructor in the science of 
government. Failing to procure such a person, in 1838 
they chose Mr. Richards to be their adviser and interpret- 
er. He was accordingly released from his connection 
with the American mission, and entered upon his duties 
in 1889 by delivering lectures on the science of govern- 
ment and assisting in drawing up the first constitution 
and code of laws. 

The Great Revival.—The years 1838-1839 were mem- 
orable for the great religious revival, which extended to | 
all the islands and affected nearly all the people. Over 
five thousand were admitted to the Protestant churches 
in 1839, and ten thousand the next year. During the 
years 1837 to 18389 seven thousand three hundred and 
eighty-two converts were admitted to the church in Hilo, 
under the charge of the Rev. Titus Coan. The effects of 
this revival were felt for many years after. 

Death of Kinau.—Kinau died April 4th, 1839, after a | 
short illness. The king appointed Kekauluohi or Auhea, — 
daughter of Kalaimamaht and Kalakua (alas Kaheihei- © 
malie) and niece of Kamehameha IL, as her successor, | 
thus keeping up the tradition of a female kuhina nu. 


TROUBLES WITH FOREIGN POWERS 225 


She was far inferior to Kinau in fitness to rule, but 
had been carefully trained in her youth, and made a 
repository of traditional lore. 

Hostile Visit of the ‘Artémise.”—The French sixty- 
gun frigate “Artémise,” Captain Laplace, arrived at 
Honolulu July 9th, 1839. In the course of his voyage 
around the world the commander had received instruc- 
tions at Sydney which obliged him to proceed to Tahiti 
and then to Honolulu. The French ministry of that day 
had adopted a vigorous colonial policy, of which the Mar- 
quesas, Tahiti, and New Zealand, as well as the Hawaiian 
Islands, felt the effects. 

Captain Laplace, without waiting for any further 
information, or making any investigation, immediately 
issued a manifesto, the principal points of which are as 
follows: 

“His Majesty, the king of the French, having com- 
manded me to come to Honolulu, in order to put an end, 
either by force or persuasion, to the ill-treatment to which 
the French have been victims at the Sandwich Islands, I 
hasten to employ the latter means as more conformable 
to the noble and liberal political system pursued by France 
toward the powerless. Misled by perfidious counselors, 
the principal chiefs of the Sandwich Islands are ignorant 
that there is not in the whole world a power capable of 
preventing France from punishing her enemies, or they 
would have endeavored to merit her favor instead of 
incurring her displeasure, as they have done in ill-treat- 
ing the French. . . . They must now comprehend 
that to tarnish the Catholic religion with the name of 
idolatry, and to expel the French unde? that absurd pre- 
text from this archipelago, was to offer an insult to 
' France and to her sovereign. . . . Among all civilized 


226 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


nations there is not one that does not permit in its ter- 

ritory the free exercise of all religions. I consequently 

demand— 

‘“1. That the Catholic worship be declared free throughout all the 
islands subject to the king. 

«2. That a site at Honolulu for a Catholic church be given by the 
government. 

“*3. That all Catholics imprisoned on account of their religion be 
immediately set at liberty. 

“4, That the king place in the hands of the captain of the ‘ Arte- 
mise’ the sum of twenty thousand dollars as a guarantee of his 
future conduct toward France; to be restored when it shall be 
considered that the accompanying treaty will be faithfully com- 
plied with. 

“5. That the treaty, signed by the king, as well as the money, be 
brought on board of the frigate ‘Artemise’ by a principal chief ; 
and that the French flag be saluted with twenty-one guns. 


“These are the equitable conditions at the price of 
which the king of the Sandwich Islands shall preserve 
friendship with France. . . . If, contrary to expecta- 
tion, and misled by bad advisers, the king and chiefs 
refuse to sign the treaty I present, war will immediately _ 
commence, and all the devastations and calamities which 
may result shall be imputed to them alone, and they 
must also pay the damages which foreigners injured 
under these circumstances will have a right to reclaim.” 

The king being absent at Lahaina, dispatches were 
sent to request his presence, while his secretary, Haalilio, 
was kept on board of the frigate as a hostage. The 
harbor was also declared to be in a state of blockade. 

Notes were sent to the British and American consuls 
announcing Captain Laplace’s intention to commence 
hostilities on the 12th at noon, and offering protection 
on board of his frigate to such of their countrymen as 


1 


..| 
i 


TROUBLES WITH FOREIGN POWERS yt 6 


should desire it. In his note to the American consul he 
added: “I do not, however, include in this class the indi- 
viduals who, although born, it is said, in the United 
States, form a part of the Protestant clergy of the chief 
of this group, direct his counsels, influence his conduct, 
and are the true authors of the insults offered to France. 
For me, they compose part of the native population, and 
must undergo the unhappy consequences of war which 
they will have brought on this country.” 

The American missionaries therefore inquired of their 
consul whether the government of the United States 
would protect their lives and property, to which he replied 
that within the inclosure of his consulate, under the flag 
of his country, he could guarantee them an asylum. 

At the request of the premier, Kekauluohi, the date 
for commencing hostilities was postponed until Monday, 
the 15th, in order to give time for the king to arrive. 
But on Saturday afternoon, as the king had not arrived, 
Kekuanaoa went on board of the frigate, and delivered 
to Captain Laplace the treaty signed by Kekauluohi and 
himself on behalf of the king, together with the twenty 
thousand dollars, part of which had been loaned by some 
of the foreign merchants to the government.* 

The next morning, at nine o’clock a.m., the 14th, the 
king arrived, and soon after Captain Laplace, accompanied 
by one hundred and fifty men with fixed bayonets and 
a band of music, proceeded to a thatched building 
belonging to the king, where a grand military mass was 
celebrated by Rev. R. Walsh, the service concluding with 
the Te Deum. 

As the Hawaiian Government, contrary to Captain 


*The money was carefully counted and packed in four boxes, which were 
sealed with red wax with the seal of the Hawaiian Government. 


928 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Laplace’s expectation, had been able to satisfy the 


demands made upon it, a further “convention” was 


drawn up and presented to the king at 5 P.m. on the 
16th, which he was required to sign by breakfast time 
the next morning. No amendment of its objectionable 
clauses was allowed; it must be signed as received, or 
not at all. The king requested time to consult with his 
chiefs, but Captain Laplace refused to grant it, and the 
“convention” was signed. Its most important articles 
were the fourth and the sixth; the former stipulating 
that no Frenchman should be tried for any crime, except 
by a jury of foreign residents nominated by the French 
consul, and the latter providing that “French merchan- 
dise, especially wine or brandy, shall not be prohibited, 
nor pay a higher duty than five per cent. ad valorem.” 
Having accomplished its errand, the “ Artemise” sailed 
on the 20th. 

Visit of Commodore Read.—On the 19th of October, 
1889, the United States frigate ‘“ Columbia,’ Commodore 
Read, and the “John Adams,” Captain Wyman, arrived 
at Honolulu, and remained until November 4th. The 
claims of Mr. Dudoit and of Mr. French for damages on 
account of the delay of the “Clementine” in 1837 were 
referred to Captain Read as umpire, and settled, on the 
25th of October, by the payment of three thousand dol- 
lars to each of them. The commodore having been peti- 
tioned to hold a court of inquiry to ascertain whether 
the American missionaries had “lost their citizenship,” 
or had been the cause of any persecution, declined to do 
so from want of time, but assured them of the protec- 
tion of the United States.* 


* Sixteen of the officers of the squadron signed a testimonial in their favor, 
and ordered one thousand copies of a pamphlet containing an account of the affair 


of the ‘‘ Artemise’’ and a vindication of the American missionaries to be printed. 


CHAPTER XXIX 
1839-1842 


FIRST CONSTITUTION—DISPUTES WITH CONSULS 


The First Constitution.—During the year 1839 the 
first draft of the constitution was drawn up in the 
Hawaiian language at Lahaina by the council, aided by 
certain graduates of Lahainaluna. 

A Declaration of Rights was signed by the king and 
promulgated June 7th, 1889, which may be considered 
as the Magna Charta of Hawaiian freedom.* 

This act produced a feeling of security unknown before, 
and formed the first step in establishing individual property 
in land. Religious liberty was also guaranteed by the 
declaration: “ All men of every religion shall be pro- 
tected in worshiping Jehovah and serving Him according 
to their own understanding.” 

The first constitution was proclaimed October 8th, 
1840. It perpetuated the offices of kuhina nut and of the 
four governors instituted by Kamehameha L, and defined 
their powers and duties. It constituted a legislative body, 
consisting of fifteen hereditary nobles and seven repre- 
sentatives, who sat together in one chamber and met 
annually. The representatives were elected by the people 


* It contained the following important passage: ‘* Protection is hereby assured 
to the persons of all the people, together with their lands, their building lots, and 
all their” property, while they conform to the laws of the kingdom, and nothing 
whatever shall be taken from any individual except by express provision of the 
laws.” 

229 


700 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


in a rather informal manner. The legislative body was 
to appoint four judges, who, together with the king and 
premier, should form the Supreme Court of final appeal. 

New Laws.—The old laws were revised and new ones 
added, and the collection was published in 1842. They f 
established a uniform system of government taxation, © 
and abolished all the oppressive local and arbitrary taxes. 
They also abolished all arbitrary forced labor, and most 
of the oppressive tabus that formerly rested on fishing. 
The first school laws were enacted in 1841.* 

On the 15th of May, 1842, all government property 
was set apart, and a treasury board created, consisting of 
four persons, of which Dr. G. P. Judd was chairman. By > 
instituting a regular system of keeping the accounts, of 
paying government officers, and of collecting taxes, he 
soon established the credit of the government, and paid 
off the most pressing debts. 

Deaths of High Chiefs.—About this time five of that 
noble band of chiefs who first welcomed Christianity 
passed from the stage of life, none of whom except Kinau 
left any children to fill their places. These were Kinau, 
the late premier, Kaikioewa, the veteran governor of 
Kauai, Hoapili, the brave and upright governor of Maui, 
his wife, Kalakua Kaheiheimalie, and the heroic Kapiolani. 
The loss was irreparable. The places of these natural 
leaders of their race could not be filled by foreigners or 
by natives of plebeian birth. 

An Heroic Deed.—At noon on Sunday, the 10th of 
May, 1840, the schooner “ Keola” foundered and sank a 
considerable distance west of Kohala Point. As there was 


* That the laws were impartially carried out was proved by the public execution 
of the high chief Kamanawa, October 20th, 1840, for poisoning his wife, Kamo- 
kuiki. 


FIRST CONSTITUTION—DISPUTES WITH CONSULS 231 


a strong current running to the northward, the passengers 
and crew, seizing on oars, boards, etc., swam for Kahoo- 
lawe, then about thirty miles distant. 

A Mr. Thomson of Lahaina was drowned, but his wife 
and two young men reached Kahoolawe the next day. 
Mauae of Lahaina and his noble wife, Kaluahinenui, swam 
together, each with an empty bucket for a support, until 
Monday afternoon, when his strength failed. His wife 
then took his arms around her neck, holding them with 
one hand and swimming with the other, until she found 
that he was dead, and was obliged to let him go in order to 
save her own life. After sunset she reached the shore, 
where she was found and taken care of by some fisher- 
men, having been thirty hours in the sea. 

Eruption and Volcanic Wave.—A great eruption from 
Kilauea commenced May 80th, 1840. The lava stream 
forced its way under-ground to the eastward, showing 
itself above ground at intervals, until: it finally broke 
out twelve miles from the coast, and flowed into the 
sea at Nanawale in Puna. The flow continued for three 
weeks. A few small hamlets were overwhelmed, but no 
lives were lost.* 

A volcanic wave took place May 17th, 1841, similar 
to that of 1837, but no lives were lost. 

The United States Exploring Expedition.—The United 
States Exploring Expedition, commanded by Commodore 
Wilkes, was at the islands from September, 1840, until 
April, 1841. The squadron consisted of the flag-ship 
“ Vincennes,” the sloop-of-war “Peacock,” under Captain 
fludson, the brig “Porpoise,” and the schooner “ Flying 
Fish,” with an accomplished corps of scientific observers. 


* During this eruption the finest print could be read by its light at midnight 
at places forty miles distant. 


232 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Their intercourse with the king and people was of the 
most friendly nature, while their researches have proved 
to be of great value to science. An observatory was built 
on the summit of Mauna Loa, and occupied for three 
weeks in the middle of winter, and surveys were made of 
the principal craters on Hawaii as well as of all the 
important harbors of the group. 

Educational Matters, etc.—A family school for the 
education of the young chiefs was founded in May, 1840. 
Fifteen young chiefs of high rank were educated in it 
through the medium of the English language for about 
ten years. 

A school was founded at Punahou in 1842 by the 
American mission, which has since been chartered as 
Oahu College. 

The translation of the Bible into the Hawaiian lan- 
guage was completed and published May 10th, 1839. 

As far back as 1886 the project of building a large 
stone church at Kawaiahao in Honolulu had been dis- 
cussed, and the sum of six thousand dollars was raised at 
that time by subscription, half of which was given by 
the king. The corner-stone was laid June 8th, 1839, and © 
the edifice completed in 1841. 

Progress of the Catholic Mission.—In May, 1840, the 
“Clementine” arrived from Valparaiso, bringing as passen- 
gers M. Etienne Rouchouse, bishop of Nilopolis, and vicar- — 
apostolic, Rev. L. D. Maigret, and two other priests. 

The erection of a cathedral was begun at Honolulu in 
July, 1840, and a considerable number of natives were — 
soon enrolled as converts to their faith. In 1841 the | 
Bishop of Nilopolis returned to France to procure a rein- 
forcement, and in 1842 he sailed for the islands in the 
ship “Joseph and Mary,” accompanied by seven priests, 


FIRST CONSTITUTION—DISPUTES WITH CONSULS Rao 


seven catechists, nine lay brothers, and ten nuns, with a 
large supply of silver crosses, chalices, and other church 
ornaments, and a cargo of goods for their mission. The 
ship foundered off Cape Horn, and was never heard from 
again.” 

Difficulties with France.—In the mean time a number 
of petty disputes arose between Catholics and Protestants 
(especially in regard to the working of the néw school and 
marriage laws), which seem to have been fomented by the 
French consul. He also objected to any restraint on the 
internal traffic in ardent spirits as an infraction of the 
Laplace convention; and such was the fear of France that 
for some years the license law of March 20th, 1838, was 
not enforced, to the great injury of the morals and health 
of the people. 

On the 24th of August, 1842, the French corvette 
“Hmbuscade,” Captain Mallet, arrived at Honolulu, but 
did not exchange the usual salutes. The captain called 
on Governor Kekuanaoa, and informed him that the 
French Government had taken the Marquesas Islands in 
July, and that there were complaints of violations of the 
Laplace convention, which he had been sent to investi- 
gate. On the 1st of September Captain Mallet sent a 
letter to the king, complaining that “French citizens and 
ministers of the Catholic religion have been insulted and 
subjected to divers unjust measures, concerning which 
Your Majesty probably has not been informed.” He then 
made eight demands, chiefly relating to school matters, 
such as that “Catholic schools should be placed under 
the exclusive supervision of Catholic school agents, nomi- 
nated by priests of the same faith and approved by the 


* After this deplorable event, M. Maigret was appointed bishop of Arathia in 
_ partibus, and vicar-apostolic of Eastern Polynesia. 


=. | 
7 


Oe HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


king,” that land should be given for a Catholic high- 
school, etc., and expressed the opinion that the license 
law violated the Laplace convention by restricting the 
sale of French liquors. 

To this the king made a courteous and dignified reply, 
assuring Captain Mallet that the convention had been 
faithfully observed, and that complete religious toleration 
was secured by the constitution and laws of his king- 
dom; that “the school laws were framed to promote 
education in these islands and not sectarianism, and 
ought not.to be altered in the interest of any particular 
sect”; that “if there had been any instances of abuse, 
they were not authorized by the government,” and that 


the courts of justice were open to all, and would afford 


redress, if appealed to. He added that the object of the 
license law was to regulate the retaz/ sale of liquor, and 
prevent abuses, and that licenses could be obtained from 
the proper officers. In conclusion, he informed Captain 
Mallet that an embassy had been sent to France to ask 
for a new treaty. Captain Mallet replied that he would 
deliver the king’s letter to Admiral Du Petit Thouars, 
who might be expected the next spring. The admiral 
was fully occupied in the mean time with the affairs of 
the Society Islands, which came under the French Pro- 
tectorate September 10th, 1842. 

Controversies with the British Consul.—The difficulties 
with France seem to have stimulated Mr. Charlton in 
the manufacture of grievances, which he hoped would 
eventually lead to the annexation of the islands to the 
British Empire. Happily, since the time of Boki no 
Hawaiian chief has ever been induced to acta disloyal 
part, or to join a foreign party, as was done at Tahiti. 

At this time a number of complicated lawsuits: arose 


FIRST CONSTITUTION—DISPUTES WITH CONSULS 235 


out of business transactions in Honolulu, which were 
tried before the governor with foreign juries, and led to 
bitter feeling between British and American residents. 
The report of one famous case, the “ Estate of French and 
Greenway,” fills two stout volumes. 

In 1826 the chiefs had given two pieces of land to 
the British Government, one near the landing for a con- 
sulate, and another farther inland for an official residence. 
In April, 1840, Mr. Charlton put forward for the first 
time a claim for a tract of land adjoining the former, 
called Pulaholaho, and comprising nearly all of the 
block lying between Kaahumanu and Nuuanu Streets, on 
the strength of a pretended lease from Kalaimoku for 
two hundred and ninety-nine years, dated in 1826. The 
king replied that the land in question belonged by the 
most undoubted testimony and by virtue of continuous 
possession to Kaahumanu and her heirs, and that Kalai- 
moku had no authority to transfer any land without the 
consent of Kaahumanu, the regent. The alleged deed 
had been kept in abeyance until thirteen years after the 
death of Kalaimoku, and many houses had been built on 
the land without any objection having ever been made 
by Mr. Charlton.* 

Ladd & Co.’s Contract, etc. —The Hawaiian Gov- 
ernment, fully aware of the designs of its enemies, and 
that a crisis was approaching, had already taken steps to 
obtain the formal recognition of its rights as an inde- 
pendent state from the Great Powers, and to negotiate 
equitable treaties with them. As early as March 17th, 
_ 1840, Mr. T. J. Farnham, an American lawyer from 
Oregon, was commissioned as minister to the govern- 


*It is believed by the best judges that the document either was a forgery, or 


. Was signed in ignorance of its real contents. 


286 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


ments of Great Britain, France, and the United States, 
but nothing came of it. By an ill-advised measure the 
foreign relations of the government became involved 
with the schemes of a private firm. The firm of Ladd 
& Co. had taken the lead in developing the agricultural 


resources of the islands by their sugar plantation at 


Koloa and in other ways, and had gained the entire 
confidence of the king and chiefs. On the 24th of Novem- 
ber, 1841, a contract was secretly drawn up at Lahaina 
by Mr. Brinsmade, a member of the firm, and Mr. Rich- 
ards, and duly signed by the king and premier, which 
had serious after-consequences. It granted to Ladd & 
Co. the privilege of “leasing any now unoccupied and 
unimproved localities” in the islands, for one hundred 
years, at a low rental, each mill-site to include fifteen 
acres, and the adjoining land for cultivation in each 
locality not to exceed two hundred acres, with privileges 
of wood, pasturage, etc. These sites were to be selected 
within one year, which term was afterwards extended 
to four years from date, and cultivation was to be actually 
commenced within five years, which was also extended 


to ten years from date. The rights of native land-— 


holders were to be strictly respected. It was further 
agreed that the said contract was to be null and void 


unless the governments of Great Britain, France, and — 


the United States should acknowledge the Hawaiian 
Kingdom as an independent state. Mr. Brinsmade imme- 
diately left with the lease, in order to effect a sale of 
it to some joint-stock company, leaving one of his part- 
ners, Mr. Hooper, as acting consul. He was also intrusted 
with letters from the king to the three powers, pro- 
posing a triple guarantee of the independence of the 
Hawaiian Kingdom. In pursuance of these objects, he 


odie mens s 


FIRST CONSTITUTION—DISPUTES WITH CONSULS 237 


proceeded first to Washington, and afterwards to Eu- 
rope. 

The First Embassy to Foreign Powers.—In February, 
1842, Sir George Simpson and Dr. McLaughlin, governors 
in the service of the Hudson Bay Company, arrived at 
Honolulu on business, and became interested in the native 
people and their government. After a candid examina- 
tion of the controversies existing between their own 
countrymen and the Hawaiian Government, they became 
convinced that the latter had been unjustly accused. Sir 
George offered to loan the government ten thousand 
pounds in cash, and advised the king to send commis- 
-sioners to the United States and Europe with full power 
to negotiate new treaties, and to obtain a guarantee of 
the independence of the kingdom. | 

Accordingly Sir George Simpson, Haalilio, the king’s 
secretary, and Mr. Richards were appointed joint minis- 
ters-plenipotentiary to the three powers on the 8th of 
April, 1842. 

Mr. Richards also received full power of attorney for 
the king. Sir George left for Alaska, whence he traveled 
through Siberia, arriving in England in November. 
Messrs. Richards and Haalilio sailed July 8th, 1842, in 
a chartered schooner for Mazatlan, on their way to the 
United States.* 

Proceedings of the British Consul.—As soon as these 
facts became known, Mr. Charlton followed the embassy 
in order to defeat its object. He left suddenly on Septem- 
ber 26th, 1842, for London via Mexico, sending back a 
threatening letter to the king, in which he informed him 
that he had appointed Mr. Alexander Simpson as acting- 


* Their business was kept a profound secret at the time 


:| 
- iH 


938 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


consul of Great Britain. As this individual, who was a 
relative of Sir George, was an avowed advocate of the — 
annexation of the islands to Great Britain, and had | 


insulted and threatened the governor of Oahu, the king 


declined to recognize him as British consul. Meanwhile | 


Mr. Charlton laid his .grievances before Lord George 
Paulet, commanding the British frigate “ Carysfort,” at 
Mazatlan, Mexico. Mr. Simpson also sent dispatches to 
the coast in November, representing that the property 
and persons of his countrymen were in danger, which 
induced Rear-Admiral Thomas to order the ‘“ Carysfort ” 
to Honolulu to inquire into the matter. 

Recognition by the United States.—Méssrs. Richards 
and Haalilio arrived in Washington early in Decem- 
ber, and had several interviews with Daniel Webster, 
the Secretary of State, from whom they received an 
official letter December 19th, 1842, which recognized 
the independence of the Hawaiian Kingdom, and declared, 
“as the sense of the government of the United States, that 
the government of the Sandwich Islands ought to be 
respected; that no power ought to take possession of 
the islands, either as a conquest or for the purpose of 
colonization; and that no power ought to seek for any 
undue control over the existing government, or any 
exclusive privileges or preferences in matters of com- 
merce.” * | 

*The same sentiments were expressed in President Tyler’s message to Con- 


gress of December 30th, and in the Report of the Committee on Foreign Relations, 
written by John Quincy Adams. 


CHAPTER XXX 
1843 


SUCCESS OF THE EMBASSY IN EUROPE, AND CESSION 
FOS EORDSPAULET 


Tue king’s envoys proceeded to London, where they 
had been preceded by Sir George Simpson, and had an 
interview with the Earl of Aberdeen, Secretary of State 
for Foreign Affairs, on the 22d of February, 1848. 

Lord Aberdeen at first declined to receive them as 
ministers from an independent state, or to negotiate a 
treaty, alleging that the king did not govern, but that he 
was “exclusively under the influence of Americans to the 
detriment of British interests,’ and would not admit that 
the government ofthe United States had yet fully recog- 
nized the independence of the islands. 

Sir George and Mr. Richards did not, however, lose 
heart, but went on to Brussels March 8th, by a previous 
arrangement made with Mr. Brinsmade. While there, 
they had an interview with Leopold I., king of the Bel- 
gians, who received them with great courtesy, and prom- 
ised to use his influence to obtain the recognition of 
Hawaiian independence. This influence was great, both 
from his eminent personal qualities and from his close 
relationship to the royal families of England and France. 

Encouraged by this pledge, the envoys proceeded to 
Paris, where, on the 17th, M. Guizot, the Minister of For- 
eign Affairs, received them in the kindest manner, and 


at once engaged, in behalf of France, to recognize the 
239 : 


240 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE | 


independence of the islands. He made the same state- | 
ment to Lord Cowley, the British ambassador, on: the 
19th, and thus cleared the way for the embassy in Eng- 
land. 

They immediately returned to London, where Sir | 
George had a long interview with Lord Aberdeen on the | 
25th, in which he explained the actual state of affairs at 
the islands, and received an assurance that Mr. Charlton 
would be removed. On the 1st of April, 18438, the Earl | 
of Aberdeen formally replied to the king’s commission- 
ers, declaring that “ Her Majesty’s Government are willing 
and have determined to recognize the independence of 
the Sandwich Islands under their present sovereign,” but 
insisting on the perfect equality of all foreigners in the > 
islands before the law, and adding that grave complaints 
had been received from British subjects of undue rigor | 
exercised toward them, and improper partiality toward | 
others in the administration of justice. Sir George Simp- 
son left for Canada April 3d, 1848. 

The Belgian Contract.— Messrs. Richards and Haalilio 
then returned to the Continent in order to obtain the | 
official recognition by France, in procuring which they | 
met with unexpected delays. 

Unfortunately they were induced by Mr. Brinsmade 
to join him at Brussels in negotiating a contract with — 
the “Belgian Company of Colonization,” a wealthy cor- 
poration, in which the king of the Belgians was a stock- 
holder. The contract was signed May 17th, 18438, by the 
three parties interested. The firm of Ladd & Co., through — 
Mr. Brinsmade, was to cede to the Belgian Company the 
lease of November 24th, 1841, and its other property 
in the islands, while the king of the Hawaiian Islands, 
represented by Mr. Richards, was to guarantee four per 


A 


SUCCESS OF THE EMBASSY IN EUROPE 241 


cent. interest on the capital for six years, secured by a mort- 
gage on the revenues of the country, besides making other 
concessions, and the Belgian Company was to organize a 
branch society under its own control (to be called “The 
Royal Community of the Sandwich Islands”), and to 
transfer to it all the property and privileges which it had 
received under the contract. The king was to be a part- 
ner and Mr. Richards a director in the new company, 
which, however, never went into operation, although its 
“statutes” were drawn up in fifty-three articles, and 
signed April 13th, 1844. 

| The interest of Ladd & Co. was fixed at one million 
and sixty-seven thousand francs, or about two hundred 
thousand dollars. The capital of the branch society was 
to consist of four thousand shares of one thousand 
francs each. Each of the emigrants sent to the islands 
was to receive twenty hectares or nearly fifty acres of 
land in fee simple. 

It was agreed, however, that the contract was not to 
_be carried out until the independence of the Hawaiian 
‘Islands should be officially acknowledged by France, and 
that if it was not ratified by the council-general of the 
Belgian Company within one month after the said 
acknowledgment, it should be null and void. This ratifi- 
- cation does not appear to have ever been given. Whether 
the ratification of the king of the Hawaiian Islands was 
necessary, has been a disputed question. It was certainly 
required and given for the acts of Mr. Richards as ambas- 
_sador. The Belgian contract was signed by Haalilio with 
great reluctance, and received by the king and chiefs with 
strong disapprobation, which was justified by its perni- 
cious consequences. 

The Demands of Lord George Paulet.— Meanwhile, 


ya HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


events of thrilling interest had been taking place at the 
islands. On the 10th of February, 1848, the British frig-_ 
ate ‘“Carysfort,” commanded by Lord George Paulet, 
arrived at Honolulu, and showed displeasure by withhold- 
ing the usual salutes. The commander seems to have 
placed himself completely under the direction of Mr. Alex- 
ander Simpson. The United States sloop-of-war “ Boston,” 
Captain Long, arrived on the 138th. 

The king, who had been sent for at Lord Paulet’s 
request, arrived from Lahaina on the 16th. Lord Paulet 
refused to treat with him through Dr. Judd, his agent, 
and late in the evening of the 17th sent him a peremp- 
tory letter, inclosing six demands, with the threat that if 
they were not complied with by four o’clock p.m. the 
next day, “immediate coercive steps would be taken.” 
The substance of these demands was as follows: 

1st. That an attachment laid on Charlton’s property, 
at the suit of an English firm for an old debt, be removed, 
that the land claimed by him be “restored,” and repara- 
tion be made to his representatives for the losses which 
they had suffered through the alleged injustice of the 
government. 

2d. The immediate recognition of Mr. Simpson as Brit 
ish consul, and a salute of twenty-one guns to the British 
flag. 

3d. A guarantee that no British subject should be put 
in irons, unless for a felony. | 

Ath. That a new trial should be held in the case of | 
Skinner vs. Dominis. : 

5th. That all disputes between British subjects and — 
others be referred to mixed juries, one half of whom , 
should be British subjects approved by the consul. 

6th. A direct communication between the king and | 


THE PROVISIONAL CESSION 943 


the acting British consul for the immediate settlement of 
all complaints on the part of British subjects. 

The next morning, February 18th, the frigate was 
cleared for action, and her battery brought to bear on 
the town. Some English families went on board of the 
brig “Julia,” lying outside of the harbor, while Americans 
and other foreigners placed their funds and valuable 
papers on board of the “ Boston.” 

The first impulse of the king and chiefs was to resist, 
but wiser counsels finally prevailed, and before the hour 
set for hostilities had arrived, a letter was sent on board 
of the “Carysfort,” informing Lord Paulet that ambassa- 
dors had been sent to England with full power to settle 
these very difficulties; that some of these demands were 
“calculated to seriously embarrass this feeble government 
by contravening the laws established for the benefit of 
all,’ but that nevertheless the king would comply with 


_ them under protest, and appeal for justice to the British 
_ Government. 


At 2 p.m. salutes were interchanged between the fort 


- and the frigate, and Monday, the 20th, was appointed for 


the reception of Mr. Simpson as vice-consul. The attach- 
ment on Charlton’s property was removed by public ad- 
vertisement.* 

The Provisional Cession.— On the 20th the king visited 
the “Carysfort,’ where he was received with royal honors, 
and the next day was fixed for a private interview with 


' Lord Paulet and Mr. Simpson. At this and another inter- 


view on the 28d, the most extravagant and unjust 


- demands were pressed upon the king, who was treated 


* At the same time the king and premier published their solemn protest 
against the proceedings of Lord Paulet, and their appeal to the justice and 


| magnanimity of the queen of England for redress. 


944 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


with insolence, and not allowed any opportunity of con- | 
sulting with his advisers. 

Under the first demand, the king was intimidated into 
signing the pretended deed from Kalaimoku to Mr. 
Charlton. He was also forced to sign a note for $8,000, 
to Henry Skinner, a nephew of Charlton, for “indirect | 
damages” caused by the attachment. Under the fourth | 
demand, it was shown that the case had been settled a 
year before by the arbitration of Sir George Simpson, and | 
a receipt given in full of all demands, but this was of no | 
avail. Under the sixth head, Simpson demanded the 
arbitrary reversal of several decisions of the courts, and — 
brought in a new list of claims for damages, so that a 
“mushroom debt” of $80,000 had grown up in a few | 
hours. | 

Under these circumstances, the king resolved to bear it 
no longer. “TI will not die piecemeal,” said he; “they may 
cut off my head at once. Let them take what they please; 
I will give no more.” 

Dr. Judd advised him to forestall the intended seizure 
of the islands by a temporary cession to Lord Paulet, 
pending an appeal to the British Government. The event 
proved the wisdom of this advice. 

At the same time, the king was strongly urged by the 
leading foreign residents to cede his kingdom to France 
and the United States jointly, until his difficulties could 
be settled by the mediation of these two powers, and such 
an act of cession was offered him to sign, which he 
declined to do. 

On the next day the subject was discussed by the king 
and his council, and preliminaries were arranged with 
Lord Paulet for the cession. On the morning of the 25th 
the king and premier signed a provisional cession of the ~ 


THE BRITISH COMMISSION 245 


islands to Lord George Paulet, “subject to the decision of 
the British Government after the receipt of full informa- 
tion from both parties.” 

At three o’clock p.m. February 25th, the king, standing 
on the ramparts of the fort, read a brief and eloquent 
address to his people.* 

The act of cession was then publicly read, and a 
proclamation by Lord Paulet, after which the Hawalian 
flag was lowered by natives. The British colors were 
then hoisted over the fort by a lieutenant from the 
“Carysfort,’ and saluted by the ship and the fort. At 
the same time the flag over the British consulate was 
struck. It chanced that the day was the forty-ninth 
anniversary of Kamehameha’s cession to Vancouver. 

The British Commission.—The proclamation issued by 
Lord Paulet declared that the government should be 
carried on, aS far as natives were concerned, by the 
native king and chiefs and their officers; and in all 
that concerned foreigners by a commission, consisting of 
a deputy appointed by the king, Lord George Paulet, 
D. F. Mackay, Esq., and Lieutenant Frere of the “ Carys- 
fort.” All laws enacted by the legislature and all bona 
fide engagements of the late government were to remain 
in force. The king and premier appointed Dr. Judd as 
their deputy in the commission, and left for Maui on 
| the 27th. 

Nothing more was heard of the claims brought 


* The following is a translation of the address: ‘“ Where are you, chiefs, peo- 
ple, and commons from my ancestors, and people from foreign lands} Hear yel 
I make known to you that Iam in perplexity by reason of difficulties into which 
I have been brought without cause; therefore I have given away the life of our 
land, hear ye! But my rule over you, my people, and your privileges will con- 
tinue, for I have hope that the life of the land will be restored when my conduct 
shall be justified.” 


VEG HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


against the late government. The commission now pro- 
ceeded as if it had been settled that the islands should 
permanently remain a British colony. Every Hawaiian — 
flag that could be found was destroyed. All foreigners 
holding land in any way were notified to send in their 
claims to the commission before June 1st, 1848, and 
new registers were given to vessels owned at the islands, 
putting them under the British flag. The government 
vessels were taken as “tenders for H. B. M.’s ship ‘Carys- 
fort,” the name of the “ Hooikaika” being changed to > 
“ Albert,” and that of the “Paalua” to “Adelaide.” Am 
additional duty of one per cent. was added to the three 
per cent. required by law, to pay the expenses of the 
commission. The principal business of the commission 
was of the nature of a police court. No jury trials were 
held during its existence. . 

Without investigation or trial by any court, Lord 
Paulet had already seized the land claimed by Mr. Charl- 
ton, and had it cleared of its occupants, twenty-three 
houses being demolished, and one hundred and fifty-six 
persons expelled from their homes. | 

On the 11th of March the “Albert” was dispatched 
to San Blas, Mexico, to carry Mr. Alexander Simpson 
with letters for the British Foreign Office. As the firm 
of Ladd & Co. had previously chartered this vessel, they 
reserved the right to send a commercial agent by her. | 

It was of vital importance to the king that he should 
be represented in London at this critical juncture. 
Accordingly, Mr. J. F. B. Marshall (who acted as Ladd 
& Co.’s messenger) was secretly commissioned as His 
Majesty’s envoy, and took passage in the same _ vessel 
with Mr. Simpson without exciting any suspicion on 
his part, 


THE BRITISH COMMISSION DAT 


A canoe had been sent beforehand with a picked 
crew from a distant part of Oahu, to notify the king 
and premier, who came down in a schooner, landed at 
Waikiki by night, read and signed the prepared docu- 
ments, and immediately returned to Wailuku. The 
“Victoria” sailed March 17th for Valparaiso with letters 
for Admiral Thomas. 

During the month of April the legislative body held 
a session at Lahaina. At this session a complete regis- 
ter was made for the first time of all the lands in 
the kingdom, with the names of their respective hold- 
ers. This work occupied about ten weeks. It proved that 
no large tract of land was unoccupied.* 

The commissioners, having been informed that there 
was gross corruption in the management of the prison in 
the fort, made it a pretext for abrogating certain laws 
against licentiousness. Orders to this effect were issued 
April 27th, and sent to the governors of the other islands, 
and all prisoners under arrest were set free. The effect 
on public morals was disastrous. Vice became open and 
shameless, as in the days of Liholiho. 

In consequence of this action, Dr. Judd presented his 
resignation May 10th, withdrawing the king from any 
further responsibility for the acts of the commission. 
Mr. Mackay had previously resigned on account of ill- 
health, so that the commission was now reduced to two 
persons, viz., Lord Paulet and Lieutenant Frere. 

Meanwhile a secret correspondence was kept up 
between the king at Lahaina and his officers at Hono- 
lulu by means of canoes manned by trusty retainers. 


* During this session, April 26th, the first anniversary of the Lahaina Tem- 
perance Society was celebrated, and a large quantity of liquor, which had lain 
for a year untouched in the king’s cellar, was emptied into the sea. 


248 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


A small standing army of natives had been enlisted 
by the commission under the name of the “Queen’s 
Regiment,’ who were made to swear allegiance to the 


queen of England, and were commanded and drilled by © 


British officers. 

Heavy drafts were made on the government treasury 
for their support. On the 12th of June Dr. Judd received 
directions from the king not to pay any more money for 
the support of the army. On the 20th the commissioners 
demanded $718 for the “ Queen’s Guard” and the police, 
and threatened to put another person in the treasury 
office if he refused. Accordingly, on the 24th the king 


and premier published a manifesto, charging the commis- — 


sion with having broken the terms agreed upon at the 
cession, by abrogating some of the laws, and by draining 


the treasury for the support of a useless standing army. — | 


Fearing imprisonment and the seizure of the national 


archives, Dr. Judd removed these from the government 


house and concealed them in the royal tomb.* 


On the Ist of July the “Carysfort” sailed for Lahaina 


and Hilo, returning on the 16th. The next day the British 
sloop-of-war ‘‘ Hazard,” Captain Bell, arrived from Tahiti. 
On the 6th the U.S. frigate “Constellation,” Commodore 
Kearney, arrived from China. On the 11th the commo- 
dore issued a protest against the cession and the pro- 


ceedings of the British Commission. The young chiefs and. 


Governor Kekuanaoa, on visiting the “ Constellation,” were 
saluted under the Hawaiian flag, at which Lord Paulet 
took great umbrage. The king returned from Lahaina 


* “Tn this abode of death,” says Jarves, “‘surrounded by the former sov- 
ereigns of Hawaii, and using the coffin of Kaahumanu for a table, for many 
weeks he nightly found an unsuspected asylum for his labors in behalf of the 
kingdom.” 


a Sa _ 


THE RESTORATION 249 


on the 25th, and on the next day the British flag-ship 
“Dublin” arrived from Valparaiso, bearing the pennant of 
Rear-Admiral Thomas, commander-in-chief of H. B. M.’s 
naval forces in the Pacific Ocean. 

The Restoration.— Hardly had the “ Dublin” come to 
anchor before the admiral in the most courteous terms 
solicited a personal interview with the king, and in a few 
hours it became known that he had come to restore the 
independence of the islands. On the following day the 
terms of the restoration were agreed upon, and arrange- 
ments were made for the ceremonies to take place on 
Monday, the 31st. 

A proclamation was issued by Admiral Thomas, in 
which he declared in the name of his sovereign that he 
did not accept of the Provisional Cession of the Hawaiian 
Islands, and that “Her Majesty sincerely desires King 
Kamehameha III. to be treated as an independent sov- 
ereign, leaving the administration of justice in his own 
hands.” A convention of ten articles was signed by the 
king and Admiral Thomas, which stringently guarded 
British interests, although it fully recognized the king’s 
rights.* 

The 31st of July, a day memorable in Hawaiian his- 
tory, was clear and cloudless. An open space on the plain 
east of the town, since called “Thomas Square,” had been 
selected for the ceremonies of the day, two pavilions 
having been erected and a flag-staff planted. Thither 
poured the entire population of Honolulu, to witness the 
restoration of the flag. At ten o'clock a.m., the marines 
of the “Dublin,” “Carysfort,” and “Hazard” being drawn 


* The king also published an “ Act of Grace,” pardoning all offenses com- 
mitted during the interregnum, and granting ten days of rejoicing, during 
which all government work was to be suspended. 


250 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


up in line, with a battery of field-pieces on their right, 
the king, escorted by his own troops, arrived on the 
ground. As the Hawaiian royal standard was hoisted, a 
salute of twenty-one guns was fired by the field battery, 
after which the national colors were raised over the fort 
and on Punchbowl Hill, and saluted by both forts and by 
the four men-of-war in port, followed by loud and long 
cheering from the assembled multitude. After the salut- 
ing, various evolutions were performed by the marines, 
after which the king was escorted to his residence, where 
the natives belonging to the late “Queen’s Regiment” 
came before him to sue for pardon, and to swear alle- 
giance to their rightful sovereign. 

At one o’clock p.m. the king attended a thanksgiving 
service in the Kawaiahao church, where he addressed the 
people, informing them that, as he had hoped, “the life 
of the land” had been restored, using the words which 
have since been adopted as the national motto, “ Ua mau 
ke ea 0 ka aina 4 ka pono” —the life of the land is per- 
petuated by righteousness.* 

Before the festival was over, the American frigate 
“United States,” Commodore Jones, arrived (August 3d), 
and soon afterwards the “Cyane,’ Captain Stribling, 
bringing news of the success of. the king’s envoys in 
Kurope. | 

Admiral Thomas took up his residence on shore while 
awaiting the approval of his own government. In the 
mean time, he gave his assistance in establishing order 
and morality, and in harmonizing the conflicting parties. 
His noble act of justice was fully approved by the home 


* The admiral’s declaration was then interpreted, after which John I 
addressed the assembly, announcing the general amnesty and a festival of ten — 
days. ; 


SUCCESS OF THE EMBASSY IN EUROPE Aaah 


government, as, in the words of Lord Canning, “marked 
by great propriety and admirable judgment throughout, 
and as calculated to raise the character of the British 
authorities for . justice, moderation, and courtesy of 
demeanor, in the estimation of the natives of those 
remote countries, and of the world.” 


CHAPTER XXXI 
1843-1847 


RECOGNITION OF THE INDEPENDENCE OF THE ISLANDS 


As was stated on page 246, Messrs. Simpson and 
Marshall sailed together on the “ Albert” for San Blas, 
the former having no suspicion of Mr. Marshall’s real 
errand. They have well been compared to the acid and 
alkaline powders lying quietly side by side in a box of 
seidlitz powders. They landed at San Blas on the 10th 
of April, 1848, and traveled in company across Mexico 
to Vera Cruz, where they parted, Mr. Simpson proceed- 
ing directly to England, while Mr. Marshall hastened to 
Washington, where the news of the cession of the islands 
created great excitement. 

He arrived in Liverpool June 28th, a week later than 
his rival, Mr. Simpson. Lord Aberdeen had already, on 
the 18th of June, assured the Hawaiian envoys that 
“Her Majesty’s government had no intention to retain 
possession of the Sandwich Islands,” and a similar declara- 
tion was made to the governments of France and the 
United States. 

Mr. Marshall was soon joined by Messrs. Richards and 
Haalhlio from Paris, after which the three commissioners 
opened a correspondence with the Foreign Office in reply 
to the charges brought by Messrs. Simpson and Charlton 
against the Hawaiian Government. In this they were 


' aided by the ready pen of Mr. Brinsmade, as well as by 
262 


THE INDEPENDENCE OF THE ISLANDS 2538 
the influence and advice of the Hudson Bay Company. 
At their urgent request the whole controversy was 
referred to the law advisers of the crown, who decided 
in’ favor of the Hawaiian Government on every point 
except the Charlton land claim. In regard to this last, 
they required “that Mr. Charlton, having first produced 
the original deed and shown it to be genuine, should 
be put in possession of the land by the government.” 
Lord Aberdeen, however, declined to consider any claim 
for damages caused by the illegal acts of Lord Paulet, 
for the alleged reason that the cession was “a volun- 
tary act” on the part of the king. 

At length, on the 28th of November, 18438, the two 
governments of France and England united in a joint 
declaration to the effect that “Her Majesty, the queen 
of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, and 
His Majesty, the king of the French, taking into consid- 
eration the existence in the Sandwich Islands of a gov- 
ernment capable of providing for the regularity of its 
relations with foreign nations, have thought it right to 
engage reciprocally to consider the Sandwich Islands as 
an independent state, and never to take possession, either 
directly or under the title of a protectorate, or under any 
other form, of any part of the territory of which they 
Srercom posed. it .f 5” | 

This was the final act by which the Hawaiian Kingdom 
was admitted within the pale of civilized nations. Find- 
ing that nothing more could be accomplished for the 
present in Paris, Messrs. Richards and Haalilio returned 
to the United States in the spring of 1844. On the 6th 
of July they received a dispatch from Mr. J. ©. Cal- 
houn, the Secretary of State, informing them that the 
President regarded the statement of Mr. Webster and the 


254 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


appointment of a commissioner “as a full recognition on 
the part of the United States of the independence of 
the Hawaiian Government.” 

A Mr. George Brown had previously been sent out 
as United States commissioner, arriving at Honolulu 
October 16th, 1848. 

General William Miller had been appointed consul- 
general for Great Britain August 25th, 1843. He had 
greatly distinguished himself in the Chilean war of inde- 
pendence, and had risen to the rank of leutenant-general 
in the Chilean army. He had visited the islands in 18381, 
in the Prussian ship “Princess Louisa.” It may be said, 
however, that he was a better soldier than diplomatist. 

General Miller arrived at the islands in February, 
1844, bringing with lim a convention with England, 
which was nearly a copy ot that exacted by Captain 
Laplace, and which was signed by the king with the 
express understanding that it was to be only temporary. 
Admiral Thomas then took leave of the islands, where 
his name will long be held in grateful remembrance. 7 

Organization of the Government.—The Hawaiian ship 
of state might then be regarded as safely launched. 
Much, however, remained to be done in order to organize 
a civilized. government, “capable of providing for the 
regularity of its relations with foreign nations.” 

It was early seen by the king’s advisers that in order 
to constitute a permanent government it would be neces- 
sary to combine the foreign and native elements together 
as subjects and officers of one common government, to 
make the king the sovereign not merely of one race or 
class, but of all, and to extend equal and impartial laws 
over all residents. 

The office of Secretary of State was instituted, and held 


THE INDEPENDENCE OF THE ISLANDS 2.55 


by Dr. Judd from November 2d, 1843, until March 26th, 
1845, when, at his instance, it was given to Robert 
Crichton Wyllie, Esq.” 

The want of a competent legal adviser of the crown 
had: long been felt. Accordingly, on the 9th of March, 
1844, Mr. John Ricord, who had then just arrived from 
Oregon, and who was versed in the civil as well as the 
common law, was appointed attorney-general. Mr. Rich- 
ards arrived at Honolulu March 238d, 1845, after a long 
voyage around Cape Horn. His colleague, Haalilio, who 
had long been in feeble health, died at sea, December 
38d, 1844. His remains were brought to Honolulu, and 
deposited in the royal tomb with much ceremony and 
sincere mourning. 

In the spring of 1845 a severe epidemic of influenza 
passed over the islands, and among others Kekauluohi, 
the premier, died June 7th, 1845, and was succeeded in 
office by John Young, Jr. 

About this time Mr. Richards was appointed Minister 
of Public Instruction, and proceeded to organize and 
improve the public schools. At his death, on the 7th of 
November, 1847, Mr. Armstrong was appointed as his 
successor, and held the office until his death, in 1860. 

On the 20th of May, 1845, the legislature was for- 
mally opened for the first time, by the king in person, 
with fitting ceremonies. At this session Mr. Ricord was 
ordered by a joint resolution to draft a series of acts 
organizing the five executive departments of the govern- 
ment. The duties on imports were raised to five per cent. 

Meanwhile there was considerable agitation among the 


* He was a Scotchman by birth, who had spent many years in South Amer- 
ica. For twenty years he employed his multifarious learning, indefatigable 
energy, and sagacity in the service of his adopted country. 


256 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


natives, especially on Maui, headed by David Malo, the 
historian, who petitioned the king to dismiss all foreigners 


from his service except Mr. Richards, not to allow any more 
to be naturalized, and not to sell any land to foreigners.* 
The king and John Young made a tour around the island 
of Maui, and addressed the people at several places, 
explaining and defending the policy of the government. 

At the legislative sessions of 1846 and 1847, the first 
two volumes of statute laws drafted by Mr. Ricord were 
finally passed, and the complicated machinery of the gov- 
ernment was set in operation, very nearly as it has been 
run ever since.+ 

Land Commission.—The king and chiefs were now 
fully convinced that their ancient system of land tenure 
(described on pages 27 and 215,) was the great hin- 
drance to their further progress in civilization, and saw 
that it was continually involving them in disputes with 
foreigners. 

By Dr. Judd’s advice the legislature passed an act 
on the 10th of December, 1845, constituting a “ Board 
of Commissioners to quiet Land Titles,” before which all 
persons were required to file their claims to land within 
two years, or be forever barred. This board continued in 
office until March 31st, 1855. 

After a long investigation it was finally settled that 
there were but three classes of persons having vested 
rights in land, viz.: 1st, the king, 2d, the chiefs, and 3d, 
the tenants or common people. The Land Commission 
decided that if the king should allow to the landlords one 


* About three hundred and fifty foreign residents had been naturalized up to 
1846. 

+ At this session the Minister of Finance was able to report that the national 
debt (which had amounted to $160,000 in 1842) was then entirely extinguished. 
The government remained out of debt during the rest of this reign. 


rh i. | 


THE INDEPENDENCE OF THE ISLANDS 257 


third, to the tenants one third, and keep one third himself, 
“he would injure no one but himself.” 

The king and chiefs for years endeavored in vain to 
make some division among themselves which would enable 
each of them to hold land independently in fee simple. 
At last the subject was brought before the Privy Council 
in December, 1847, when the principles of the division 
among the king, the chiefs, and the government were 
finally settled. A committee was appointed, of which 
Dr. Judd was the chairman, to bring about this division. 

The work was commenced January 27th, 1848, and 
completed in forty days.* 

The day after the first partition with the chiefs was 
closed, the king again divided the lands which had been 
surrendered to him, setting apart half of them for 
the government, and reserving the remainder for himself 
as his own private estate. The former were known 
as government lands, and the latter as crown lands. By 
this grand act Kamehameha IPI. set an illustrious exam- 
ple of liberality and public spirit. Most of the chiefs 
afterwards (in 1850) gave up a third of their lands to 
the government, in order to obtain an absolute title to the 
remainder. 

The common people were offered fee-simple titles for 
their house lots and the lands which they actually culti- 
vated for themselves, commonly called kuwleanas. The 
number of claims finally confirmed amounted to eleven 
thousand three hundred and nine. The awards for these 
were recorded in ten huge folios, which were deposited in 
the Land Office. Aliens were not allowed to own land in 

fee simple until July 10th, 1850. 


*The book in which it is recorded is called the ‘‘Mahele Book,” or book of 
division. 


253 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Thus a solid foundation was laid for individual property | 


in land, and the poor serfs became owners of their home- 
steads. 

The Judiciary.—The weakest point in the government, 
of which its enemies took every possible advantage, was 


the administration of justice in foreign cases. Hitherto, — 


all such cases had been tried by juries composed of for- 
eigners, with Governor Kekuanaoa as judge. The fact 


that the judge had to depend on the attorney-general | 


for advice on points of law gave occasion for numerous 
complaints. Party spirit ran very high, while the course 


of the attorney-general was not conciliatory or calcu- — 


lated to inspire confidence in his impartiality. 


At this juncture the brig “Henry” arrived from : 


Newburyport, October 12th, 1846, with fifteen passengers 


on board, bound for Oregon. Among these was Mr. 
William L. Lee, a talented young lawyer, highly recom- 
mended by Professor Greenleaf and Judge Story. For- 
tunately he was persuaded to remain and accept the 
position of chief-justice, which he held until his death. 


To say that he was “the right man in the right place” 


gives but a faint idea of his eminent services to the 
country. He organized the courts of justice, and so con- 
ducted the highest tribunal that it soon acquired univer- 
sal confidence and respect, and instead of being a source of 
weakness, became the strongest pillar of the government. 


As president of the Board of Land Commissioners he 


performed a most arduous and responsible task. Although 


he was not the originator of that great reform, his wag _ 


the guiding mind in carrying it on.* 
Material Progress in the ’40’s.—The progress of the 


* Mr, Ricord’s departure in July, 1847, threw additional labors upon Judge 
Lee, to be mentioned hereafter. 


THE INDEPENDENCE OF THE ISLANDS 2.59 


country during these years in wealth and resources was 
steady but slow, from the want of convenient markets. 
The revenue of the government rose from forty-one 
thousand dollars in 18438 to one hundred and fifty-five 
thousand dollars in 1848, and the national debt was paid 
off. Among the public improvements made at this time 
may be mentioned the first horse-road over the Nuuanu 
Pali, opened June 7th, 1845, the oid custom-house built 
in 1848, and a palace of coral stone, built on the site 
of the present one in 1844. 

The exports were still small, averaging about seven 
hundred thousand dollars per annum, of which only 
one third was domestic produce. The furnishing of sup- 
plies to the whaling fleet was a great resource in those 
days. Over fifty whalers were sometimes at anchor off 
Lahaina at once, and about five hundred touched at the 
islands during the year 1845. Their influence on the 
morals and health of the people was pernicious. 

Agriculture.—As has been stated, the first sugar plan- 
tation was started at Koloa, Kauai. Another was started 
in Kohala in 1841, and one in Wailuku soon afterwards. 
The wages then paid to laborers only averaged twenty- 
five cents a day. The amount exported rose to five 
hundred tons in 1848, but then fell off, and did not reach 
that figure again for ten years. The methods in use 
were rude and wasteful, the mills being mostly worked 
by oxen or mules, and the molasses drained in the old- 
fashioned way. 

The first coffee plantation was started at Hanalei, 
Kauai, in 1842, and promised well at first, but the grow- 
ers became discouraged by the blight, and gave it up. 
The export rose to two hundred and eight thousand 
pounds in 1850, but then fell off. 


260 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


The first silk was exported in 1844, having been raised 
at Hanalei by Mr. Charles Titcomb. Although the quality 
was excellent, the enterprise was not a financial suc- 
cess. 

The first experiments in wheat-raising were made in 
Makawao in 1845, and a few years later it became a 
flourishing branch of industry. 

The Discovery of Gold in California.—The discovery 
of gold in California in 1848 formed an era in the history 
of the islands. In August of that year the first party left 
Honolulu for the gold diggings, and the rush continued 
for several months. It opened a new market for the pro- 
ductions of the islands, which has been increasing in 
importance ever since. 

Decrease in Population.—No census of the kingdom 
was taken between 1836 and 1850, but it is certain that 
the decrease in population was rapid. Of the high chiefs, 
besides the premier, Governor Adams or Kuakini died 
December 9th, 1844, Kekauonohi June 2d, 1847, and 
Leleiohoku, son of Kalanimoku, October 21st, 1848. 
During the year 1848 the measles was introduced from 
California, and spread through the group for the first 
time. The mortality was dreadful.* 

Relations with France.— For five years the relations 
between the islands and France continued to be of the 
most friendly nature. From 1848 until 1848 scarcely a 
complaint was made, and the bishop of Arathia, speaking 
for his countrymen, said: “We esteem ourselves happy 
in living under a government that so well understands 
the liberty of conscience.” This was largely owing to the 
ability, tact, and courtesy shown by the French consul, 
M. Dudoit. 

*It is supposed that it carried off one tenth of the people. 


(a 


THE INDEPENDENCE OF THE ISLANDS | 261 


On the 22d of March, 1846, the French frigate “ Vir- 
ginie,’ Rear-Admiral Hamelin, arrived at Honolulu. On 
the following day the admiral restored the twenty thou- 
sand dollars which had been delivered to Captain 
Laplace July 18th, 1889. The money was brought on 
shore in the original cases and with the seals unbroken.* 

The New Treaties.—The same ship brought Mr. Em. 
Perrin, special commissioner from the king of the French, 
who brought with. him new treaties with the Hawaiian 
Government, concerted between England and France in 
identical terms, which did away with all former conven- 
tions. Although a.decided improvement on the Laplace 
convention, they contained two objectionable clauses, 
which proved to be a fruitful source of trouble in subse- 
quent years. The third article provided that no French or 
British subject should be tried except by a jury nomi- 
nated by the consul of his country. The sixth article pro- 
vided that import duties should not exceed five per cent., 
except for “ wines, brandies, and spirituous liquors,” which 
should “be liable to any reasonable duty which did not 
amount to a prohibition.” 

No modification being allowed, the two treaties were 
signed by the king, March 26th, 1846. At this same time 
he sent to both governments a strong remonstrance 
against the third and sixth articles. 

Consular Grievances.—For several years fie small 
| foreign community of Honolulu was kept in a state of 
turmoil, and rent by party animosity. 

On the one hand, the king’s ministers claimed for him 
_ all the rights of an independent sovereign, while on the 
other, the representatives of England and the United 


* Nothing could exceed the courtesy shown by the admiral during his short 
stay in port, 


ZO HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


States claimed the rights of “ready access” to the king 
and of “diplomatic interference” with the internal affairs 


2 


of the kingdom. In 1845 extraordinary efforts were made | 


to discredit the government abroad and to break it down 
at home. The dispute over the “ Belgian Contract ” added 
to the excitement. In 1846, by order of the legislature, 
Mr. Wyllie prepared a table of “consular grievances,” 
which formed a roll one hundred and twenty feet long. 


At length the course of Mr. Brown, the American com- | 


missioner, became so hostile and insulting that all official 

intercourse with him was suspended July 29th, 1845. 
On the Ist of June, 1846, the United States ship 

“Congress,” Commodore Stockton, arrived at Honolulu, 


bringing A. Ten Kyck, Esq., the new commissioner, and | 


Joel Turrill, Esq., the new consul. All the outstand- 
ing petty disputes were immediately settled, and for 
nearly ten years not a single complaint was made by an 
American consul. | 


Captain Steen Bille, of the Danish corvette “ Galathea,” 


in the course of a scientific voyage around the world, 
arrived at Honolulu October 5th, 1846. On the 19th he 
negotiated the first fair and honorable treaty with this 
country, and one which has served as a model for other 
treaties. 

End of the Belgian Contract, 1846.—While Mr. Brins- 
made was in Europe, vainly endeavoring to persuade the 
Belgian Company to carry out their contract (page 240), 
the firm of Ladd & Co. had failed in business, and in 
November, 1844, the government, which had aided them 
with loans, levied on their property, and sold it for the 
benefit of their creditors. 

In May, 1845, the firm claimed the right of selecting 
lands under the original contract of November, 1841 


THE INDEPENDENCE OF THE ISLANDS 268 


(page 236), which the government denied, on the ground 
that they had transferred it to the Belgian Company. On 
Mr. Brinsmade’s return in March, 1846, he brought a 
claim against the government for damages to the amount 
of $378,000, chiefly for having, as he alleged, prevented 
the Belgian contract from being carried out.* 

On the part of the government it was held that the 
Belgian contract of May 17th, 1848, was contrary to the 
constitution and laws of the islands, and inconsistent with 
existing treaties, and that its execution would have been 
fatal to the native race, and would have ruined all foreign 
trade except through the Belgian Company. 

Difficulties with the British Consul.—For several years 
the government was involved in unfortunate disputes 
with General Miller, which were finally referred to the 
British Government, and settled in 1847. The Charlton 
land claim gave rise to a misunderstanding as to the 
meaning of Lord Aberdeen’s decision (page 253). The 
Hawaiian Government held the view that Mr. Charlton 
was to produce his title before a court, and there prove 
its genuineness and validity. General Miller limited the 
question to the genuineness of the handwritings, and 
evidently considered it a mere matter of form. After a 
long correspondence he presented a peremptory demand 
from the British Government, and on the 23d of August, 
1845, took possession of the land in question, without 
having even shown the alleged deed. An investigation 
was held at the palace during the month of October, 1845, 


*The government agreed to refer this claim to the arbitration of Messrs. 


_ J.¥F. B. Marshall and 8. H. Williams, and offered its archives for their inspection. 


Mr. Ten Eyck acted as counsel for Ladd & Co., and Mr. Ricord for the govern- 
ment. After the trial had lasted four months, and filled six hundred and thirteen 


_ printed pages, Ladd & Co. withdrew from it, before the government had brought 
- in its evidence. Other attempts to effect a compromise failed, and the question 
_ long remained unsettled, to divide and embroil the foreign community. 


264 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


when a mass of evidence was taken on the subject, which — 


was sent to England, and also published: here, and which 


to most minds was entirely conclusive against Mr. Charl- — 


ton’s claim. 

While this appeal was pending, H. B. M.’s eighty-gun 
ship “ Collingwood,” Admiral Seymour, having been sent 
for by General Miller to enforce his demands, arrived 
August 6th, 1846. The admiral, however, consented 
to act aS umpire in the matter, his decision being subject 


to revision by his own government. Accordingly, a 


second investigation was held at the palace, from August 
25th until September 1st, a full account of which was sent 
to England. 


The final award of the British Government, which 


confirmed that of Admiral Seymour, was not received 
until August 13th, 1847. It decided that Mr. Charlton 
was not to be disturbed in the possession of the land 
called Pulaholaho, but sustained the Hawaiian Govern- 
ment on the other points in dispute, viz.: that the 
government might erect wharves in front of the land of 
Pulaholaho, and that a certain James Ruddack should 
submit his petty boundary quarrels to the local courts. 


CHAPTER XXXII 


1848-1851 
FOREIGN RELATIONS 


The Grievances of Consul Dillon.—On the Ist of 
February, 1848, the French corvette “Sarcelle” arrived 
at Honolulu, bringing Mr. Patrick Dillon, the new French 
consul, commissioned to exchange the ratifications of the 
treaty of March 26th, 1846. 

On the 15th a full-length portrait of Louis Philippe, the 
king of the French, was presented to Kamehameha ILI. with 
much ceremony and with the most friendly assurances. 

But these pleasant relations did not continue long. 
Mr. Dillon was soon involved in personal quarrels with 
his predecessor and with Mr. Wyllie, and reversed the 
policy of the past five years, endeavoring to reopen all the 
old disputes which had been closed, and to manufacture 
new grievances in every possible way. He carried to the 
last extreme the policy of ‘diplomatic interference” with 
the internal affairs of the kingdom.* 

His principal grounds of complaint were the high duty 
on brandy and the alleged partiality shown to the English . 
language. 

The Ten Demands.—In April, 1849, the questions at 
issue between the Hawaiian Government and Mr. Dillon 
were referred directly to the French Government, and 
his recall was requested. 


* In six months his correspondence with Mr Wyllie filled nearly four hundred 
printed pages. 
265 


966 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE: 


At the same time Mr. Dillon wrote to the French 


admiral for a naval force to support his demands. 


On the 12th of August, 1849, the French frigate 


“ Poursuivante,’ Admiral De Tromelin, arrived at Hono- 
lulu, and was joined the next day by the steam corvette 
“Gassendi,’ from Tahiti. On the 22d Admiral De Tro- 
melin sent the king a peremptory dispatch containing 
ten demands which. had been drawn up by Mr. Dillon, as 
follows: 


1. 
2. 


10; 


The complete and loyal adoption of the treaty of March 26th, 1846. 
The reduction of the duty on French brandy to fifty per cent. ad 
valorem. 

The subjection of Catholic schools to the direction of the chief of 
the French Mission, and to special inspectors not Protestants, and 
a treatment rigorously equal granted to the two worships and to 
their schools. 


The use of the French language in all business intercourse between — 


French citizens and the Hawaiian.Government. 

The withdrawal of the (alleged) exception, by which French whal- 
ers, which imported wine and spirits, were affected, and the 
abrogation of a regulation which obliged vessels laden with liquors 


to pay the custom-house officers placed on board to superintend 


their loading and unloading. 

The return of all duties collected by virtue of the regulation the 
withdrawal of which was demanded by the fifth article. 

The return of a fine of twenty-five dollars paid by the whale ship 


“General Teste,” besides an indemnity of sixty dollars for the 


time that she was detained in port. 
The punishment of certain school-boys, whose impious conduct (in 
church) had occasioned complaint. 


. The removal of the governor of Hawaii for allowing the domicile of 


a priest to be violated (by police officers, who entered it to make 
an arrest), or the order that the governor make reparation to that 
missionary. § 
The payment to a French hotel keeper of the damages committed 
in his house by sailors from H. B. M.’s ship “‘ Amphitrite.” 


FOREIGN RELATIONS. 1848-1851 ’ 267 


The Hawaiian Government was allowed three days in 
which to make a satisfactory reply to these demands. 
If they were not acceded to, the admiral threatened to 
cancel the existing treaty, and to “employ the means at 
his disposal to obtain a complete reparation.” 

About noon of the 25th, a firm but courteous reply 
was sent to the admiral, declaring that the government 
had faithfully observed the treaty of 1846 ; that the exist- 
ing duty on brandy was so far from being “an absolute 
prohibition” that the importation of French brandy had 
greatly increased under it; that rigorous equality in the 
treatment of different forms of worship was already pro- 
vided for, but that public schools supported by government 
funds should not be placed under the direction of any 
mission, whether Catholic or Protestant; and that the 
adoption of the French language in business was not 
required by the treaty or by international law, and was 
impracticable in the state of the islands. 

In reply to the fifth and sixth demands, it was stated 
that the laws in question applied equally to all vessels of 
whatever nation, that the ship “General Teste” had vio- 
lated the harbor laws, and that the penalty in her case 
had already been reduced from five hundred dollars to 
twenty-five dollars. In regard to the last three demands, 
the admiral was informed that the courts of the kingdom 
were open for the redress of all such grievances, and that 
until justice had been denied by them there could be no 
occasion for diplomatic interference. 

The government offered to refer any dispute to the 
mediation of a neutral power, and informed the admiral 
that no resistance would be made to the force at his dis- 
posal, and that in any event the persons and property of 
French residents would be scrupulously guarded. 


ee 


268 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


The ‘“Reprisals” made by Admiral Tromelin.—The 
same afternoon an armed force was landed with two field- 
pieces, scaling-iadders, etc., which met with no opposition, 
and took possession of an empty fort. The Hawaiian flag, 
which was flying over it at the time, was never hauled 
down. The invaders also took possession of the custom- 
house and other government buildings, and seized the’ 
king’s yacht, together with seven merchant vessels in port. 
Perfect order prevailed during the whole time of the occu- 
pation, and no French citizen. was molested in any way, 

The occupation continued for ten days, during which 
nearly all business was interrupted. All communication 
with the other islands was stopped. No coasting vessels 
were allowed to leave, and all arriving from the other — 
islands were at once taken and anchored under the guns of 
the “Gassendi.” On the 28th, at the suggestion of the 
admiral, a conference was held on board of the “ Gassendi,” 
between himself and Mr. Dillon on the one side, and the 
king’s commissioners, Messrs. Judd and Lee, on the other 
side.* | 

During this conference the work of dismantling the fort 
was going on, and was continued until noon of the 30th, 
The guns were spiked and broken; the magazine was 
opened, and the powder poured into the sea. The furni- — 
ture, calabashes, and ornaments in the governor’s house | 
were destroyed. : 

On the 80th the admiral issued a proclamation, declar- — 
ing that by way of “reprisal” the fort had been dismantled, 
and the king’s yacht, “ Kamehameha IIL,” confiscated, but 
that private property would be restored. He also declared 


* At this conference the duty on brandy was discussed for several hours, 
but no agreement was arrived at, and the admiral refused to refer any poimt — 
to arbitration. 


FOREIGN RELATIONS. 1848-1851 269 


the treaty of 1846 to be annulled, and replaced by the 
Laplace Convention of 1839. This last act, however, was 
promptly disavowed by the French Government. The 
British and American consuls had both protested against 
his proceedings, the former declaring them to be a viola- 
tion of the convention of November 28th, 1843. 

The yacht “ Kamehameha” sailed for Tahiti, September 
Ath, and on the following day both men-of-war left, the 
“Gassendi” for Valparaiso and Europe, and the “ Poursui- 
vante,’ with Mr. Dillon and family on board, for San 
Francisco, where Mr. Dillon afterwards held the office of 
French consul-general. 

The Second Embassy to Europe.—It was immedi- 
ately resolved by the king and council to send Dr. Judd 
as special commissioner to France, together with the two 
young princes, Alexander Liholiho, the heir-apparent, and 
his brother, Lot Kamehameha. They sailed for San Fran- 
cisco September 11th, 1849, in the schooner “ Honolulu,” 
amid hearty cheering from the shore, while all the ships 
in port manned their yards in their honor. 

In San Francisco they met Charles Eames, Esq., United 
States commissioner, with whom Dr. Judd negotiated the 
| draft of a new treaty. On their arrival in New York, 
. they received flattering attentions from the city authori- 
_ties, but deemed it necessary to take the first steamer for 
Liverpool. _In England they were shown much kindness 
‘by Admiral Thomas and Lord Palmerston. 

On arriving in Paris, they found that Mr. Dillon had 
preceded them, and still possessed the confidence of the 
Minister of Foreign Affairs. Dr. Judd was referred to Mr. 
Perrin, who seemed to be fully imbued with the views of 
‘Mr. Dillon. After remaining in Paris ten weeks, vainly 
endeavoring +o negotiate a new treaty, they returned to 


2G | HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


England, where the young princes were treated with the 
utmost hospitalty and courtesy, and enjoyed etree of 
the aristocratic society of London. 

Having agreed with Lord Palmerston upon the basis 
of a new treaty with England, the embassy returned to 
the United States in May, 1850. After visiting Washing- 
ton, they came home by way of Panama, arriving in Hono- 
lulu September 9th, 1850.* The new treaty with the 
United States was finally concluded in Washington, 
December 26th, 1849. 

A similar just and equitable treaty was concluded with 
Great Britain July 10th, 1851. 

Negotiations with Mr. Perrin, 1851.—Mr. Perrin was 
again sent to the islands as commissioner of France, in 
the corvette “Serieuse,” which arrived at Honolulu Decem- 
ber 18th, 1850, and remained in port three months. He 
opened a voluminous correspondence with the Hawaiian 
Government, and on the 1st of February, to the surprise 
of every one, presented the identical ten demands of Mr. 
Dillon, although the last claim had been fully paid. He 
also resumed Mr. Dillon’s policy of an annoying diplo- 
matic interference with the internal affairs of the kingdom. 

After a month’s fruitless discussion of these demands, 
the king and privy council passed a proclamation, which 
was duly signed by the king and premier, March 10th, 
1851, placing the islands provisionally under the protec- 
tion of the United States, until their relations with France 
should be placed “upon a footing compatible with the 
king’s rights as an independent sovereign, and with his 
treaty engagements with other nations,” or, if this should 
be found to be impracticable, declaring the said protector- 


* The princes were much improved by their foreign tour, and made a very 
favorable impression abroad. 


FOREIGN RELATIONS. 1848-1851 Varia 


ate to be perpetual. This declaration was communicated 
to the governments of Great Britain and the United 
States. 

The result of this action was that Mr. Perrin soon dis- 
covered that the difficulties with his government were 
reduced to two points, viz.: “the liberty of Catholic wor- 
ship and the trade in spirits.” A joint declaration, com- 
prising four moderate articles, was agreed upon and signed 
by both parties, March 25th, the question of indemnity to 
the king being referred to the decision of the President 
of the French republic. Nothing more was ever heard of 
the rest of the ten demands.* 


*Mr. Perrin left for Paris May 24th, 1851, to obtain fresh instructions, and 
did not return until January 8th, 1858. The legislature of 1851 confirmed the 
action of the privy council. 


CHAPTER XXXIII 
1851-1854 
THE CLOSE OF KAMEHAMEHA III.’S REIGN 


The Constitution of 1852.—The legislature of 1850 
provided for the appointment of three commissioners to 
draft a new constitution. The king was represented by 
Dr. Judd, the nobles by John Ii, and the representatives 
by Chief-justice Lee. The draft, which had been chiefly 
prepared by Judge Lee, was submitted to the legislature 
of 1852, and after having been discussed at length and 
amended, was finally adopted June 14th, 1852, by both 
houses, and signed by the king. This constitution was a 
great advance upon that of 1840, and has formed the 
basis of those that have succeeded it. 

The legislature was to be composed of two houses, to sit 
in separate chambers. The nobles were to be chosen by 
the king for life, their number being limited to thirty. 
The number of representatives was not to be less than 
twenty-four, who were to be elected by universal suffrage. 
The privy council was now made distinct from the house 


i 


of nobles. The singular institution of a kuhina nui or — 


vice-king was continued. 
The courts were organized very nearly as they now 
exist, viz.: a Supreme Court, consisting of a chief-justice 


and two associate justices, and four circuit courts, besides — 


a petty judge for each district. It was an extremely lib- 
eral constitution, and together with his gift to the peopse 


272 | 


! 
. 
| 


THE CLOSE OF KAMEHAMEHA III.’S REIGN 2To 


of lands in fee simple, forms the glory of the reign of 
Kamehameha ILI. | 

Between the years 1850 and 1860 a large part of the 
government land was sold in small tracts to the natives, 
at low prices, and great efforts were made to encourage 
habits of industry and thrift among them. The census 
taken in 1850 gave a total population of 84,165, showing 
a decrease of 24,414 in fourteen years. The number of 
foreigners was only 1,962. 

Material Progress.— The rapid settlement of California 
opened a new market for the productions of the islands, 
and gave a great stimulus to agriculture. For a short 
time, sugar brought from eighteen to twenty cents a 
pound in San Francisco, and large profits were made by 
raising potatoes in Kula, Maui, and elsewhere for the 
California market. The culture of wheat also increased, 
and in June, 1854, a steam flouring mill was started in 
Honolulu. The next year four hundred and sixty-three 
barrels of Hawaiian flour were exported. A foundry was 
started at Honolulu at the same time. 

In August, 1850, the Royal Hawaiian Agricultural 
Society was organized with Judge Lee as president, and 
existed for more than twenty years.* 

The year 1851-52 was noted for one of the severest 
droughts ever known at the islands, after which the 
coffee plantations were attacked by blight. 

Steam Navigation.—In November, 1858, a California 
company brought a small steamer called the “S. B. 
Wheeler” (afterwards the “Akamai”), to run between 
the islands, and obtained a charter from the government. 
In 1854 the company added an old, shaky boat called 


! *It did much to encourage industry and to introduce valuable plants and 
animals. 


204 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


the “West Point” or “Kalama,” which was wrecked at 
Koloa in 1856. 

Before this a larger boat, the “Sea Bird” or “ Kameha- 
meha,” had been put on the windward route, but she 
was withdrawn in a year or two, and the company’s 
charter was annulled in October, 1856. 

The Sailors’ Riot of 1852.—A serious riot was caused 
by the death of a seaman named John Burns, who died 
in the fort from the effects of a blow from a policeman’s 
club, November 9th, 1852. After his funeral, in the after- 
noon of the 10th, a mob of four or five hundred sailors. 
demanded that the policeman should be delivered up to 
them, and they threatened to take the fort. Later in the 
evening they burned the station-house, a two-story build- 
ing near the foot of Nuuanu Street, and broke open 
several liquor saloons. The next morning many of the 
foreign residents assembled in the fort and formed a 
military organization of two hundred men. Meanwhile 
Governor Kekuanaoa, keeping his soldiers in reserve, 
ordered the unarmed multitude of natives looking on > 
to clear the streets, which was soon done without any 
loss of life, and forty or fifty rioters were locked up in 
the fort. 

Later on, the foreign volunteer companies patrolled 
the streets, and made some arrests. On the 17th, the first 
military company of foreigners was formed under the 
name of “The Hawaiian Guards.” 

Filibusters.—At that time California was resorted to 
by lawless adventurers from all parts of the world, and 
filibustering expeditions were common. One General 
Walker headed a raid of this kind into Lower California 
in 1858, another into Nicaragua in 1855, and a third 
in 1861, in which he was taken and shot. The Hawaiian | 


THE CLOSE OF KAMEHAMEHA IIL’S REIGN oT 


Government received many warnings in the fall of 1851, 
that a band of filibusters was being organized to invade 
the kingdom. Accordingly, at their request, the U. S. 
sloop-of-war ‘“ Vandalia,” Captain Gardner, was kept in 
readiness to seize any suspicious vessel, and a small body 
of native soldiers was drilled for several months by his 
officers. A number of suspicious characters came down 
_ by the “Gamecock” in November, 1851, who rifled the 
_ mail-bag on the voyage down, and threw the letters over- 
board. The greater part of them, however, soon returned. 
For several years the peace of the country was guaranteed 
by the presence of British and American ships-of-war. 

The Small-pox Epidemic.—The year 1853 was one 
of the darkest in the history of this nation. 

In the early part of that year the small-pox was prev- 

alent in San Francisco. The clipper ship “Charles Mal- 
lory” from that port touched at Honolulu February 10th, 
' with one case of small-pox on board. It was strictly quar- 
_antined, and no harm resulted.* 
Three months later, in the month of May, several cases 
of small-pox were discovered on Mauna Kea Street in 
‘Honolulu. It has never been ascertained how it was 
introduced, but it was generally believed -to have been 
‘brought from San Francisco in some hundred chests of 
old clothing, which had been sold at auction. 

In spite of all precautions, the pestilence spread rapidly. 
On the 10th of May, three commissioners of public 
health, viz., Mr. Parke, Dr. Judd, and Dr. Rooke, were 
appointed with full powers. Sub-commissioners and 


* Three meetings of the resident physicians were held, and their advice 
“was adopted by the privy council. Vaccine matter was imported, and great 
efforts were made to vaccinate all the people through the voluntary services of 
‘medical men, missionaries, and others. 


976 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


agents were also appointed for every district, and the — 
coasting vessels were forbidden to take any passengers | 


who were not vaccinated —an ineffectual precaution. 
On Oahu the ravages of the disease were terrible, 
especially in Honolulu and in the district of Ewa. A large 


proportion of those taken with it had been vaccinated. | 


Temporary hospitals were established, and the physicians, 
missionaries, and many other volunteers were untiring in 
their efforts to dispense food, medicine, and comforts 


among the suffering people, and to vaccinate all who | 


had not taken the disease. The amount expended by the 


commissioners was over $28,000. 
There were but few cases on Kauai, and none on Molo- 


kal, where a strict policy of non-intercourse was main- 


tained. At Lahaina, effective measures were taken to 
properly vaccinate all the people, and to isolate those who 
brought the infection with them, of whom seven died. 
There were only a few cases in the district of Hana, and 
a few in Hilo, but a considerable number in Kawaihae 
and in the district of Kona, Hawaii. The total number of 
deaths caused directly by this epidemic was between two 
thousand five hundred and three thousand. It finally 
ceased in October. 

The census taken in December gave a total popula- 


tion of 73,137, showing a decrease of 11,027 in three 


years. 

Political Agitation—A portion of the foreign com- 
munity, many of whom had recently come from California, 
took advantage of this calamity to foment partisan strife. 


Two members of the cabinet, Messrs. Armstrong and — 


Judd, were selected as scapegoats, and held responsible 


for the spread of the disease. Great efforts were made to 
excite the native population against them, but they utterly 


i 


THE CLOSE OF KAMEHAMEHA III.’S REIGN A Gti 


failed. Indignation meetings were held, and petitions 
presented to the king for their removal from office. 
Threats were also used to intimidate the chiefs. An active 
agitation was commenced at the same time in favor of 
annexation to the United States. A committee of thirteen 
was appointed to carry out these objects. On the 29th 
of August the British and French consuls presented to 
the king a joint remonstrance against any annexation 
scheme. A few days later the whole cabinet resigned, 
but were all reappointed with the exception of Dr. Judd, 
who was succeeded by Hon. EK. H. Allen, whose appoint- 
ment gave general satisfaction, and caused no change in 
the policy of the government. 

Proposed Annexation.— The history of this reign 
would be incomplete without a reference to the agitation 
in favor of annexation to the United States that went 
on during the years 1853 and 1854.* 

Petitions in favor of it were presented to the king in 
August, 1853, and in January, 1854. There were at that 
time strong commercial interests in its favor, and the 
prospect of it stimulated speculation and led to new 
enterprises. The missionaries, however, of both denomi- 
nations were generally opposed to the ‘project, believing 
that its effects would be disastrous to the native race. 
But it was favored by the king, as a refuge from impend- 
Ing dangers. He was tired of demands made upon him 
by foreign powers, and of threats by filibusters from 
abroad and by conspirators at home to overturn the 
_ government.t 


*Although mosily confined to the foreign residents, it was so great as to lead 
_ in 1854 to a general belief of the certainty of the event. 

t‘“‘His purpose, though it happily fell through, secured to his successors a 
more peaceful possession of their inheritance.” 


2ES HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


The fearful decrease of the population, the rapid 
extinction of the order of chiefs, the relapse of the king 
into the excesses of his youth, and the perils overhang- 
ing the feeble government, disheartened some true friends 
of the nation, and led them to favor the preliminary 
steps then taken. On the 6th of February, 1854, in view 
of danger from filibusters and conspirators, the king 
commanded Mr. Wyllie to ascertain on what terms a 
treaty of annexation could be negotiated, to be used as a 
safeguard to meet any sudden emergency. Every proposi- 
tion was to be considered by the cabinet and Prince Liho- 
liho, and the treaty as a whole was to be submitted to 
His Majesty for his approval, modification, or rejection. 

The negotiations were carried on between Mr. Wyllie 
and Mr. Gregg, the American minister, with many delays. 
On the 11th of November Mr. Wyllie was informed that 
three hundred filibusters were expected in two vessels 
from San Francisco, and that there was a formidable 
armed organization of Californians and others in town, 
who would compel the king to sign the treaty, although 
Prince Liholiho was absent on Kauai. By order of the 
king and cabinet, Mr. Wyllie immediately applied to the 
representatives of the Great Powers, and was promised 
the support of the forces on board of the United States 
ships “Portsmouth” and “St. Mary’s,” of the British ship 
“Trincomalee,” and of the French frigate “ Artémise.” 
The expected filibusters never appeared. | 

On the 18th of December, a proclamation was pub- 
lished, declaring that the king had accepted the assistance 
of the naval forces of the three powers named, and that 
“his independence was more firmly established than ever 
before.” 

Death of Kamehameha III.—After a short illness of 


THE CLOSE OF KAMEHAMEHA III.’S REIGN 279 


five or six days, Kamehameha III. expired at noon on 
Friday, December 15th, 1854, in the forty-second year of 
his age. His adopted son and heir, Alexander Liholiho, 
was immediately proclaimed king, under the title of 
Kamehameha IV. | 

The funeral of the late king was celebrated January 
10th, 1855, with the most imposing procession ever seen 
in the islands. The mourning for his death was universal 
and sincere. His memory will ever be dear to his people 
for his unselfish patriotism, for the lhberal constitution 
which he granted them, and for the gift of the right to 
hold lands in fee simple. His reign will also be memora- 
ble for the unexampled progress made by the nation, and 
for its wonderful preservation from the many perils which 
beset it. While there were grave faults in his character, 
there were also noble traits. He loved his country and his 
people. He was true and steadfast in friendship. Duplic- 
ity and intrigue were foreign to his nature. He always 
chose men of tried integrity for responsible offices, and 
never betrayed secrets of state, even in his most unguarded 
moments. 


CHAPTER XXXIV 
1855-1863 
THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA IV. 


THE brief reign of Kamehameha IV. began with bright | 
hopes, but ended in disappointment and sorrow. He took 
the oath to maintain the 
constitution January 11th, 
1855, in the old Stone 
Church, where he delivered 
an eloquent inaugural ad- 
dress to his people and to 
the foreigners present. He 
was then twenty-one years 
of age, of brilliant talents 
and winning manners, and 
his accession to the throne 
was hailed with high antici- 
pations by the nation at | 
large. A diligent student 
of English history, he was ambitious to reign as a con- 
stitutional king. 

Foreign Relations.—The negotiations that had been 
commenced with Mr. Gregg were now broken off, and 
Chief-justice Lee was sent as ambassador to Washington, 
where he concluded a treaty of reciprocity July 20th, 
1856. By the terms of this treaty, Hawaiian sugar, coffee, 


wool, hides, etc., were to be admitted into the United States 
280 


- ee = 


THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA IV. 281 


free of duty. It failed, however, to be ratified by the 
senate.* 

An act reducing the duty on brandy to three dollars 
a gallon was passed by the legislature of 1855, whereupon 
negotiations were resumed by Mr. Perrin which occupied 
more than two years, the chief difficulty being in regard 
to the official use of the French language. The new 
treaty with France was finally ratified September 7th, 
1858, with a clause lhmiting the duties on wines and 
brandy for ten years more. On the 19th of February, 
1858, Mr. Perrin presented the king with a silver épergne, 
an ormolu clock, a pair of silver candelabra, and a Sévres 
dinner-service from the Emperor Napoleon. 

In 1861 Sir John Bowring was commissioned as min- 
ister-plenipotentiary to urge the project of a joint guar- 
antee of the independence of the islands by the three 
great maritime powers, but nothing came of it. In May, 
1857, Laysan, Lisiansky, and other islands to the north- 
west were taken possession of by Captain John Paty, in 
the name of the Hawaiian Government. 

Notable Deaths.—After Judge Lee’s return to the 
islands, he drafted the Penal Code, and was engaged on 
the Civil Code when he died, May 28th, 1857. His death 
was mourned by all as a national loss. He was succeeded 
as chief-justice by Hon. E. H. Allen. In the same year 
died John Young 2d, and Konia, widow of Paki. Admiral 
Thomas also died August 22d, 1857, near London. 

The King’s Marriage.—On the 19th of June, 1856, 
the king married Emma Rooke, a granddaughter of John 
Young. She had been adopted in childhood by Dr. Rooke, 


*The next year, Hon. E. H. Allen was sent to Washington to urge the rati- 


' fication of the treaty, but did not succeed, and twenty years more were destined 


fo pass away before this boon was attained. 


282 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


an English physician who had married Kamaikui, a sister 
of her mother, Fanny Kekela Young. She had been edu-— 
cated in the Young Chiefs’ School, and both by her char- 
acter and by her talents was worthy of her high station. 

Birth of the Prince of 
Hawaii.—On the 20th of 
May, 1858, the queen 
gave birth to a son, to 
the great joy of her sub- 
jects of all classes. His 
title was officially declared 
to be “The Prince of Ha- 
wal,’ and it now seemed 
as if the Kamehameha 
dynasty was firmly estab- 
lished. 

The Queen’s Hospital. 
—The crowning act of this 
reign, by which Kame- 
hameha IV. and Queen 
Emma will ever be re- 
membered with gratitude, was the founding of the 
“Queen’s Hospital.” During the year 1859 the king 
and queen personally canvassed the town of Honolulu 
for subscriptions, and met with a generous response. 

A board of trustees was organized June 22d, 1859, 
and a dispensary was established in a hired house.* 

The Neilson Tragedy.—During a visit to Lahaina in 
August, 1859, in a moment of passion the king was led 
to commit an act for which he ever afterwards suffered 


QUEEN EMMA 


* The king had the satisfaction of laying the corner-stone of the hospital 
July 17th, 1860, with impressive ceremonies, and of seeing the building com- 
pleted in December. 


- | 


THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA IV. 283 


in mind and health. While under the influence of liquor, 
he shot his private secretary, Mr. H. A. Neilson, who died 
from his wound after lingering many months in suffering. 
“Tf,” says Mr. Hopkins, “the most heart-felt sorrow and 
the tenderest care could have availed to avert the catas- 
trophe, Mr. Neilson’s life would have been saved.” The 
king’s first impulse was to abdicate the throne, but from 
this he was dissuaded by his advisers. The nobles were 
then called together at Honolulu, and on the 3d of Octo- 
ber, 1859, the Prince of Hawaii was duly proclaimed heir 
to the throne. 

Commencement of the Anglican Mission.—In Decem- 
ber, 1859, Mr. Wyllie communicated to the Hawaiian 
consul in London the desire of the king and queen that a 
clergyman of the Church of England should be settled in 
Honolulu, to act as chaplain for the royal family, who 
offered to guarantee a certain sum toward his support, 
and to give a site for a church. The king also wrote an 
autograph letter on the subject to Queen Victoria. This 
request excited much interest in England, where a com- 
mittee was formed to organize a mission to the islands. 
After some further correspondence, the Right Rey. T. N. 
Staley, D.D., was consecrated as Bishop of Honolulu, 
December 15th, 1861. 

It was expected that his first official act would be the 
baptism of the Prince of Hawaii, but Providence ordered 
otherwise. 

Death of the Prince of Hawaii.—The little prince, in 
whom so many hopes were centered, was attacked by 
brain fever on the 19th of August, 1862, and died on 
the 27th, amid the universal grief of the nation. The 
king never recovered from the blow, and was a broken- 
hearted man during the remainder of his life. 


2.84 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Arrival of the Anglican Mission.—The king now retired 
to a country residence, where he resumed the work, which 


he had already commenced, of translating the English © 


Book of Common Prayer into the Hawaiian language. 


His translation is an excellent one, and the preface written 
by himself has been justly admired. 


Bishop Staley, accompanied by other clergymen, arrived | 


at Honolulu on the 11th of October, 1862, and soon 


afterwards received the king and queen into the com- 


munion of his church. A temporary cathedral was erected, 


and several schools established, among which were the 
Iolani College for boys, St. Andrew’s Priory for girls, ete. 

Death of Kamehameha IV.—During the next year 
the king was steadily failing in health. He avoided state 
ceremonials as much as possible, and lived a retired life. 
At last, on the 80th of November, 18638, he suddenly 
passed away, at the early age of twenty-nine, having 
reigned nearly nine years. The building of the present 
mausoleum was then commenced. The Queen’s Hospital 
is, however, his best monument. 

Public Improvements.—Several important public im- 
provements were executed during this reign. The reef 
belonging to the land of Waikahalulu, on the south side 
of Honolulu Harbor, had been purchased by the govern- 
ment from the Queen Dowager Kalama for $22,000. 


The fort was demolished in 1857. The work of filling” 


in the sixteen acres of land known as the “ Esplanade ” or 
“ Ainahou,”’ and of building up a water-front of two 
thousand feet, with a depth of water of from twenty to 
twenty-five feet, occupied several years, from 1856 to 
1860, and cost $242,000. The present prison was built 
in 1856-57, to take the place of the old fort. The new 
custom-house was completed in 1860. The water-works 


THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA IV. 985 


were much enlarged, and a system of pipes laid down in 
1861, at an expense of $45,000. A gas company was 
chartered in 1859 by Mr. W. H. Tiffany and others, and 
the pipes for it were laid, but the enterprise failed after 
a few months’ trial from want of patronage. On the night 
of March 28th, 1858, the old custom-house was entered 
by burglars, and robbed of $8,573.* 

Inter-Island Steamer.—By an act of the legislature 
passed March 7th, 1859, a charter was granted to OC. A. 
Wiliams and others, under the title of the Hawaiian 
Steam Navigation Company, together with extensive 
privileges. The steamer “ Kilauea,” of four hundred and 
fourteen tons, was built for the company in New London, 
Connecticut, and arrived at Honolulu the following year. 
She started on her first regular trip to Hawaii July 24th, 
1860, and continued to run between the islands, in spite 
of many casualties, for seventeen years. 

Agriculture, etc.—During this period the development 
of the country was nearly at a stand-still. The cultiva- 
tion of wheat as well as that of coffee was mostly given 
up. The exports diminished, and the main dependence of 
the people continued to be on the whaling fleet. During 
the year 1859 one hundred and ninety-seven whale ships 
visited the islands. 

Experiments in the culture of rice were commenced 
by Mr. Holstein in 1858, and in 1860, with seed from 
South Carolina, they proved to be a decided success. Such 
an interest was excited in this new industry that in 1862 
nine hundred and twenty-three thousand pounds of rice 
and paddy were exported, and rice has ever since been 
the crop second in value in the islands. 


* Although a reward of $1,000 was offered for any information that would 
lead to the detection of the guilty persons, they have never been discovered. 


» 


286 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Pulu was an important article of export to California 
from 1860 to 1870. The quantity exported rose at one 
time to six hundred thousand pounds in a year, but both 
the demand and the supply soon fell off. The first honey- 
bees were imported from San José, California, October 
20th, 1857, and their number rapidly increased. 

The census of 1860 gave a total population of sixty- 
nine thousand eight hundred, showing a decrease of three 
thousand three hundred and thirty-eight in seven years. 

Schools, etc.—After 1850, the English language was 
taught more and more in the government schools. The 
Royal School was opened at its present site December 
5th, 1851. The Punahou School was chartered as Oahu 
College in 1854, under the presidency of the Rey. E. G. 
Beckwith.* 


Partial Withdrawal of the American Board from the — 


Mission to the Hawaiian Islands.— As early as 1848, the 
American Board had prepared to retire from the Hawaiian 
Islands as a missionary field, and to organize a self-govern- 
ing and self-supporting religious community there, to 
carry on the work which had been begun. The greater 
part of the property held by the board at the islands was 
transferred to its missionaries, the government giving 
them titles to their land in fee simple. No more mis- 
sionaries were sent out from the United States, but as 
fast as possible, churches were formed and placed under 
the charge of native Hawaiian pastors. In 18638 Rev. 
R. Anderson, D.D., Foreign Secretary of the American 
Board, visited the islands to assist in the execution of 
this plan. 


* The death of the Rev. R. Armstrong, September 23d, 1860, was a serious 
blow to the prosperity of the government schools. He was succeeded by Gov- 
ernor M. Kekuanaoa, 


THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA IV. 987 


Four island associations were organized, besides the 
“Hawaiian Evangelical Association,” for the whole king- 
dom, which consists of native and foreign clergymen 
and lay delegates. This latter body elects an executive 
board called the “Hawaiian Board,” which manages both 
home and foreign missions, and disburses the funds con- 
tributed for these objects. Since then the American 
Board has merely acted the part of an auxiliary, and not 
that of a controlling body, and the places of the American 
missionaries have been gradually filled by native Hawaiian 
pastors. 

Fruptions of Mauna Loa.—Two great eruptions of 
Mauna Loa took place during this period. On the 11th 
of August, 1855, a steeam of lava burst out of the 
northeastern side of the mountain, at an elevation of 
twelve thousand feet, and ran directly toward Hilo. In 
Some places it was over two miles wide. After having 
flowed for fifteen months, on the 22d of N ovember, 1856, 
it reached a point within eight miles of the town of Hilo, 
causing great alarm to its inhabitants; but there the 
flow ceased to advance, and Hilo was saved. 

Again, on the 23d of January, 1859, an eruption took 
_place from a fissure on the northern side of the moun- 
tain, about ten thousand feet above the sea. The lava 
stream flowed to the northwest, passing around the 
eastern and northern sides of Mount Hualalai, and reached 
the sea at Keawaiki, North Kona, in eight days, filling 
up a great fish-pond constructed by Kamehameha I. at 
Kiholo. The lava continued to flow until August, a 
period of seven months. 


CHAPTER XXXV 


1863-1872 


THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA V. 


Character of Kamehameha V.—Immediately after the ¥ 


Jeath of Kamehameha IV., his elder brother, Prince Lot 


KAMEHAMEHA ¥Y., 


that his countrymen were not yet fitted to enjoy such 


Kamehameha, was pro- 


| 


claimed king under the title 


of Kamehameha V., on the | 


30th of November, 1868. 


He had inherited some- 
what of the first _Kameha- 
meha’s strength of will and 
practical shrewdness, and 
had shown considerable ad- 
ministrative ability as Min- 
ister of the Interior during 


the previous reign. He had 


been opposed to some of the 
liberal reforms of Kameha- 


meha III.’s reign, believing q | 


privileges. His reign, unlike that of his brother, was | 
marked by bitter party contests, which it is not within 
the plan of this work to discuss. It was his policy to — 
place able men who were in sympathy with his views — 


at the head of affairs, and to give them a steady support. — 
The Constitutional Convention.—The king retained 


Mr. Wyllie in the cabinet, with Mr. C. C. Harris, an | 


288 


THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA V. 289 


American lawyer, and Mr. C. de Varigny, late secre- 
tary of the French consul, as his colleagues. In the 
following year Dr. Hutchinson became Minister of the 
Interior. 

The king had resolved not to take the oath to main- 
tain the constitution of 1852, but to embrace the oppor- 
tunity to make such changes in it as would increase the 
power of the crown. Accordingly, a proclamation was 
issued May 5th, 1864, for the election of a constitu- 
tional convention, to be held June 13th. The king him- 
self, attended by Mr. Wylhe, made a tour through the 
islands, explaining and defending the changes which he 
desired to make in the constitution. The convention 
met July 7th, being’: composed of sixteen nobles and 
twenty-seven elected delegates, presided over by the king 
in person. After a week’s debate it was decided that the 
“three estates” should sit together in one chamber. The 
next question was whether the convention had the right 
to proceed to make a new constitution, which was finally 
decided in the affirmative.* 

The Constitution of 1864.—On the 20th of August 
the king promulgated a new constitution upon his own 
authority, which continued in force for twenty-three 
years. There were fewer changes in it than had been 
expected. | 

The useless office of kuhina nut or vice-king was 
abolished. The right of suffrage was made to depend on 
a small property qualification, and also, for those born 
since 1840, on ability to read and write. The nobles and 
representatives were henceforth to sit and vote together 


* After a long discussion of the proposed property qualification for voters, 
_ the king’s patience broke down, and on the 13th of August, 1864, he declared 
_ the constitution of 1852 abrogated, and prorogued the convention. 


290 _HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


in one chamber. A new legislature was elected October { 
15th, which passed several important measures. 

Immigration.—A Bureau of Immigration was formed, 
and in April, 1865, Dr. Hillebrand was sent on a mission — 
to China, India, and the Malay Archipelago, to make 
arrangements for the importation of laborers, to procure 
valuable plants and birds, and to collect information, | 
especially in regard to leprosy. In July he sent five hun- ~ 
dred laborers from China under contracts with the gov- 
ernment, who were followed by many others. During his 
tour he introduced into the islands many kinds of choice 
plants and trees, and of insectivorous birds, and collected 
a large fund of useful information.* 

Segregation of Lepers.—The dreadful disease of leprosy 
was first observed in the islands in 1858, and in 1864 
it had begun to spread to an alarming extent. Accord- 
ingly, an act was passed January 38d, 1865, to isolate the 
lepers and to provide separate establishments and hospitals 
for them. <A hospital was established. at Kalihi in October, 
1865, and about the same time Dr. Hutchinson selected 
the present site of the leper settlement, and purchased 
lands for it on the north side of Molokai. It is a penin- 
sula, comprising some five thousand acres, surrounded on 
three sides by the ocean, and on the south side shut in 
by a steep precipice from two to three thousand feet in 
height. It includes the fertile valley of Waikolu, besides — 
the villages of Kalawao on the east side and Kalaupapa 
on the west. About one hundred and forty lepers were 
sent there in 1866. ; 

The Schools.— By an act which was passed January 
LOth, 1865, the Board of Education was constituted, and 


* In 1868 the first company of Japanese immigrants, one hundred and forty= 
eight in number, came to the islands on the ship ‘‘ Scioto.” 


> “— rey , a 


Ms sagt ines |e ~ aia ¥y Mi, ere * i 
Sos ee ae “sr. coabeaas ~ a 7 mai ly ins add 


Pe ro S| . ¢ we J S . ‘ 4 ag? 
i yoe — ‘ - tee a 


: > Tpit * ) abe nium A 3g 
Paes ee ee ee cnt eer? faa Sears 
: ° 1 'T> y : 


if ce: 


s 


+« 


ie Sehr = Pee ee ee S68 eres e 


1.31 A.M. 


WHEN NOON 


AT LONDON 


Ka Lae o Ka llio 


157°10 Longitude 157 00°. 


Ka 


Kaunakakai | 


KAS Ts KALOHS 


de Ast WE CH\A NN 


Kaena Pt.(—~ 


e 


Hoe 
00” —- 
MOLOKAT, 
LANAT, 
AND PART OF 
e MAUI 


SCALE OF MILES 
2 4 6 8 10 


157°10° 157°00° 


156 50 Greenwich 156°40° 


aluaaha 


\ 


1.35 A.M. 


WHEN NOON 


Cont 
156 30 AT LONDON 


° 


21 


us’valley 


= LAHAINA‘O 
Lary 
: ee 
_|-\ka Halepalaoa x 
a Olowalu 
a 

| eA AIK I 

; 

\N NEL 

156°50’ 180°40 


CA 


Pitta ee 


MOLOKINI 
Y 


° , 
156 30 


THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA V. 291 


the office of Inspector-General of Schools was created, 
which was first held by the late Hon. A. Fornander. 
The Reformatory School was founded in March, 1865, as 
well as the Girls’ School in Honolulu, which is now 
located at Pohukaina, on Punch-bowl Street. 

Queen Emma’s Foreign Tour.—In May, 1865, Queen 
Kmma sailed in H. B. M.’s ship-of-war “Clio,” for Panama, 
on her way to England, accompanied by Mr. and Mrs. 
Hoapili Kaauwai and Mr. C. G. Hopkins. She spent over 
a year abroad, mostly in England, where she was treated 
with much kindness, and returned to Honolulu October 
22d, 1866, on the United States ship-of-war “Vanderbilt,” 
Admiral Thatcher. 

Burning of Whalers by the “ Shenandoah.’— Remote 
as these islands were from the seat of the great civil 
war then raging in the United States, they did not escape 
its effects. In April, 1865, the Confederate cruiser 
“Shenandoah,” Captain Waddell, burned four whalers at 
Bonabe, Caroline Islands, one of which was a Hawaiian 
vessel, the “Harvest.” After this piratical act Captain 
Waddell sailed north, and burned twenty whalers more 
in the Arctic Sea in June, 1865. Five vessels were spared 
to carry the crews of the rest to San Francisco, including 
several hundred Hawaiian sailors. The bark “Kameha- 
meha V.” was sent for the relief of the seamen at Bonabe — 
in August, 1865, and brought them all, ninety-eight in 
number, safely to Honolulu. 

) Notable Deaths.—Mr. R. C. Wyllie, the veteran Min- 
ister of Foreign Affairs, died October 19th, 1865. His 
| funeral took place October 80th, when his remains were 
placed in the royal mausoleum, and the following night 
all the coffins of former kings and chiefs were removed 
from the old tomb on King Street to the new mausoleum, 


992 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


in an imposing torch-light procession. Victoria’ Kama- 
malu, sister of the king and heir-apparent, died May 29th, 
1866, at the early age of twenty-seven. Her father, Gov- 
ernor Kekuanaoa, who for nearly forty years had filled so 
important a piace in the history of his country, died 
November 24th, 1868, at the age of seventy-five. 

Treaty of Reciprocity.—In 1867 Mr. C. C. Harris was 
sent to Washington, as minister-plenipotentiary, to nego- 
tiate a treaty of reciprocity with the United States, being 
accompanied by General McCook, the American minister. 
In August the treaty was completed and approved by 
the President and his cabinet. An extra session of the 
Hawaiian legislature was called, and on the 10th of 
September a law was -passed to change the tariff in case 
the treaty went into effect. 


At Washington, however, it was opposed by Senator | 


Sumner, and failed of ratification by the senate. In 1868 


Hon. J. Mott Smith was sent to Washington, to succeed | 


Mr. Harris as minister-resident. 

The Great Eruption in Kau.—On the 27th of March, 
1868, an eruption began in the summit crater of Mauna 
Loa, attended by a long series of earthquake shocks. At 
length, on the 2d of April, a terrific earthquake took 


place, which shook down every stone wall and nearly | 
every house in Kau, and did more or less damage in 


every part of Hawaii. 


At Kapapala in eastern Kau it caused a destructive | 
land-shp, commonly known as the “mud flow.” An enor- | 
mous mass of marshy clay was detached from the bluff at 
the head of the valley, and in a few minutes swept down | 
for a distance of three miles, in a stream about half 
a mile wide and thirty feet deep in the middle. It) 
moved so swiftly that it overtook and buried thirty- 


J Sd 


“ 


THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA V. 293 


one human beings and over five hundred horses, cattle, 
and goats. 
Immediately after this earthquake, a tremendous wave, 
forty or fifty feet high, rolled in upon the coast of Kau, 
sweeping away all the villages from Kaalualu to Keauhou, 
and destroying some cocoanut groves. Over eighty per- 
sons perished in a few minutes, and the survivors were 
left destitute and suffering. At the same time the crater 
of Kilauea emptied itself of its lava through underground 
fissures toward the southwest. The central part of the 
floor of the crater fell in, forming a pit three thousand 
feet long and five hundred feet deep, with sloping sides. 
On the 7th of April, the lava from the central crater 
of Mauna Loa burst out on the southwest slope of the 
mountain, in the land of Kahuku, at a point five thousand 
six hundred feet above the sea. The lava spouted up in 
great fountains, several hundred feet high, and flowed to 
the sea, a distance of ten miles, in two hours. This eruption 
continued only five days. It destroyed several houses and 
several hundred head of cattle, and overflowed four 
thousand acres of good land. Three men were imprisoned 
for several days on a hill surrounded by lava streams, and 
Captain Robert Brown and his family were obliged to run 
‘for their lives. | 
/ The government promptly dispatched the steamer 
“Kilauea” with supplies of provisions, clothing, lumber, 
etc., for the relief of the sufferers. The king himself, 
with Mr. and Mrs. -Varigny, went on this expedition, 
-and visited the principal landings in Puna and Kau, 
relieving the pressing wants of the people, and assisting 
them with materials to rebuild their houses. On their 
‘return, the legislature voted a subsidy of nearly $7,000, 
and about $4,000 was raised by voluntary subscriptions, 


| 


| 


we 
294 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


with which another vessel was sent laden with supplies 
for the unfortunate people of southern Hawaii. On the 
15th of August, 1868, a sudden rising and falling of the 


sea was observed at all the islands, which was caused by — 


a terrible earthquake in Peru and Ecuador. Another 
earthquake on February 19th, 1871, was severely felt in 
Oahu and Maui, but slightly in Hawaii. 

The Kaona Insurrection.—In the year 1868, a crazy 
fanatic by the name of Kaona, who claimed to be a 
prophet, gathered around him a large number of credu- 
lous people in the district of Kona, Hawaii. He was com- 
mitted to the insane asylum at Honolulu, where he 
remained for some months, until he was discharged as 
cured. Returning to Kona, he and his disciples encamped 
on the land of Honuaino, three miles north of Kealakekua, 
which had been leased to a Mr. Roy, who brought an 
action of ejectment against them. On the 19th of October, 
1868, the deputy-sheriff, Mr. Richard B. Neville, accom- 
panied by a posse of constables and others, undertook to 


arrest Kaona and some of his men as trespassers. A fight — 


ensued in which Mr. Neville was killed, and the next day 
a policeman named Kamai was taken and murdered by 
the fanatics. A company of troops was immediately sent 
up from Honolulu, but before it arrived, Mr. Coney, the 
sheriff of Hawaii, had organized a force, and taken Kaona 
and his company prisoners without any more bloodshed. 
About seventy-five of them were taken to Honolulu.* — 

Visit of the Duke of Edinburgh.—On the 21st of July, 
1869, the Duke of Edinburgh, second son of Queen Vic- 
toria, in command of the frigate “Galatea,” arrived at 
Honolulu on his way from Tahiti to Japan and China. 


*Five of the ringleaders were convicted of manslaughter, and sentenced to 
imprisonment for terms varying from five to ten years. 


THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA Y. 295 


He remained in port twelve days, and was entertained in 
a style befitting his high rank. 

The Australian Line of Steamers.—On the 19th of 
April, 1870, the British steamer “ Wonga Wonga” arrived 
at Honolulu, twenty-three days from Auckland. This was 
the pioneer of the lines of steamers which have since then 
continued to ply between the Australian Colonies and 
San Francisco. 

Loss of the Whaling Fleet in the Arctic.—In the 
autumn of 1871, the whaling fleet in the Arctic Sea was 
shut in by ice-fields near Point Belcher, and had to be 
abandoned by the crews on the 14th of September. 
Thirty-three ships were lost, and over a thousand seamen 
were brought from Icy Cape to Honolulu in five ships 
which had escaped, arriving there between October 23d 
and 25th, 1871. It was estimated that this disaster 
caused a loss to Honolulu of $200,000 a year. 

The Small-pox.—The small-pox was introduced for the 
second time from San Francisco in May, 1872. Warned 
by the experience of 18538, the government took energetic 
measures to prevent its spread. These measures were 
so successful that on the 6th of September the disease 
had disappeared, and out of thirty-seven cases only eleven 
had proved fatal. 

Public Improvements.—Several important public im- 
provements date from this reign. The Honolulu light- 
house was first lighted August 2d, 1869. The present 
_ substantial post-office was opened in March, 1870. The 
barracks were built in the same year at an expense of 

$25,000. 
The Hawaiian Hotel was built by the government and 
opened to the public in 1872, and the new government 
building known as “ Aliiolani Hale” was commenced in 


—_ --. —~ —_ ~ i > a a i 


e 
ASNOH § aAILVN V 


4 


THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA Y. 297 


March of the same year, and completed in 1874 at a cost 
of $130,000. The steamer “Kilauea” was taken by 
the government in 1870, and rebuilt at great expense. 
The general survey of the kingdom was commenced in 
1871. 

Agriculture and Trade.—The production of sugar* was 
greatly increased during this reign, owing to the importa- 
tion of laborers from abroad, and to the hope of reciprocity 
with the United States, which, however, was not realized. 
The whaling fleet steadily fell off to only forty-seven ships 
in 1871, and continued to decrease after that date. The 
total exports that year were valued at one million eight 
hundred thousand dollars. The establishment of regular 
lines of steamers between Australia and California was of 
great benefit to the islands in many ways. The census 
of 1872 gave a total population of 56,897, showing a 
decrease of 12,900 in twelve years. 

Death of Kamehameha V.—The king died suddenly, 
December 11th, 1872, of dropsy on the chest, in the 
forty-third year of his age, having reigned nine years. 
With him ended the line of the Kamehamehas. Unfor- 
tunately, no successor had been appointed to the throne. 


*The amount produced rose to eleven thousand tons in 1872. 


CHAPTER XXXVI 
1873-1891 


THE REIGNS OF LUNALILO AND KALAKAUA; 
ACCESSION OF LILIUOKALANI 

Election of Lunalilo.— In this chapter the political his- 
tory of the country to 1891 will be briefly sketched. 

As Kamehameha V. had died without appointing a 
successor, the choice devolved 
upon the legislature, which 
was summoned to meet in 
four weeks, on the 8th of 
January, 1878. Prince Will- 
iam C. Lunalilo was generally 
considered to be the highest 
surviving chief by birth. His 
mother, Kekauluohi, had suc- 
ceeded her half-sister, Kinau, 
in the office of kuhina nui, 
as being a niece of Kaahu- 
manu, and both niece and 
step-daughter of Kamehame- 
ha I. Lunalilo was also uni-— 
versally popular, both with natives and foreigners, from— 
his amiable traits of character and his well-known liberal. 
views. On the 17th of December, 1872, he published an 
address to the Hawaiian people, requesting them to meet 
at the different polling-places throughout the kingdom 
on the Ist of January, 1873, and to cast a vote for the 


purpose of instructing their representatives as to their | 
298 


THE REIGN OF LUNALILO 299 


choice for king. A wave of popular enthusiasm swept 
over the group, and on New Year’s day a larger vote than 
ever before was cast, almost unanimously, for Lunalilo. 
The legislature met on the appointed day, and in compli- 
ance with the expressed will of the people, elected Luna- 
lilo king amid general rejoicing. The next day, in the 
Kawaiahao church, he took the oath to maintain the 
existing constitution of 1864, and delivered addresses to 
the people and to the legislature. 

Amendments to the constitution were then proposed: 
one to restore the two houses of the legislature and the 
other to abolish the property qualification for voters, of 
which only the latter went into effect in 1874. 

The Lunalilo Administration.—The Hon. R. Stirling 
was retained in the new cabinet as Minister of Finance, 
his colleagues being Hons. C. R. Bishop, Minister of Foreign 
Affairs, E. O. Hall, Minister of the Interior, and A. F, Judd, 
Attorney-General. 

The new cabinet made a determined effort to carry out 
the law for the seclusion of lepers, and during that year 
over five hundred confirmed cases were sent to Molokai. 
The execution of this painful duty excited a bitter oppo- 
sition among a large portion of the people. It was con- 
sidered a favorable juncture to renew negotiations with 
the government of the United States for a treaty of com- 
mercial reciprocity, and it was proposed to offer it the 
exclusive use of the harbor of Pearl River, Oahu, as a 
coaling and repair station for its ships-of-war. This pro- 
posal gave rise to an extensive agitation, which intensified 
the suspicion and ill-feeling that already existed. In 
August, the king’s health began to decline rapidly, and 
at his desire, the negotiations were dropped. 

The Mutiny at the Barracks.—On Sunday, September 


300 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


7th, 18738, the disaffection which had been brewing for 
some time among the household troops broke out in open 
mutiny. They assaulted their drill-master, Captain 

Jajczay, an Austrian, and demanded that both he and 
the adjutant-general should be dismissed. The following 

-night they dragged two cannons from the palace yard to | 
the barracks, which they loaded with grape-shot. They 
then bade defiance to the authorities. 

A large part of the populace evidently sympathized 
with the mutineers. On Tuesday, a message having been 
read to them from the king, who was confined to his bed 
at Waikiki, thirteen of them surrendered, leaving twenty- 
four in rebellion. A warrant for their arrest was issued, 
but not executed. In order to avoid bloodshed and the 
risk of starting a formidable riot, a siege was resorted to, 
and guards were posted around the barracks. 

On Thursday an autograph letter was sent to the muti- 
neers from the king, ordering them to give up their arms 
and leave the barracks, and offering them on this condition | 
a free pardon for their crime. They finally left on Friday 
morning, when the corps was disbanded by order of the 
king. The result of this affair was a considerable loss of aus 
thority on the part of the government, and a further increase 
of lawlessness and race-hatred throughout the country. 

Illness and Death of Lunalilo.—Soon after this affair, 
the king removed to Kailua, Hawaii, to try the effect of a 
change of climate. He remained there several months, but | 
nothing availed to stay the progress of the fatal disease. On 
the 18th of January, 1874, he returned to Honolulu, where 
he died on the 3d of February of pulmonary consump- 
tion, after a reign of only one year and twenty-five days.* - 


* By his will he left the bulk of his real estate to found a home for aged and 
poor Hawaiians. It was opened in April, 1881, and will ever keep his memory green. — 


} 


| 


THE REIGN OF KALAKAUA 801 


Election of Kalakaua.— As the late king had failed to 
nominate a successor, the legislature (which had been 
elected February 1st) was summoned to meet on the 
12th, only nine days after his death. 

During this short interval, many mass-meetings were 
held, and numerous circulars printed in behalf of the 
two rival candidates, viz.: the Queen Dowager Emma and 
Colonel David Kalakaua. 
The legislature, having con- 
vened in the old court- 
house (now occupied by 
Hackfeld & Co.), elected 
Kalakaua by thirty-nine 
votes, only six votes being 
cast for Queen Emma. 

The Court-House Riot. 
—An immense mob, com- 
posed of Queen Emma's 
partisans, had surrounded 
the court-house during the 
election, after which they Sa orar tree 
broke in the back doors 
and sacked the building. The representatives were sav- 
agely assaulted and beaten with clubs. One of them, 
Lonoaea of Wailuku, afterwards died in consequence of 
his injuries. As the police proved to be inefficient, and 
the volunteer troops were divided in their sympathies, 
the government was compelled to apply to the representa- 
tives of the United States and Great Britain for aid. A 
body of one hundred and fifty marines immediately 
landed from the United States ships “Tuscarora” and 
“Portsmouth,” and another from H.B. M.’s ship “Tenedos.” 
They quickly dispersed the mob, and took possession of 


$02 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


A ti ne 
a 


the building. They continued to guard the government 


buildings, the palace grounds, and the barracks until the 
20th. About a hundred of the rioters were arrested and 
afterwards punished by the courts. 

Inauguration of King Kalakaua.—Kalakaua took the 
oath of office at noon on the 18th of February, 1874, 
at Kinau Hale, near the palace, and was duly proclaimed 

king. The next day his 
younger brother, Prince 
William Pitt Leleiohoku, 
was proclaimed heir to 
the throne. , 
Kalakaua was born 
November 16th, 1836, 
being descended through 
his father Kapaakea 
io. from Kameeiamoku, and 
-—» * through his mother Keo- 
~ hokalole from Keawea- 
heulu, both distinguished 
counselors of Kameha- 
meha I. He was married 
December 19th, 1868, to 
ariolan a granddaughter of Kaumualii, the last king of 
Kauai. On the 17th, his first cabinet was formed, consist- 
ing of W. L. Green, Minister of Foreign Affairs, H. A. 
Widemann, Minister of the Interior, P. Nahaolelua, Minis- 
ter of Finance, and A. 8. Hartwell, Attorney-General. 

The King’s Visit to the United States——The United 
States Government having extended an invitation to 
the king and placed the steamer “Benicia” at his dis- 


KAPIOLANI 


posal, he embarked November 17th, 1874, for San Fran-— 


cisco, on his way to Washington, accompanied by the 


THE REIGN OF KALAKAUA 803 


Hon. H. A. Peirce, the American Minister, and other gen- 
tlemen. On their arrival they were cordially received, 
and treated as guests of the nation. After a tour through 
the northern states the royal party returned to Honolulu 
February 15th, 1875, having produced a most favorable 
impression in the United States. 

The Reciprocity Treaty.— Negotiations were immedi- 
ately reopened for a treaty of commercial reciprocity with 
the United States, which was ratified in June, 1875, and, 
in spite of strenuous opposition in both countries, the laws 
necessary to carry it into operation were enacted in 
September, 1876. This treaty was to remain in force 
for seven years, and further until twelve months after 
either government should give notice to the other of its 
desire to terminate the same. The conclusion of this 
treaty was the great event of this reign, and perhaps 
the most important event in Hawaiian history since 1843. 
Tt ushered in an era of unexampled prosperity, and set in 
motion a series of changes of which no man could foresee 
the end. 

Death of the Heir-Apparent.—The following year the 
' nation was called to mourn the untimely death of Prince 
_ Leleiohoku, the heir-apparent. He died suddenly, April 
10th, 1877, of rheumatic fever, at the early age of twenty- 
two. His sister, H. R. H. Lydia Kamakaeha Liliuokalani, 
was proclaimed heir to the throne the next day. 

Immigration.— One effect of the reciprocity treaty was 
_ to create a pressing demand for labor to carry out the 
_ Many new enterprises that were projected. Through the 
agency of Dr. Hillebrand, who was residing in the island 
of Madeira in 1877, arrangements were made for the 
‘immigration of Portuguese from the Azores and Madeira. 

The pioneer company of one hundred and eighty Portu- 


804 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


guese arrived September 80th, 1878, by the ship “ Pris- 
cilla” from Funchal, and since then over ten thousand 
more have been added to the population of the islands. 

In 1884, the consent of the Japanese Government was 
obtained for the emigration of its subjects to these islands 
under certain conditions. The first company of nine 
hundred and fifty-six Japanese, sent under this agreement, 
arrived in the “City of Tokio,’ February 9th, 1886. 
In six years over ten thousand immigrated to these 
islands, of whom twelve hundred and. sixty returned 
to Japan. During 1878 and the next six years, about two 
thousand Polynesians, mainly from the Gilbert Islands, 
were introduced into this country. These laborers, as a 
general rule, did not give satisfaction, and nearly all of 
them have since been returned to their homes.* 

The King’s Tour around the World.—On the 20th of 
January, 1881, the king set out on a tour around the 
world, accompanied by the late Colonel C. H. Judd, his 
chamberlain, and the Hon. W. N. Armstrong as Commis- 
sioner of Immigration. One of the principal objects of this 
journey was to investigate the whole subject of emigration, 
and to ascertain the conditions under which foreign goy- 
ernments would sanction it. | 

After a visit to California, where he received the most 
flattering attentions, he proceeded to Japan. Here he 
was received with royal honors, and afterwards had an 
interview with the famous Chinese statesman Li Hung 
Chang, in Tientsin. 

He was next royally entertained by the king of Siam 
and the rajah of Johore, after which he crossed British 
India by rail, and visited the Khedive of Egypt. The 


* After 1876 the Chinese came in great numbers until their immigration was 
checked in 1880. 


THE REIGN OF KALAKAUA 805 


royal party then made the tour of Europe, visiting the 
capitals of Italy, Germany, Austria, France, Spain, Portu- 
gal, and Great Britain. The king visited Washington on 
his way home, arriving in Honolulu October 29th, 1881, 
where a magnificent reception awaited him. He was 
everywhere received with the utmost courtesy, and 
afforded every opportunity to collect valuable information 
for the good of his kingdom. 

The Third Small-pox Epidemic.—In the early part of 
the year 1881 five so-called “tramp steamers” arrived 
from China in quick succession, bringing nearly seven 
hundred passengers apiece. Every one of these steamers 
was infected with small-pox, but the officers of one, the 
“Quinta,” succeeded in concealing the fact. On the 4th 
of February, a fortnight after she had sailed, several 
cases of small-pox were discovered on Kukui Place near 
Nuuanu Street, from which it spread rapidly. All inter- 
island travel was stopped for a time, and the disease was 
confined to Honolulu. It was seven months before it 
had entirely disappeared, during which time there were 
seven hundred and eighty cases and two hundred and 
eighty-two deaths. 

Volcanic Phenomena.—On the 10th of May, 1877, a 
great earthquake wave was experienced at all the islands, 
which washed away the village of Waiakea, Hilo, and 
drowned five persons. It was caused by a terrible earth- 
quake on the coast of Peru, similar to that of 1868, 
and was observed throughout the Pacific Ocean. 

On the 5th of November, 1880, a light was seen in 
the summit crater of Mauna Loa. The next day a stream 
of lava made its appearance at a point eleven thousand 
one hundred feet above the level of the sea, on the 
eastern slope of the mountain. It continued to flow for 


306 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


nine months, along the southern edge of the flow of 1855, ~ 
and finally stopped three quarters of a mile from the town 
of Hilo, near the Halai hills, August 10th, 1881. 

Again, in December, 1886, there were frequent earth- — 
quakes in southern Hawaii. At length, January 16th, ~ 
1887, fire appeared on the summit of Mauna Loa, and on © 
the 18th an outbreak took place in Kau, north of © 
Kahuku, at an elevation of six thousand five hundred — 
feet, and twenty miles from the. 
sea. The lava stream reached — 
the sea at noon the next day, ~ 
four miles west of the flow of, 
1868, and continued to flow 
until the 24th. 

The Great Fire of 1886.— 
The most destructive fire ever 
known in Honolulu broke out 
April 18th, 1886, and reduced © 
to ashes nearly the whole of 
what was known as “China- 
town,” which included one third 
of the city, covering about 
thirty acres. The loss was estimated at nearly $1,500,000; 
but like the famous great fire of London, it proved to be 
a blessing. The streets have been widened, new streets — 
have been opened, and a large part of the burnt district — 
has been solidly rebuilt in brick. ; 

Obituary.—Within the space of four years the nation 
lost by death four Hawaiian ladies of the highest rank: — 
Ruth Keelikolani, half-sister of Kamehameha V., died — 
May 15th, 1883; Mrs. Bernice Pauahi Bishop, October 
16th, 1884; Queen Emma, April 25th, 1885; and the 
Princess Miriam Likelike Cleghorn, February 2d, 1887. . 


BERNICE PAUAHI BISHOP 


THE REIGN OF KALAKAUA 807 


The Kamehameha Schools will be an enduring monu- 
ment to the memory of their founder, Mrs. B. P. Bishop, 
the last descendant of Kamehameha I. 

Political Contests.—In the early part of this reign a con- 
test began between two parties, of which the one, headed 
by the king, aimed at restoring, to a great extent, the an- 
cient system of personal government, while the other 
sought to limit the sovereign’s power, and to make the 
ministry responsible to the representatives of the people. 

In pursuance of the above policy, the king took it upon 
himself on the 2d of July, 1878, and again on the 14th 
of August, 1880, to dismiss a ministry without assigning 
any reason, after it had been approved by a majority vote 
of the legislature. On the latter occasion his appointment 
of one Moreno, an Italian adventurer, as premier and Min- 
ister of Foreign Affairs, called forth the protest of the dip- 
lomatic representatives of Great Britain, France, and the 
United States, and such a manifestation of public opinion 
that the king was obliged, after four days of popular excite- 
ment, to remove the obnoxious minister. 

Systematic efforts were made to turn the constitutional 
question into a race issue, and to use race jealousy to fur- 
ther party ends. The majority of the members of the legis- 
lature, for several sessions, consisted of officeholders, de- 
pendent upon the executive. Some of the measures at 
issue between the two parties were the project of a ten- 
million-dollar loan, chiefly for military purposes, the re- 
moval of restrictions on the sale of liquor to Hawaiians, 
the licensing of the sale of opium, the chartering of a lot- 
tery company, etc. Meanwhile the national debt increased 
from $889,000.in 1880 to $1,935,000 in 1887. 

The Samoan Embassy.—In 1883 two commissioners 
were sent to the Gilbert Islands and the New Hebrides, to 


| a 


308 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


prepare the way for a Hawaiian protectorate over the 
former group. On the 28d of December, 1886, the king 
commissioned Mr. J. E. Bush as minister plenipotentiary to 
the king of Samoa and the king of Tonga, and as high com- 
missioner to the other independent chiefs and peoples of 
Polynesia. He arrived in Samoa January 3, 1887, and 
remained there six months, during which time he negoti- 
ated an alliance between Hawaii and Samoa. The “Ex- 
plorer,” a small steamer employed in the copra trade, was 
purchased, fitted up as a man-of-war at great expense, 
and sent to Samoa March 18, 1887, to strengthen the 
embassy. It is sufficient to say that the conduct of the 
representatives of the Hawaiian Government, both on ship- 
board and on shore, was highly discreditable to their coun- 
try, and led to their recall in the following July. 

The Revolution of 1887.—The dissatisfaction which had 
long been increasing among the better class of citizens 
was brought to a crisis in 1887 by gross scandals con- 
nected with the sale of a monopoly of the opium traffic to a 
Chinese firm. On the 80th of June, 1887, an immense 
mass meeting was held in the armory on Beretania Street, 
from which a committee was sent to the king with specific 


demands for radical reforms in the method of carrying on — 


the government. The king, finding himself without sup- 
port, acceded at once to these demands, dismissed his min- 


istry, and on the 7th of July signed a new constitution. © 


This was a revision of that of 1864, and was intended to 
put an end to personal government, and to make the cabi- 
net responsible only to the legislature. Officeholders were 
to be henceforth ineligible to seats in the legislature, and 
no member of the legislature could be appointed to any 
civil office under the government, during the term for which 


he should be elected. The members of the upper house, 


® 


THE REIGN OF KALAKAUA 309 


instead of being appointed by the king, were to be elected 
for terms of six years by electors possessed of a moderate 
property qualification. 

The Insurrection of 1889.— The execution of the reform 
measures of 1887 was attended with much opposition on 
the part of the court and other advocates of the old régime, 
which came to a head in an insurrection led by R. W. Wil- 
cox, on the 80th of July, 1889. The insurgents, about 
150 in number, occupied the grounds of the palace and 
government building before daylight, and brought over the 
battery of fieldpieces from the barracks to fortify their 
position. They then invited the king to come up from his 
boathouse and proclaim a new constitution, which, how- 
ever, he did not see fit to do. They were surrounded by 
the volunteer troops, aided by other citizens, who opened 
a rifle fire upon them from the neighboring houses, and 
compelled them to surrender the same afternoon, but not 
without bloodshed. Seven of the insurgents were killed, 
and a large number wounded. 

The result of this deplorable affair was to intensify the 
bitter party feeling and race hatred that already existed in 
_the country. 

Close of Kalakaua’s Reign— Accession of Queen 
Liliuokalani.—In order to recruit his failing health, the 
king visited California in the United States cruiser 
“Charleston,” as the guest of Rear-Admiral Brown, in 
November, 1890. He received the utmost courtesy and 
hospitality from all classes, both in San Francisco and 
in southern California. 

His health, which seemed at first to have been bene- 
fited by the voyage, rapidly failed, in spite of the best 
medical attendance, and on the 20th of January, 1891, 
he breathed his last at the Palace Hotel, San Francisco. 


810 


: 
: 
Py 
g 


THE ACCESSION OF QUEEN LILIUOKALANI OtoL 


His remains were removed to the “Charleston” with 
imposing funeral ceremonies, and arrived at Honolulu 
January 29th, where the decorations for his welcome 
were suddenly changed into those of mourning. On the 
same day his sister, the regent, took the oath to maintain 
the constitution, and was ae queen, under the 
title of Liliuokalani. 

After lying in state for a fortnight, the remains of 
the late king were laid to 
rest in the royal mausoleum, 
on the 15th of February. 

On the 26th of the same 
month, the queen commis- 
sioned a new ministry, con- 
sisting of the Hons. 8. Parker, 
Minister of Foreign Affairs, 
C. N. Spencer, Minister of 
the Interior, H. A. Widemann, 
Minister of Finance, and W. 
A. Whiting, Attorney-Gen- 
eral. 

On the 9th of March, the 
Princess Victoria Kaiulani, 
daughter of the late Princess Likelike, was duly appointed — 
and proclaimed heir-apparent. 

Progress of the Country to 1890.— The Hovplennent 
of the resources of the islands under the stimulus of 
reciprocity with the United States surpassed all expec- 
tation. The production of the principal staples of the 
country, sugar and rice, increased to eight times what it 
was before the treaty. The total value of the domestic 
exports of the country rose to more than six times, and 
the total revenues of the government to more than three 


Shy HISTORY OF THE HAWAILAN PEOPLE — 


times what they were before the treaty. Unfortunately, 
however, the national debt also increased, to nearly 
$2,600,000. ae 

Much of the wealth thus poured into the country was 
invested in public and private improvements. The gov- 
ernment is spending three times as much for schools and 
for the health of the people as it did before 1876. In 1896, 
the use of the English language as the basis and medium 
of instruction was made by law compulsory in all schools. 

Public Improvements.— Among the public improve- 
ments made by the government during this period may 
be mentioned the new palace, built in 1880-81 at a 
cost of over three hundred and fifty thousand dollars; 
the marine railway, completed in 1882 at a cost of 
over ninety thousand dollars; the Kapuaiwa building, 
built in 1884; and the police-court station, built in 1885. 
The Honolulu water-works have been greatly enlarged, 
and the city was lighted by electricity March 28d, 1888. 
The population of Honolulu has increased to 28,920 (1896). 
The Molokai light-house was first lighted in 1882, and 
the Barber’s Point light-house, in 1888. . 

Private enterprise, however, has done still more to 
develop the resources of the country and to improve 
the means of communication. A large number of in- 
ter-island steamers and sailing vessels have come into 
existence. The first railway built in the islands was 
the Wailuku and Kahului Railway, on Maui, which was 
begun in 1879, and is eleven miles in length. The 
Kohala Railway was begun in 1881, and was completed 
the next year. This line is twenty miles in length from 
Mahukona to Niulu. The year 1889 saw the completion 
of the Honolulu street tramways, and of the Oahu Rail- 
way as far as Waimano, Ewa. The first line of telegraph 


a ee r 


PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS 813 


(afterwards changed to a telephone line) was put up in 
Maui, between Haiku and Wailuku, in 1878, and tele- 
phones were introduced into Honolulu and Hilo in 1882. 

In several localities, extensive irrigation canals have 
been constructed, which have fertilized large tracts of 
land that were formerly barren.* 

The first artesian well in the islands was bored for 
James Campbell, Esq., at Honoiliuli, Ewa, in July, 1879, 
and met with unexpected success. The next successful 
well was bored for the Hon. A. Marques, near Punahou, 
in the spring of 1880, and gave a fine flow of water. 
Since then great numbers of artesian wells have been 
sunk around the island of Oahu, and have added greatly 
to the resources of the country. 

Private generosity has also done much for the educa- 
tional and charitable institutions of the country. 

*In East Maui the Haiku ditch and the Hawaiian Commercial Company's 


ditch, which tap the streams flowing down the northern slopes of Haleakala, have 
brought many thousands of acres into cultivation, and changed the face of the 
country. 

+ Among the new institutions founded during this period are the Kameha- 
meha Schools, the Lunalilo Home, the St. Louis College, the Kohala Girls’ School, 
the Lihue Industrial School, and the Bishop Home for Girls at Kalaupapa, 
Molokai, besides the Honolulu Library and the Young Men’s Christian Associ- 
ation Hall 


CHAPTER XXXVII 
1892-1898 


THE REVOLUTION— ANNEXATION TO THE UNITED 
STATES 


Policy of Queen Liliuokalani— The troubled reign of 
Liliuokalani lasted a little less than two years. Its history 
shows that she was determined to renew the political con- 
test which had been going on during the preceding reign, 
and to abolish all the restrictions that had been imposed on 
the power of the crown. 

The decision of the supreme court that the term of the 
last cabinet had expired with the king enabled her to make 
conditions in advance with the new cabinet, so as to gain _ 
control of all appointments. The manner in which this 
power was exercised caused much dissatisfaction, and 
grave charges were made against the administration of the 
police department. | 

On the 20th of May, 1892, Messrs. R. W. Wilcox, V. V. 
Ashford, and others were arrested on the charge of conspir- 
ing against the government, with the view of establishing” 
a republic, but were finally discharged. | 

The Legislature of 1892.—The legislative session of’ 
1892 was protracted to eight months by persistent strug- 
gles between the opposing parties, during which four 
changes of ministry took place. During the last week of 
the session a bill granting a franchise to establish a lottery 
was passed, as well as an act licensing the sale of opium. 

314 


REVOLUTION AND ANNEXATION 5H a 


By the same voters an able and upright cabinet was voted 
out January 12, 18938, two days before the prorogation of 
the legislature. 

The Attempted Coup d’Etat.— Meanwhile the queen had 
caused a new constitution to be privately drawn up, by 
which the principal checks on the power of the crown were 
to be removed, together with the existing guaranties of the 


LILIUOKALANI 


independence of the supreme court. Only Hawaiian sub- 
jects were to be allowed to vote. | 
Preparations had been made to proclaim this constitu-} > 
tion at the palace on the 14th, shortly after the ceremony 
_ of prorogation, in the presence of the legislature, the chief 
| Officers of state, and the diplomatic corps. The government 
| troops were drawn up under arms, and a large crowd of 
; 


316 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


sympathizers with the project assembled in and around the 
palace. Fortunately, however, at the critical moment, the 


cabinet refused to sign the document, and appealed to 


leading citizens for advice and support. After a long and 
exciting contest with her cabinet, the queen partially 
yielded, and made a speech to the assemblage, stating that 
with deep regret she had consented to postpone for a few 
days the execution of her design. 

Proceedings of the Committee of Safety.— Meanwhile an 
informal meeting of residents was held to consider the situ- 
ation, at which a Committee of Safety was appointed. 
This committee took steps to form a provisional govern- 
ment, and to reorganize the volunteer military companies, 
which had been disbanded in 1890. 


It also called a mass meeting, which met on the after- 
noon of the 16th, and ratified its action. On the morning 


of the same day the queen published a declaration that 
thenceforth changes in the constitution would be “sought 
only by methods provided in the constitution itself.” 


The U.S. 8. “Boston,” which had unexpectedly arrived — 
from Hilo on the 14th, landed a force on the evening of the _ 
16th, to protect the lives and property of American citizens — 


in case of riot or incendiarism. 


Establishment of the Provisional Government.— On the © 
next day, the 17th, the organization of the provisional 


government was completed by the appointment of an 
executive council of four members, presided over by San- _ 


ford B. Dole, and an advisory council of fourteen members, 


with general legislative authority. 


On the same afternoon the members of the two coun- 
cils took possession of the government building, and a 
proclamation by the Committee of Safety was issued, de- — 
claring the monarchical system to be abrogated, and estab- 


REVOLUTION AND ANNEXATION Sita 


lishing the provisional government, to exist “until terms 
of union with the United States of America have been ne- 
gotiated and agreed upon.” Meanwhile two companies of 
volunteer troops arrived and occupied the grounds. 

By the advice of her ministers, and to avoid bloodshed, 
the queen surrendered her authority under protest, in view 
of the landing of United States troops, appealing to the 
government of the United States to reinstate her in au- 
thority. By her orders the station house and the barracks 
were surrendered the same evening to the provisional 
government. | 

Proposed Treaty of Annexation.— On the 19th of Janu- 
ary the steamer “Claudine” was dispatched to San Fran- 
cisco with five commissioners, fully empowered to nego- 
tiate a treaty of union with the United States. They 
arrived in Washington February 8d, and were favorably 
received by President Harrison. A treaty of annexation 
was then drawn up by the secretary of state and the Ha- 
Wwalian commissioners, which was signed on the 14th. It 
was laid before the senate for its concurrence on the 17th, 
but was not acted upon before the end of the session. One 
| of the first acts of President Cleveland after his inaugura- 
tion was to withdraw the treaty from the consideration of 
| the United States senate on the 9th of March. 

The Mission of Commissioner Blount.— Two days later 
President Cleveland dispatched Colonel James H. Blount 
of Macon, Georgia, as his special commissioner, to investi- 
gate the situation in the Hawaiian Islands. 
| A provisional protectorate of the Hawaiian Islands had 
_ been proclaimed, and the flag of the United States had 
_ been raised over the government building at Honolulu, on 
| the 1st of February. 

Mr. Blount arrived in Honolulu on the 29th of March. 


———w 


318 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Two days later he gave orders that the flag of the United 


States should be hauled down, and that the troops on shore i 


should be embarked on board of their respective ships, thus 
putting an end to the protectorate. 


His report, together with the testimony which he had 7 


collected, was sent to the Secretary of State July 17th, © 


shortly after which he returned to Washington. 
The Attempt to Restore the Queen.—President Cleve- 


land, considering the controversy between the provisional — 


government and the queen to have been submitted to his — 


arbitration, adopted the conclusion of Mr. Blount’s report, 


that the late revolution had been brought about by the aid — 


of the United States minister. 


Accordingly, Hon. Albert S. Willis of Louisville, Ken- © 


tucky, was sent to Honolulu as United States minister, 
with instructions first to inform the queen of the Presi- 
dent’s decision, and then, if she would promise to grant a 


full amnesty to all who had taken part in the revolution, to 
demand of the president and ministers of the provisional — 
government that they “ promptly relinquish to her fee con- 


stitutional authority.” 


Mr. Willis arrived in Honolulu November 4th, and, — 
having with difficulty obtained the queen’s consent to the 
amnesty, made a formal demand on the provisional govern-— 
ment for her restoration on the 19th of December, 1898. ; 
On the 28d President Dole sent the reply of his government ; 
to Minister Willis, declining to surrender its authority to 


the deposed queen. 


The Establishment of the Republic.— As all hope of 
early annexation was now abandoned by the provisional | 


government, steps were immediately taken to establish a 
republican form of government. A constitutional conven- 


tion was called to meet May 30th, 1894, for the purpose of | 


REVOLUTION AND ANNEXATION 319 


framing a constitution for the Republic of Hawaii. The 
convention finished its labors on the 3d of July, and on the 
following day the Republic of Hawaii was proclaimed, with 
Sanford B. Dole as its first president. 

The new constitution was in the main modeled after 
that of the United States. The 
legislature was divided into 
two houses, sitting separately, 
consisting of fifteen members 
each, a senate and a house 
of representatives. The quali- 
fications required of voters 
were similar to those pre- 
scribed in the constitution of 
1887. The president was to 
be elected for a term of six 
years, not being eligible to 
a second term. No change 
was made in the national flag. 


~ Necker Island was taken pos- SANFORD B. DOLE 


session of on the 27th of May, by Captain J. A. King, in 
the name of the Hawaiian Government. The first election 
under the new constitution for members of the legislature 
was held October 29th, 1894. 


The Insurrection of 1895.— Toward the end of the year 
1894 a plot was formed to overthrow the existing govern- 
ment and to restore the monarchy. In December of that 
year a cargo of arms and ammunition was shipped from San 
Francisco to the islands in the schooner ‘‘ Wahlberg,” and 
secretly landed at Kaalawai, east of Diamond Head. On Sun- 
day, January 6th, 1895, a body of native royalists was as- 
sembled there under the command of Messrs. R. W. Wilcox 


and 8. Nowlein. Their plan was to enter the city after 


320 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


midnight and attack the government headquarters, while | 
their allies in town were expected to seize the electric-light 
works, telephone offices, and station house. Toward even- 
ing, however, a squad of police, which had been sent to 
search a house at the foot of Diamond Head, was fired upon 
by an outpost of the insurgents. Mr. C. L. Carter, a leading 
citizen, was killed, and two native policemen were wounded. — 
The military companies and Citizens’ Guard were im- 
mediately called out, and all roads leading into town 
strictly guarded. There was some skirmishing during the 
night, and Mr. Nowlein and his company intrenched them- 
selves on a rocky hill near the mouth of Palolo valley, from 
which they were dislodged the next day, and about forty 
of them taken prisoners. The other band of insurgents 
under Mr. Wilcox was discovered on the 8th, while crossing 
the upper part of Manoa valley, and a sharp skirmish took 
place, in which one of their number was killed and three 
were taken prisoners, the rest escaping over the ridge into 
Nuuanu valley. On the 14th Mr. 8. Nowlein and his three 
lieutenants were captured near Moiliili, while Mr. Wilcox- 
was taken in a fishing hut near Kalihi. Liliuokalani was 
arrested on the 16th, and was confined for nine months in 
the former palace. On the 24th she formally renounced 
all her claims to the throne, appealing to the government 
for clemency toward those who had taken part in the in- © 
surrection. In all about 190 persons were brought to trial, 
90 of whom pleaded guilty. The ex-queen and 48 others 
were granted conditional pardons September 7th, 1895, 
and on the following New Year’s Day all the remaining 
prisoners were set at liberty. q 
The Cholera Epidemic.— An epidemic of Asiatic cholera 
prevailed in Honolulu during part of the months of August 
and September, 1895. It was undoubtedly introduced by 


I 


REVOLUTION AND ANNEXATION 321 


a Chinese immigrant, who was landed from the steamer 
“Belgic,” August 10th. The disease made its first appear- 
ance among Hawaiians at Iwilei on the 18th, and spread 
through the Palama quarter and along the Nuuanu stream. 
By the energetic measures of the board of health and the 
active codperation of public-spirited citizens, the epidemic 
was stamped out in about thirty days. The number of 
deaths caused by it was 63 out of a total of 88 cases, while 
the expenses incurred by the board of health amounted to 
$60,000. 

Census of 1896.— On the 24th of September, 1896, an 
official census of the islands was taken under the superin- 
tendency of A. T. Atkinson, Esq. The result showed a 
total population of 109,020, of whom 39,504 were Hawai- 
ians and part-Hawalians .by descent, and 13,783 were 
Hawaiian-born “foreigners” (including 4,312 Asiatics, 
6,959 Portuguese, and 2,240 other whites). 

Of the foreign-born, the Japanese numbered 22,329, 
the Chinese 19,382, the Portuguese 8,232, and other 
whites 5,007. (For classification by races, see Appendix A.) 

Difficulty with Japan.— During the years 1896 and 
1897 certain Japanese emigration companies made strenu- 
ous efforts to induce large numbers of their countrymen to 
emigrate to the Hawaiian Islands. Having ascertained 
that extensive frauds were being practiced on these people, 
and that the immigration laws were being evaded, the 
Hawaiian Government caused a strict examination to be 
made, and on the 28d of March, 1897, forbade the landing 
of several hundred Japanese immigrants. In all, about 
1,100 immigrants on different occasions were obliged to 
return to Japan, where this severe action excited intense 
feeling. The Japanese Government sent the cruiser 
“Naniwa” in May, with a special commissioner, to investi- 


oo HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


gate the matter. After a lengthy correspondence, the diffi- 
culty was amicably compromised the next year by the pay- 


ment of an indemnity of $75,000 to Japan. This was 


done at the instance of the United States Government, to 
remove a possible hindrance to annexation. 

Annexation to the United States.—On the accession of 
President McKinley in March, 1897, negotiations for an- 
nexation to the United States were renewed, and on the 
16th of June, 1897, a new treaty providing for annexa- 


tion was signed at Washington. It was ratified by a unani- — 


mous vote of the Hawaiian senate on the 8th of the 
following September, but was not pressed to a vote in the 
United States senate, as the support of two thirds of 
the members, required by the United States constitution, 


could not be counted upon. At last a joint resolution to ~ 


the same effect, having passed the house of representatives 
by a vote of 209 to 91, and the senate by a vote of 42 to 
21, was signed by President McKinley July 7th, 1898. 
The news was received with great enthusiasm in Honolulu 
on the 138th of July, and on the 12th of August, 1898, the 
formal transfer of sovereignty was made, and the flag of 


the United States was raised over the executive building 


with appropriate and impressive ceremonies. 


In the exercise of the power conferred upon him by the 


joint resolution, President McKinley directed that the offi- 
cers of the Republic of Hawaii should continue to exercise 
the powers held by them before the transfer of sovereignty, 
subject to the direction of the President of the United 
States. 

By the terms of the joint resolution, the existing laws 


of Hawaii were left in force so far as they did not conflict — 


with the constitution of the United States. The public 
debt of the Republic of Hawaii was assumed by the United 


REVOLUTION AND ANNEXATION 323 


States, not, however, to exceed $4,000,000. It was also 
provided that there shall be no further immigration of 
Chinese into the Hawaiian Islands, except upon such con- 
ditions as are allowed by the laws of the United States. 

In compliance with the joint resolution, the President 
appointed five commissioners to recommend such further 
legislation by Congress for the government of the islands 
as they should deem advisable, namely : from the American 
Congress, Senators Shelby M. Cullom and John T. Morgan, 
and Representative Robert R. Hitt; and from the Hawai- 
ian Islands, President 8. B. Dole and Judge W. F. Frear. 
They commenced their labors at Honolulu in September, 
and submitted their report to Congress in December, 1898. 

In April, 1900, an act was passed by the Congress of the 
United States, establishing a territorial government for 
the islands, which are to be known as the Territory of 
Hawaii. The laws of the republic in force on August 12, 
1898, are in general continued, subject to repeal or amend- 
ment by the territorial legislature or by Congress; but 
many are specifically repealed. The constitution and laws 
of the United States have the same force in the Territory 
of Hawaii as elsewhere in the United States. 

The legislature consists of a senate and a house of rep- 
resentatives, consisting respectively of fifteen and thirty 
members, elected by vote of the citizens who can read and 
write English or Hawaiian. Instead of the president of the 
republic, there is a governor of the Territory, appointed for 
four years by the President, by and with the advice and 
consent of the senate of the United States. The secretary 
of the Territory is appointed in the same manner. The 
other important administrative officers and boards are ap- 
pointed by the governor, by and with the advice and con- 
sent of the territorial senate. The judges of the supreme 


pas HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


and circuit courts are appointed in the same way as the 
governor and secretary. 

As the first governor of the Territory of Hawaii, Presi- 
dent McKinley appointed ex-President Sanford B. Dole, 
who thus is continued in chief control during the impor- 
tant period of the inception and establishment of the new 
form of government. 


Thus the Hawaiian Islands enter upon a new era, as an 
integral part of that great country to which they owe so © 
much in all the lines of human progress. Assured of per- 
manent peace and prosperity, the future of the “ Paradise 
of the Pacific” seems brighter than ever before. 


POPULATION 

NATIONALITIES In 1896 In 1900 
Rett oi. sxc ssc cic siee ss 31,019 29,787 
MET EPELTIBNIS fo cc ct tt tee 8,485 7,848 
ay SA 3,086 7,283 
OE Sa 15,191 15,675 
Other Europeans ............0.-:---- 4,161 3,294 
BSTIORE bine eco ccc tte e tte cence: 24,407 61,115 
ET ccc cas a esc cece cites 21,616 25,762 
MEIPEIOTIONS #5 c.2. csc. ce hee es 1,055 3,237 
I ee rr 109,020 154,001 


AREA AND POPULATION BY ISLANDS 


AREA IN SQUARE PoPpuULATION, 
IsLaNps aiitcs 1900 
a a A 4,015 46,843 
Ete. oS... ce clb bce Cees 728 24,797 
SE a 598 58,504 
Se 547 20,562 
SS 261 2,504 
ee UU 139 619 
a 97 172 
EE “es Sigh a 69 eet 
i Ne 6,454 154,001 


326 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


TABLE TO ILLUSTRATE THE COMMERCIAL PROGRESS OF 
THE COUNTRY 


1875 1888 
Pxport “Ol SUSaE siess.s Sicees es } oe OjOG0, Lee alba 235,888,346 lbs. 
Hxport: of Rites. sas. ate heen OTS cOUL oe 12,878,600 <* 
Total Domestic Exports........ $1,835,382.00 $11,631,434.88 
Totals Imports sicawecsuee coceeee | $1,682,471.00 $4,540,887.46 
Revenue for two years.....ee-- $877,791.85 $2,817,170.87 


1874-1876 1888-1890 
Expended for Schools........ deccses $95,441.33 $391,438.73 


Expended by Board of Health.......] $114,000.00 


$316,663.75 


1890 


1876 
Nationale Debt: ois xc skeen oes eater eee $459,187.59 $2,599,502.94 - 
Number of Pupils in Schools....... 6,981 10,006 


APPENDIX B 
PRONUNCIATION OF HAWAIIAN WORDS 


The original Hawaiian alphabet, adopted by the first mission- 
aries, contained but twelve letters, five of which were vowels and 
seven consonants, viz.: a, é, 4, 0, u, h, k, l,m, n, p, and w. The 
number of distinct sounds is about sixteen. 

No distinction was formerly made between the sounds of % and 
t, or between those of Z@ and r. In poetry, however, the sound of ¢ 
was preferred to that of k. The letter w generally sounds like v 
between the penult and final syllable of a word. 

A is sounded as in father, e as in they, ¢ as in maréne, 9 as in 
note, w as in rule or as oo in moon. 

Ai when sounded as a diphthong resembles the English ay, and 
@u, the English ow in loud. 


APPENDIX ay 


Besides the sounds mentioned above, there is in many words a 
guttural break between two vowels, which is represented by an 
apostrophe in a few common words, to distinguish their meaning, as 
Kina’u. © 

Every word and every syllable must end in a vewel, and no two 
consonants occur without a vowel sound between them. 

The accent of about five sixths of the words in the language is on 
the penult. A few of the proper names are accented on the final 
syllable, as Paki’, Kiwalao’, and Namakeha’. 


APPENDIX C 


HAWAIIAN NAMES OF MONTHS 


1. Makalii. 5. Welo. 9. Hilinaehu. 
2. Kaelo. 6. Ikiiki. 10. Hilinama. 
3. Kaulua. 7, Kaaona. 11. Ikuwa. 
4, Nana. 8. Hinaieleele. 12. Welehu. 


NAMES OF THE DAYS IN THE MONTH 


De t0; 16. Mahealani. 
2. Hoaka. 17. Kulu. 
3. Ku-kahi. 18. Laau-ku-kahi. 
Kapu Ku 3} 4, Ku-lua. 19. Laau-ku-lua. 
5. Ku-kolu. 20. Laau-pau. 
6. Ku-pau. 21. Ole-ku-kahi. 
7. Ole-ku-kahi. 22. Ole-ku-lua. 
8. Ole-ku-lua. 23. Ole-pau. 
9. Ole-ku-kolu. Kapu Kana- ( 24. Kaloa-ku-kahi 
10. Ole-ku-pau. loa or ee a Kaloa-ku-lua. 
ig ode hvait:y 26. Kaloa-pau. 
12. Mohalu. ain oe { 27. Kane. 
ou Hua | 13. Hua. 28. Lono. 
" 14, Akua. Full Moon. 29. Mauli. 


15. Hoku. 30. Muku. 


HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


328 


‘T syourvyqouvy 
poraieUL 
“(a) Tue[ondoeyy 


‘OBC MIST 
poLtieut 
(A) BUTT 
eM10deinyoy 


“*B[OTe 


‘() VINNYeny, SVNos>yT 


‘ED offeun’T *O “MM 


(i) eupeuey “O 
pelle ur 


*“() TYON[NVyoy 


“oyooryy BULUL, eee eee eo eeeeeerere ses e eee eseeseoe® e@aoverrere uo. Ip[Ipopuess-yeery) 


| 


‘ejoyoy AUUR IL 
‘suno | uyor 
pollreul 
‘(aA) BYOVUBOB ST 
pue 
(Qp Tueleyoenso oT 


| 


*(A) BUOBVUOTUCN 
(>) TTNoveyzINV yy eeceeeseneses coe *TlOAp[LyOpuBlpy) 


‘@) OFLOUFT 


‘en YV[VSL *(M) NVOMBTITST (4) Tuvpondoey, 
poLlreuL pelle UL pell1eul 
*() Hyvueullel[ey *(4) genie Se eeecese @receeeees sees seoe usIpIIgO 
*TTNYNoYyoeyVure Ss wh @MLOd VINO > eeceeeev eee ecoeeeoereoos eee eG SOAT AA 
nndovunoxy fo wayjoug-fyoy “onoay fo yyw 
7 eyouVyoule yy 01 poLLre un *(M) ie seer eoesesees ee eeeorertte @oecree PITyopusry 
*(M) eu] VMlOdVInNyey 03 pe TITeUL (4) Be ecoeseees eeece Cotes ees ees eres roe +e UsIpTIgg 
‘TID[OUR jo 1048s ‘elo[ey ere e eee eeoenee S808 @eeeseeresseeece "SOAT MA 


*"ToTOdeyoue ys, 


wonoz fo buy ‘nndounjpy fo hyvwosy 


AMOINGO HINGALHDIA AHL AO GNA AHL LOAOAV IIVMVH AO SAHIHD 


XIGNHdd V 


SHIDOIVUNAD CGALOXTHS 


829 


APPENDIX 


*Bunok poly 
*“() neury ‘dM 


dousia “HO = w" ST. NAOYOTOTO'T “dM 


poLireut porlreutr 
‘Tyened 9, | ‘FaeloytTooy 
eoTuleg iG qn 
=) Wed “(q) vowuenyoyT 
pettreur , > \\ pertreut 
(A) vruOy “(M) Tyeneg 
eulyen'y pue enooy 
por.ieur 
‘G) NAOTo[oVy 
neg 


qojodeqouey 


(A) oulyeMny pus (4) nxOUTTULIVY JO 10g » 


‘sunok pol 
*TTNOveyIMNe ST prem poy ARTO DG cceneone, oe ee ane nie a cece UsIP[Tqopus.13-7yearpy 


‘eyooy BULUI 


poerli1eUl 
‘oqToury 1epuBxely 
6:9) eo[o [ee “D[BULBULE ST BLLOJOTA See S828 08S S808 088 SESS S S880 eee**TaIp OpuBszpy 
porlslie ul ‘eYoulBVyouBey JOT Ta 
‘“(M) TTOUONB YOST ‘CMIBNYOY SOSOPL 
‘TOHVUYNALYL YT 
spyo ‘() OIdouTTeM 
porlt1zeur *(y) BOVTENAOST (AA) CUOBUOTY BN 
‘(q) neUryT porLLreul "GD TInovoymMeyy fF eerere’*e*"*** TOIPTIUD 
“nyouvoye sy a (Ad) ite *() OUTIOULT 
SO \ ereureureqesr 
a SDYD 
*Tneeg ‘enyVley ‘Tuvjondosyy seconseosudes sss: Gaal nat 


‘T vyaunyawuoy fo fyuuog 


GHONILNOO—CT XICNUddV 


HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


‘() volereex "T ‘PEST UL polq 


peLireur *(M) ofouvUIe yy 
‘“(AA) TYOUONBYAO yy 
pues (MA) BOT 
Cp vrereqeyy peLLreut 


‘suULepYy “AO 20 


‘@p) neury ‘QD Tuppenyy *g 
-nyouvoyey *SUBYCUIS NT BIPATT 
POLLreur SDYD “BIT *F 
(A) loyVeynyeye yy syn *xOOD “AOD IO 
‘(A) ordourye mM *¢g ‘Q)) nyournveeyy *g 
‘O) PIO °S *(M) BnyVlesy °s 


Me: 9) Ee Tr ‘(M) NUBUINYVEY *T 
*(M) [UREN YyeyVuMeyy ‘() nyounveeyxT 
poltreur polteur 
‘Qp eyourueny ‘(a) BUeyeUIe NT 


noreey 


“D aac 


*(M) nyouvendey 


porireut 
‘Cp Hrenumne xy 
‘Topoyeyvusy 

poerr1eur 


‘C) covey 


NBlOOH, 


‘aousig “A “O 
poltreur 
‘Tyened oofmiog 
PoLLIeuL 
‘CD ie 
nUusoO (A) OBMEST 
JO SULY 4SeryT peLizeut 
‘DP oIndnyrueley ‘G) BuntiTewoloyrueresyy 
| (T “ONT 009) | 
*(M) OUTWeMNeyST ‘nndoruvresy (MA) OuUvITeyN 
potireuL porireur portieut 
‘D) TPpeqey (A) PlOTe ST ‘@) Inuveyoueyourey 


eeeece eocerere*"SOATAA 


‘I chedeieen 


9E4l “GV lwun mop fo bury ‘oyynoyoy 


SHHIHD JO ATINVA IOVIT FH, 


H XIGNHddV 


331 


APPENDIX 


4H XIGCNAHddV 


‘PS GD) DAOYOIS'T ‘TI “M 


L00‘FST eeeeee Peres eeeeeoee O06T " *(M) Tuvjorde yy 
OZO'BOT te 968T ev | 
OGG GS ttt tee O68T te (eee | 
BLGIOG coiitttr teeters eees FREI y (MA) OLOUTST polilieuL ‘ep orgnyy 
C86'LG ee ey SL8T a 
LOB'OG “cite “LET is (4) TIyenuaneyy “UL 
GSB'BO te 998T i (a) nyouvendey 
Sato eee nes a | 3 
GOTES coche OSs F (A) TUBTIVMNdee yy “UL *(¥) SOTMTOIM “Ut 
GLEROT ete ORT 4 ‘() NVM *(A) LUVTCYLeULO 
E1Te‘OkTt ee ee ee | SE8T jo snsuep | 
NeUTIN Jo Joryo v ‘(y) VYLY “UL “ps (A) TKTeoponVeylUeley "UL 
NOILLVINdOd #O WIdViL ‘Teneyy JO uoonb “(M) lefeyeyVuUeyy ‘“(4) BOROULST 


unjondvy woenh fo eboeuT 


‘TUBTNTES VELOPOT A, 


‘ULOYSOO “S “WY “UL ‘sTUTUIOG °O ‘ff ‘Ur ‘TuRlOldey “un 
‘Oyl[oylT Weyl ‘eyoeyeule yy BIpAT SRE ds PLAsG 
| | | 
| 
xe: 9) ee peLiaeuL *(MA) oe 
(A) LAIN youey “UL “(M) OVS “UL 
‘QD emeueure sy ‘ep pale 
°(AA) eee “UL *(q) TueTeyoodoy ‘UL 
‘Ep ie ces *(M) nee 
(A) TINYloyoeyvurvy “UL *(M) TURN Q ‘Ur 
‘() ny{ourvIooMIe yy ‘(q) N[NoP{-v-OMBOSH 


hnung Suyvubrar oyz fo sosbypag 
GaHONILNOYO—H XIGCNUdd V 


332 


HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


APPENDIX G 


CHRONOLOGICAL TABLE OF EVENTS IN HAWAIIAN 


HISTORY 


The following table, prepared solely for purposes of reference, is 
based upon one compiled by the late Hon. A. Fornander : 


A.D. 
1527, 


1555, 
1736, 


isd 
1738, 
1768, 
1770; 
iW Arey 


1778, 


1779, 
1781, 
1782, 
1782, 
1783, 
1786, 


Wk, 
1788, 


1790, 
1790, 
1790, 
1790, 
1790, 
1791, 
1791, 
1792, 


November. Probable arrival of shipwrecked Spaniards at Keei, 
in Kona, Hawaii. 

Discovery of the Hawaiian Islands by Juan Gaetano. 

November. Birth of Kamehameha I. at Kokoiki, Kohala, 
Hawaii. 

Great battle at Kawela, Molokai. 

Battle of Keawawa, north of Lahaina. 

Kaahumanu born at Kauwiki, Hana, Maui. 

Kalaniopuu defeated near the Waikapu sand-hills. 

January [8. Discovery of Oahu and Kauai by Captain James | 
Cook. 

November 26. Discovery of Maui on Captain Cook’s second 
visit. 

February 14. Death of Captain Cook at Kealakekua, Hawaii. 

Reconquest of Hana by Kahekili. 

January. Death of Kalaniopuu, king of Hawaii. 

July. Battle of Mokuohai between Kamehameha and Kiwalao. 

Conquest of Oahu by Kahekili. 

May 26. Arrival of Captains Portlock and Dixon at Keala- 
kekua. 

September. Kaiana sailed for China with Captain Meares. 

December 29. Reception of Kaiana by Kamehameha at Kea-— 
lakekua. 

February. Massacre of natives at Olowalu by Captain Metcalf. 

March 17. The “Fair American” cut off by Kameeiamoku. 

July. Invasion of Maui and battle of Kepaniwai at Wailuku. 

November. Great eruption of Kilauea. 

November. Sea-fight off Waimanu, Hamakua, Hawaii. 

Building of the heiau of Puukohola at Kawaihae. 

Autumn. Assassination of Keoua Kuahuula at Kawaihae. 

March 5. Arrival of Captain Vancouver at Kealakekua. 


1792, 
1793, 
1794, 
1794, 
1795, 
1795, 
1796, 
1796, 


1796, 


1797, 
1801, 
1802, 


1803, 


1804, 
1804, 
1809, 
1810, 
1810, 
1811, 
1813, 
1815, 
1816, 
1816, 
1816, 
1818, 


1819, 
1819, 
1319, 
1820, 
1820, 


1820, 


1821, 
1821, 


APPENDIX 838 


May 7. Murder of Messrs. Hergest and Gooch at Waimea, 
Oahu. 

February 14. Second visit of Captain Vancouver. First cattle 
landed. 

January 9. Third visit of Vancouver. 

February 25. Cession of Hawaii to Great Britain. 

January 1. Massacre of Captains Brown and Gardner in Hono- 
lulu Harbor. 

May. Battle of Nuuanu and conquest of Oahu. 

April. Failure of expedition against Kauai. 

August. Rebellion of Namakeha in southern Hawaii sup- 
pressed. 

October 31. Wreck of Captain Barber’s ship at Barber’s Point. 

Liholiho born at Hilo. 

Eruption of Hualalai. 

Kamehameha sailed with the pelelew fleet to Lahaina. 

May 24. First horses landed at Kawaihae by Captain Cleve- 
land. 

Purchase of the ship ‘‘ Lelia Byrd” by Kamehameha. 

The pestilence called ‘‘ Mai okuu.” 

Death of Keliimaikai, brother of Kamehameha I. 

Cession of Kauai by Kaumualii to Kamehameha I. 

May. Death of Isaac Davis. 

Return of Kamehameha I. to Hawaii. 

August 11. Birth of Kauikeaouli at Keauhou, Kona, Hawaii. 

Fort built by Dr. Scheffer at Waimea, Kauai. 

Fort built at Honolulu. 

Death of Pauli Kaoleioku, son of Kamehameha I. 

November 24. Arrival of Captain Kotzebue at Kailua, Hawaii. 

Arrival of Spanish pirates, and their capture by the ‘‘ Argen- 
tina.” 

May 8. Death of Kamehameha I. at Kailua, Kona, Hawaii. 

August. Visit of Captain Freycinet in the ‘ Uranie.” 

October. Abolition of idolatry. 

January. Battle of Kuamoo and death of Kekuaokalani. 

March 31. Arrival of First American Missionaries in brig 
“Thaddeus.” 

Arrival of first whale-ship at Honolulu, the ‘‘ Mary,” Captain 
Allen. 

July.21. Voyage of Liholiho to Kauai in an open boat. 

August 25. First Christian meeting-house built in Honolulu. 


334 


1822, 
1822, 


1822, 
1823, 
1823, 
1823, 
1824, 
1824, 
1824, 
1824, 


1824, 
1824, 


1825, 
1825, 
1825, 
1826, 


1826, 
1826, 


1827, 
1827, 


1827, 
1827, 
1829, 


1829, 
1830, 


1830, 


1831, 
1831, 


1832, 
1832, 


HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


January 7. First printing in Hawaiian. 


yn ae, Seal 


May 1. The schooner ‘‘ Prince Regent” presented to Liholiho ~ 


by Captain Kent for the British Government. 
August 11. First Christian marriage in Honolulu. 
February 4. Arrival of Mr. Ellis from Tahiti. 
September 16. Death of Keopuolani at Lahaina. 


November 27. Departure of Liholiho and suite for England. 


May 26. Death of Kaumualii, ex-king of Kauai. 
July 8. Death of Kamehamalu, the queen, in London. 
July 14. Death of Liholiho in London. 


August 8. Rebellion on Kauai and attack on the Waimea : 


fort. 
August 18. Defeat of insurgents at Wahiawa, Kauai. 
December. Kapiolani descends into the crater of Kilauea and 
defies Pele. : 
May 4. Arrival of the ‘‘ Blonde” at Lahaina with the remains 
of Liholiho and his queen. 
June 6. Kauikeaouli proclaimed king and Kaahumanu regent. 
October 5. Outrage at Lahaina by crew of the ‘“ Daniel.” 


February 26. Outrage in Honolulu by crew of United States 


schooner ‘‘ Dolphin.” 
Mosquitoes introduced at Lahaina by ship ‘ Wellington.” 


October. Visit of the United States ship ‘‘ Peacock,” Captain 


Ap Catesby Jones. 
February 8. Death of Kalanimoku. 
July 7. Arrival of the first Catholic missionaries in the 
** Comet.” 
October 27. Outrage at Lahaina by crew of the ‘‘ John Palmer.” 
December 8. First laws published. 


October 14. Arrival of the United States ship ‘‘ Vincennes,” 


Captain Finch. 


December 2. Departure of Boki on a sandal-wood expedition. — 


August 3. Return of the ‘‘Becket” with news of the loss of 
the ‘‘ Kamehameha” with Boki and most of his party. 

December 11. Birth of Lot Kamehameha, afterwards Kame- 
hameha YV. 

September. Commencement of Lahainaluna Seminary. 


December 24. Banishment of the Catholic priests to California 


on the brig ‘‘ Waverly.” 
January 31. Birth of Lunalilo. 
June 5. Death of Kaahumanu. 


= 
4 


1832, 
1833, 
1833, 
1834, 
1834, 


1835, 


1836, 


1836, 
1836, 
1836, 
1837, 


1837, 


1837, 
1837, 
1837, 
1837, 
1837, 


1838, 
1839, 
1839, 
1839, 


|. 1839, 


1839, 
_ 1840, 
| 1840, 
1840, 
} 1840, 
| 1841, 
| 1841, 
1842, 
1842, 


1842, 
1842, 
1842, 


APPENDIX 835 


December 23. Arrival of Japanese junk at Waialua. 

March. Kauikeaouli assumed the power of king. 

November 28. Bethel Church opened for worship. 

The newspaper ‘‘ Kumu Hawaii” printed at Honolulu. 

February 9. Birth of Alexander Liholiho, afterwards Kame- 
hameha IV. , 

December 16. Death of John Young, Sr., in Honolulu. 

July 30. First English newspaper, the ‘‘Sandwich Island 
Gazette.” 

September 30. Arrival of Rev. R. Walsh at Honolulu. 

November 16. - Birth of David Kalakaua. 

December 30. Death of Harriet Nahienaena at Honolulu. 

February 2. Marriage of Kamehameha III. to Kalama, daugh- 
ter of Kapihe. 

April 17. Return of Messrs. Bachelot and Short on the 
** Clementine.” : 

July 7. Arrival of H. B. M.’s ship ‘‘ Sulphur.” 

July 10. Arrival of the French frigate ‘‘ Venus.” 

November 2. Arrival of Rev. M. Maigret on the ‘‘ Europa.” 

November 7. Extraordinary earthquake wave. 

November 23. Departure of Messrs. Maigret and Bachelot in 
the ‘‘ Honolulu.” 

September 2. Birth of Queen Lydia Kamakaeha Liliuokalani. 

April 4. Death of Kinau, the kwhina nui. 

June 7. Declaration of Rights. 

June 17. Edict of Toleration. 

July 9. Arrival of French frigate ‘‘ Artemise,” Captain Laplace. 

July 25. Treaty signed and $20,000 paid to Captain Laplace. 

May. Return of Rev. L. Maigret to Honolulu. 

May. Royal School opened. 

May 30. Eruption from Kilauea. 

October 8. First Constitution proclaimed. 

May. Death of Kapiolani. 

May 17. Great volcanic wave. 

May 15. Treasury Board appointed—Dr. Judd president. 

July 8. Departure of Messrs. Haalilio and Richards for United 
States and Europe as ambassadors. 

July 11. Punahou school opened. 

August 24. Arrival of the ‘‘ Embuscade,” Captain Mallet. 

September 26. Departure of Mr. Charlton for England via 
Mexico. 


306 


1842, 


1843, 
1843, 


1843, 
1843, 


18438, 
1843, 


1844, 
. 1845. 
1845, 
1846, 
1846, 


1846, 


1848, 
1848, 
1849, 
1849, 


1849, 
1849, 


1849, 
1850, 


1850, 


1851, 
1851, 
1851, 
1852, 
1853, 
1853, 
- 1853, 


HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


December 19. Recognition of independence by the United States. 

January 10. Eruption of Mauna Loa to the north. 

February 10. Arrival of H. B. M.’s ship “ Carysfort, ” Lord 
George Paulet. 


‘February 25. Provisional cession of the islands to Great — 


Britain. 

March 11. Departure of Messrs. Simpson and Marshall for 
England. 

July 31. Restoration of independence by Admiral Thomas. 

November 28. Recognition of independence by Great Britain 
and France. 

December 9. Death of Kuakini (Governor Adams). 

March 23. Return of Mr. Richards with the remains of Haalilio. 

June 7. Death of Kekauluohi. ; 

February 11. Land Commission organized. 

March 26. Arrival of French frigate ‘‘ Virginie,” and restora- 
tion of the $20,000. 

March 26. New treaties with Great Britain and France con- 
cluded. 

January 27 to March 7. Mahele or division of lands. 

August. First party left for the gold diggings in California. 

June 23. Death of Kealiiahonui. 

August 12. Arrival of Admiral Tromelin in the ‘‘ Poursui- 
vante.” 

August 25. Occupation of the fort and seizure of the yacht 
‘“* Kamehameha III.” 

September 11. Departure of Dr. Judd and Princes Lot and 
Alexander on a diplomatic mission. 

December 26. Treaty concluded with the United States. 

September 9. Return of Dr. Judd and the princes from 
Europe. 

December 13. Arrival of Mr. Perrin, French consul, in the 
“* Serieuse.” 

March 10. Protectorate offered to the United States. 

June 2. Death of Keahikuni Kekauonohi. 

July 10. New treaty concluded with England. 

February 17. Eruption from Mauna Loa on the east. 

April 28. Arrival of Mormon missionaries. 

May — October. Epidemic of small-pox. 

November 12. Arrival of steamer ‘‘S. H. Wheeler,” afterwards ' 
the ‘“‘ Akamai.” 


1854, 
1855, 
1855, 
1855, 
1856, 
1857, 
1857, 
1857, 
1857, 
1857, 
1858, 
1858, 
1859, 
1860, 
1860, 
1860, 
1862, 
1862, 
1862, 
1863, 
1864, 
1864, 
1864, 
1865, 


1865, 
1865, 
1865, 


1866, 
1866, 
1867, 
1868, 


1868, 
1868, 
1868, 
1868, 
1869, 
(1870, 


APPENDIX 837 


December 15. Death of Kamehameha III. 

June 13. Death of Paki. 

August 11. Great eruption of Mauna Loa toward Hilo. 

Introduction of lantana from Chile by Mr. John Ladd. 

June 19. Marriage of Kamehameha IV. to Queen Emma. 

Demolition of the fort at Honolulu. 

May 28. Death of Judge Lee. 

July 2. Death of Konia. 

August 22. Death of Admiral Thomas. 

October 21. Introduction of the first honey-bees. 

May 20. Birth of the Prince of Hawaii. 

September 8. New treaty with France. 

January 23. Eruption of Mauna Loa to the northwest. 

July 17. Corner-stone of the Queen’s Hospital laid. 

July 18. First regular trip of steamer ‘‘ Kilauea.” 

September 23. Death of Rev. R. Armstrong. 

March 29. Death of Mr. Perrin. 

August 19. Death of the Prince of Hawaii. 

October 11. Arrival of Bishop Staley. 

November 30. Death of Kamehameha IV. 

July 7. Meeting of Constitutional Convention. 

August 3. The Constitutional Convention dismissed. 

August 20. A new constitution decreed. 

May 6. Departure of Queen Emma for England on H. B. M.’s 
ship ‘‘ Clio.” 

April 11. Order of Kamehameha founded. 

October 19. Death of R. C. Wyllie, Minister of Foreign Affairs. 

October 30. Removal of the remains of the kings to the new 
mausoleum. 

May 29. Death of Victoria Kamamalu. 

October 22. Return of Queen Emma from England. 

March 5. Corner-stone of Anglican Cathedral laid. 

April 2. Great eruption of Mauna Loa in Kahuku, Kau, 
accompanied by earthquakes and a volcanic wave. 

March 25. Death of J. P. Parker, Esq. 

August 15. Great volcanic wave. 

October 19. Kaona insurrection in Kona, Hawaii. 

November 24. Death of Governor Kekuanaoa. 

July 21. Arrival of the Duke of Edinburgh at Honolulu. 

April 19. Arrival of the “‘ Wonga Wonga,” first steamer on the 
Australian route. 


338 
1870, 


1871, 
1871, 


1872, 
1872, 
1873, 
1873, 
1874, 
1874, 


1874, 
1874, 
1874, 


1875, 


1875, 
1876, 
LB.G75 
1ST 
1877, 
TS C4, 
1879, 
1879, 
1879, 
1880, 
1880, 


1881, 


1881, 
1881, 
1881, 


1883, 
1884, 
1885, 
1886, 
1887, 


HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


September 20. Death of Queen Kalama, widow of Kame- 
hameha ITI. : 

February 19. Earthquake at Honolulu and Lahaina. 

September 14. Thirty-three whale-ships abandoned in the ice 
in the Arctic Sea. 

March 20. Corner-stone of ‘ Aliiolani Hale” laid. 

December 11. Death of Kamehameha V.° 

January 8. Lunalilo elected king by the legislature. 

September 7. Mutiny at the barracks. 

February 3. Death of Lunalilo. 

February 12. Election of David Kalakaua as king by the legis- 
lature. 

February 12. Court-house riot. 

February 14. Prince W. P. Leleiohoku proclaimed heir-apparent. 

November 17. Departure of the king for the United States on 
the United States ship ‘‘ Benicia.” 

February 15. Return of the king on the United States ship 
** Pensacola.” 

October 16. Birth of the Princess Kaiulani. 

August 15. Reciprocity treaty ratified. 

April 10. Death of Prince Leleiohoku. 

April 10. Princess Liliuokalani proclaimed heir-apparent. 

May 10. Destructive volcanic wave. 

July 23. First telegraph line on Maui put in operation. 

July 17. Kahului Railway opened. 

July. First artesian well in Honouliuli, Ewa. 

December 31. Corner-stone of the palace laid. 

April 28. First artesian well in Honolulu. 

November 6. Great eruption of Mauna Loa, which nearly 
reached Hilo. 

January 20: King Kalakaua set out on his tour around the 
world. 

February. Introduction of small-pox at Honolulu. 

April 9. Corner-stone of Lunalilo Home laid. 

October 29. Return of the king from his tour around the 
world. 

May 15. Death of Ruth Keelikolani. 

October 16. Death of Mrs. Bernice Pauahi Bishop. 

April 25. Death of Queen Emma, Kaleleonalani. | 

April 18. Great fire in Honolulu. 

January 16. Eruption of Mauna Loain Kau. 


APPENDIX 


1827, February 2. Death of Princess Likelike. 

1887, July 7. New constitution proclaimed. 

1889, July 30. Insurrection led by R. W. Wilcox. 

1891, January 20. Death of King Kalakaua in San Francisco. 
1891, January 29. Accession of Queen Liliuokalani. 
1893, January 17. Provisional government begun. 
1894, July 4. Establishment of the Republic. 

1895, January 6. Insurrection in favor of Liliuokalani. 
1898, July 7. American annexation secured. 

1898, August 12. United States flag raised at Honolulu. 
1899, March 6. Death of Princess Kaiulani. 

1899, July 4-23. Eruption of Mauna LoainS. Kona. 
1900, January 20. Great fire in Honolulu. 

1900, June 14. Territorial government begun. 


APPENDIX H 


SOVEREIGNS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS 


NAME BIRTH 
KAMEHAMEHA J........ Nov. 
KAMEHAMEHA IIT....... 
KAMEHAMEHA III...... Aug.11, 
KAMEHAMEHA IV...... Feb. 9, 
KAMEHAMEHA V....... Dec. 11, 
WILLIAM C. LUNALILO..| Jan. 31, 
Davip KALAKADA......| Nov. 16, 
BAILIUOKALANI......-0.. Sept. 2, 


— 


1736 
Lio 
1813 
1834 
1830 
1832 
1836 
1838 


ACCESSION DEATH 


1795 | May 8, 
May 20, 1819 | July 14, 
June 6, 1825 | Dec. 15, 
Janell, 1855" | Nov. 30; 
Nov. 30, 1863 | Dec. 11, 
USNS. O,-1070 ipheo, bo, 
Feb. 12, 1874 | Jan. 20, 
Jan. 29, 1891 


THE KUHINA NUYS 


KaAAHUMAND, from May, 1819, until June 5, 1832. 


KINAU, 

KEKAULUOHI, 

JOHN YouNG 2d, 
VICTORIA KAMAMALU, 


until April 4, 1839. 
until June 7, 1845. 


until January 15, 1855. 


until August 13, 1864. 


539 


1819 
1824 
1854 
1863 
1872 
1874 
1891 


* 


340 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


AIST OR Ati 


APPENDIX I 


THE CABINET MINISTERS WHO HAVE 


HELD OFFICE IN THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS 


REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA ITI. 


DE GeaPeJUDDst se President of Treasury Board. May 10, 1842. 
Recorderiv iis ress sices cea May 15, 1842. 
Commissioned to correspond 
with Messrs. Richards and 
Haalligsce. 2... os cee July 18, 1842. 
Minister of Foreign Affairs.. November 2, 1848. 
Minister of the Interior..... March 30, 1845. 
Minister of Winance......... April 15, 1846. 
Resigned ise lial ome meee tee September 5, 1853. 
JOHN RICORD......... Attorney-General............ March 9, 1844. 
Resigned iiys:c issn wea sieers ae May 17, 1847. 
BR: 70 WY GLEN teas Minister of Foreign Affairs 
through this reign....... March 26, 1845. 
JOHN YOUNG 2d...... Minister of the Interior 
through this reign....... March 4, 1846. 
W. RICHARDS... ...... Minister of Public Instruc- 
TLOD eis Dele pas Cacmeae eee April 13, 1846, 
until» his ‘deaths. ti... amenoe November 7, 1847. 
R. ARMSTRONG ....... Minister of Public Instruc- 
tion through this reign.. December 6, 1847. 
OO EPALE eae Acting Minister of Finance.. September 6, 1849, 
ADVE. see SER atan yale eee meee September 26, 1850. 
By ALLEN. ei Minister of Finance through 
thiss velen ee. nena September 6, 1853. 


Kamehameha III. died December 15, 1854. 


HSH. CAR GENK eee oe 


JOHN YOUNG 2d...... 


REIGN oF KAMEHAMEHA LV. 


Minister of Foreign Affairs 

through this reign....... January 15, 1855. 
Minister of Finance......... January 15, 1855, 
until appointed Chief-Justice. June 11, 1857. 


Minister of the Interior..... January 15, 1855. ~ 


Died...... HO cba tess ole C DOly ee ee 


ieee 


APPENDIX 341 


Lor KaMEHAMEHA...Minister of the Interior 


through this reign....... June 6, 1857. 
R. ARMSTRONG....... Minister of Public Instruction January 15, 1855, 
until abolition of the office... July 1, 1855. 
Davip L. GREGG..... Minister of Finance......... May 26, 1858. 
THISNOUL weveveecue cece cess ss AAUSUSt. Loses oUrs 
O. G. Hopxins....... Minister of Finance......... November 5, 1863. 


Kamehameha IV. died November 30, 1863. 


REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA V. 
R. C. WYLLIE........Minister of Foreign Affairs.. December 24, 1863, 


HOG ANIS"AGathiry. Gs. <ss ores ss October 19, 1865. 
C. DE VARIGNY....... Minister of Finance......... December 24, 1863. 
FARRIS}. 0... Attorney-General. ........... December 24, 1863. 
G. M. RoBERTSON....Minister of the Interior..... December 24, 1863, 


until re-appointed first Asso- 
ciate-Justice of the Su- 


Dremos UOurt se asce cess ss February 18, 1864. 
C. G. Hopxins.......Minister of the Interior..... February 18, 1864. 
Left for England with Queen 
BGs ghee ew. en ae esis os He's e May 6, 1865. 
F. W. Hutcuinson...Minister of the Interior 
through this reign..... April 26, 1865. 
C. DE VARIGNY....... Minister of Foreign Affairs. December 21, 1865. 
Returned to France in...... July, 1868. 
Resignation received........ November, 1869. 
STEPHEN H. Puruuips. Attorney-General through 
GIS TeIPN ee caps ses tees ee September 12, 1866. 
Pm. FARRIS... 2.0 Minister of Finance......... December 21, 1865, 
TING A pas ua eer dese tere nes December, 1869. 
Minister of Foreign Affairs. December 21, 1869. 
GRIPNGC Ts si veneer cesses e---- August 25, 1872. 
J. Morr SMITH....... Minister of Finance......... December 21, 1869. 
HLORIETIOCS viecise cte's cet ooeeee- August 25, 1872. 
BOeSSTIRLING. v0 ccc cess Minister of Finance through 
CHISITOIOT ite che ss ee . September 10, 1872. 


F. W. Hurtcuinson...Minister of Foreign Affairs 
pro tem. through this 
POIQTR neh verks seeS eas ss September 10, 1872. 
Kamehameha V died Demee 11, 1872. 


842 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


REIGN oF LUNALILO 


C. R. BisHop.........Minister of Foreign Affairs. January 10, 18'73. 


Be OSE Lie ee Minister of the Interior..... January 10, 1873. 
Rio STIRLING }2 5 ese se Minister of Finance......... January 10, 1873. 
AHS JUDD cites ce Attorney-General............ January 10, 1873. 


Lunalilo died February 3, 1874. 


REIGN oF KALAKAUA 


W. 1... GREEN. 2... ~. Minister of Foreign Affairs... February 17, 1874. 
H. A. WIpEMANN....Minister of the Interior...... February 17, 1874. 
P. NABAOLELUAs oe Minister of Finance.......... February 17, 1874. 
A. 8S. HARTWELL.....Attorney-General............ February 17, 1874. 
W. L. Green........Minister of Foreign Affairs.. May 28, 1874. 

Minister of Interior ad im, 

LOPUNE iv ohae 6 cone cena May 28, 1874. 

P. NAHAOLELUA......Minister of Finance.......... May 28, 1874. 
R. H. STANLEY ......Attorney-General...........% May 28, 1874. 
W. de cGRemneais.'. Minister of Foreign Affairs.. October 31, 1874. 
W. L. MorHonva....Minister of the Interior.....: October 31, 1874. 
J. 8S: WALKER: ..<<,. Minister of Finance’. ;..o.% -. October 31, 1874. 
R. H. STANLEY ......Attorney-General............ October 31, 1874. 

Died <5 sce anise November 5, 1875. 
Je-Sy WALKERS. se. . Attorney-General ad interim. November 5, 1875. 
W. R. CASTLE..... . -Attorney-General............ February 15, 1876 
H. A. P. Carter....Minister of Foreign Affairs.. December 5, 1876. 
J. Mott SMITH....... Minister of the Interior..... December 5, 1876. 
J. M. KApPENA.......Minister of Finance........- December 5, 1876 
A. 8S. HarTwE.u.....Attorney-General............ December 5, 1876 
HA. PEIRCK. 5.0¢%8 Minister of Foreign Affairs.. March 1, 1878, 
J. M. Kapena.......Minister of Foreign Affairs.. July 3, 1878. 
B.C. WinpER ee Minister of the Interior..... July 3, 1878. 


Simon K. KaAal...... Minister of Finance.......... July 3, 1878. 
Epwarp Preston....Attorney-General............ July 3, 1878. 


APPENDIX a3 


CreLso CmsaAR Moreno. Minister of Foreign Affairs... August 14, 1880, 


iy BUSH... ..s..s 
MMMLCITATCA . .*..-5.. 2s 
W. CLAUDE JONES... 
ety. BUSH. s. 6.0080 
eee GREEN. .<..s% 


mW. Ll. GREEN.... . 
mii. A. P. CARTER... 
eer. WALKER.<.... 


W. N. ARMSTRONG.. 
fon, F. CARTER... 
W. N. ARMSTRONG.. 


W. M. GIBSON...... 
Simon K. KaAal... . 


ty DUSH 6 sos osce 


EDWARD PRESTON... 


W. M. GIBSON....... 
meric IKAPENA...... 
W. M. GIBSON....... 


See GULLICK ..... 06 
PauL NEUMANN..... 
ioe. GIBSON ...6-- 
See teeGrULIOK ...e.. oe 


R. J. CREIGHTON.... 
W. M. Gtisson..... 
ob KANOA...... 


ULiid entaentetes vv s clo saeats'ss! c's» August 19, 1880. 
Minister of the Interior..... August 14, 1880. 
Minister of Winance...ii.... August 14, 1880. 


.Attorney-General............ August 14, 1880. 


Minister of Foreign Affairs 
POM ANTON EE eee August 19, 1880. 
Minister of Foreign Affairs.. September 22, 1880. 


..Minister of Foreign Affairs.. September 27, 1880. 
.Minister of the Interior..... September 27, 1880. 


Minister of Finance....-.... September 27, 1880. 
Attorney-General ad interim. September 27, 1880. 


.Attorney-General............ November 29, 1880. 
.Attorney-General........... » January 17, 1881. 
.Attorney-General............ November 5, 1881. 


Minister of the Interior ad 
GEOL oa ace eS acces December 4, 1881. 


Minister of Foreign Affairs. May 20, 1882. 


Minister of the Interior..... May 20, 1882. 
Minister of Finance......... August 8, 1882. 
.Minister of Finance......... May 20, 1882. 
Minister of the Interior...... August 8, 1882. 
.Attorney-General............ May 20, 1882. 
RESID BOT. cenaweeolug tas tee May 9, 1883. 
Minister of Foreign Affairs.. Continued. 
Minister of Finance.......... February 13, 1883. 
-Attorney-General............ May 14, 1883. 
Minister of the Interior ad 

BYILOT UTI te ac oe beh ore July 26, 1883. 
Minister of the Interior..... August 6, 1883. 
Attorney-General............ December 14, 1883. 


.Acting Attorney-General.... September 18, 1884. 


Acting Minister of Finance. September 1, 1885. 


.Minister of Foreign Affairs. June 30, 1886. 


Minister of the Interior..... June 30, 1886. 


Joun T. Dareg.......Attorney-General..... oeeeees June 30, 1886. 


044 


GopFREY BROWN.... 
L. A. THURSTON.... 
W .- GREENS os 


JOHN A. CUMMINS... 
OS NS PENCER. Ooo 


. SPENCER. 


“gio w 
cae 


5 


PauL NEUMANN 


SAMUEL PARKER.... 
CHARLES T. GULICK. 
E. C. MACFARLANE.. 
PAUL NEUMANN..... 


JosEPpH NAWAHI.... 
CHARLES T. GULICK.. 
W. H. CoRNWELL.... 
CHARLES CREIGHTON 


.Minister of Foreign Affairs.. 


...Attorney-General............ 


eesee 


. WIDEMANN ...Minister of Finance..... lee 
. WHITING..... 
OTT OMITH Sere 
H. A. WIDEMANN ... 


H. A. WIDEMANN ... 


essen 


HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


Minister of Foreign Affairs. July 1, 1887. 


Minister of the Interior..... July 1, 1887. 
Minister of Finance.......... July 1, 1887. 
Attorney-General ........... July 1, 1887. 


..Minister of Foreign Affairs. December 28, 1887. 


Minister of Finance......... July 22, 1889. 
June 17, 1890. 
June 17, 1890. 
June 17, 1890. 
June 17, 1890. 


Minister of the Interior..... 
Minister of Finance....... es 


REIGN OF LILIUOKALANI 


February 26, 1891. 
February 26, 1891. 
February 26, 1891. 
February 26, 1891. 
July 28, 1891. 

January 28, 1892. 


Minister of Foreign Affairs. 
Minister of the Interior..... 


Attorney-General........ raise 
Minister of Finance......... 
Minister of Finance......... 


.Attorney-General ad interim July 27, 1892. 


Attorney-General............ August 29, 1892. 


Minister of Foreign Affairs . September 12, 1892. 
.Minister of the Interior..... September 12, 1892. 
. Minister of Fimance . “2... 3. September 12, 1892. 
Attorney-General............ September 12, 1892. 


Minister of Foreign Affairs. November 1, 1892. 


Minister of the Interior..... November 1, 1892. 
Minister of Finance.......... November 1, 1892. 
.Attorney-General............ November 1, 1892. 


Mark P. RoBINson. 
GrorGE N. WILCox. 
PETER C. JONES..... 
coin BROWN....... 


SAMUEL PARKER.... 
JOHN EF’. COLBURN... 
W. H. CORNWELL... 
A, P. PETERSON..... 


SANFORD B. DOLE... 


* James A. KING..... 


PETER C. JONES 


WILLIAM O. SMITH.. 
Set PORTER......- 
SAMUEL M. Damon. 
_ Francis M. HatcyH. 


SANFORD B. DOLE... 
FRANcIS M. HaTcH. 
JAMES A. KING..... 
SAMUEL M. Damon. 
WILLIAM O. SMITH.. 
HENRY E. Cooper.. 
THro. F. LANSING .. 
SAMUEL M. Damon. 
E. A. Mort-Smiru .. 
HENRY E. Cooper .. 
ALEXANDER YOUNG. 


.Minister of the Interior 


.Minister of Finance 
. Attorney-General............ 
.Minister of Foreign Affairs.. 
.Minister of Finance......... 
.Minister of Finance......... 
. Minister of Foreign Affairs .. 
.Attorney-General............ 
. Minister of the Interior 


APPENDIX 


.Minister of Foreign Affairs. 
.Minister of the Interior..... 


Minister of Finance 
Attorney-General........ ... 


Minister of Foreign Affairs. . 


Minister of Finance... 
Attorney-General............ 


PROVISIONAL GOVERNMENT 


1 PORN Ges ceric ent Sas 


Minister of Foreign aoe 
. January 


Minister of the Interior. 
Minister of Finance......... 


.Attorney-General............ 


Minister of Finance 


e@ervreeseee 


.Minister of Finance......... 
.Minister of Foreign Affairs.. 


REPUBLIC OF HAWAII 


PE TORIC ak ode ee Bis <i<ic nia 'op st 
.Minister of Foreign Affairs 


Minister .of the Interior 


& 6's) ey 8 O26) 0 


eseeeer 


. January 


.. July 4, 


345 


1892. 
1892. 
1892. 
1892. 


November 8, 
November 8, 
November 8, 
November 8, 


13, 
13, 
13, 
13, 


1893. 
1893. 
1893. 
1893. 


January 
January 


January 


January 17, 1898. 


Wee Be 
January 17, 1893. 
January 17, 1893. 
March 15, 1893. 
May 29, 1893. 


February 15, 1894 


1894. 
1894. 
1894. 


July 4, 


July 4, 
July 4, 1894. 
July 4, 1894. 
November 6, 1895. 
July 20, 1897. 
August 12, 1897. 
March 29, 1899. 
March 29, 1899. 
October 27, 1899. 


346 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


APPENDIX K 


SUPREME BENCH OF THE HAWAITIAN ISLANDS 


Supertor Oourt 


Established by the act of 1846 to organize the judiciary. 


Chief Justice, Hon. William L. Lee, appointed January 15, 1846. 
First Associate, Hon. Lorrin Andrews, appointed January 15, 1846. 
Second Associate, Hon. John li, appointed January 15, 1846. 


The above court was abolished by the constitution of 1852, and 
The Supreme Court 
established in its stead, with the same justices, since which time the 
changes of incumbents have been as follows: 


Chief Justices 


Hon. William L. Lee, reappointed June 14, 1852; died May 28, 1857. 

Hon. E. H. Allen, appointed June 4, 1857; resigned February 1, 1877, 
to accept the appointment of Hawaiian minister resident at 
Washington, at which post he died January 1, 1883. 

Hon. C. C. Harris, appointed February 1, 1877; died July 2, 1881. 

Hon. A. F. Judd, appointed November 5, 1881. 


First Associate Justices 


Hon. Lorrin Andrews, reappointed June 14, 1852; resigned January 
10, 1855. 

Hon. G. M. Robertson, appointed January 10, 1855; resigned December 
24, 1863, to accept a cabinet appointment, and reappointed 
February 18, 1864; died March 12, 1867. 

Hon. A. S. Hartwell, appointed September 30, 1868 ; resigned February 
18, 1874, to enter the cabinet. 

Hon. C. C. Harris, appointed February 18, 1874; promoted to be Chief 
Justice February 1, 1877. 

Hon. A. F. Judd, appointed February 1, 1877; promoted to be Chief 
Justice November 5, 1881. 

Hon. Lawrence McCully, appointed November 5, 1881; died April 10, 
1892. 

Hon. R. F. Bickerton, appointed April 11, 1892; died December 10, 
1895. 

Hon. Walter F. Frear, appointed January 6, 1896. 


Hon. 
Hon. 
Hon. 
Hon. 
Hon. 
Hon. 
_ Hon. 
Hon. 
Hon. 


Hon. 
Hon. 


Hon. 


Hon. 


Hon. 


Hon 


Hon 


APPENDIX 347 


Second Associate Justices 


John Ii, reappointed June 14, 1852; resigned February 16, 1864. 

R. G. Davis, appointed February 16, 1864; resigned July 8, 1868. 

J. W. Austin, appointed July 10, 1868; resigned July 10, 1869. 

H. A. Widemann, appointed July 10, 1869 ; resigned to enter the 
cabinet February 18, 1874. 

A. F. Judd, appointed February 18, 1874; promoted to be First 
Associate Justice February 1, 1877. 

Lawrence McCully, appointed February 1, 1877; promoted to be 
First Associate Justice November 5, 1881. 

Benjamin H. Austin, appointed November 7, 1881; died July 5, 
1885. 

Edward Preston, appointed November 7, 1885; died January 17, 
1890. 

R. F'. Bickerton, appointed April 29, 1890; promoted to be First 
associate Justice April 11, 1892; died December 10, 1895. 

S. B. Dole, appointed April 11, 1892; resigned January 17, 1893. 

Walter F. Frear, appointed March 7, 1893; promoted to be First 
Associate Justice January 6, 1896. 

William A. Whiting, appointed January 11, 1896. 


Third Associate Justices 


R. F. Bickerton, appointed December 29, 1886; promoted to be 
Second Associate Justice April 29, 1890; died December 10, 
1895. . 

S. B. Dole, appointed April 29, 1890; promoted to be Second 
Associate Justice April 11, 1892. 


Fourth Associate Justices 


. Abraham Fornander, appointed December 29, 1886; died No- 
vember 1, 1887. 

. 8. B. Dole, appointed December 28, 1887; promoted to be Third 
Associate Justice April 29, 1890. 


Notze.—In accordance with an act of the legislature of 1886, the supreme court 
was increased to five members. During the legislative session of 1888 an act was 


passe 


d which provided that ‘hereafter, as vacancies occur in the offices of the 


justices of the supreme court, no new appointments shall be made so as to increase 


the number above three.” 


848 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


APPENDIX L 
DIPLOMATIC OFFICERS IN HAWAIL. 


GEORGE Brown, of Massachusetts. 
Commissioner, appointed March 3, 1848. 


ANTHONY TEN Eyck, of Michigan. 
Commissioner, appointed April 19, 1845. 


CHARLES EAmMEs, of New York. 
Commissioner, appointed January 12, 1849. 


LUTHER SEVERANCE, of Maine. 
Commissioner, appointed June 7, 1850. 


Davin L. Grae, of Illinois. 
Commissioner, appointed July 6, 1853. 


JAMES W. BorDEN, of Indiana. 
Commissioner, appointed January 11, 1858. 


THOMAS J. DRYER, of Oregon. 
Commissioner, appointed March 26, 1861. 


JAMES McBripg, of Oregon. 
Minister Resident, appointed March 9, 1863. 


EDWARD M. McCook, of Colorado. 
Minister Resident, appointed March 21, 1866. 


Henry A. PEIRCE, of Massachusetts, 
Minister Resident, appointed May 10, 1869. 


JAMES M. Comiy, of Ohio. 
Minister Resident, appointed July 1, 1877. 


ROuuLIN M. Daaaett, of Nevada. 
Minister Resident, appointed July 1, 1882. 


GroRGE W. MERRILL, of Nevada. 
Minister Resident, appointed April 2, 1885. 


JOHN L. STEVENS, of Maine. 
Minister Resident, appointed June 20, 1889. 


JOHN L. STEVENS, of Maine. ‘ 


Envoy Extraordinary and Minister Plenipotentiary, appointed 


July 30, 1890. 
JAMES H. BLount, of Georgia. 


~ 


11, 1893. 
JAMES H. BLount, of Georgia. 


Special Commissioner to the Hawaiian Islands, appointed March 


Envoy Extraordinary and Minister Plenipotentiary, appointal 


May 9, 1893. 


APPENDIX 849 


Apert 8. WILLIS, of Kentucky. 
Envoy Extraordinary and Minister Plenipotentiary, appointed 
September 13, 1893. 


ELuis MILLs, of Virginia. 
Secretary of Legation and Consul General, appointed August 8, 
1894. 


HAROLD M. SEWALL, of Maine. 
Envoy Extraordinary and Minister Plenipotentiary, appointed 
April 22, 1897. 


WILLIAM Haywoop, of District of Columbia. 
Secretary of Legation and Consul General, appointed June 1, 1897. 


APPENDIX M 


CONSULAR OFFICERS IN HAWAII. 


JOHN C. JONES, Jr., of Massachusetts. 
Agent for Commerce and Seamen at the Sandwich Islands, ap- 
pointed September 19, 1820. ; 


PrETER A. BRINSMADE, of Maine. 
Agent for Seamen and Commerce, appointed April 13, 1838. 


ALEXANDER G. ABELL, of Michigan. 
Consul to Hawaii, appointed January 16, 1845. 


JOEL TURRILL, of New York. 
Consul to Sandwich Islands, appointed August 1, 1845. 


_ConsuLs To HONOLULU. 


PETER A. BRINSMADE, of Maine, appointed July 5, 1844. 
_EvisHa H. ALLEN, of Massachusetts, appointed October 18, 1849. 
BENJAMIN F’. ANGELL, of New York, appointed May 24, 1853. 
Darius A. OGDEN, of New York, appointed August 2, 1854. 
ABNER PrRatTrT, of Michigan, appointed March 14, 1857. 
ALEXANDER W. BULL, of Michigan, appointed August 17, 1860. 
_ Joun A, ParKER, of Virginia, appointed October 2, 1860. 
ALFRED CALDWELL, of Virginia, appointed August 12, 1861. 
Morean L. Smiru, of Virginia, appointed September 29, 1866. 
ZEPHANIAH S. SPALDING, of Ohio, appointed July 25, 1868. 
THOMAS ADAMSON, Jr., appointed June 1, 1869. 

Carvin 8. Mattoon, of Ohio, appointed September 24, 1870. 
JAMES Scort, of Ohio, appointed August 22, 1874. 


350 HISTORY OF THE HAWAIIAN PEOPLE 


JoHN M. Morton, of California, appointed April 3, 1879. 
Davip A. McKINLEY, of California, appointed December 21, 1880. 


CONSULS GENERAL TO HONOLULU. 


JoHN H. Putnam, of Ohio, appointed July 1, 1885. 
Henry W. SEVERANCE, of California, appointed May 16, 1889. 


Eis Miuzs, of Virginia, appointed September 9, 18938. 
(Appointed Secretary of Legation and Consul General, August 8, 
1894.) 


WILLIAM Haywoop, of District of Columbia, appointed June 1, 1897. 
(Secretary of Legation and Consul General.) 


VICE CONSULS TO HONOLULU. 


THomas FE. WILSON, of Pennsylvania, appointed May 30, 1866. 

J.S. CHRISTIE, Jr., of New Jersey, appointed September 13, 18770. 
JONATHAN 8. CHRISTIE, Jr., of New J ersey, appointed April 25, 1871. 
WILLIAM H. PEEBLES, of Ohio, appointed December 7, 1874. 

JAMES CASTLE, appointed November 6, 1875. 

THEODORUS B. HASCOLL, appointed September 6, 1876. 


FRANK P. HASTINGS, appointed August 3, 1877. 
(Vice and Deputy Consul.) 


FRANK P. HASTINGS, appointed April 3, 1886. 
(Vice and Deputy Consul General.) 


ARTHUR W. RICHARDSON, of Colorado, appointed September 13, 1889. 
(Vice and Deputy Consul General.) 


W. Porter Boyp, appointed June 20, 1892. 
(Vice and Deputy Consul General.) 


CONSULS TO LAHAINA. 


CHARLES BUNKER, of Massachusetts, appointed April 2, 1850. 
GrorGE M. CuHAsE, of Maine, appointed May 24, 1853. 

ANSON G. CHANDLER, of Maine, appointed July 7, 1856. 

JoHN A. PARKER, of Virginia, appointed August 17, 1860. 
CHARLES RicHMOND, of Michigan, appointed October 2, 1860. 
SAMUEL Long, of [llinois, appointed March 21, 1861. 

EviAs Perkins, of Connecticut, appointed March 18, 1863. 
Horace H. Houenton, of Illinois, appointed April 9, 1869. 


APPENDIX 851 
CONSULS AND CONSULAR AGENTS TO HILO. 


THoMAS MILLER, Consul, appointed August 31, 1852. 
THOMAS SPENCER, of Hilo, Consul, appointed March 6, 1862. 
THOMAS SPENCER, Consular Agent, appointed May 6, 1872. 


JOHN ALLISON BEcKwITH, of the U. S., Consular Agent, appointed 
- September 24, 1884. 


CHARLES FuRNEAUX, of the U. S., Consular Agent, appointed August 
18, 1888. 


CONSULAR AGENTS TO KAHULUI. 


Avucust FREDERIC HopkE, of the U. 8., appointed August 20, 1880. 


Arnot Gray Dickins, of District of Columbia, appointed January 29, 
1898. 


CoNSULAR AGENTS TO MAHUKONA. 


CHARLES L. WiGHT, of the U. S., appointed September 15, 1882. 
CHARLES JACOB FALK, of Illinois, appointed January 30, 1895. 
ABBOT FRASER, of Iowa, appointed January 26, 1898. 


a aris = = - J ‘ . 3 
: ‘ 
+5 “: . - ap 
- f: ‘ " J = 
. Y i Sm e ~ 
i ‘ , " 2 
no sf Ps ee 
’ y a 
ea ‘ re. 
iE . f . J 
; ee , tes 
z . D 7 = 5 
‘ 5 n 
: 
“ = 
K x ¢ ’ - 
\ pA 
: = S J 4 : ays 


ENED EX 


A 


Abolition of idolatry, 169. 

Adams, Captain Alexander, 162. 

_ Admiral Thomas, 288, 249, 250, 281. 
Affinity with other Polynesians, 18. 
Agriculture, 63, 80, 215, 259. 

Aha prayers, 48, 50, 56, 57, 63. 
Ahua-a-Umi, 97. 

Aina huna o Kane, 77. 

Aku fish tabu, 52. 

Akua alaea, 54. 

Akua noho, 37, 68. 

Alae bird, 38. 

Alapainui, 101, 102. 

Alii (nobility), 25, 26, 27, 33. 

Alii kapu, 26. 

Alii niaupio, 33. 

Altar (lele), 43. 

American Board, withdrawal of, 286. 


American Mission commenced, 174,175. 


Anaana sorcery, 69. 
Anglican Mission, 283. 


Animals indigenous to the islands, 17. 


Annexation, 277, 278, 317, 322. 
Anson, Lord, 100. 

Apo leo sorcery, 69, 71. 
Argentina, man-of-war, 163, 164. 
Artémise, French frigate, 225, 278. 
Artesian wells, 311. 
Assassination of Keoua, 183. 
_Astor, Jacob, 157, 158. 
Astrologers, 73. 

Aumakuas, 39, 62, 66, 77. 

Awa drinking, 87, 

Axes, 80 


B 


| Bachelot, Rev. J. A., 200, 207, 219, 222. 


| Bananas, tabu to women, 49. 


Banishment of Catholic priests,206-208. 
Baranoff, Governor, 158, 159. 
Barber, Captain, shipwreck of, 148, 
Barter, 88. 
Battle of Hanapepe, 187. 
of Kalauao, 141. 
of Kapaniwai, 129, 
of Kawela, 101. 
of Keawawa, 102. 
of Kuamoo, 170, 171. 
of Mokuohai, 119, 120. 
of Nuuanu, 145. 
of Wailuku sand-hills, 103. 
of Waimea Fort, 187. 
Battles, 31. 
Beechey, Captain, 195. 
Bees introduced, 286. 
Belcher, Captain Edward, 220, 221. 
Belgian Contract, 240, 241. 
end of, 263. 
Bethel Church, 214. 
Betrothal, 32. 
Betting, 88. 
Bible translated, 232. 
Bingham, Rev. H., 174, 195, 220. 
Bishop, Bernice Pauahi, 307. 
Blonde, frigate, 192. 
Boki, 168, 184, 192, 198, 199, 201, 203. 
Bones, concealment of, 75. 
Bones of Cook worshiped, 114. 
Bouchard, Captain, 163, 164. 
Bow, use of, 31. 
Boxing (mokomoko), 88. 
Brinsmade, consul, 224, 227, 236, 240, 
252, 2638. 
Britannia, sloop, 189. 
British Commission, 245-249. 
Broughton, Captain, first visit of, 146, 
second visit of, 147, 148. 


393 


354 


Brown, Captain, trader, 188. 
discovers Honolulu Harbor, 141. 
massacred, 142. 

Brown, George, U. S. commissioner, 
254, 262. 

Bruce, Captain, 221. 

Buckle, Captain, 194, 199. 

Burial of chiefs, '74. 
of commoners, 76, 
of priests, 76. 

Byron, Lord, 192, 198. 


Cc 


Calabashes, 83. 

Calendar, 49, 327. 

Campbell, Archibald, 153. 

Cannibalism unknown, 82. 

Canoe building, 63. 

Canoes, 82. 

Capture of ‘‘ Fair American,” 128. 

Carysfort, ship, 242. 

Catholic cathedral built, 282. 

Catholic Mission, 200, 206, 282, 288. 

Census, 214, 273, 276, 286, 297, 321. 

Cessation of intercourse with Southern 
Polynesia, 24. 

Cession of Hawaii to Vancouver, 139. 
of Hawaiian Islands to Lord 

Paulet, 243-245. 

of Kauai to Kamehameha, 155,156. 

Chariton, Richard, 181, 194, 197, 219, 
220, 221, 235, 287, 240, 264. 

Chiefs, 25-27. 

Chiefs’ school, 282, 

Chronology, 382. 

Circumcision, 65. 

Civil polity, 25-29. 

Clarke, Captain, 198. 

Cleopatra’s Barge, 178, 186. 

Cleveland, Captain, 152. 

Climate of islands, 15. 

Cloaks, feather, 85, 86. 

Clothing, 84. 

Coan, Rev. Titus, 224, 

Cock-fighting, 91. 


INDEX 


Cocoanuts, tabu to women, 49, 
Coffee, 259, 278. 
Collection of taxes, 28. 
Common people, 30. 
Concealment of bones, %5. 
Conquest of Oahu by Kahekili, 121-128, 
by Kamehameha L., 145. 
Constitution, first, 229. 
second, 272. 
third, 289; fourth, 308. 
Consular grievances, 261-263. 
Cook, Captain James, anchors at Kea- 
lakekua, 108. 
deified, 114. 
despoils the heiau, 110, 111. 
discovers Kauai, Oahu, and Niihan, 
104. 
funeral, 115. 
killed in an affray, 113, 114. 
lands at Waimea, 105. 
lands with marines, 112. 
mistaken for god Lono, 106. 
returns, 111. 
sails for the Arctic, 111. 
second visit, 107. ; 
visited by Kalaniopuu, 109, 110. 
worshiped as Lono, 108, 109. 
Cooking, 87. 
Coral islands, life on, 16. 
Cotton, 215. 
Court of a chief, 27. 
Court-house riot, 301. 
Customary law, 29. 
Cyclones unknown, 15, 


D 


Dedalus, visit of, 135. 
Dana, Prof. J. D., on coral islands, 16. 
Dancing, 92. 
Davis, Isaac, capture of, 128. 
death of, 156. 
Death of Kamehameha I., 164. 
Decrease of population, 96, 146, 214 
260, 276. 
Dedication of a temple, 54-61. 


INDEX 


Deification of a dead chief, 74, 75. 

Deification of Nature, 35. 

Diell, Rev. John, 213. 

Dillon, P., consul, 265 - 269. 

Discovery ofthe islands by Spaniards, 
98 -100. 

Discovery by Captain Cook, 104-116. 

Distilling, 157, 201. 

Divination, 72. 

Division of lands, 257 

Dole, Sanford B., 316, 318, 319. 

Dolphin, U. 8. schooner, 194, 195. 

Domestic relations, 32-34. 

Douglass, Captain, 127. 

Downes, Commodore, 210, 211. 

Drums, 23, 91, 92. 

Dudoit, J., consul, 219, 222, 228, 260. 

Duke of Edinburgh, visit of, 294. 


E 


Earthquakes, 292, 293, 294. 
Eleanor, a snow, 127, 128. 
Ellis, Rev. Wm., 179, 181, 184, 188. 
Embalming, 76. 
Embassy to Europe, 237, 269. 
Emma, Queen, 282, 291, 301, 306. 
English deputation, 179. 
Eruption of Hualalai in 1801, 151. 
of Kilauea in 1790, 131. 
of Kilauea in 1840, 231. 
of Mauna Loa in 1855, 287. 
of Mauna Loa in 1859, 287. 
of Mauna Loa in 1868, 292-294. 
of Mauna Loa in 1880, 805. 
of Mauna Loa in 1887, 306. 
Execution of supposed murderers of 
Hergest and Gooch, 188. 
Executions, 29. 
Exploring expedition, U. S., 281, 282. 
Extent of the islands, 14. 


F 


Fair American, schooner, captured by 
Kameeiamoku, 128. 
Family worship, 62. 


055 


Farnham, T. J., 235. 

Feather helmets and cloaks, 85, 86. 
Filibusters, 274, 275, 278. 
Finch, Captain, 202. 

Fire, how produced, 87. 

Fire, the great, 306. 

First cattle landed, 136. 

First Christian marriage, 180, 
First church, 176. 

First constitution, 229. 

First fruits offered, 64, 

First horses landed, 152. 

First laws, 199. 

First missionaries, 173. 

First mosquitoes, 195. 

First newspaper, 214. 

First printing, 178. 

First settlers in Hawaii, 19, 
First.whaler, 175. 
Fishermen’s rites, 62. 


Fishing, 81. 

Fish ponds, 17, 20, 81. 
Flute, 91. 

Fort at Honolulu, 160, 284. 
Forts, 31. 


Freycinet’s visit, 168. 
Funeral rites, 74-76, 
Fur trade, 124. 
Furniture, 838. 
Future state, 77-'79. 


G 


Gaetano, Juan, 99. 
Games, 60, 88-91. : 
Genealogies, 328-381. 
Ghosts, 78, 79. 

Gods, 35-38. 

Gourds, 83. 
Government, 149, 150. 


H 


Haalilio, 287. 255. 
Hakau, 97. 
Hale Kauwila, 204, 216. 


356 


Hale o Keawe, 46, 204. 
Hale o Papa, 44, 58. 
Hamelin, Admiral. 261 
Hawaiian Islands: 
animals, 1% 
climate, 15 
extent, 14. 
first settlers in, 19, 
name, 13. 
plants, 17. 
position, 13. 
soil, 16. 
surface, 14. 
volcanoes, 14. 
Hawaiiloa legend, 20. 
Heiaus, 42. - 
Helmets, 85. 
Hergest, Lieutenant, murdered, 1385. 
Hiiaka, sister of Pele, 38. 
Hiku and Kawelu, legend of, 78. 
Hoapili, 152, 165, 187, 196, 198, 205, 
212, 2380. e 
Holua game, 89, 90. 
Honaunau, 46, 
Hono ceremony, 58. 
Honolulu Harbor, 141. 
the town, 153, 181, 306, 312. 
Hooks, fishing, 81. 
Hoopiopio sorcery, 70. 
Horses introduced, 152. 
Houses, 48. 
House-building, 62. 
Hualalai eruption, 151. 
Hula dance, 92. 
Human sacrifice, 51, 52, 55, 56, 57, 63, 
74, 153. 
. Humehume, George, 173, 186, 187. 
Hunakele, practice of, '75. 


I 
Idolatry, abolition of, 169. 
Idols, 41. 
bringing down of, 55. 
destruction of, 172, 180. 
setting up of, 56. 
Immigration, 290, 308. 


INDEX 


Inamoo, governor of Kauai, 135, 138, 
140. 
Infanticide, 33. 


Invasion of Kauai, 14%, 
Ipu o Lono, 44, 64. 


J 


Japanese junk, 19, 211, 
Jones, Com. T. Ap Catesby, 196, 197. : 


| Jones, J. C., consul, 176, 224, 


Judd, Dr. G. P., 230, 242, 244, 245, 247, 
248, 255, 256, 257, 268, 269, 272, 
277. 

Judiciary, 258, 272. 


K 


Kaahumanu, appointed kuhina’ nui, 
166. 
attempt to elope, 148, 
breaks tabu, 169. 
declared regent, 184, 193. 
directs the war, 170. 
her conversion, 190. 
her death, 208, 209. 
her tour of Hawaii and Maui, 204. 
her tour of islands, 180. 
her treaty with Captain Jones, 197, 
Kamehameha’s favorite queen,151. 
marriage with Kamehameha L, 
121. ; 
marriage with Kaumuailii, 178. 
persecutes the Catholics, 205, 206. 
reconciliation of, 139. 
Kadu, drifted 1,500 miles, 19. 
Kaekeeke drum, 23. 
Kaeo Kulani, king of Kauai, 117 127, 
132, 140, 141. 
Kahahana, king of Oahu, 122. 
Kahekili, conquers Oahu, 128. 
defeated in sea-fight, 182, 
his death, 140. 
king of Maui, 122. 
meets Vancouver, 1387. 
visits Kauai, 188. 
Kahiki, meaning of term, 24, 


INDEX 


Kahilis, 26, 27, 167, 182, 
Kahoalii, 52, 56. 
Kahuna anaana, 69. 
caste of, 30. 
hoonohoho, 68. 
-hoounauna, 68, 69. 
lapaau, 66, 67. 
Kaiana, conducts war in Kau, 121. 
his jealousy, 185, 148. 
plots against vessels, 127, 134, 
returns to the islands, 127. 
slain in battle of Nuuanu, 145. 
visits China, 126. 
Kaikioewa, Governor, 188. 
Kaiulani, Princess, 311. 
Kalaipahoa, 71, 180. 
Kalakaua, David, elected, 301. 
his death, 309. 
his tour around the world, 304. 
inaugurated, 302. 
visit to United States, 302. 
Kalanikupule of Oahu, 123, 129, 140, 
141, 142, 145. 
Kalanimoku (Wm. Pitt), 150, 159, 160. 
Kalaniopuu, king of Hawaii, 101, 102, 
108, 107, 109, 110, 113, 117, 118. 
Kalaunuiohua, 95, 96. 
Kalii ceremony, 60. 
Kamapuaa legend, 40. 
Kameeiamoku, 118, 128, 152, 
Kamehameha I., attempts to invade 
Kauai, 147. 
birth of, 101. 
cedes Hawaii to Vancouver, 139. 
centralizes government, 149, 150. 
conquers Oahu, 143-145. 
defeats Keoua at Paauhau, 131. 
delivers up pirates, 163. 
distinguished in war, 103. 
goes to Kaawaloa, 118. 
his death, 164. 
his victory at Mokuohai, 119, 120, 
invades Hilo, 120, 121. 
offers up Imakakoloa, 117. 
overruns Maui, 129, 180. 
present at the death of Cook, 114. 


357 


puts down Namakeha’s rebellion, 
149, 

receives cession of Kauai, 155, 156, 

receives Kotzebue, 161. 

receives Vancouver, 186. 

removes to Lahaina, 151, 152, 

resides on Hawaii, 151. 

returns to Hawaii, 157, 158, 

returns to Kohala, 118. 

returns to Oahu, 152, 

sacrifices Keoua, 133, 

sends letter to George IV., 154, 

victor in sea-fight, 132. 

visits Captain Broughton, 146, 

visits Captain Cook, 107. 

Kamehameha II., abolishes tabu, 169, 
birth of, 151. 
his character, 176, 
his death, 185. 
his visit to Kauai, 177, 178. 
his voyage to England, 184, 185. 
installation, 166. 
receives missionaries, 174. 

Kamehameha III., or Kauikeaouli, 

accession of, 211. 

birth of, 158. 

his death, 279. 

his marriage, 218. 

his provisional cession of islands, 
245. 

his restoration of islands, 249, 

proclaimed king, 193. 

Kamehameha IV., birth of, 218. 
founds Queen’s Hospital, 282. 
his marriage, 281. 
his death, 284, 
inaugurated, 280. 

Kamehameha V., death of, 297. 
proclaimed king, 288. 
promulgated a new constitution, 

289. 

Kamohoalii, brother of Pele, 38. 

Kamohomoho, 121, 137, 142, 

Kanaloa, a god, 36. 

Kane, chief deity, 36. 

Kaomi, 211, 212, 213, 


058 


Kaona, a false prophet, 294. 
Kaonohiokala, a deity, 77. 
Kapa (cloth), 84. 
Kapiolani, 49, 188, 189, 230. 
Kapus, 26, 59, 169. 
Kauikeaouli. See Kamehameha III. 
Kauila ceremony, 56. 
Kaulas or prophets, 73. 
Kaulu, voyage of, 22. 
Kaumuailii, prince of Kauai, 185, 147, 
148. 
entertains Liholiho, 178. 
his cession of Kauai to Kameha- 
meha I., 156. 
his death, 186. 
his tours with Kaahumanu, 180. 
Kauwiki, in Hana, 381. 
Kawaiahao church built, 282. 
Kearney, Commodore, 248. 
Keawe II., 98. 
Keawe, hale o, 46, 118, 172, 204. 
Keeaumoku, 118, 120, 188. 
Kekauluohi, 224, 255. 
Kekuaokalani, rebellion of, 170-172. 
Kekuhaupio, 118, 118. 
Keliimaikai, 121, 153. 
Kendrick, Captain J., 184, 141. 
Kennedy, Commodore, 215. 
Keopuolani, Queen, 150, 153, 183. 
Keoua Kuahuula, 118, 119, 120, 129, 
131, 182, 138. 
Keoua, schooner, 157, 158, 168. 
Kiha-a-Piilani, 98. 
Kila, voyage of, 23. 
Kilauea, eruptions of, 181, 281. 
Kilokilo (diviners), 30, 72. 
hoku, 78. 
uhane, 72. 
Kilu game, 91. 
Kinau, 204, 205, 210, 220, 223, 224. 
Kini akua, 39. 
Kiokio flute, 91. 
Kipapa, battle of, 96. 
Kite-flying, 90. 
Kiwalao, 103, 117, 118, 110, 120. 


INDEX 


Konane, game of, 90, 
Kotzebue, Captain, 161, 162, 191, 
Ku, a deity, 36. 

Kuakini (Governor Adams), 205. 
Kualoa in Oahu, 28, 45, 122. 
Kuamoo, battle of, 170. 

Kuili ceremony, 57. 

Kukailimoku, war-god, 87, 41, 11% 
Kukui candles, 88. 

Kuni soreery, 70. 

Kupuas or demigods, 39. 

Kuula, god of fishermen, 37, 44, 52, 62, 


L 


Laa-mai-Kahiki, 23. 

Laamaomao, god of winds, 37. 

Ladd & Co., 215, 236, 262. 

Lahaina, outrages at, 194, 195, 196, 
198, 199. 

Lahainaluna Seminary, 208. 

Laka, goddess of hula, 37, 64, 98. 

Lananuu in heiau, 48. 

Land Commission, 256. 

Land tenure, 27, 215, 256. 

La Pérouse, 125. 

Laplace, Captain, 225-228. 

Lapu, a specter, 79. 

Lauhuki, goddess of kapa beaters, 37, 
64, 

Laws, customary, 29. 

Leaping-places of ghosts, 77. 

Lee, W. L., chief-justice, 258, 268, 
278, 280, 281. 

Leis (wreaths), 85. 

Lele (altar), 43. 

Leleiohoku, Prince, 302, 303. 

Leper establishment, 290. 

Liholiho, See Kamehameha II, , 

Liliha, 184, 192, 204, 205. 

Liliuokalani, Queen, 811, 314-320. 

Liloa, 9'7. 

Lizards, 38. 

Lomilomi, or-massage, 2% 

Lono, 36, 42, 59. 

Lono-i-ka-Makahiki, 100, 


INDEX 


Lono, ipu o, 44, 64. 
Luakini, temple, 42. 
Lunalilo, King, 298, 299, 300. 


M 
Maigret, Bishop, 221, 222, 233. 
Maika, game of, 89. 
Makaainana caste, 25, 30. 
Makahiki festival, 59-61, 100. 
Makalii month, 49, 50. 
Malaysian affinities of Hawaiian race, 
19. 
Mallet, Captain, 233, 234. 
Mamala, vessel, arrival of, 96. 
Mamalahoa decree, 151. 
Manono killed, 171. 
Marin, Don Francisco, 154, 168. 
Marriages, 33. 
Marshall, J. F. B., 246, 252. 
Massacre at Kona, Oahu, 128. 
at Niihau, 148. 
at Olowalu, 127, 128. 
Mats, 83. 
Maui, demigod, legends of, 39. 
Mauna Loa, eruptions of, 287, 293, 305, 
306. 
Meares, Captain, 126. 
Measles, epidemic of, 260. 
Medicine, 66. 
Menehune people, 20. 
Metcalf, Captain, 127, 128. 
_ Migration from west to east, 19. 
Miller, General Wm., 254, 263, 264. 
Milu, god of under-world, 78. 
Moepuu sacrifice, 74, 165. 
Moi, office of, 26. 
Moikeha, voyage of, 22. 
Moluccas or Spice Islands, 19. 
Monthly tabus, 51, 52. 
Months, 49, 315. 
- Mookini heiau, 21, 42. 
Mosquitoes introduced, 195. 
Mourning customs, 75. 
Mu, the, 51, 74. 
Music, 91, 92. 
Mutiny at barracks, 299, 300, 


359 


N 


Nahienaena, 192, 218. 
Namakeha’s rebellion, 147, 149, 
Nana-uli (diviners), 73. 
Necklaces, 85. 

Necromancers, 68, 69. 

Nets, 81. 

New Zealanders, 19, 20. 
Nobility, 25-27. 

Nose-flute, 91. 

Nuuanu, battle of, 145. 


O 


Oahu Charity School, 214, 

Oahu College, 286. 

Obookiah, 173. 

Oio (ghostly procession), 79. 

Olopana, a chief, 22. 

Olowalu massacre, 128. 

Oo (bird), 85, 86. 

Oo (digger), 80. 

Opelu, a fish, 52. 

Origin of Hawaiian people, 18-20. 

Ornaments, 85. 

Outrages at Lahaina, 194, 195, 196, 
198. 

Owls, sacred, 38. 


=) 


Paao, arrival of, at Hawaii, 21. 
Pageant, 182. 

Pahee game, 89. 

Pahiuhiu sorcery, 70. 

Pala (fern), 58, 55. 

Palea, a chief, 108, 112. 

Papa, wife of Wakea, 20. 

Paulet, Lord George, 238, 242-248. 
Paumakua, voyage of, 22. 

Peacock, U. S. ship, 196, 215. 
Pele, goddess, 38, 39, 40, 151, 188, 189. 
Peleleu canoes, 151. 

Percival, Lieutenant, 194, 195. 
Perrin, Em., 261, 270, 271, 281. 
Persecution of Catholics, 205, 206. 
Pestilence of 1804-5, 152, 153. 


560 


Physical geography, 13-17. 

Pioneer missionaries, 173, 174. 

Pirates, Spanish, 168, 164. 

Planting ceremonies, 63, 64. 

Plants, indigenous, 17. 

Poetry, 93, 94. 

Pohaku o Kane, 44. 

Po’i-uhane sorcery, 72, 73. 

Political agitation, 276. 

Polynesian affinities, 18. 

Pork, tabu to women, 49. 

Portlock and Dixon, 124, 125. 

Position of Hawaiian Islands, 13. 

Potomac, U. S. frigate, 210. 

Praying to death, 69. 

Priests, 25, 30, 42. 

Prince of Hawaii, 282, 288. 

Prince Regent, schooner, 179, 180. 

Prineess Royal, sloop, 134. 

Pronunciation of Hawaiian, 326, 327. 

Prophets, 73. 

Public Improvements, 259, 284, 295, 
312. 

Puhenehene game, 90, 91. 

Puloulou introduced, 21. 

Pulu, 286. 

Punahou School founded, 232, 835. 

Purification, rites of, 54, 59. 

Puuhonuas, 44-46. 

Puukohola heiau, 42, 48, 181. 


Q 


Queen Dowager Kapiolani, 302. 
Queen Emma, 282, 291, 301, 306. 
Queen’s Hospital, 282. 


R 


Rank derived from mother, 32. 
Read, Commodore, 228. 
Rebellion of Namakeha, 147, 149. 

on Kauai, 186-188. 
Reciprocity treaties, 280, 292, 308. 
Recognition of independence by Eng- 

land and France, 253. 

by United States, 288. 

Reinforcements, 181, 208, 219, 


INDEX 


Reinga, '%8. 

Religion, ancient, 35-40, 77-79. 

Reprisals by Admiral Tromelin, 268, 

Restoration of the flag, 249, 250. 

Revival, the great, 224. 

Richards, Wm., 188, 194, 199, 224, 
237, 255. 

Ricord, J., 255, 256, 258. 

Riot, court-house, 301, 302. 

Riot, sailors’, 274. 

Ritual, 50. 

Rives, Jean B., 168, 175, 184, 185, 200, 
201. : 

Roman Catholic Mission, 200, 206, 282, 
233. 

Romances, 98. 

Royal School, 2382, 286. 

Russians, 158, 159, 161-163. 


S 


Sacrifices, human, 51, 52, 55, 56, 5%, 
63, '74, 153 ; to Pele, 38, 

Sailors’ riot, 274. 

Salt-making, 87. . 

Sandal-wood trade, 156. 

Sandwich Islands. See Hawaiian 
Islands. : : 

Savaii, center of dispersion, 19. 

Scheffer, Dr., 159, 161. 

Schools, 188, 214, 255, 291, 312. 

Sea-fights, 32, 182. 

Second migration, 21. 

Seymour, Captain, 218. 

Shark gods, 387, 39, 62. 

Shenandoah, pirate, 291. 

Short, Rev. P., 200, 207. é 

Simpson, Alexander, 237, 242, 246, 252 

Simpson, Sir George, 237, 239, 240. 

Singing, 92. 

Sliding, game of, 89, 90. 

Slings, 31. 

Small-pox, 275, 295, 305. 

Soil of Hawaiian Islands, 16, 

Sorcerers, 69, 70. 

Sorcery, 66-73. 


INDEX 


Spanish chart of the islands, 100. 

Spanish discovery of islands, 98-100. 

Spears, 31, 61. 

Steam navigation, 2738, 274, 285, 295, 
310. 

Stewart, Rev. Charles, 188, 203. 

Sugar, 201, 215, 259, 278, 297, 311. 

Surface of islands, 14. 

Surf-swimming, 90. 


ar 
Tables, 313, 314. 
Tabus, 27, 48, 50, 52, 58, 59. 
of aku and opelu, 52. 
Tapa cloth, 37, 49. 
Tattooing, 86. 
Taxes, 28. 
collection of, 54, 59, 60. 
Temples, 42-44. 
Ten demands of Admiral Tromelin, 
266. 
Thomas, Admiral, 238, 249, 250, 281. 
Thouars, Du Petit, Admiral, 220, 234. 
Tools. 80. 
Top-spinning, 91. 
Treaties, ancient, 32. 
with Denmark, 262. 
with France, 228, 261, 281. 
with Great Britain, 254, 261, 270. 
with United States, 197, 270. 
Tromelin, Admiral, 266-268. 


U 
Ukeké, 91. 
Uli, a deity, 37, 68, 69, 70. 
Ulua, offering of, 57, 58, 
. Ulu-maika, 89. 
Umi, story of, 96-98, 
Unihipili, 68. 


361 


Vv 
Vancouver, endeavored to restore 
peace, 137. 
first visit of, 184, 185. 
landed cattle, 136. 
receives cession of Hawaii, 139. 
second visit of, 136-188. 
third visit of, 188-140. 
Vassilieff, Commander, 176. 
Venus, French frigate, 220. 
Vincennes, U.S. ship, 202. 
Volcanic waves, 222, 231, 294, 
Voyages, of Kahai, 23. 
of Kaulu, 22. 
of Laamaikahiki, 23. 
of Moikeha, 22. 
of Paao, 21. 
of Paumakua, 22, 


Wakea, 20, 78. 

Walsh, Rey. R., arrival of, 21%. 

War months, 50. 

Wars, 31. 

Weapons, 81. 

Whale-ships, 175, 196, 291, 295. 

Wheat, 260, 278, 285. 

Women excluded from heiaus, 44, 
excluded from men’s eating-house, 

48, 

forbidden to eat pork, etc., 49. 
made offerings at Hale o Papa, 58. 
secluded at certain periods, 52. 

Wrestling, 89. 

Wyllie, R. C., 255, 262, 278, 283, 289, 


291. 
We 


Young, John, 128, 129, 182, 148, 148, 
150, 160. 
death of, 335, 


UNITED STATES HISTORIES 


By JOHN BACH McMASTER, Professor of American 
‘History, University of Pennsylvania 


Primary History, $0.60 School History, $1.00 Brief History, $1.00 


HESE standard histories are remarkable for their 
freshness and vigor, their authoritative statements, 
and their impartial treatment. ‘They give a well- 

proportioned and interesting narrative of the chief events 
in our history, and are not loaded down with extended 
and unnecessary bibliographies. The illustrations are his- 
torically authentic, and show, besides well-known scenes 
and incidents, the implements and dress characteristic of the 
various periods. ‘The maps are clear and full, and well 
executed. 


€| The PRIMARY HISTORY is simply and interestingly 
written, with no long or involved sentences. Although brief, 
it touches upon all matters of real importance to schools in 
the founding and building of our country, but copies beyond 
the understanding of children are omitted. ‘The summaries 
at the end of the chapters, besides serving to emphasize the 
chief events, are valuable for review. 


€| In the SCHOOL HISTORY by far the larger part of 
the book has been devoted to the history of the United States 
since 1783. From the beginning the attention of the student 
is directed to causes and results rather than to isolated events. 
Special prominence is given to the social and economic 
development of the country. 


€| In the BRIEF HISTORY nearly one-half the book 
is devoted to the colonial period. ‘The text proper, while 
brief, is complete in itself;. and footnotes in smaller type 
permit of a more comprehensive course if desired. Short 
summaries, and suggestions for collateral reading, are provided. 


AMERICAN: BOOK. COMPAWN: 


(116) 


NEW SERIES OF THE 
NATURAL GEOGRAPHIES 


REDWAY AND HINMAN 


TWO BOOK OR FOUR BOOK EDITION 


Introductory Geography . $0.60 School Geography . . . $1.25 
In two parts, each . . .40 In twoiparts each 0) awe, 75 


N the new series of these sterling geographies emphasis is laid 
on industrial, commercial, and political geography, with just 
enough physiography to bring out the causal relations. 

€| The text is clear, simple, interesting, and explicit. The 
pictures are distinguished for their aptness and perfect illus- 
trative character. Two sets of maps are provided, one for 
reference, and the other for study, the latter having corre- 
sponding maps drawn to the same scale. 

€| The INTRODUCTORY GEOGRAPHY develops the 
subject in accordance with the child’s comprehension, each 
lesson paving the way for the next. In the treatment of the 
United States the physiographic, historical, political, industrial, 
and commercial conditions are taken up in their respective 
order, the chief industries and the localities devoted largely to 
each receiving more than usual consideration. The country 
is regarded as being divided into five industrial sections. 

€) In the SCHOOL GEOGRAPHY a special feature is 
the presentation of the basal principles of physical and general 
geography in simple, untechnical language, arranged in num- 
bered paragraphs. In subsequent pages constant reference is 
made to these principles, but in each case accompanied by 
the paragraph number. ‘This greatly simplifies the work, 
and makes it possible to take up the formal study of these 
introductory lessons after the remainder of the book has been 
completed. With a view to enriching the course, numerous 
specific references are given to selected geographical reading. 


move RICAN -BO:O-K ~-COMPAN Y 


Cir) 


DAVISON’S HEALTH SERIES | 


By ALVIN DAVISON, M.S., A.M., Ph.D., Professor of 
Biology in Lafayette College. 


Human Body and Health: 
Elementary, $0.40 Intermediate, $o.50 Advanced, $0.80 


Health Lessons; 
Book One : $0.35 Book Two 3 : fo.60 


HE object of these books is to promote health and pre- 
vent disease: and at the same time to do it in such 
a way as will appeal to the interest of boys and girls, 

and fix in their minds the essentials of right living. They are 

books of real service, which teach mainly the lessons of health- 
ful, sanitary living, and the prevention of disease, which do not 
waste time on the names of bones and organs, which furnish 
information that everyone ought to know, and which are both 
practical in their application and interesting in their presentation. 

@| ‘These books make clear: 

4} That the teaching of physiology in our schools can be made 

more vital and serviceable to humanity. 

4] That anatomy and physiology are of little value to young 

people, unless they help them to practice in their daily lives 

the teachings of hygiene and sanitation. 

€| That both personal and public health can be improved by 

teaching certain basal truths, thus decreasing the death rate, 

now so large from a general ignorance of common diseases. 

4} That such instruction should show how these diseases, 

colds, pneumonia, tuberculosis, typhoid fever, diphtheria, and 

malaria are contracted and how they can be prevented. 

@ That the foundation for much of the illness in later life is 

laid by the boy and girl during school years, and that in- 

struction which helps the pupils to understand the care of the 
body, and the true value of fresh air, proper food, exercise, and 
cleanliness, will add much to the wealth of a nation and the 
happiness of its people. 


AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 


(153) 


—————— —— 


STEPS IN ENGLISH 


By A. C. McLEAN, A.M., Principal of Luckey School, 
Pittsburg; THOMAS C. BLAISDELL, A.M., Pro- 
fessor of English, Fifth Avenue Normal High School, 
Pittsburg; and JOHN MORRO", Superintendent of 
Schools, Allegheny, Pa. 


Book One. For third, fourth, and fifth years. . . . . . . $0.40 
Book Two. For sixth, seventh, and eighth years . : 


HIS series presents a new method of teaching language 
which is in marked contrast with the antiquated systems 
in vogue a generation ago, ‘The books meet modern 

conditions in every respect, and teach the child how to ex- 
press his thoughts in language rather than furnish an undue 
amount of grammar and rules, 
€| From the start the attempt has been made to base the work 
on subjects in which the child is genuinely interested. Lessons 
in writing language are employed simultaneously with those in 
conversation, while picture-study, the study of literary selec- 
tions, and letter-writing are presented at frequent intervals. 
The lessons are of a proper length, well arranged, and well 
graded. ‘The books mark out the daily work for the teacher 
in a clearly defined manner by telling him what to do, and 
when to do it. Many unique mechanical devices, ¢. g., a 
labor-saving method of correcting papers, a graphic system of 
diagramming, etc., form a valuable feature of the work. 
€| These books are unlike any other series now on the 
market. They do not shoot over the heads of the pupils, 
nor do they show a marked effort in writing down to 
the supposed level of young minds. ‘They do not contain 
too much technical grammar, nor are they filled with what 
is sentimental and meaningless. No exaggerated attention is 
given to analyzing by diagramming, and to exceptions to ordi- 
nary rules, which have proved so unsatisfactory. 


AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY | 


(1) 


MILNE’S PROGRESSIVE 
ARITHMETICS 


By WILLIAM J. MILNE, Ph.D., LL.D., President of 
New York State Normal College, Albany, N. Y. | 


TWO BOOK SERIES 


Fitst Boole %. 7 2 es 
Complete Book <7 05 


THREE BOOK SERIES 


First Book .° 0 is2 <6 90.35 
Second Book ys, eens ae 
Third Book 


N these series the best modern methods of instruction have 
been combined with those older features which gave the 
author’s previous arithmetics such marvelous popularity. 

€| Built upon a definite pedagogical plan, these books teach 
the processes of arithmetic in such a way as to develop the 
reasoning faculties, and to train the power of rapid, accurate, 
and skillful manipulation of numbers. ‘The inductive method 
is applied, leading the pupils to discover truths for them- 
selves ; but it is supplemented by model solutions and careful 
explanations of each step. 

€| Each new topic is first carefully developed, and then en- 
forced by sufficient practice to fix it thoroughly in the mind. 
The problems, which have been framed with the greatest care, 
relate to a wide range of subjects drawn from modern life and 
industries. Reviews in various forms are a marked feature. 
Usefulness is the keynote. 

€| In the First and Second Books the amount of work that 
may be accomplished in a half year is taken as the unit of 
classification, and the various subjects are treated topically, 
each being preceded by a brief résumé of the concepts 
already acquired. In the Third Book the purely topical 
method is used in order to give the pupil a coherent 
knowledge of each subject. The Complete Book covers 
the work usually given to pupils during the last four years 
of school. 


AMERICAN BOOK .COMPAWNY 


(s7) 


CPX fat er hae Oe oe See Se! bas fe ks. pei ee Gee 
(iy ery byes 0148 ee pared §e ag | ee 
tev mngar tery : GE Saree: hig Na Tp Bae 

ee ria Mk Ue Re ae wp phe MEMS HII Re ey 

aes ATA Weed ta ‘ wees eve gi trates Bled pet iehe ena FA 

; neeetyye  <k2e ae hes 2s py seyes wasn} 9 ede i yao 
Prec es eyt eae te ee A bane sts 7 

Cee, obi eeg ge ares . Rpg arly ora Bray a eer 
iS bia at. Awe hee Fh ae» ON ete er ae ten nd Rp ver oa 

eee ee <i re ar r DEAF ONSERL gues anias tastier Tes GF hea 


Md eh hel ’ oy) ene oer wr ee Lae Poet ae Re tee eet 
rrevati se. rai. hab Rae dian ib t 

OMA hy pea 2 oy oa Uiyayauesnat ee . 
phdnp tne bees WEES ae wk (etre PID SEN Pave Ae RES My END 
te oh i) a eer iveky mage ee = ae i) oe pte meg 


rar yee 


=e, 


wh 


aaa 


pipe oat awe Hate der ees | eed ; 
drt ee © ed ee LEP NAREE Con! ey oid 7 Ci4gtasnt Pr eAeREin de: OPE ey, Po OPER PEW: Mee 
are ts ‘ ' eae Phe (tees s sarge ae: sad vi; - eaphaeeny ween hee a HR LIK, RSS J 


Deak bats ae Ge, ci at) i kOekee RRL » oe ah. A. et i mse f 


eevee Sita y jie 


years gy OUny rd, @ Yt mayer sere ‘de baa sei soy aMihucesiad Oey © APES & CAy vats aL SR Diet #. : ‘ * 
eae Cl) ea BM URS E Ds C084 ( Way Se ayees ers eee farts yee Mtge) Pa: vee Orr Se pet 5 « lan erg 7 
ee ec eee Pe ts olde Ge aa a tay esan as ae VPI OLAS 2 eee ate 4 Oe nit ewig OS Pierre 
vec tener ders reek AoE, has ands wate) Eavdutaw ete) ae y ead ae LR Pare be hh igs OG A vig Oat . 
Pete ee es veryien psy Sens coe ouy Rs Wart ee fs ny ee Ae nt be he EW ee eek ae tees Ee hae 
SEEN ay 1 Cee ee ban Aas pea gece S988 i i haes aa end Soi A Lee ot Abn hcg + Pg Rade ne 
pe Coens Cass «80 ee o0e 044i) OU Vie ep aha ct ‘a PS Ae “ays ‘ ) Bs eRe stg 1s 
+ preg Bp? REA tiptoe a Pe tM Pid) ty Let: 2 fc ta AE x ‘ig ana ee oe 
es eee ten ote Oe eee Mae rt: tee ebare tee ; rai sista E> thie ee) eee Cee Tk ' 
baad Wiis’ ate fag yy Pay heer ee ‘ude raeeaey | Wyre 4.™> 7 bee ASSO be > Ge oF" fig 8's ; eye ty - 
Pivaraseabres PeeR ag aie bes tee he EB Bel W- aed ap tat te i Peake ie ae A “es, A 
? Fete Gent tory ds : ee ae es eee oy . oe Wage! hoe Pda hy “ See ts 7 a wee ey 
mot ia ee ee Peed 46 40) Suet ah See feo eof Cr a ig a ari eae wn eh en ae oh hey an 4 ¢\ 
, wane Rasiya etry pire hey kee ee eerie at har y set. Gre tangs nies § Mer er ee “A we gh tye ? 
\ ie tia a eA) Crh adden ovine, we ee 1 1 yt Lk Pee es AY Siren tare meh) FAT bey + died YP TH OF e 
ir ae Pavel by tg eet (Ans Bot Ee BNE hee Caer hayes ee Ga! ered 7 aside DN a CE fe Ss Mee We eer ha dae *.. 4” : 
MA dee die A ae Pastas UAT Var sar tant 634 2 fear Veer ee oy et Vy 066 Fol Ae he 5 CE ety! > ee a ee 


Pee dite Us ee eeyes eee ped 5 ht. ee ete > Oak gt ah RLY ey pyres, Vg ie Ne use eno ser Wes af > i oe 
rare rrrges Shiva ee wie ae - oe yas Fit eW he E08 FANN tee ey MD, yar: a tie te ano rere’ oh Meet ese ; trates 


Maer eoke bud pet eee te: ee en te ee eer por ent a2 Ae, RD) Serer rere ¢" us 6 SM eR a lh RW AL Te ae 
ne ee i, Whee EE A acess eee seh bows valict t+ Tis Che LLA Shoe Rather ee WD ae KP LF iy) WEE we? 
| See oe Spi hag vi oon ree ae hw tae ee Saree ae =) Cet Bet” Vier er oye rere ae ane eget a Sa come 
eeu ayty le ely ent ¥ Seren RS GS ikea UR AR AO CREARS) <M Ee Maree Ey ep Uh Ree, 
Vat ety 7<iset™ Sa ed) Make nh take lel v tw apr wed | rk a Cte peers v4) (AR, nl “Thy (®t Ppt 6 nce eeives vay F 
bf cob T% rely Kemah dae Raat pawn eke fie as iit vb Wu oe doje it ES, vy > siete yp ety sty a, 
ae) AD COV eet, 0 1 Te ee ee Setar. nex 5 eae cen ange (ares tite Coad) a ot ee ee sia eerie) 6 
» os. et 2 ea aicn Teeth is 04 ey Y CRE GEKA is oy Revyioeg rus TL Nee ERA RY hear yy 
sh Phen y OFA a ey Rees og Bi oe dees ib de + ie it Re as ee ee ee ee ; 
to POA Bee | pire nea ee _ gm bealinen ate Tei peuerey je has a 2 Puke si - v 
ae sattwet tae od WR BRP EE ee eo tetas Pet’ ie Whe Catena Pea ee a ry 
Ries s Ceara 1: ok ey nb * SAE gr or hae, Thick’) © Awaba l tas Tea Res Pee HT & ht wert Hey 
Re ase Os ne te vi? iu Dawe) ohana retots oul Ae ts a’ x Ws cee e oes © u#, es 
ages swe iN wy aaa PPeR) EDs pT Rete ae WL OL HPL iS cee Se utiys ) 
mee sha “y ehte ey etimy ee tant ‘ eS e yy) fs) gy Re OR Be tte, oe oN A yet 
day itrve tsa raley Pew ty a oe “¢ 7% Ce ee Ae ici. tae* \ hat 
O¢e¢caSe ae St: cov as? APT PETE TREO OR ee 5 ( Shaye bn vs Warley 
a) «Pape vey? Toye - ae aengpet ess let 4 TS ir rag er 7 ‘ 
er ~~, : eee WET ASAE ee a teh eh oe hace Aes ious Leary > Re 
es a oe ‘be aes har at BR iS abe . sets 3 + Tia Sam | r 
Civ Seeeeee Ate 4 Lethe atsaoee trPtras ite) 4 es haar aang St ehia f kl aa we 
vig et? tte! > Ue he ge? tear 4 oS af ro * Pee ige ? 4 
ones? aps la teeer wey fe is CAS ees PC Os eee wa avers FG Le aor) be enl 
» or? pr kap: \ o* ia ¥ % a*fpa th, retin - We en erie te Sa owe 
vw ekPha ke ee) PL aey > 6 ee a TY ~e _, ot ? pete) eA were eae. Oe ee ee f 4 a“ 
a ve ’ ta tye ae Mee) ae re crm es Sher war © a, ete ‘ww 4a 
wekbegas 4 te, be + Pang eel wee wee ee ee Ape hse a week Sa ae Ung? Pipes uo =e, PAL OR. OES 
skis carla ‘ihe ‘he hh a oo an x whe “hee oe ng? Ageia a> ig Wat aer ap ee +7 t 
, ny dewec@e dpe i Vl ae ‘- 7 eee She ee oe te Ee UD en) a OP a Rah RTA £4 ah +A ee) CC ee, SF whe or, 
\ie katate Tee ee ewe) pace ae : SE) (hee 0S, | & ee *>Sta4 shed te Che ORT ee ee ee ee a : 
Moya Oe aI Wig ays os erie Me *. Us 894, + vy. Bho. oot PPE OME Hrd Sry bd Mery Ah Oe ce kets %.. 1 tty ate he Bele link Malek 
“Med bok se ’ i; ain —- ‘ P Are > Ped ne rag eee te ‘ hefner sd Loree: aa 
i eee es at ee rete et ie. . ¥. Ue eee “Ae bee Lr Ps OFeas ae! ahs 4 Und bine AO 
Nada tae ie eeet * ae GA A = '" ~4 Le *F 4 Bae? Sheth nah ay Cie See GA Uo Ler) o¢ J 
me : . . ; ® 


EEE Oe ods + CN Mee mnt Boa ay Bey | : . a A Ore reene Or arent a be tk 
Deter beers ttm ee) we : Aaa Ae Cor ae 8 ‘ite Pv ‘as sm Wa ne ache sap 
‘ At« Au li tep. Deel i Gath tm ay Ja CP aig he me tO OD ie, 3 Pen our Ping. avi tee as ads 
‘1 my ‘ Roe my FPS, via 


‘ oy Wingms Sally: Ff Per eT a «) Titak, are 4 . .. vie TAs sw " dir wR Waa et a ¢ 
, ml Sida ye te) OPER bee A) be Pt eh eo ee “al » ee aa payday nas Y) _ +, Wh Db eRe 
a tated 8 rus hee oe? rice.’ HR ar Ok ess od ahi; J git PS, Mt? felaw? ae?) a. 5" ne A TAA i bee 
rahe as Nm By eaves Seen e hke © A OO ee PD Ce, y DLA em eA Pays ae Oe Wer We Bik eres 
WG cs ky yet freneh Pian! £% ub dyes ® wr his cg balan 0B ay D a 84 ee i CaP * the Ee Le ake de: «byes “4 
ad Ctgy be, 8 Vw wer oi x ee hk Sin? i Wear * 4X ' & Ort A TR bas Wee ew O'S eS te, a ee Oa Te 
TT in ee Hoe PRR. Si Se A ti See ie? tvc* 1, & ee ehh Es setae te hens U4 

i ‘ \ r i Mo, > —— + ee, 
& Tey ee a bAVae a Ba He 9 eal. Poe ee i + he Te we ae ‘1 nc SH 
: ihn oS Doan reese ae Gis ee Wag Ate & jae Ns T. 0% ‘oe “ye tae ee : ig there ps seygh 
fe o a ‘ . 5 Se ww owe - 


rer ease | vEere 


1 Sed ey Na eo ~ aN : 4 
panto ect Oho “Re ter ba ae 


Shane hes ras 
er hg 


Terai Frans tip Oh 


~— 


4 shiny se, Oe. 


eS 


Bers 


om eh be Made TAY i < 
“f Pie aa is a) 


thes 1 Whe > oy 
ma eas sas rhe 
an 


whe, eee SABA Ge 
VaAG bie pate 


<= 
= 
<= 
a 
c 
= 
& 
o 
= 
= 
= 
ee 
oO 
> 
= 
7) 
c 
tu 
> 
= 
= 


